Reclaimer Erection Manual PDF

CNBM – MUGHER CEMENT ENTERPRISE
ETIOPIA
RECLAIMER PALT 130/34+4 M7261
RECLAIMER
PALT 130/34+4
M7261
ASSEMBLY
MANUAL
Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
CONTENTS
1.00 STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

1.01 MACHINE
1.02 REDUCTION GEARS
1.03 MOTORS
1.04 LIFTING
1.05 LUBRICATION PLANT
2.00 PROJECT AND MECHANICAL DATA

2.01 PROJECT DATA
2.02 MECHANICAL DATA
3.00 MOTORIZATION
4.00 ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS

4.01 RAILS CHECK
4.02 GENERAL SPECIFICATION
4.03 MACHINE ASSEMBLING
5.00 LUBRICATION
5.01 GREASE LUBRICATION
5.02 OIL LUBRICATION
6.00 TRADE COMPONENTS
7.00 DRAWING LIST
8.00 DRAWINGS

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
1.00 STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
1.01 MACHINE
If it is not foreseen to assemble the machine immediately after its arrival on site, it is
necessary to store it in a shed or under a roof.
In particular:
– the mechanical parts
– the motors, reduction gears, etc.
– the lubrication plants (pipes included)
– electrical equipments and components, cables
– hoist and ropes
– cable reels
and further delicate parts, should be stored in closed sheds, where they are repaired from
moisture, dust and eventual sand.
The structures are protected with antirust paint, the mechanical parts are covered by a
transparent paint or protective grease.
It is necessary to effect a control, at least once a fortnight, of the preservation of the various
components and their protection and, if necessary, to restore them as foreseen above.
Also verify the packaged components, bearing in mind that the package could have been
damaged during the transportation and, if necessary, restore the initial conditions.

ETIOPIA
1.02 REDUCTION GEARS
Reduction gears have to be stocked in a dry environment, possibly inside wooden cases with
silica salt bags, in order to reduce moisture.
Worked parts of reduction gears have always to be greased or protected with tectyl, or
protected against any static and dynamic loading.
Regarding bearings, avoid any loading, both static and dynamic.
If the reduction gears have to be kept stored for a period longer than 2 months, it is necessary
to fill them with oil.
If the storage period exceeds the 6 months, it is necessary to fill them with oil and make them
turn (also by hand) for a few minutes every 3-4 months.
Always protect the breathing caps from dust.
If the gear boxes are stored under roofs, besides the mentioned conditions, which have
absolutely to be respected, it is also necessary to wrap them up in some waterproof sheets (in
this case long storage periods have to be excluded).

ETIOPIA
1.03 MOTORS
- Store in a dry and clean environment.

- Obstruct the openings (breathers, cable outputs) with a cloth or with paper, in order to avoid the
dust entry.
- Protect the top of the shaft in order to repair it from eventual shocks.
- When a locking screw is foreseen on the shaft, please verify that this shaft is tightly locked by the
screw.
REMARKS
When the storage is not made in an adequate warehouse, but in the same environment of utilisation,
the motor is generally much more exposed to the external agents and shall be necessary to complete
the previous cautions by means of the followings:
- verify that the motors are not submitted to vibrations emitted by the close machines; otherwise,
take them away from the vibrations.
It is necessary to stress out a particular case for the fan: frequently, the air naturally circulating in
the vent drags slightly the out-of-service fan. In this case, it is better not to lock the motor bearings
and leave the fan rotate slightly.
- If the environment is wet, even temporarily, verify periodically the insulation resistance (between
a phase terminal and the mass).
If this resistance falls quickly to a value lower than 1.000 Ohms per Volt of nominal voltage, it
would be better to install a permanent heating.
- Let motor turn - possibly electrically or at least by hand - once a month.
- Before installing them, change the grease (where lubrication is foreseen). Where long life bearings
are foreseen, check the gear and, eventually, change the grease.

ETIOPIA
1.04 LIFTING
Some parts of the machine to be assembled cannot be mounted without the use of proper lifting
equipments.
Recommended lifting equipments are crane, overhead crane and undercarriage elevator: all of them
should be selected on the basis of the weight to be lifted. All equipment must have indications of
the maximum admissible load.
Only lift machine and components using appropriate lifting ropes.
ATTENTION: Components weighting more than 30 kg must be lifted with dedicated lifting
equipment
1.05 LUBRICATION PLANT
PIPES: They are provided with caps at their ends; verify every month the integrity of
the caps and oil the pipes periodically to avoid rust-forming which would
then create some damages to the lubrication plant at the moment of start.
MANUAL PUMP: Every 3 months change grease and act manual pump, checking right oil flow
on the lines. Manual pump must be well protected and packed before being
stored waiting for its installation.

ETIOPIA
2.00 PROJECT AND MECHANICAL DATA

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
2.01 PROJECT DATA
Material Coal
Bulk density :t/m3 0.72
Material size :mm 75
Moisture content :% 15
Angle of repose :° 40
Total stored volume :t 13.800 + 13.800
Number of piles :no. 2
Section of piles :m2 215
Total length of piles :m 214
Width of piles :m 32
Height of piles :m 13.42
Stacking capacity :t/h 300
Reclaming capacity :t/h 150

ETIOPIA
2.02 MECHANICAL DATA
TYPE OF UNIT : PALT 130/34+4

Nominal capacity : ton/h 150
TRANSLATION
Distance between rails axis :m 34
Working speed : m/min 0.015
Translation speed : m/min 10
Working speed motors : kW 1.1 + 1.1
High speed motors : kW 5.5 + 5.5
Distance of trolleys wheels :m 7
Wheel diameter : mm 650
RECLAIMER BOOM
Center to center distance :m 34 + 4
Blades : mm 1300
Chain motor : kW 55
Chain speed : m/min 30
RAKE
Type : Harrow
Height of unloading drum : Winch
Number of wheels :m 4
Wheels diameter : kW 22
TOTAL MACHINE WEIGHT : kg 137.000

ETIOPIA
3.00 MOTORIZATION

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

MACHINE: RECLAIMER PALT 160/31+4
CUSTOMER: CNBM - MUGHER C. E. PLANT ETIOPIA C07198 BEDESCHI S.p.A.
UNIT: WINCH ITEM: 0 M07261 Via Praimbole, 38
2 35010 LIMENA - PADOVA
DATE: 10/12/2014
OUTPUT: 150 t/h MATERIAL: COAL BULK DENSITY: 0,72 t/m³
CRID050.1608
ROPE DRUM REDUCTION GEAR
DIAMETER [mm]: 715 TYPE: SC 3004/MP
RPM¹: 7,8 48x82+FR+RDF
SPEED¹ [m/min]: 17,54 RED.RATIO: 188
RPM¹ INPUT: 1465
RPM¹ OUTP.: 7,8
CGIU010.0128
CFRE010.0040
CMOT020.0640
MOTOR
TYPE: 180L
HEATERS POWER [KW]: 22

POLES NO.: 4
FORM: B3
RPM¹: 1465
UNIT: CHAIN DRIVING ITEM: 0 M07261 Via Praimbole, 38
DATE: 26/03/2014
CPUL030.0029 CRID050.1607
CBUS030.0165 REDUCTION GEAR
RED. GEAR PULLEY TYPE: SL 4003
Dp[mm]: 355 FE/67,6/S46C1
NO. RIMS: 5 RED.RATIO: 67,60
RIM TYPE: SPC RPM INPUT: 1071,6
HOLE [mm]: 65 RPM OUTP.: 15,9
MOTOR PULLEY MOTOR TOWING WHEELS

Dp[mm]: 265 TYPE: 250 SMA Dp[mm]: 705,5
NO. RIMS: 5 Pitch(mm) 270
RIM TYPE: SPC POWER [KW 55 HEATERS SPEED[m/min]: 34,2
POLES NO.: 4 RPM: 15,9
RPM: 1480
HYDRAULIC COUPLING FORM: B3
TYPE: Beta
55-J155 CMOT020.0607
SLIDING: 0,03
HOLE [mm]: 65,000
CGIU040.0443
UNIT: BRIDGE TRAVELLING ITEM: M07261 Via Praimbole, 38
DATE: 26/03/2014
REDUCTION GEAR
WHEEL FINAL STAGES FAST-SLOW FAST

DIAMETER [mm]: 650 REDUCTION GEAR RED.GEAR PRE-PAIR
RPM¹: 0,013 TYPE: SC 3003/FE TYPE: EM 1010
SPEED¹ [m/min]: 0,026
RPM²: 0,008 RED.RATIO: 74,25 PRE-PAIR 3,38
SPEED² [m/min]: 0,016  FAST Tot. 251,0  FAST Tot. 251,0
RPM³: 5,8  SLOW Tot. 73385 RPM³ INPUT 1450
SPEED³ [m/min]: 11,8 RPM¹ INPUT 0,94 RPM³ OUTPUT 429
RPM¹ OUTPUT 0,01
RPM² INPUT 0,56
RPM² OUTPUT 0,008
RPM³ INPUT 429
RPM³ OUTPUT 5,8
CRID050.1610
CRID050.1609
SLOW
RED.GEAR PRE-PAIR
TYPE: ED 2010
DIFFERENTIAL 69,70
PRE-PAIR 14,18
 SLOW Tot. 73385
RPM¹ INPUT 930
RPM¹ OUTPUT 0,94
RPM² INPUT 558
RPM² OUTPUT 0,56
FAST
MOTORE AUTOFRENANTE
TYPE: 132M
HEATERS POWER [KW]: 5,5

POLES NO.: 4
FORM: B5
RPM³: 1450
SLOW CMOT060.0026
MOTOR
TYPE: 90L + VVVF
POWER [KW]: 1,1 HEATERS

POLES NO.: 6 N.2 GROUPS
FORM: B5
RPM¹: 930 50 Hz
RPM²: 558 30 Hz
CMOT010.0623
NOTES:
VELOCITA' DURANTE RIPRESA:
150 t/h => 0,016 m/min = 0,008 rpm with motor at 850 rpm 30 Hz
200 t/h => 0,026 m/min = 0,013 rpm with motor at 1155 rpm 50 Hz
VELOCITA' IN TRASFERIMENTO:
11,8 m/min = 5,78 rpm with motor at 1760 rpm 50 Hz
BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
4.00 ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
4.01 RAILS CHECK
Before starting assembling the machine, please make sure that rail tolerances are according to
drawings VO-950.363.
For a correct machine operation, these tolerances have to be respected.
4.02 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
When the structure assembling foresees the use of bolted joints, it will be necessary to
proceed to the tightening of bolts through a dynamometric key.
SCREW PRELOADING TIGHTENING TORQUE

Diam. Precarico max. V (kg.) Momento max Ma (mkg.)
nom. 6D 8G 10 K 12 K 6D 8G 10 K 12 K
screw 6.6 8.8 10.9 12.9 6.6 8.8 10.9 12.9
M 8x1 995 1750 2470 2960 1.48 2.60 3.70 4.40
M 10x1,25 1540 2740 3860 4630 2.90 5.20 7.30 8.70
M 12x1,25 2420 4140 5800 6980 5.30 9.10 12.80 15.40
M 12x1,5 2220 3960 5570 6680 5 8.9 12.50 15
M 14x1,5 3150 5600 7880 9450 8 14.30 20 24
M 16x1,5 4200 7500 10500 12600 12 21.50 30 36
M 18x1,5 5430 9700 13600 16300 17.40 31 43 52
M 20x1,5 6900 12100 17150 20600 24.40 43 61 73
M 22x1,5 8400 15000 21000 25200 32 57.5 80.5 97
M 24x2 9650 17200 24200 29000 41 73.5 103 124
M 27x2 12500 22300 31300 37500 60 107 150 180
M 30x2 15700 27800 39200 47000 83 147 208 250
The value of tightening torque for different diameters is drawn from the enclosed table.

ETIOPIA
When the structure assembling foresees welded joints, these must be imperatively made by
qualified staff.
Electrodes suggested are of type :
- E 6013 (AWS regulations)
- E 213 (BS regulations)
- E 4322 (DIN regulations)
4.03 MACHINE ASSEMBLING
In order to facilitate the following description and therefore the machine assembling, the main
components of the machine - identified by a number - are represented in the assembling drawing
VO-201.618.
In the enclosed list there is the correspondence between this identification number and the
corresponding manufacturing drawing number and title.
NOTE: The sequences described below, must not be considered as imperative; they depend
upon the equipments and the lifting machines present in the yard and shall be eventually
modified according to these.
Considering the elevated gauge between the rails, identify the theoretical axis of the machine as to
the rails; this axis must be perfectly perpendicular to the rails themselves as in the following layout
MACHINE AXIS
RAIL RAIL

ETIOPIA
STACKER ASSEMBLY
- Position and fix the rake trolleys structure pos.17 on the respective trolleys. Pay attention in
supporting them fast as, then, the beam pos.11 will be positioned on them.
- Position on the ground the structure 12 along the theoretical axis of the machine (pay attention to
position them before assembling the beam 11, otherwise the following assembling may be difficult)
and fasten it provisionally to the structure pos. 15.
- Position the beam stocks pos. 11, leaning them on the wheel beam pos. 30 and 31.
- Apply the blade drive assembly pos. 25, the joint axle in pos. 2 to the structure in pos. 12.
- Connect the lower parts chain holder pos. 12 to the beam pos. 11 and to the beam trolley holder
pos. 30 and 31.
- Verify the parallelism between the axles pos. 25 and 2 according to the manufacturing drawing.
Proceed with the application of the blades to the chain as in drwgs.e-506.02.011. Thus, it is
possible to proceed with the assembling of the chain complete of blades, making it slide on the
upper guide and connecting between them the various stocks as they are the one nearby the
other. It can be entered by the side of the idle axle pos. 29 and towed with a tackle; when it will
reach the towing axle, it will be meshed with the axle and will slide on the lower guide until the
whole chain will be positioned.
Then, the idle axle pos. 29 will be assembled and the same chain will be closed, connecting
between them the free ends.
- Pay attention in positioning in the right direction the blades, the reclaiming direction is the
direction of the axle pos. 26.
- Proceed now applying the trolleys for rake holder pos. 17 on the beam, assembling and welding
them. Verify the dimensions of the manufacturing drawings .
Take particular care in the welding quality, in order to avoid that, as it is matter of a slim structure,
there can be some deformations.

ETIOPIA
- After finishing the assembling and the welding, verify the correct alignment with the guides
according to the structure checking, and that the trolley slides well on the guides of the beam
pos.11.
- In order to assemble the rake, it is suggested to prepare some support frames for it, perfectly
horizontal, in order that the rake lays on the same plan of the fastening points on the trolley for
rakes holder.
- Then proceed with the assembling and welding of the rake structure according to the
corresponding manufacturing drawing. It is advisable to execute first of all the assembling of the
peripheral structure, connecting the elements with some provisional welding points, then it will be
possible to assemble and weld all the internal elements and, after a verification of the good
provisional assembling, proceed to the definitive welding, according to the correspondent
manufacturing drawing.
- Install the lubrication plant according to the relevant drawings and to the detailed instructions.
Generally a particular care must be paid to keep the pipes perfectly clean. The pipes leave our
workshop pickled and capped to avoid dirt entry. Pay particular care when you cut pipes to avoid
chips entry. In any case, before connecting them to the lubrication feeders, it is advisable to blow
inside them with compressed air. The presence of dirt inside them risks to block, during the
funcioning, the lubrication feeders and therefore the lubrication cycle.
- Thus, it will be possible to proceed to the assembling (according to the manufacturing drawing) of
all the components rapresented on the assembly drawing and relevant list, namely:
- gangways, ladders;
- cabin (NOTE: before assembling the cabin, insert the electric board in the platform; when the
cabin will be assembled, it will not be able to enter through the door);
- rake hoist
- tie-rod connection for rake
- stops for rake trolley
- lateral protection
- reclaimer chute
- discharge hopper
- reclaimer share
- cable reel (according to the relevant assembling instructions enclosed)
- gear boxes

ETIOPIA
- motorization
- etc.
- Therefore the rakes shall be lifted with a crane until reaching the inclination correspondent to the
slope angle of the material and therefore fastenable by means of the relevant tie rods as represented
on the relevant manufacturing drawing. There must be lifted at the same moment both the rakes so
as to avoid unbalancings to the machine and elevated solicitations to the structure.
Therefore, the rake's inclination and the position of its queue shall be regulated with relation to the
real slope angle of the material with:
. the tie-rods' system (for little regulations)
. the plates and holes' system at the base of the rake, in correspondence with the holder for rakes
trolley (for bigger regulations). On the drawing E-506.01.009 there is represented, by means of a
table, the criteria of this regulation system.
For positioning of pipes and components of grease lubrication plant see the “lubrication plant” and
the “lubrication points” drawings.
Single points of the plant are detailed on the enclosed sketches.

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
5.00 LUBRICATION

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
ATTENTION
Before starting up the machine, check the oil level of the reduction gear. Moreover check the grease
presence in the supports of the various towing and idle axis. Check the anchor blocks operating and
check that the pipes, where the grease passes, have no occlusions.
Then carry out periodical controls.

ETIOPIA
5.01 GREASE LUBRICATION
The machine is equipped with a centralized manual plant for the lubrication of bearings
of the translation towing and idle axles .
The plant consists of:
 a set of steel pipes
 a set of flexible pipes
 a set of joints and distribution blocks
Other points must be lubricated manually with portable pump, see lubrication sheet.
It is necessary to check periodically the plant and make a lubrication cycles, according to the
modalities and frequency detailed on layout.
Fill the tank with grease when necessary.
Suggested grease: see lubrication sheet.
5.02 OIL LUBRICATION
Reduction gears are lubricated in oil bath; for type an quantity of oil, see the lubrication sheet.

ETIOPIA
INSTRUCTION MANUAL FOR CENTRALIZED

GREASE LUBRIFICATION SYSTEM

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

32 31 28 29
30 27
D.20
25 23 24
26 22
21 20 17
18
16
RG1
FP2
D.20
RC6
33
El.pompa cod. 5015267
100 CC./min. cap. 10Kg. R3 RG1 FT5
invertitore elett-mecc. 220V.
BE1 9 14
FLENCO
Kg. 10
P
200 80 80
0 400
F RC7 RT2 250 250
15
0 0
D.16 D.30 D.16

RC2
D.30 D.30 D.16 D.10
D.16 D.30
D.30
B D.16 B
RC4 FP3 10 BC5 RR9 12
D.16
RC2 FP1
5
11
13
FP1
6
RC5
3 D.16 1
4 2
7 B
FT5
8 STARLUB s.r.l.
BEDESCHI S.p.A. Limena PD
dis. nr. : D3VS1292 distinta mat. : DSXP1434
rif. cliente :
descrizione : PAL T 130 / 34+4

nr. nr. nr.
revisioni
del : del : del :
disegnatore
data : 18 dic. 2014 G .C . F ag g in verif. :
TABELLA DI LUBRIFICAZIONE / LUBRICATION SHEET BEDESCHI SPA
MACCHINA/MACHINE: RECLAIMER PALT 130 / 34+4 Via Praimbole, 38

I - 35010 Limena (PD)
PARTICOLARE DA QUANTITA’ E TIPO DI LUBRIFICANTE NOTE FREQUENZA D’INTERVENTO
POS. DENOMINAZIONE
LUBRIFICARE
ITEM Nr. DENOMINATION QUANTITY AND LUBRICANT TYPE NOTES INTERVENTION FREQUENCY
PART TO BE LUBRICATED
LUBRIFICAZIONE
CENTRALIZZATA
- OGNI 40 ORE DI LAVORO,
CUSCINETTI GREASE X1 – EP1
CUSCINETTI SUPPORTO CENTRALIZED ESEGUIRE UN CICLO DI 10 MINUTI
SUPPORTI ELETTROPOMPA 10 KG
LUBRICATION
C1 ÷ C33
BEARING SUPPORT ONE LUBRICATION CYCLE OF 10
SUPPORTS GREASE X1 EP1
RIEMPIRE FINO A MINUTES EVERY 40 HOURS OF
BEARINGS ELECTROPUMP 10 KG
LIVELLO RUNNING
-
FILL TILL THE LEVEL
RULLI DI GUIDA CUSCINETTI GRASSO X2 - EP1 SIRINGA A GRASSO OGNI 40 ORE DI LAVORO
C60 ÷ C63
GUIDE ROLLERS BEARINGS GREASE X2 - EP1 GREASE GUN EVERY 40 HOURS OF RUNNING
PRIMO CAMBIO DOPO 50-100 ORE

DI FUNZIONAMENTO, CAMBI
SUCCESSIVI OGNI 2500 ORE DI
OLIO LUBRIFICANTE VISCOSITA’ ISO VG FUNZIONAMENTO O 12 MESI
RIDUTTORE
220 RIEMPIRE FINO A
TRASLAZIONE RECLAIMER SC 3003 FE
11 LT (2X) LIVELLO
50 ÷ 51 FIRST CHANGE AFTER 50-
RECLAIMER TRANSLATION GEARBOX 100 WORKING HOURS,
LUBRICANT OIL VISCOSITY ISO VG 220 FILL TILL LEVEL
SC 3003 FE
11 LT (2X) FOLLOWING CHANGES
AFTER 2500 WORKING
HOURS OR 12 MONTHS

POS. DENOMINAZIONE
LUBRIFICARE

SUCCESSIVI OGNI 2500 ORE DI
OLIO LUBRIFICANTE VISCOSITA’ ISO VG FUNZIONAMENTO O 12 MESI
RIDUTTORE
220 RIEMPIRE FINO A
TRASLAZIONE RECLAIMER ED 2010
0.8 LT (2X) LIVELLO
50 ÷ 51 FIRST CHANGE AFTER 50-
RECLAIMER TRANSLATION GEARBOX 100 WORKING HOURS,
ED 2010
0.8 LT (2X) FOLLOWING CHANGES
AFTER 2500 WORKING
HOURS OR 12 MONTHS
OLIO IDRAULICO VISCOSITA’ ISO HM 32

TENSIONAMENTO CATENA POMPA MANUALE MOBIL D.T.E. 32 CAMBIO OLIO OGNI 2000 ORE DI
RIEMPIRE FINO A
(CON POMPA MANUALE) PMI-25 S3 3 LT LAVORO O 12 MESI
LIVELLO
52
CHAIN TENSIONING MANUAL PUMP HYDRAULIC OIL VISCOSITY ISO HM 32 CHANGE OIL EVERY 2000
FILL TILL LEVEL
(MANUAL PUMP) PMI-25 S3 MOBIL D.T.E. 32 WORKING HOURS OR 12 MONTHS
3 LT

POS. DENOMINAZIONE
LUBRIFICARE
RIEMPIRE FINO A
LIVELLO
–
LUBRIFICAZIONE
CENTRALIZZATA – UN CICLO DI LUBRIFICAZIONE DI
OLIO SINTETICO
RIEMPIRE QUANDO 6 MINUTI OGNI 4 ORE DI
VISCOSITA’ ISO VG 150 EP
CATENA PALETTE CATENA SERBATOIO VUOTO FUNZIONAMENTO
30 LT
53
CHAIN BLADES CHAIN FILL TILL LEVEL ONE LUBRICATION CYCLE OF 6
SYNTHETIC OIL VISCOSITY ISO VG 150 EP
– MINUTES EVERY 4 WORKING
30 LT
CENTRALIZED HOURS
LUBRICATION – FILL
WHEN THE TANK IS
EMPTY

OLIO LUBRIFICANTE VISCOSITA’ ISO VG
RIDUTTORE SUCCESSIVI OGNI 2500 ORE DI
220 RIEMPIRE FINO A
ARGANO SC 3004 MP FUNZIONAMENTO O 12 MESI
10 LT LIVELLO
54
WINCH GEARBOX FIRST CHANGE AFTER 50-100
SC 3004 MP WORKING HOURS, FOLLOWING
10 LT
CHANGES AFTER 2500 WORKING
HOURS OR 12 MONTHS

POS. DENOMINAZIONE
LUBRIFICARE

SUCCESSIVAMENTE OGNI 1000
GIUNTO IDRODINAMICO OILO MINERALE ISO HM 46
RIEMPIRE FINO A ORE
GIUNTO IDRODINAMICO ALFA 40P K1FRV5
LIVELLO
54 MINERAL OIL ISO HM 46
HYDRAULIC COUPLING FIRST CHANGE AFTER 50-100
HYDRAULIC COUPLING
FILL UP THE LEVEL HOURS
ALFA 40P K1FRV5 4.07 LT
FOLLOWING CHANGE EVERY 1000
HOURS

OLIO LUBRIFICANTE VISCOSITA’ ISO VG
RIDUTTORE SUCCESSIVI OGNI 2500 ORE DI
220 RIEMPIRE FINO A
ASSE TRAINO CATENA SL 4003 FE FUNZIONAMENTO O 12 MESI
8.0 LT LIVELLO
55
CHAIN DRIVE SHAFT GEARBOX FIRST CHANGE AFTER 50-100
SL 4003 FE WORKING HOURS, FOLLOWING
8.0 LT
CHANGES AFTER 2500 WORKING
HOURS OR 12 MONTHS
T AB E LLA C OMP AR AT IV A DE I LUB R IF IC ANT I C ONS IG LIAT I
R E C OMME NDE D LUB R IC ANT S T AB LE
T AB LA DE LOS LUB R IC ANT E S AC ONS E J ADOS
V E R G LE IC HS AUF S T E LLUNG DE R E MP F OHLE NE S C HMIE R S T OF F E
LIS T E LUB R IF IANT S C US E ILLE 'S
AP P LIC AZIONE - AP P LIC AT ION

AP LIC AC IONE S - AMB R ING UNG E N - AP P LIC AT IONS
S IMB OLO - S Y MB OL
S IMB OLO - ZE IC HE N - S Y MB OLE
T IP O DI LUB R IF IC ANT E
T Y P E OF LUB R IF IC ANT
T IP O DE LUB R IF IC ANT E
S C HMIE R S MIT T E LT Y P
T Y P E DE LUB R IF IANT
T E MP E R AT UR A AMB IE NT E
S E R V IC E T E MP E R AT UR E
R AUNT E MP E R AT UR
T E MP E R AT UR E AMB IANT E
T IP O DI LUB R IF IC ANT E DIN (IS O)
T Y P E OF LUB R IF IC ANT DIN (IS O)
T IP O DE LUB R IF IC ANT E DIN (IS O)
S C HMIE R S MIT T E LT Y P DIN (IS O)
T Y P E DE LUB R IF IANT DIN (IS O)
C LAS S E DI V IS C OS IT A' IS O O C LAS S E NLG I
IS O V IS C OS IT Y G R ADE OR NLG I C ONS IS T E NC Y C LAS S
C LAS A DE V IS C OS IDAD IS O O C LAS E NLG I
IS O V IS K OS IT T S K LAS S E ODE R NLG I K LAS S E
C LAS S E V IS C OS IT E ' IS O OU C LAS S E NLG I
-25 / +80 °C V G 460 G R -XP 460 S P AR T AN E P 460 MOB ILG E AR 634 OMALA 460 B LAS IA 460
C LP
(C C )
A
picycloïdal
-25 / +80 °C V G 220 AR AL DE G OL G S 220 B P E NE R S Y N MOB IL G LY G OY LE 30 S HE LL T IV E LA S Y NT HE S O D 220E P B LAS IA S 220
PG
B
ducteur é
S G -XP 220 OIL WB
-25 / +80 °C S HE LL OMALA

C V G 320 S P AR T AN E P 320 MOB ILG E AR 632
OIL 320
0 / +40 °C B P E NE R G OL MOB ILG E AR 630 S HE LL OMALA

D V G 220 AR AL DE G OL B G 220 S P AR T AN E P 220 LAMOR A 220 B LAS IA 200
G R -XP 220 OIL 220
C LP (C C )
V G 150 AR AL DE G OL B G 150 E NE R G OL G R -XP 150 MOB ILG E AR XMP 150 OMALA OIL 150 K LUB E R OIL G E M1-150 B LAS IA 150
E -15 / +25 °C S P AR T AN E P 150
V G 100 AR AL DE G OL B G 100 E NE R G OL G R -XP 100 MOB ILG E AR 629 OMALA OIL 100 LAMOR A 150 B LAS IA 100
V G 68-46 B P E NE R G OL S HE LL T E LLUS
F -30 / +10 °C AR AL DE G OL B G 46 E S S O AT F D-21611 MOB IL D.T .E . 15M LAMOR A 68 B LAS IA 68
V G 32 G R -XP 68 OIL T 32
V G 22 B P E NE R G OL S HE LL T E LLUS
-45 / +20 °C UNIV IS J 13 MOB IL D.T .E . 11M IS OF LE X MT 30 R OT AR NIC A 22
e ducteurs àengrenages cylindriques , à couple conique, ré

HLP
G V G 15 HLP -HM10 OIL T 15
R iduttori ad ingranaggi cilindrici, a coppia conica e riduttori epicicloidali

S pur gearboxes , bevel gearboxes , epicycloidal gearboxes
R eductores de engranajes cilindricos , de par conico, reductor epicicloidal
G etriebe mit zylindris chen Zahnrädern, doppelkonis che und P lanetengetriebe
Ré
0 / +60 °C V G 680 MOB IL G LY G OY LE S Y NT HE S O D 680E P
PG
H HE 680
OLIO - OIL - AC E IT E - Öl - HUILE

0 / +40 °C B P E NE R G OL
L V G 680 AR AL DE G OL B G 680 S P AR T AN E P 680
G R -XP 680
-15 / +25 °C B P E NE R G OL
M V G 220 AR AL DE G OL B G 220 S P AR T AN E P 220
G R -XP 220
C LP (C C )
-20 / +10 °C V G 150 B P E NE R G OL
N AR AL DE G OL B G 100 S P AR T AN E P 150
V G 100 G R -XP 100
-25 / +10 °C V G 220 MOB IL G LY G OY LE 30 S Y NT HE S O D 220E P B LAS IA S 220
PG
P
Motovariatori, riduttori a vite s enza fine

V ariable s peed drives , worm reduction units
Motovariadores , reductores de tornillo s in fin
Motorgetriebe, G etriebe mit endlos er S chraube
Motovariateurs , reducteurs à vis s aus fin
V G 22 S HE LL T E LLUS
-45 / -20 °C UNIV IS J 13 MOB IL D.T .E . 11M IS OF LE X MT 30 R OT AR NIC A 22
PG
Q V G 15 OIL T 15
T AB E LLA C OMP AR AT IV A DE I LUB R IF IC ANT I C ONS IG LIAT I
R E C OMME NDE D LUB R IC ANT S T AB LE
T AB LA DE LOS LUB R IC ANT E S AC ONS E J ADOS
V E R G LE IC HS AUF S T E LLUNG DE R E MP F OHLE NE S C HMIE R S T OF F E
LIS T E LUB R IF IANT S C US E ILLE 'S
AP P LIC AZIONE - AP P LIC AT ION

AP LIC AC IONE S - AMB R ING UNG E N - AP P LIC AT IONS
S IMB OLO - S Y MB OL
S IMB OLO - ZE IC HE N - S Y MB OLE
T IP O DI LUB R IF IC ANT E
T Y P E OF LUB R IF IC ANT
T IP O DE LUB R IF IC ANT E
S C HMIE R S MIT T E LT Y P
T Y P E DE LUB R IF IANT
S E R V IC E T E MP E R AT UR E
R AUNT E MP E R AT UR
T E MP E R AT UR E AMB IANT E
T IP O DI LUB R IF IC ANT E DIN (IS O)
T Y P E OF LUB R IF IC ANT DIN (IS O)
T IP O DE LUB R IF IC ANT E DIN (IS O)
S C HMIE R S MIT T E LT Y P DIN (IS O)
T Y P E DE LUB R IF IANT DIN (IS O)
C LAS S E DI V IS C OS IT A' IS O O C LAS S E NLG I
IS O V IS C OS IT Y G R ADE OR NLG I C ONS IS T E NC Y C LAS S
C LAS A DE V IS C OS IDAD IS O O C LAS E NLG I
IS O V IS K OS IT T S K LAS S E ODE R NLG I K LAS S E
C LAS S E V IS C OS IT E ' IS O OU C LAS S E NLG I
MOB ILG E AR S HC
XMP 220 K LUB E R S Y NT H B LAS IA S X220
R -40 / +80 °C V G 220 DE G OL P AS 220 E NE R S Y N E P X 220 S P AR T AN S E P 220 OMALA HD 220
MOB IL S Y NT HE T IC E G 4-220 DIC R E A S X220
F LUID S 36
P AO*
c iales
S -40 / +10 °C V G 32 MOB IL S HC 624 DIC R E A S X32
MOB IL D.T .E . 24
T 0 / +50 °C HM 32 V IT AM G F 32 E NE R G OL HLP 32 NUT O H 32 T E LLUS OIL 32 OS O 32
C LP
MOB IL D.T .E . 32
ducteurs avec lubrifications s pé

OLIO - OIL - AC E IT E - Öl - HUILE
R iduttori con lubrificazione s peciale

G earboxes requiring s pecial lubrication
R eductores con lubricaciones pecial
G etriebe mit S onders chnierung
R eé
S P AR T AN S E P 150 MOB ILG E AR S HC K LUB E R S Y NT H
U V G 150 DE G OL P AS 150 E NE R S Y N E P X 150 OMALA HD 150
P AO*
XMP 150 E G 4-150
X1 -35 / +120 °C 2 V G 460 DE G OL B G 460 MOB ILUX E P 460 ALB IDA S LC 460
X2 -30 / +60 °C 1 V G 220 AR ALUB HL1 E NE R G R E AS E LS 1 E XXON B E AC ON 1 MOB ILUX E P 1 ALV ANIA R 1
-30 / +60 °C 2 V G 220 AR ALUB HL2 E NE R G R E AS E LS 2 E XXON B E AC ON 2 MOB ILUX E P 2 ALV ANIA R 2 C E NT OP LE X 2E P
S UP P OR T I - S UP P OR T S
S OP OR T E S - HALT E R
S UP P OR T S
X3
X4 +80 / +100 °C 2 B AR R IE R T A L55/2
DIN 51818
X5 -25 / +80 °C 3 UNIR E X N3
X6 -25 / +60 °C 3 ALV ANIA F E T T R 3 G R MU 3
MOT OR I - MOT OR S
MOT OR E S - MOT OR E N
MOT E UR S
G R AS S O - G R E AS E - G R AS A - G R AS A - G R AIS S E
-45 / -25 °C 2 AE R O G R E AS E 16
C US C INE T T I - B E AR ING S - R ODAMIE NT OS - LAG E R - R OULE ME NT S

X7
C LP = Lubrificanti minerali - Mineral lubricant - Lubricantes minerales - Minerals chmiers toffe - Lubrifiants miné e rales
P AO, P G = Lubrificanti s intetici - S ynthetic lubricant - Lubricantes s inteticos - S ynthetis che S chmiers toffe - Lubrifiants s ynthé
e tiques
BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
TYPICAL SKETCHES FOR INSTALLATION OF

CONNECTIONS FOR CENTRALIZED GREASE
LUBRIFICATION SYSTEM

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

description
riduzione diritta D16 - D30
reducter droite D16 - D30
SKETCH
reduccion recta D16 - D30
recht reduzieretuxk D16 - D30 RT2
right reducer D16 - D30 data : 30 - 07 - 2003
9256007
7102007
D= 30
description
riduzione a T D.16-D.10-D.16
reducter en T D.16-D.10-D.16
SKETCH
reduccion en T D.16-D.10-D.16
T reduzieretuxk D.16-D.10-D.16 RR9
T reducer D.16-D.10-D.16 data : 2 - 10 - 1999
D10
SL9256016
8102019
D16 D16
D10
D16 D16
67$5/8%VUO
description
giunzione riduzione diritta D20 - D16
raccord reducteur droite D20 - D16
SKETCH
junta reduccion recta D20 - D16
verbindung reduzieretuxk recht D20 - D16 RG1
union reduceur right D20 - D16 data : 23 - 10 - 96
D = 16
D = 16
7102039 7102039
D = 20
D = 20
STARLUB s.r.l.
description
giunzione diritta D.30
raccord droite D.30
SKETCH
junta recta D.30
recht verbindung D.30 RC7
right union D.30 data : 21-04-1999
8169024 D.30
8124007
8102007 7102007
D.30
STARLUB s.r.l.
description
raccord droite D.20
SKETCH
junta recta D.20
right union D.20 data : 17 - 07 - 1998
D.20
D.20
7102006 7102006
D.20
D.20
STARLUB s.r.l.
description
raccord droite D.16
SKETCH
junta recta D.16
right union D.16 data : 17 - 07 - 1998
8169022 D.16
8124005
8102005 7102005
D.16
67$5/8%VUO
description
giunzione a " T " D.30
raccord en " T " D.30
SKETCH
junta en " T " D.30
" T " verbindung D.30 RC4
tee union D.30 data :09-03-1999
D30
D30
8102021
8124007
8169024
D30
7102021
description
giunzione a " T " D.16
raccord en " T " D.16
SKETCH
junta en " T " D.16
" T " verbindung D.16 RC2
tee union D.16 data : 7 - 11 - 1998
D16
8169022
8124005
8102019
D16
7102019
D16
D16
67$5/8%VUO
description
giunzione a 90° D.16
raccord en 90° D.16
SKETCH
junta en 90° D.16
90° verbindung D.16 R3
90° union D.16 data : 7 - 11 - 1998
D16
8169022
8124005
8102012
D16 7102012
67$5/8%VUO
description
fissatubo D.10
support fixation tube D.10
SKETCH
suporte de fijacion tubo D.10
lager fur rohrfixierung mit D.10 FT5
pipe fixing support with D.10 data : 7 - 11 - 1998
8155010
D=10
STARLUB s.r.l.
description
fissatubo a 2 p. D.30 + p.
support fixation tube en 2 p. D30 + p.
SKETCH
suporte de fijacion tubo de 2 p. D.30 + p.
lager fur rohrfixierung mit 2 p. D.30 + p. FP3
pipe fixing support with 2 p. D.30 + p. data : 05-03-1999
8155044
D.30
D.30
description
support fixation tube en 2 p. D.20 + p.
SKETCH
pipe fixing support with 2 p. D.20 + p. data : 17 - 07 - 1998
8155043
D.20
D.20
STARLUB s.r.l.
description
support fixation tube en 2 p. D.16 + p.
SKETCH
pipe fixing support with 2 p. D.16 + p. data : 17 - 07 - 1998
5015042
D.16
D.16
67$5/8%VUO
description
filtro in acciaio 300 mic. - p. max. 500 bar
filtre en acier 300 mic. - p. max. 500 bar
SKETCH
filtro de acero 300 mic. - p. maz. 500 bar
stahlfilter 300 mic. - p. max. 500 bar F
seel filter 300 mic. - p. max. 500 bar data : 21 - 07 - 1998
7076028 8104005
8124005
D=16
8169022
D=16
7104009
67$5/8%VUO
description
blocchetto diritto 3/8"
boitier de derivation droit 3/8" SKETCH
bloque rector 3/8"
gerader block 3/8" BE1
straight block 3/8" data : 05-03-1999
8104005
8124005
8093051
7094013 8169022
8133029
3304008
D=16
8132015 7104009
STARLUB s.r.l.
description
blocchetto diritto 3/8"
boitier de derivation droit 3/8" SKETCH
bloque rector 3/8"
gerader block 3/8" BC5
straight block 3/8" data : 7 - 03 - 1998
8104005
8124005
8133029 8093051
8169022
3304008 D=16
8132015 7104009
67$5/8%VUO
description
blocchetto a croce 3/8"
boitier de derivation en croix 3/8" SKETCH
bloque de cruz 3/8"
kreuzblock 3/8" B
cross block 3/8" data : 16 - 01 - 1998
D=16
7104009
8132027
D=16 D=16
7104009
8124005
8104005
8169022 D=16
67$5/8%VUO
BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ETIOPIA
6.00 TRADE COMPONENTS

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

CHAIN TIGHTENING SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC PUMP

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

CODICE FAMIGLIA
FAMILY CODE 106
POMPE A MANO
CON INVERTITORE DI FLUSSO
HAND PUMPS
SERIE PMI
SERIES
WITH DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE 12-25-45
Pompe a mano con azionamento a doppio effetto per impianti a doppio effet-
Rev: AD
to, direttamente flangiabili su serbatoio e con invertitore di flusso incorporato.

Sono disponibili in tre diverse cilindrate per consentire le più svariate applica-
zioni e per limitare lo sforzo sulla leva in ogni situazione. Hanno il corpo in ghi-
sa sferoidale con trattamento in cataforesi anticorrosione e lo stelo nichelato.
Codice foglio:997-106-00710
Double acting hand pumps suitable to operate double acting applications. They can be fitted
also onto tank and are equipped with built-in directional control valve. These hand pumps can
have 3 different sizes to perform various applications and to achieve smoother loads on the
lever. They are available with nodular cast-iron body with cataphoresis anti-corrosion treatment
and nickel-plated spool.
Codice di ordinazione (senza leva)

Order code (without lever)
FULCRO 12 FULCRO 25 FULCRO 45
Senza
Serbatoio 106-017-00015 106-007-00017 106-007-00026
Without Tank
1 106-016-00016 106-005-00019 106-006-00063
Codice fascicolo: 997-400-10610 Rev:AG
Con serbatoi
2 106-016-00025 106-005-00028 106-006-00054

Litri / Litres
With Tank
3 106-016-00034 106-005-00037 106-006-00018

5 106-016-00043 106-005-00046 106-006-00027
7 106-016-00052 106-005-00055 106-006-00036
10 106-016-00061 106-005-00064 106-006-00045
Ingombro
Overall Dimension
A A1 B C D1 D2 E
mm mm mm mm ° ° mm
FULCRO 12 143187120 2,8 18,5 45 35

FULCRO 25 142193127 3,7 20 45 35
FULCRO 45 141193138 3,7 20 45 42
Data: Lunedì 27 luglio 2009
Schema Idraulico
Hydraulic layout
P1 P
pag.9
O.M.F.B. S.p.A. Hydraulic Components
We reserve the right to make any changes without notice.
Edition 2004.05 No reproduction, however partial, is permitted.
Via Cave, 7/9 25050 Provaglio d’Iseo (Brescia) Italy Tel.: +39.030.9830611
Fax: +39.030.9839207-208 Internet:www.omfb.it e-mail:info@omfb.it
SCHEMA RICAMBIO POMPE A MANO FULCRO SERIE PMI 106
FULCRO HAND PUMP PMI SERIES SPARE PARTS
Rev: AD
kit ricambi / kit’s
N° FULCRO Codice Gruppo
N° 12 25 45 P. Number Assembly
Kit valvola aspirazione Suction valve kit
40
• • 500-002-00016
• 500-002-00025
Kit pistone Piston assembly
41
• 500-012-00032
• 500-012-00014
• 500-012-00023
Kit portaleva Hand lever holder kit
42
• • • 500-009-00135
pag.10
106 SCHEMA RICAMBIO POMPE A MANO FULCRO SERIE PMI
FULCRO HAND PUMP PMI SERIES SPARE PARTS
N° FULCRO Codice Descrizione Quantità
N° 12 25 45 P. Number Description Quantity
1 • • • 506-000-00392 Guarnizione portafiltro Suction cap 1
2 • • • 550-001-00012 Filtro acciaio rotondo Steel strainer 1
• • 540-005-00019
3 Corpo valvola di aspirazione Suction valve casing 1
• 540-005-00037
• • 506-002-00201
4 Guarnizione OR O-ring 1
• 506-003-00095
Rev: AD
5 • • • 510-009-00116 Sfera tenuta Ball 1

6 • • • 512-005-00689 Molla valvola di aspirazione Spring for suction valve 1
7 • • • 550-001-00101 Guidamolla Spring-guide 1
8 • • • 501-001-00113 Anello elastico Circlip 1
• 537-002-00037
9 • 537-002-00019 Cilindro acciaio Steel stem 1
• 537-002-00028
• • 116-009-01255
10 Rondella tenuta cilindro Washer 1
• 116-009-01308
11a • 506-000-00516 Guarnizione speciale Special gasket 2
• 506-000-00258
11 Guarnizione speciale Special gasket 1
• 506-000-00267
• 532-002-00082
12 • 532-002-00028 Pistone Piston 1
• 532-002-00037
13a • 550-004-00046 Anello antiestrusore Locking ring 2
• 506-002-00158
13 Guarnizione OR O-ring 1
• 506-002-00229
• 535-001-00121
14 • 535-001-00069 Stelo Piston rod 1
• 535-001-00078
• 501-011-00086
15 • 501-011-00111 Anello elastico Circlip 1
• 501-011-00148
• 517-001-00496
16 • 517-001-00512 Corpo pompa a mano Hand pump housing 1
• 517-001-00530
17 • • • 116-009-00158 Rondella utilizzi Washer 2
18 • • • 116-006-00259 Nipplo utilizzi Pressure nipple 2
19 • • • 526-001-00095 Spinotto lunghezza 26mm Gudgeon Pin 26mm 2
• 506-000-01640
21 • 506-000-01659 Guarnizione a labbro Lip seal 1
• 506-000-01668
• 506-000-01613
22 • 506-000-01622 Guarnizione raschiapolvere Wiper seal 1
• 506-000-01631
23 • • • 501-004-00058 Spina elastica Spring pins 2
24 • • • 526-001-00086 Spinotto Gudgeon Pin 1
25 • • • 538-001-00081 Biella Brackets 2
26 • • • 502-002-00012 Vite blocco leva Locking lever screw 1
27 • • • 539-001-00212 Portaleva Lever holder 1
29 • • • 506-000-00963 Guarnizione protezione stelo Seal 1
30 • • • 506-002-00041 Guarnizione OR O-ring 1
31 • • • 536-001-00030 Stelo invertitore Diverter rod 1
32 • • • 539-004-00031 Leva per invertitore Directional control lever 1
33 • • • 509-001-00073 Pomello rosso Red knob 1
34 • • • 540-003-00360 Tappo valvola di ritegno Non-return valve cover 1
35 • • • 506-019-10200 Guarnizione OR O-ring 1

36 • • • 512-005-00312 Molla valvola di ritegno Non-return valve spring 1
37 • • • 510-009-00054 Sfera tenuta di ritegno Non-return ball 3
38 • • • 530-001-00489 Distanziale Spacer 1
pag.11
POMPE A MANO FULCRO SERIE PMI
106
FULCRO HAND PUMP PMI SERIES
Dati Tecnici
Technical data
Tipo pompa Pressione massima Cilindrata Peso
Pump type Max. Pressure Displacement Weight
Completa / Full Tiro / Pull Spinta / Push
bar cm3/ciclo cm3/ciclo cm3/ciclo Kg
Rev: AD
FULCRO 12 350 12 6,1 5,9 2,9
FULCRO 25 300 25 13,4 11,6 2,8
FULCRO 45 270 45 23,7 21,3 3,2
Fluido idraulico
Minerale o sintetico compatibile con guarnizioni:
Mineral or synthetic compatible with the following Sforzo in fase di pompaggio
Fluid seals:
NBR, FKM, FPM, Nylon con leva standard
Viscosità cinematica T media ambiente (°C) < -10 -10÷10 10÷35 > 35 Load while pumping with standard lever
consigliata Average ambient temp. (°C)
Kinematic viscosity
suggested VG (cSt = mm2/s) 22 32 46 68 F Kg
FULCRO 12
160
Pres. di aspirazione -0,3 ÷ 2 bar
Inlet pressure 140
120
Kit di guarnizioni 100
Seal kit 80
FULCRO 12 FULCRO 25 FULCRO 45 60

TIRO
106-900-00551 106-900-00604 106-900-00659 40

PULL

SPINTA
PUSH
20
0
bar
0
100
150
250
350
200
300
400
450
50
F Kg
FULCRO 25
160
140
120
PIA.APP.GRP.PMP. PMS-PMI
106-000-00032 MOUNTING PLATE FOR TANK PMS-PMI 100
80
TIRO
PULL
60
SPINTA
40
PUSH
20
0
bar
200
300
450
400
100
150
250
350
0
50
AST. CON IMP.PMS/PMI L.600 MM 35x15 FULCRO 45

106-000-00078 LEVER FOR PMS/PMI L. 600 MM 35x15

F Kg
160
140
120
TIRO
100
PULL
80
SPINTA
PUSH
60
40
20
KIT MONTAGGIO POMPE PMS/PMI
106-960-00700 MOUNTING KIT FOR PUMPS PMS/PMI
0
bar
200
450
50
100
150
250
300
350
400
0
pag.12
BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

ELECTRIC MOTOR

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

Drehstrommotoren Betriebsanleitung Operating
instructions
Instructions de service
Three-phase AC Motors Instrucciones para el manejo
Manuale d’uso
Moteurs triphasés Bruksanvisning
Motores trifásicos
Motori trifasi
Trefasmotorer
1LA6, 1LA7/9, 1LP7/9, 1PP7/9
BG 56 ... 90 L - IM B3
1MA6/7, 1MF6/7
BG 100 ... 160 L - IM B3 BG 100 ... 160 L - IM B3

1LA6, 1MA6
Baugrößen (BG) / Frame sizes (BG) / Désignation de carcasse (BG)

Tamaños constructivos (BG) / Grandezza costruttiva (BG) / Konstruktionsstorlekar (BG)
(1MA) (1MA)
*
(1MA)
*
oder oder oder
or or or
ou ou ou
o IM V 5 IM V 6 o o IM V 18
oppure oppure oppure
*
eller eller eller
IM B 3 IM B 5 IM V 1 IM V 3 IM B 14 IM B 35
IM B 34
IM B 6 IM B 7 IM B 8 IM V 19
Fig. 1 Bauformen / Types of construction / Formes de construction * s. "4 EEx e Motoren"/see "4 EEx e motors"/voir "4 Moteurs EEx e " /
véase "4 Motores EEx e "/cfr. "4 Motori EEx e " / se "EEx e-Motorer"
Formas constructivas / Forme costruttive / Monteringssätt
Ausgabe / Edition 10.01 Bestell - Nr. / Order No.: 610.43 428.21.d

 Siemens AG 1996 All Rights Reserved DEUTSCH / ENGLISH / FRANÇAIS / ESPAÑOL / ITALIANO / SVENSKA
1
DEUTSCH
Ggf. kann ein komplettes Auswuchten des Motors mit dem Abtriebs-
Allgemeine Hinweise element erforderlich werden.
Zu beachten sind die Angaben und Anweisungen in der BG90S/L: Die Motoren haben zur Einhaltung der genormten Fußab-
mitgelieferten Anleitung Sicherheits- und messungen bei der Bauform IM B3 an den hinteren Füßen Doppel-
Inbetriebnahmehinweise bzw. allen sonstigen löcher (s. Fig. 10).
Anleitungen.
Dies ist zur Vermeidung von Gefahren und Schäden unerläß- 2.3 Klemmenkasten
lich! Weiterhin sind die jeweils geltenden nationalen, örtlichen
und anlagespezifischen Bestimmungen und Erfordernis- BG56...90L: Das Klemmenkastenoberteil kann bei 1LA, 1LP,
se zu berücksichtigen! 1PP um 4x90 Grad gedreht werden.
Sonderausführungen und Bauvarianten können in techni- BG100...160L: Der am Motorgehäuse angegossene Klemmen-
schen Details abweichen! Bei eventuellen Unklarheiten wird drin- kasten ist nicht drehbar.
gend empfohlen, unter Angabe von Typbezeichnung und Bei Motoren mit angeschraubtem Klemmenkastenoberteil
Fabriknummer (No ... , s. Leistungsschild) beim Hersteller kann dieses um 4 x 90 Grad gedreht werden (Fig. 2 - 5.90).
rückzufragen, oder die Instandhaltungsarbeiten von einem der
SIEMENS - Servicezentren durchführenzulassen. 2.4 Wuchtung, Abtriebselemente
Das Auf- und Abziehen von Abtriebselementen (Kupplungen, Rie-
menscheiben, Zahnrad, ...) ist mit einer geeigneten Vorrichtung
1 Beschreibung auszuführen (Fig. 7).
1.1 Anwendungsbereich
Standardmäßig sind die Läufer Halbkeil gewuchtet.
Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung der Standard Motoren:
Die Motoren sind in Schutzart IP55 (Schutzart s. Leistungsschild) Bei Montage des Abtriebselementes auf entsprechende
ausgeführt. Sie können in staubiger oder feuchter Umgebung auf- Auswuchtart achten! (Option: F = Auswuchtung mit voller
gestellt werden. Die Isolierung ist tropenfest. Bei sachgemäßer Paßfeder)
Lagerung oder sachgemäßer Aufstellung im Freien sind normalerwei- Die Abtriebselemente sind nach ISO 1940 auszuwuchten!
se gegen Witterungseinflüsse keine besonderen Schutzmaßnahmen
Bei Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder ist der überstehende
an den Motoren notwendig. Die Motoren müssen jedoch vor intensiver
sichtbare Paßfederanteil TP abzuarbeiten (s. Fig. 9) .
Sonneneinstrahlung geschützt werden, z. B. durch ein Schutzdach.
Umgebungstemperatur: -30° ... +60°
Zu beachten sind die allgemein erforderlichen Maß-
Aufstellungshöhe: ≤ 1000 m
nahmen für den Berührungsschutz der Abtriebs-
elemente.
1.2 Aufbau und Arbeitsweise Wird ein Motor ohne Abtriebselement in Betrieb genommen,
Motorausführungen: so ist die Paßfeder gegen Herausschleudern zu sichern.
1LA- und 1MA-Motoren sind eigengekühlt (mit Lüfter). 1PP-Motoren
sind eigengekühlt entweder - z. B. beim Einsatz als Lüftermotoren - 2.5 Elektrischer Anschluß
durch einen auf dem Wellenende angeordneten Sonderlüfter, oder
HINWEIS: Sind die Öffnungen für Kabel und Leitungen im
durch Fremdlüfter. 1LA-BG56, 1LP und 1MF-Motoren sind selbst-
Klemmenkasten mit einer "Gußhaut" (Ausbrechöffnung) ver-
gekühlt (ohne Lüfter).
schlossen, so ist diese mit einem geeignetem Werkzeug auszuschla-
gen (s. Fig. 4) !
Bei Fußmotoren sind die Füße an das Motorgehäuse angeschraubt
bzw. angegossen. Hierbei darf der Klemmenkasten, Klemmenbrett, Kabelan-
schlüsse, ... im Innenraum des Klemmenkastens nicht
Ein Umsetzen der angeschraubten Füße am Motorgehäuse,
beschädigt werden!
z. B. zwecks Veränderung der Klemmenkastenlage (s. Fig. 2), ist
möglich. Hierzu nachträglich Gewinde in die vorhandenen Bohrungen Verschraubungen für Kabel und Leitungen s. Fig. 4. Bei
am Motorgehäuse schneiden, um die Motorfüße zu befestigen. Kaltleiteranschluß ist ein Reduktionsstück einzuschrauben!
Allerdings müssen anschließend die Fußstandflächen durch Nach- Der Klemmenkasten muß staub- und wasserdicht verschlos-
arbeit wieder in eine Ebene gebracht und bei Bedarf unterlegt werden. sen sein.
Bei Bremsmotoren ist zusätzlich die Bremsenbetriebsanleitung Netzspannung und Netzfrequenz müssen mit den Daten auf dem
mit zu beachten! Leistungsschild übereinstimmen. ±5% Spannungs- oder
±2%Frequenzabweichung sind ohne Leistungsherabsetzung zuläs-
2 Betrieb sig. Anschluß und Anordnung der Schaltbügel nach dem im Klemmen-
Alle Arbeiten nur im elektrisch spannungslosen Zu- kasten befindlichen Schaltbild vornehmen. Schutzleiter an diese
stand der Anlage durchführen. Klemme anschließen.
Bei Anschlußklemmen mit Klemmbügeln (z. B. nach DIN
2.1 Transport, Einlagern 46282) sind die Leiter so zu verteilen, daß auf beiden Stegsei-
ten etwa gleiche Klemmhöhen entstehen. Diese Anschluß-
Beim Transport sind alle vorhandenen Hebeösen am Motor
art erfordert daher, daß ein einzelner Leiter U-förmig gebo-
zu benutzen!
gen werden muß oder mit einem Kabelschuh anzuschließen
Zum Transport von Maschinensätzen (z.B. Getriebe-, Gebläse- ist (s. Fig. 6.1). Dies gilt auch für den Schutzleiteranschluß und
anbauten, ...) nur die dafür vorgesehenen Hebeösen bzw. - den äußeren Erdungsleiter (s. Fig. 6.2) - grüngelb .
zapfen benutzen! Maschinensätze dürfen nicht durch An- Anziehdrehmomente für Schraubenverbindungen der elektrischen
hängen an den Einzelmaschinen gehoben werden! Auf Trag- Anschlüsse - Klemmenbrettanschlüsse (außer Klemmenleisten) s.
fähigkeit dieser Hebeeinrichtung achten! Fig. 5.
Die Wälzlager sollten erneuert werden, wenn die Zeit von der Während des Betriebes darf die Stillstandsheizung nicht ein-
Lieferung bis zur Motorinbetriebnahme bei günstigen Bedingungen geschaltet sein.
(Aufbewahrung in trockenen, staub- und erschütterungsfreien Räu-
men) mehr als 4 Jahre beträgt. Bei ungünstigen Bedingungen verrin- 2.6 Überprüfung des Isolationswiderstandes
gert sich diese Zeit wesentlich.
Vor der Erstinbetriebnahme des Motors, nach längerer Lagerung oder
Ggf. sind ungeschützte, bearbeitete Oberflächen (Anflansch- Stillstandzeit (ca. 6 Monate), muß der Isolationswiderstand der
fläche, Wellenende,...) mit Korrosionsschutzmittel zu behandeln. Wicklungen ermittelt werden.
Ggf. ist der Isolationswiderstand der Wicklung zu überprüfen, s. Bei und unmittelbar nach der Messung haben die Klemmen
Abschnitt 2.5 . teilweise gefährliche Spannungen und dürfen nicht berührt
2.2 Aufstellung werden.
Eingeschraubte Hebeösen sind nach dem Aufstellen fest anzu- Isolationswiderstand

ziehen oder zu entfernen! - Der Mindestisolationswiderstand von neuen, gereinigten oder
instandgesetzten Wicklungen gegen Masse beträgt 10 MegaOhm.
Bei senkrechter Motoraufstellung muß anwenderseitig das - Der kritische Isolationswiderstand Rkrit wird zunächst errech-
Eindringen von Flüssigkeit entlang der Welle verhindert werden. net. Berechnung erfolgt durch Multiplikation der Bemessungs-
Laufruhe: Ein genaues Ausrichten der Kupplung sowie ein gut spannung UN, z. B. AC 0,69 kV, mit dem konstanten Faktor (0,5
ausgewuchtetes Abtriebselement (Kupplung,Riemenscheiben,Lüfter, MegaOhm/kV):
...) sind Voraussetzung für einen ruhigen schwingungsarmen Lauf. Rkrit = 0,69 kV * 0,5 MegaOhm/kV = 0,345 MegaOhm
Siemens AG
2
DEUTSCH
Messung
Der Mindestisolationswiderstand der Wicklungen gegen Masse HINWEIS: Die zulässigen axial- und Querkräfte (lt. Katalog) dürfen
wird mit 500 V Gleichspannung gemessen. Dabei soll die Temperatur nicht überschritten werden !
der Wicklungen 25°C ± 15°C betragen. Unabhängig von den Betriebsstunden sollte das Wälzlager ,
Der kritische Isolationswiderstand ist bei Betriebstemperatur der wegen der Fettalterung, etwa alle 3 Jahre erneuert werden.
Wicklung mit 500 V Gleichspannung zu messen. Bei besonderen Betriebsbedingungen, z. B. senkrechter
Überprüfung Motoraufstellung, großen Schwingungs- und Stoßbelastungen,
Ist bei neuer oder gereinigter Wicklung oder instandgesetztem Motor, häufigem Reversierbetrieb, ... reduzieren sich die vorstehend
der längere Zeit gelagert wurde oder still stand, der Mindest- genannten Betriebsstunden wesentlich.
isolationswiderstand der Wicklung gegen Masse kleiner 10 Die Motoren haben Rillenkugellager mit Deckscheiben (2ZC3 Ausfüh-
MegaOhm, kann die Ursache hierfür Feuchte sein. Die Wicklungen sind rung). Das Material der Scheiben sollte temperaturbeständig von -
dann zu trocknen. 30°C bis +150°C sein, z. B. Polyacryl-Kautschuk (ACM).
Nach längerer Betriebsdauer kann der Mindestisolationswiderstand Fettsorte bei Standardmaschinen: UNIREX N3 (Fa. ESSO);
auf den kritischen Isolationswiderstand absinken. Solange der Ersatzfette müssen der DIN 51825-K3N genügen.
gemessene Wert den errechneten Wert des kritischen Isolations- Sonderfette sind auf dem Leistungsschild bzw. zusätzlichen Schild
widerstandes nicht unterschreitet, darf der Motor weiter betrieben angegeben.
werden. Wird dieser Wert unterschritten, ist der Motor sofort abzuschal- Motor im erforderlichen Umfang zerlegen. Wälzlager mit geeigneter
ten. Es ist die Ursache hierfür zu ermitteln, ggf. sind die Wicklungen oder Vorrichtung abziehen (s. Fig. 7). Lagerstelle von Verunreinigungen
Wicklungsteile instand zusetzen, zu reinigen oder zu trocknen. säubern!
Wälzlager gleichmäßig auf ca. 80-100°C erwärmen und aufziehen.
2.7 Inbetriebnahme Harte Schläge (z. B. mit einem Hammer, ...) sind zu vermeiden.
HINWEIS: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit Eventuell abgenützte Dichtelemente (z. B. Wellendichtring, ... ),
Störaussendungen: Bei stark ungleichen Dreh- sind ebenfalls zu erneuern.
momenten (z.B. Antrieb eines Kolbenkompressors) wird Sind Wellendichtringe ohne Feder eingebaut, so muß auch das
ein nichtsinusförmiger Motorstrom erzwungen, dessen Ober- Ersatzteil ohne Feder eingesetzt werden.
schwingungen eine unzulässige Netzbeeinflussung und da- Nachschmiereinrichtung
mit unzulässige Störaussendungen bewirken können. Bei Motoren mit Nachschmiereinrichtung sind die Angaben auf
Bei Speisung durch Umrichter treten je nach Umrichteraus- dem Schmierschild oder Leistungsschild zu beachten! Die Nach-
führung (Typ, Entstörmaßnahmen, Hersteller) unterschiedlich starke schmierung sollte bei laufendem Motor erfolgen!
Störaussendungen auf. Die EMV-Hinweise des Umrichterherstellers
sind unbedingt zu beachten. Empfiehlt dieser eine abgeschirmte
Motorzuleitung, so ist die Abschirmung am wirksamsten, wenn sie
großflächig am Metallklemmenkasten des Motors (mit Verschraubung 4 Motoren der Zündschutzart -
aus Metall) leitend verbunden wird. Bei Motoren mit eingebauten
Sensoren (z.B. Kaltleitern) können umrichterbedingt auf der Sensor- Erhöhte Sicherheit EExe 1MA,1MF
leitung Störspannungen auftreten. Für diese Motoren gelten ergänzend oder speziell die Informationen
Störfestigkeit: Bei Motoren mit eingebauten Sensoren (z.B. in kursiver Schrift!
Kaltleitern) muß der Betreiber durch geeignete Auswahl der Sensor- Die erhöhte Gefahr in explosions- und schlagwettergefährdeten
Signalleitung (evtl. mit Abschirmung, Anbindung wie bei Motorzu- Bereichen verlangt die besonders sorgfältige Beachtung der allge-
leitung) und des Auswertegerätes selbst für eine ausreichende meinen Sicherheits- und Inbetriebnahmehinweise.
Störfestigkeit sorgen. Explosionsgeschützte elektrische Maschinen entsprechen den Nor-
Vor Inbetriebnahme sind die Angaben und Anweisungen in der men der Reihen EN 60034(VDE 0530) sowie EN 50014 - 50020. Sie
mitgelieferten Anleitung Sicherheits- und Inbetriebnahmehin- dürfen in explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen nur nach Maßgabe der
weise bzw. allen sonstigen Anleitungen zu beachten ! zuständigen Aufsichtsbehörde eingesetzt werden. Ihr obliegt die
Nach dem Anbau der Motoren ist die Bremse (falls vorhanden) Feststellung der Explosionsgefährdung (Zoneneinteilung).
auf ihre einwandfreie Funktion zu prüfen! Ist die Bescheinigung durch ein X ergänzt, sind besondere
Auflagen in der EG-Baumusterprüfbescheinigung zu beach-
ten.
3 Instandhaltung Die Leitungseinführungen müssen für den Ex-Bereich zugelassen
sein und gegenüber selbsttätigem Lockern gesichert werden. Nicht
benutzte Öffnungen mit zugelassenen Stopfen verschließen.
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen Bei Wellenende oben, z. B. Bauformen IMV3, IMV6, IMV19 (s. Fig.
Vor Beginn jeder Arbeit am Motor oder Gerät, 1), ist bei 1MA-Motoren eine Abdeckung anzuordnen, die ein
besonders aber vor dem Öffnen von Abdeckungen Hineinfallen von Fremdkörpern in die Motorlüfterhaube verhindert
aktiver Teile, muß der Motor vorschriftsmäßig frei- (s. DIN EN 50014/50019). Sie darf die Kühlung des Motors durch
geschaltet sein. Neben den Hauptstromkreisen ist dabei seinen Lüfter nicht behindern.
auch auf eventuell vorhandene Zusatz- oder Hilfs- Werden in der EG-Baumusterprüfbescheinigung bzw. auf dem
stromkreise zu achten. Leistungsschild keine anderslautenden Angaben bezüglich Be-
Die üblichen "5 Sicherheitsregeln" lauten hierbei z. B. nach triebsart und Toleranzen gemacht, sind elektrische Maschinen für
DIN VDE 0105: Dauerbetrieb und normale nicht häufig wiederkehrende Anläufe
- Freischalten ausgelegt, bei denen keine wesentliche Anlauferwärmung auftritt.
- Gegen Wiedereinschalten sichern Die Motoren dürfen nur für die auf dem Leistungsschild angegebene
- Spannungsfreiheit feststellen Betriebsart eingesetzt werden.
- Erden und Kurzschließen Der Bereich A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, Teil 1) - Spannung ± 5%,
- Benachbarte unter Spannung stehende Teile abdecken Frequenz ± 2%, Kurvenform, Netzsymmetrie - muß eingehalten
oder abschranken. werden, damit die Erwärmung innerhalb der zulässigen Grenzen
Diese zuvor genannten Maßnahmen dürfen erst dann bleibt. Größere Abweichungen von den Bemessungswerten können
zurückgenommen werden, wenn die Instandhaltungsar- die Erwärmung der elektrischen Maschine unzulässig erhöhen und
beiten abgeschlossen sind und der Motor vollständig müssen auf dem Leistungsschild angegeben sein.
montiert ist. Die auf dem Leistungsschild angegebene Temperaturklasse des
Motors muß mit der Temperaturklasse des möglicherweise auftre-
HINWEIS: Sofern Motoren mit verschlossenen Kondenswasser- tenden brennbaren Gases übereinstimmen.
öffnungen ausgeführt sind, müssen diese von Zeit zu Zeit geöffnet
werden, damit eventuell angesammeltes Kondenswasser abfließen Die Überstromschutzeinrichtung mit stromabhängig verzö-
kann. gerter Auslösung ist so auszuwählen, daß die Auslösezeit, die
aus der Kennlinie des Schalters für das Verhältnis IA / IN des zu
Kondenswasseröffnungen sind stets an der tiefsten Stelle des Motors
schützendes Motors zu entnehmen ist, nicht größer als die
anzuordnen!
Erwärmungszeit tE des Motors ist. Das Verhältnis IA / IN sowie
Lagerwechsel, Fettsorte die Erwärmungszeit tE sind dem Typenschild zu entnehmen.
Die Lagerwechselfrist [h] ist unter normalen Außerdem ist die Schutzeinrichtung auf den Bemessungsstrom
Betriebsbedingungen, bei waagerechter Motoraufstellung, einzustellen. Bei Wicklungen in Dreieckschaltung werden die Aus-
Kühlmitteltemperatur bzw. Motordrehzahl von löser in Reihe mit den Wicklungssträngen geschaltet und auf den
25°C 40°C 0,58fachen Bemessungsstrom eingestellt. Ist diese Schaltung nicht
... 1800/min ca. 40 000 h ca. 20 000 h möglich, sind zusätzliche Schutzmaßnahmen erforderlich (z. B.
... 3600/min ca. 20 000 h ca. 10 000 h Thermischer Maschinenschutz).
Siemens AG
3
ENGLISH
Die Schutzeinrichtung muß bei blockiertem Läufer innerhalb der

für die jeweilige Temperaturklasse angegebenen tE-Zeit abschal- General note
ten. The data and recommendations specified in all the
Elektrische Maschinen für Schweranlauf (Hochlaufzeit > 1,7 x tE- instructions supplied ("Information on safety and
Zeit) sind entsprechend den Angaben der EG-Baumusterprüf- commissioning"), and in all other related
bescheinigung durch eine Anlaufüberwachung zu schützen. instructions, must always be observed in order to avoid
Thermischer Maschinenschutz durch direkte Temperatur- hazardous situations and the risk of possible injury or
überwachung der Wicklung ist zulässig, wenn dies bescheinigt und damage.
auf dem Leistungsschild angegeben ist. Furthermore, the pertinent national, local and plant-specific
Bei polumschaltbaren Motoren sind für jede Drehzahlstufe regulations and requirements should be kept in mind!
getrennte, gegenseitig verriegelte Schutzeinrichtungen erforder- Special designs and other versions may vary in technical
lich. Empfohlen werden Einrichtungen mit EG-Baumusterprüf- details! If in doubt, be sure to contact the manufacturer, quoting
bescheinigung. the type designation and serial number (No. ..., see rating
plate), or have maintenance work done by one of the SIEMENS
In Deutschland wird beim Errichten elektrischer Anlagen in Service Centres.
explosionsgefährdeten Bereichen auf DIN 57165/VDE 0165 und
ElexV hingewiesen! Im Ausland sind die entsprechenden
Landesvorschriften zu beachten! 1 Description
Der Betrieb am Umrichter muß ausdrücklich bescheinigt sein.
Die gesonderten Herstellerhinweise sind unbedingt zu beachten. 1.1 Application
Für die Zündschutzart EExe müssen Motor, Umrichter und Schutz- Normal use of the standard motors:
einrichtungen als zusammengehörig gekennzeichnet und die zuläs- The motors are designed to comply with degree of protection IP55
sigen Betriebsdaten in der gemeinsamen EG-Baumusterprüf- (degree of protection indicated on rating plate). They are suitable for
bescheinigung festgelegt sein (VDE 0165). installation in dusty and damp environments. The insulation is
Die vom Umrichter erzeugten Spannungsspitzen können durch tropicalized. If they are properly stored or installed outdoors, special
das installierte Verbindungskabel zwischen Umrichter und elektri- weatherproofing measures are not usually required for these motors.
scher Maschine in ihrer Größe ungünstig beeinflußt werden. In dem They must however be protected against intense sunlight, e.g. by
System Umrichter-Kabel-elektrische Maschine darf der Maximal- means of a canopy.
wert der Spannungsspitzen an den Anschlußklemmen der Maschine Ambient temperature -30°C ... +60°C
den in den gesonderten Herstellerhinweisen genannten Wert nicht Site altitude ≤ 1000 m
überschreiten. Des weiteren ist die EMV-Richtlinie einzuhalten.
1.2 Construction and mode of operation
Reparaturen müssen in Siemens-Werkstätten durchgeführt oder Motor types:
von einem amtlich anerkannten Sachverständigen abgenom- 1LA- and 1MA motors are self-ventilated (with fans). 1PP motors are
men werden. Die Arbeiten sind durch ein zusätzliches Reparatur- self-ventilated either by separate fans arranged on the rotors, such
schild zu kennzeichnen. as for service as fan motors, or by external fans. 1LA-BG56, 1LP and
Ersatzteile mit Ausnahme genormter, handelsüblicher und gleich- 1MF motors are non-ventilated (without fans).
wertiger Teile (z. B. Wälzlager) dürfen nur Originalersatzteile (s. In the case of the base motors the feet are screwed or cast on the
Ersatzteilliste) verwendet werden: dies gilt insbesondere auch für motor housing.
Dichtungen und Anschlußteile. The screw-fitted feet on the motor housing can be changed
over to alter the position of the terminal box (see Fig. 2). To do this
tap the thread in retrospect in the existing drill holes on the motor
housing to fasten the motor feet. However, the stand surface of the
feet must be remachined and aligned afterwards and shims fitted, if
necessary.
The brake connection cable is also to be considered in the case of
brake motors!
2 Operation
Before starting any work on the machine, be sure to
isolate it from the power supply.
2.1 Transport, storage

The motors should always be lifted at all lifting eyes during
transport.
For lifting machine sets (such as built-on gearboxes,
fan units), always use the lifting eyes or lifting pegs
provided! Machine sets may not be lifted by suspending
the individual machines! Check the lifting capacity of the
hoist!
If, after delivery, the motors are stored for more than 4 years under
favourable conditions (kept in a dry place free from dust and vibration)
prior to commissioning, the rolling-contact bearings should be
regreased. Under unfavourable conditions, this period is considerably
shorter.
If necessary unprotected, machined surfaces (flange
surface, shaft end, etc.) to be treated with corrosion-protection
agent.
If necessary, the insulation resistance of the winding should be
checked, see Section 2.5.
2.2 Installation
Screw-fitted lifting eyelets are to be done up tight or removed
after installation!
In the case of motors installed vertically, additional measures
must be taken to ensure that no water can penetrate along the shaft.
Quiet running: Exact alignment of the coupling and a well-balanced
transmission element (coupling, pulleys, fans, etc.) are essential for
quiet vibration-free running. If necessary, the whole motor and
transmission element should be balanced.
Siemens AG
4
ENGLISH
BG90S/L: Double drillholes are provided for Type IM B3 in the rear feet Measurement
(see Fig. 10) to maintain the standard foot dimensions. The minimum insulation resistance of the windings to ground is
measured with 500 V DC. The winding temperature should then be
2.3 Terminal box 25oC ± 15 oC.
BG56...90L: In the case of 1LA, 1LP and 1LP motors, the top part The critical insulation resistance should be measured with 500
of the terminal box can be turned through 4x90 degrees. V DC with the winding at operating temperature.
BG100...160L: The cast terminal box on the motor housing cannot be Checking
turned. In the case of motors with screw-fitted top section on If, the minimum insulation resistance of the winding against earth is
the terminal box this can be turned 4 times through 90 degrees (Fig. less than 10 Mega Ohm in the case of a new or cleaned winding or repaired
2 - 5.90). motor which has been stored or has been standing still for a longer period,
2.4 Balancing, transmission elements moisture can be the cause.. The windings must then be dried.
After long periods of operation, the minimum insulation resistance
A suitable device should always be used for fitting and removing the
may drop to the critical insulation resistance. As long as the
transmission elements (couplings, pulleys, pinions, etc.) (Fig. 7).
measured value does not fall below the calculated value of the critical
As standard, the rotors are dynamically balanced with the insulation resistance, the motor may continue in operation. If it
half featherkey. does, the motor must be stopped immediately.
When fitting the transmission element, keep the type of The cause must be determined, and the windings or winding sections
balance in mind! (Option: F = balanced with full featherkey) repaired, cleaned or dried as necessary.
The transmission elements must be balanced in accordance
with ISO 1940! 2.7 Commissioning
If the transmission elements are balanced with a half NOTE: Electromagnetic compatibility
featherkey, the visible, protruding part of the featherkey TP
must be cut back (see Fig. 9). Emitted interference: Where the torque is very uneven
(the drive of a piston-type compressor, for example), the
The usual measures should be taken to guard
inevitable result is a non-sinusoidal motor current, whose
transmission elements from touch. If a motor is started
harmonics can lead to excessive system perturbation and
up without the transmission element attached, the
thus excessive emitted interference.
featherkey should be secured to prevent it being
thrown out. In the case of converter-fed motors, interference is emitted to a
greater or lesser degree, depending on the converter version concerned
2.5 Electrical connection (type, interference suppression measures, manufacturer). The
instructions of the converter manufacturer regarding electromagnetic
NOTE: If the openings for cables and leads in the terminal box
compatibility must be heeded at all times. If a sheathed motor supply
are sealed with a "skin" of cast iron, it must be shaken out using a
cable is recommended then the sheathing will be best effective when
suitable tool (see Fig. 4)!
a conductive connection is made to the large surface on the metal
Care must be taken not to damage the terminal box, the terminal box of the motor (metal union). Noise voltages may occur on
terminal board, the cable connections, etc. inside the terminal the sensor leads of motors with integrated sensors (e.g. PTC
box! thermistors) as a result of the converter.
See Fig. 4 for details of the screwed connections for cables and leads.
Noise immunity: If the motor has an integrated sensor (e.g. a
An adapter must be screwed in for PTC thermistor
PTC thermistor), the owner is responsible for ensuring adequate
connections!
noise immunity by choosing a suitable sensor signal lead (possibly
with shielding, connected like the motor supply lead) and evaluator.
The terminal box must be sealed so that it is dust and water-tight.
The data and recommendations specified in all the instructions
The system voltage and the frequency must agree with the data given supplied (“Information on safety and commissioning”), and in
on the rating plate. Voltage or frequency deviations of ±5% and ±2% all other related instructions, must always be observed prior to
respectively from the rated voltage and frequency values are permitted commissioning!
without needing to derate the output. The connection and arrangement
of the terminal links must agree with the diagram provided in the
After motor installation, the brake, if fitted, should be checked
terminal box.
for proper functioning.
Connect the earthing conductor to the terminal with the marking.
Wherever terminal clips are used (for example, to DIN 46282),
arrange the conductors so that the clips are virtually level on
both sides. This method of connection means that the ends 3 Maintenance
of single conductors must be bent in the shape of a U or be
fitted with a cable lug (see Fig. 6.1). This also applies to the
Safety precautions
green-yellow protective earthing conductor and the outer
Before starting any work on the motor or other
earthing conductor (see Fig. 6.2).
equipment, particularly before opening covers over
Please refer to Fig. 5 for the tightening torques for the screwed live parts, the motor must be properly isolated
electrical connections - terminal board connections (except for from the power supply. Besides the main circuits, any
terminal strips). additional or auxiliary circuits that may be present must
also be isolated.
The anti-condensation heater must not be switched on The usual "5 safety rules" (as set forth in DIN VDE 0105)
during operation. are: - Isolate the equipment
- Take effective measures to prevent reconnection
2.6 Checking the insulation resistance - Verify equipment is dead
The insulation resistance of the windings must be measured prior to - Earth and short-circuit
initial startup of the motor, or after long periods of storage or standstill - Cover or fence off adjacent live parts
(approx. 6 months). The precautions listed above should remain in force
until all maintenance work is finished and the motor has
While the measurement is being taken and immediately
been fully assembled.
afterwards, some of the terminals carry dangerous voltages
and must not be touched.
NOTE: Where motors are fitted with closed condensed water openings,
these should be opened from time to time to allow any accumulated
Insulation resistance condensed water to drain away.
- The minimum insulation resistance of new, cleaned or repaired Condensed water openings should always be at the lowest point of
windings with respect to ground is 10 Mohms. the motor!
- The critical insulation resistance Rcrit is calculated first by
multiplying the rated voltage UN, e.g. 0.69 kV AC, with the constant
factor (0.5 Mohms/kV):
Rcrit = 0.69 kV * 0.5 Mohms/kV = 0.345 Mohms.
Siemens AG
5
ENGLISH
The overcurrent protection facility with current dependent

Fitting new bearings, type of grease delayed triggering is to be selected so that the triggering time
Under normal operating conditions, with horizontally mounted motors to be taken from the switch characteristic curve for the
and the following coolant temperatures and motor speeds, the protected motor ratio IA / IN must not be greater than the
bearings should be changed at the intervals [h] specified below: heating up time tE of the motors. The ratio IA / IN as well as the
25°C 40°C heating up time tE are to be found on the rating plate. The
... 1800 rev/min approx. 40,000 h approx. 20,000 h protective device is to be set to the rated current. In the case of delta-
... 3600 rev/min approx. 20,000 h approx. 10,000 h connected windings, the trips are to be connected in series with the
NOTE: The permissible axial and transverse forces (see Catalog) winding phases and set to 0.58 times the rated current. If such a circuit
must not be exceeded! is not possible, additional protective measures are necessary (e.g.
Irrespective of the number of operating hours, the rolling-contact thermal machine protection).
bearing should be renewed every 3 years because of grease ageing. If the rotor is blocked, the protection device must switch off the
machine within the time tE indicated for the respective temperature
In the case of motors operating under special conditions, such as class.
a vertical motor position, heavy vibration, sudden load changes, Electrical motors for heavy start up (running up time > 1.7 x tE-time)
frequent reversing operation, etc., the bearing should be changed at are to be protected by a start monitoring system in accordance with
considerably more frequent intervals than the operating hours stated the details given in the EC sample type test certificate.
above. Thermal machine protection by means of direct temperature
The motors feature deep-groove ball bearings which are provided with monitoring of the winding is permissible if this is certified and
cover plates (2ZC3 version). The cover plate material should withstand indicated on the rating plate.
temperatures from -30 °C to +150 °C, e.g. polyacryl-rubber (ACM). Separate, common interlocked protection devices are required for
each speed stage for pole reversible motors. To be recommended
Type of grease for standard machines: UNIREX N3 (Esso); synthetic are devices with EC sample type test certificate.
greases must conform to DIN 51825-K3N. In Germany, please refer to DIN 57165/VDE 0165 and ElexV when
Special greases should be indicated on the rating plate or on a erecting electrical installations in areas exposed to the danger
separate plate. of explosion. In countries other than Germany, the relevant
national regulations are to be complied with in each case!
Dismantle the motor to the extent necessary. Pull off the rolling- Operation on a converter must be certified. The separate
contact bearing with a suitable device (see Fig. 7). Clean the journal! instructions of the manufacturer must be complied with. The motors,
Heat the rolling-contact bearing evenly to about 80-100 °C and press converters and protection devices are to be marked as pertinent to
on. Heavy blows (such as with a hammer, etc.) should be avoided. each other in the case of the EExe ignition protection mode and the
Any worn sealing elements (such as the shaft sealing ring, etc.) approved operating data is to be laid down in the general EC sample
should also be renewed. type test certificate (VDE 0165).
The connector cable installed between the inverter and the electrical
If springless radial shaft sealing rings are used, the replacement device can adversely affect the levels of the voltage peaks produced
sealing rings must also be of the springless type. by the inverter. . The maximum value of the voltage peaks at the
terminals in the system Inverter-Cable-Eletrical Device must not
Regreasing device exceed the value stated in the manufacturer’s special notes.
In the case of motors with a regreasing device, take note of the Furthermore, the EMC Guideline must be observed.
information given on the rating plate or the lubrication instruction plate! Repairs must be performed in Siemens Workshops or inspected
The bearings should be relubricated while the motor is running! and approved by a state-certified Expert. The repairs must be
indicated by an additional repair plate.
As to Spare parts, with the exception of standardised, commercially
available equivalent parts (e.g. roller bearings), only original
4 1MA and 1MF motors with spare parts (see parts list) may be used; this applies in particular
also with respect to gaskets and connectors.
increased EExe protection
The information in italics is intended to serve as supplementary or
special information on these types of motors.
The increased hazards in areas which are exposed to the danger of
explosion or firedamp necessitate that the general notes on safety and
commissioning are carefully complied with.
Electrical machines which are protected against explosion are in line
with the standards EN 60034 (VDE 0530) and EN 50014 to 50020. It
is permitted to use these machines in areas exposed to the danger of
explosion only in accordance with the stipulations of the responsible
authority which also determines whether a danger of explosion exists
(division into zones).
To be observed in the case of certification additionally
marked with an X are the special stipulations in the EC sample
test certificate.
The cable entries must be approved for the explosion-endangered
area and be secured to prevent accidental loosening. Unused openings
are to be closed with approved plugs.
In the case of 1MA-motors, a cover to prevent foreign bodies from
falling into the motor-fan cowl (see DIN EN 50014/50019) is to
be located on the end of the shaft at the top, e.g. types of
construction IMV3, IMV6 and IMV19 (see Fig. 1). This cover
must not hinder cooling of the motor by its fan.
Should no details be given to the contrary in respect of mode of
operation and tolerances in the EC sample test certificate or on the
rating plate the electric motors have been designed and built for
continuous operation and infrequent repeated start-up with no
excessive heating up when starting. The motors are only to be used
for the given mode of operation shown on the rating plate.
Section A in EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, Part 1) - voltage + 5 %, frequency
+ 2 %, waveform, power-system symmetry - must be complied with in
order to ensure that any increase in temperature remains within the
permitted limits. Greater deviations from the rated values can lead to
non-permissible increases in the temperature of the machine and
must be indicated on the rating plate.
The temperature class of the motor given on the rating plate must
agree with the temperature class of the inflammable gas which may
occur.
Siemens AG
6
FRANÇAIS
organes de transmission (demi-accouplements, poulies, roues
Remarque générale dentées,...) sont les conditions d’un bon comportement vibratoire.
Afin d’assurer la protection des personnes et d’éviter
tout dégât matériel, il est impératif de respecter les indications C’est ainsi qu’il faudra éventuellement procéder à l’équilibrage du
contenues dans les Consignes de sécurité et de mise en moteur avec les éléments de transmission.
service transmise avec le produit et dans tous les
autres éléments de documentation. BG90S/L: Afin que les dimensions des pieds correspondent aux
Toutes les prescriptions et exigences nationales, locales ou normes, les pieds arrières des moteurs de forme IM B3 présentent
spécifiques à l’installation doivent être respectées. deux trous (voir Fig. 10).
Les machines de réalisation spéciale (version, forme de 2.3 Bornier

construction) peuvent différer quant aux détails techniques. En cas BG56...90L: La partie supérieure du bornier peut avec 1LA, 1LP, 1PP
de doute à ce sujet, il est instamment recommandé de contacter être tournée de 4 x 90 degrés.
l’agence Siemens compétente en indiquant la désignation de BG100...160L: Le bornier coulé sur le carter du moteur ne peut pas
type et le numéro de fabrication (No ..., voir plaque signalétique), être tourné.
ou de recourir aux centres de S.A.V. Siemens pour effectuer les Sur les moteurs avec partie supérieure du bornier vissée, la partie
travaux de maintenance. supérieure du bornier peut être tournée de 4 x 90 degrés (Fig. 2 5.90).
1 Description 2.4 Equilibrage, organes de transmission
1.1 Domaine d’application L’emmanchement et l’extraction des organes de transmission (demi-
Utilisation conforme des moteurs standards accouplements, poulies, roues dentées,...) devront se faire avec des
Les moteurs sont exécutés en degré de protection IP55 (degré de dispositifs appropriés (Fig. 7).
protection, voir plaque signalétique). Ils peuvent être installés en
atmosphère poussiéreuse et humide. L’isolation est tropicalisée. Les moteurs en version standard ont fait l’objet d’un
Normalement, aucune mesure de protection particulière contre les équilibrage dynamique avec demi-clavette.
intempéries n’est nécessaire si l’on entrepose correctement les Lors du montage de l’organe de transmission, veiller à ce
moteurs ou si on les monte à l’extérieur selon les règles de l’art. Les que le type d’équilibrage de ce dernier corresponde à celui
moteurs doivent cependant être protégés de l’insolation directe, par du rotor. (Option: F = équilibrage avec clavette entière)
ex. par un auvent ou toit de protection.
Température ambiante : - 30 °C à + 60 °C Equilibrer les organes de transmission conformément à ISO
Altitude : ≤ 1 000 m 1940.
Lors de l’équilibrage avec demi-clavette éliminer l’excédent
1.2 Constitution et mode de fonctionnement de matière visible Tp de la clavette qui fait saillie.
Exécution des moteurs :
Les moteurs 1LA et 1MA sont autorefroidis (ventilateur). Les moteurs Prendre les mesures habituelles de protection des
1PP sont autorefroidis par ventilateur monté sur l’arbre ou ventilés par personnes contre l’accès aux parties en mouvement
un motoventilateur rapporté. Les moteurs 1LA-BG56, 1LP et 1MF sont au niveau des organes de transmission. Lorsqu’un
à refroidissement naturel (pas de ventilateur). moteur est mis en marche sans organes de transmission,
Sur les moteurs normaux, les pieds sont vissés sur le carter du prendre les mesures nécessaires afin d’empêcher que la
moteur ou coulés intégralement. clavette ne soit projetée hors de l’arbre par force centrifuge.
Un déplacement des pieds vissés sur le carter du moteur est
possible, par exemple dans le cadre d’une modification de 2.5 Raccordement électrique
l’emplacement du bornier (voir Fig. 2). Pour ce faire, tarauder le filet Remarque Si les ouvertures de traversée de câbles ou de
dans les tarauds existants du carter du moteur pour fixer les pieds conducteurs de la boîte à borne sont obturées par une membrane de
du moteur. Dans un tel cas, il faut cependant après remettre la surface fabrication, enlever celle-ci à l’aide d’un outil approprié (voir fig. 4).
d’appui des pieds à niveau par rectification et le cas échéant utiliser
des cales. Au cours de l’opération, veiller à ne pas endommager la boîte
Pour les moto-freins, il faut en supplément respecter le mode à bornes, la plaque à bornes et les bornes.
d’emploi des freins! Presse-étoupes pour câbles et conducteurs, voir Fig. 4. La sonde
C.T.P. nécessite un presse-étoupe avec pièce de réduction.
2 Service La boîte à bornes doit être fermée de manière étanche à la
Avant toute intervention sur la machine, s’assurer de poussière et à l’eau.
l’absence de tension. Comparer la tension et la fréquence du réseau aux indications de la
plaque signalétique. Une variation de ± 5 % de la tension ou de ± 2
2.1 Transport, manutention et entreposage % de la fréquence est admissible sans déclassement en puissance.
Pour la manutention, utiliser tous les oeillets de levage Réaliser le branchement et disposer les barrettes de couplage
disponibles sur le moteur. conformément au schéma situé dans la boîte à bornes. Raccorder le
conducteur de protection à la borne .
Les groupes de machines (par ex. motoréducteurs, Les conducteurs raccordés à des bornes à étrier (par ex.
motocompresseurs, etc.) ne doivent être manutentionnés selon DIN 46282) doivent être disposés de telle sorte que
que par les oeillets ou chevilles d’élingage prévus à cet effet. l’étrier repose à la même hauteur de part et d’autre de la vis.
Ils ne doivent pas être levés par les machines individuelles. Lorsqu’un seul conducteur est raccordé, il doit être plié en
La charge limite du dispositif de levage doit être respectée. U autour de la vis ou être muni d’une cosse (voir Fig. 6.1). Il
en est de même du conducteur de protection et le conducteur
Dans des conditions d’entreposage favorables (dans des locaux secs, de terre externe vert-jaune (voir Fig. 6.2).
à l’abri des poussières et des trépidations), remplacer les roulements
à billes s’il s’est écoulé plus de 4 ans entre la livraision et la mise en Couples de serrage des vis et écrous des bornes de la plaque à bornes
service du moteur. Dans des conditions défavorables, cette période (ne concerne pas les borniers), voir Fig. 5.
devra être raccourcie en conséquence. Le chauffage à l’arrêt ne doit jamais fonctionner lorsque le
Si besoin, traiter les surfaces usinées non protégées (les moteur est en service.
surfaces de bride, bout d’arbre) avec un agent anti-corrosif.
Le cas échéant, contrôler la résistance d’isolement des 2.6 Contrôle de la résistance d’isolement
enroulements (voir chap. 2.5). Avant la première mise en service de la machine, après un entreposage
de longue durée ou encore une interruption de service prolongée (env.
2.2 Installation 6 mois), la résistance d’isolement des enroulements doit être mesurée.
Les œillets de levage vissés doivent après montage être serrés Durant la mesure et immédiatement après, les bornes sont
à fond ou bien retirés. sont en partie le siègede tensions dangereuses et ne
Sur les moteurs à axe vertical, l’utilisateur devra prendre les doivent pas être touchées.
mesures nécessaires pour empêcher la pénétration d’eau le long de
l’arbre.
Comportement vibratoire
La précision de l’alignement des machines et l’équilibrage soigné des
Siemens AG
7
FRANÇAIS
Résistance d’isolement REMARQUE Dans la mesure où le moteur doit fonctionner avec

- La résistance minimale d’isolement mesurée par rapport à trous d’écoulement de l’eau de condensation fermés, ces derniers
la masse est de 10 Megaohms pour les enroulements neufs, devront être ouverts de temps à autre pour évacuer l’eau condensée
nettoyés ou remis en état. qui s’est accumulée.
- La résistance critique d’isolement Rkrit se calcule en Le moteur doit être installé de telle manière que les trous d’écoulement
multipliant la tension assignée UN, p.ex. 0,69 kV CA, par la constante de la condensation se trouvent en son point le plus bas.
0,5 Mégohms/kV : Remplacement des roulements, graissage
Rkrit = 0,69 kV * 0,5 Mégohms/kV = 0,345 Mégohms
Mesure Dans des conditions de service normales, avec moteur à axe
La résistance minimale d’isolement des enroulements par horizontal et température d’air de refroidissement de 25 °C ou de
rapport à la masse est mesurée avec une tension d’essai continue de 40 °C, la périodicité de remplacement des roulements [h] est d’environ
500 V. La température des enroulements en cours d’essai doit être 25 °C 40 °C
de 25 ± 15 °C. à 1800/min 40 000 20 000 heures de service
La résistance critique d’isolement doit être mesurée avec une à 3600/min 20 000 10 000 heures de service
tension d’essai continue de 500 V lorsque les enroulements ont atteint REMARQUE Les efforts axiaux et radiaux admisibles (selon
leur température en service. catalogue) ne doivent pas être dépassés.
Pour des raisons de vieillissement de la graisse, le roulement devrait
Contrôle être renouvelé tous les 3 ans, indépendamment du nombre d’heures
Le fait que la résistance d’isolement minimum à la masse de de service.
l’enroulement soit inférieure à 10 méga ohm,, avec enroulement
nouveau ou nettoyé ou moteur remis en état, peut être dû à l’humidité. Dans les conditions d’utilisation particulières, par ex. axe vertical,
Dans ce cas, sécher les enroulements. grandes sollicitations par des vibrations et chocs, inversion fréquent
Après un service prolongé, la valeur de la résistance minimale du sens de marche, etc., la périodicité de remplacement des roulements
d’isolement peut se rapprocher de la valeur de la résistance devra être choisie plus courte.
critique d’isolement. Tant qu’elle ne tombe pas en-dessous de
cette dernière, la machine peut rester en fonctionnement. Dans le cas Les moteurs sont équipés de roulements à billes avec déflecteurs
contraire, la machine doit être arrêtée immédiatement. (version 2ZC3). Les déflecteurs seront en matière résistant aux
Il faudra alors en déterminer la cause, et éventuellement remettre en températures entre -30 °C et +150 °C, par ex. caoutchouc de
état, nettoyer ou sécher les enroulements en totalité ou en partie. polyacryle (ACM).
2.7 Mise en service Type de graisse (moteurs standards) : UNIREX N3 (Esso) ; les
graisses de rechange doivent correspondre à DIN 51825-K3N.
REMARQUE Compatibilité électromagnétique Les graisses spéciales sont spécifiées sur la plaque signalétique ou
Perturbations : des couples très irréguliers (par ex. lors de sur une plaque additionnelle.
l’entraînement d’un compresseur à piston) donnent lieu à un courant
moteur non sinusoïdal dont les harmoniques peuvent polluer Démonter le moteur dans la mesure du nécessaire. L’extraction des
exagérément le réseau d’alimentation et ainsi entraîner des roulements doit être réalisée avec un dispositif approprié (voir Fig. 7).
perturbations électromagnétiques. Nettoyer les portées de paliers.
L’alimentation par convertisseurs statiques entraîne des
perturbations d’intensité variable en fonction du type de convertisseur Porter progressivement les roulements à une température d’environ
(mesures d’antiparasitage, constructeur, ...). Les instructions du 80 à 100 °C et les emmancher sur l’arbre. Eviter les coups secs (par
constructeur quant à la compatibilité électromagnétique doivent être ex. : coups de marteau).
impérativement respectées. Si ce dernier recommande un conducteur Remplacer également tous les éléments d’étanchéité soumis à usure
d’amenée blindé au moteur, la meilleure solution pour un blindage (par exemple bagues d’étanchéité).
efficace sera représentée par une connexion conductrice sur toute Les bagues d’étanchéité sans ressort seront remplacées par des
la surface avec le bornier métallique du moteur (avec vis métalliques). bagues de même type (sans ressort).
Sur les moteurs à sonde incorporée (par ex. sonde C.T.P.), le
convertisseur statique peut provoquer des perturbation sur le câble Dispositif de graissage
de signal de la sonde. Pour les moteurs avec graisseurs, respecter les indications figurant
Tenue aux perturbations: Sur les moteurs à sondes incorporées sur la plaque signalétique ou sur la plaque de graissage. Le graissage
(par ex. sondes C.T.P.), l’utilisateur devra garantir une tenue suffisantes doit avoir lieu lorsque le moteur est en marche.
aux perturbation par le choix judicieux du câble de signal des sondes
(par ex. blindage, raccordement à la masse du moteur) et par la mise
en oeuvre d’un dispositif d’évaluation approprié.
Avant mise en service, s’assurer que toutes les instructions et 4 Moteurs en mode de protection
indications des Consignes de sécurité et de mise en service
et de tous les autres éléments de la documentation ont étés sécurité augmentée EExe 1MA ,
respectées. 1MF
Après montage de la machine, s’assurer que le frein (si
présent) est en bon état de fonctionnement.
Les informations en italique s’appliquent en complément ou
spécialement à ces moteurs.
3 Maintenance Le risque accru dans les zones grisouteuses ou à risque d’explosion
exigent de respecter minutieusement les consignes générales de
Dispositions générales concernant la sécurité
sécurité et de mise en service.
Les machines électriques en mode de protection Ex sont conformes
Avant toute intervention sur le moteur, notamment avant
aux normes des séries EN 60034 (VDE 0530) et EN 50014 - 50020.
d’ouvrir ou d’enlever les recouvrements des parties
Elles ne peuvent être utilisées dans les zones à atmosphère explosi-
actives, il est indispensable de mettre le moteur
ble que dans le cadre des prescriptions édictées par les autorités
hors tension conformément aux règlements de
compétentes auxquelles il revient de constater le risque d’explosion
sécurité. En plus des circuits principaux, ne pas oublier
(classification en zones).
les éventuels circuits auxiliaires et additionnels.
Si un X est ajouté au certificat, il faut tenir compte de certaines
Les "5 règles de sécurité" (par exemple selon DIN VDE
sujétions particulières dans le certificat de contrôle du modèle
0105) sont applicables :
type CE.
- mettre hors tension
Les entrées de câbles seront agréées pour les zones à atmosphère
- condamner les appareils (contre le réenclenchement)
explosible et bloquées de manière à empêcher qu’elles se desserrent
- vérifier l’absence de tension
d’elles-mêmes. Les ouvertures inutilisées seront obturées avec des
- mettre à la terre et court-circuiter
bouchons agréés.
- recouvrir les parties actives voisines ou en barrer l’accès.
Les moteurs 1MA dont le bout d’arbre est dirigé vers le haut (ex.
Ces mesures de sécurité ne doivent être supprimées
formes IMV3, IMV6, IMV19 ; cf. Fig. 1) seront équipés d’un
qu’à l’issue de l’intervention de maintenance et lorsque
recouvrement empêchant les corps étrangers de tomber dans le capot
tous les éléments du moteur sont remontés.
du ventilateur (cf. EN 50014/50019). Ce recouvrement ne doit pas
entraver le refroidissement du moteur par son ventilateur.
A moins de spécifications contraires dans le certificat de contrôle
Siemens AG
8
ESPAÑOL
du modèle type CE et/ou sur la plaque signalétique en ce qui

concerne le mode de service et les tolérances, les machines
Indicaciones generales
Deben observarse los datos y las indicaciones que figuran
électriques sont dimensionnées pour régime continu et démarrages
en las instrucciones de servicio y de seguridad y en
normaux sans répétition fréquente sans montée de température
todas las demás suministradas. ¡Esto es imprescindible
importante en démarrage. Les moteurs ne doivent être utilisés que
para evitar peligros y daños! ¡Además rigen las
sous le mode de service indiqué sur la plaque signalétique.
condiciones y prescripciones nacionales, locales y
Le domaine A de la norme EN 60034-1 - tension ± 5 %, fréquence
específicas de la instalación!
± 2 %, forme d’onde, symétrie du réseau - doit être respecté pour que
l’échauffement reste dans les limites admises. Des écarts plus
Pueden diferir los detalles técnicos de las ejecuciones
importants par rapport aux valeurs assignées peuvent occasionner un
especiales y variantes. En caso de dudas, es perentorio
échauffement exagéré de la machine électrique et ne sont tolérés que
dirigirse al fabricante indicando la designación de tipo y el
s’ils sont spécifiés sur la plaque signalétique.
número de serie (N° ..., v. placa de características) o dejar que
La classe de température figurant sur la plaque signalétique du
el servicio técnico de SIEMENS efectúe los trabajos de conservación.
moteur doit coïncider avec celle du gaz combustible susceptible de se
présenter.
La sélection du dispositif de protection contre les surcharges
1 Descripción
avec déclenchement temporisé en fonction de l’intensité du 1.1 Campo de aplicación
courant doit s’effectuer de façon telle que le temps de Utilización conforme de los motores estándar:
déclenchement qui résulte de la courbe caractéristique du El grado de protección de los motores es IP55 (v. grado de protección
contacteur pour le rapport IA / IN du moteur à protéger, ne soit en la placa de características). Pueden instalarse en ambientes
pas supérieur au temps d’échauffement t E du moteur. Le polvorientos o húmedos. El aislamiento es resistente al clima tropical.
rapport IA / IN ainsi que le temps d’échauffement tE sont Normalmente no es preciso adoptar medidas de protección especiales
indiqués sur la plaque signalétique. L’équipement de contra los efectos climatológicos, si los motores se almacenan o se
protection doit par ailleurs être réglé sur le courant de depositan a la intemperie convenientemente. Sin embargo, deben
dimensionnement. Avec les bobinages en commutation étoilé, protegerse contra irradiaciones solares intensas, p. ej., colocando un
les déclencheurs sont commutés en série avec les branches des techo.
enroulements et réglés sur le courant de dimensionnement x Temperatura ambiente: -30° ... +60°
0,58. Si cette commutation n’est pas possible, il faut prendre Altura de instalación: ≤ 1000 m
d’autres mesures de protection supplémentaires (par exemple
protection thermique). 1.2 Construcción y funcionamiento
Le dispositif de protection sera réglé sur la valeur du courant
Ejecución de los motores
assigné. Si les enroulements sont couplés en triangle, les
Los motores 1LA y 1MA tienen autorrefrigeración (con ventiladores).
déclencheurs seront branchés en série avec les phases
Los motores 1PP tienen refrigeración propia bien sea, p. ej., cuando
d’enroulement et réglés sur 0,58 fois le courant assigné. Si ce
se emplean para impulsar ventiladores, por disponer de un ventilador
montage n’est pas possible, il faut prendre des dispositions
especial montado en el extremo del eje, o por tener ventiladores
additionnelles (par ex. protection thermique du moteur).
independientes. Los motores 1LA-BG56, 1LP y 1MF tienen
En cas de calage du rotor, le dispositif de protection déclenchera en
autorrefrigeración (sin ventiladores).
l’espace du temps tE correspondant à la classe de température
considérée. En los motores con patas, éstas están atornilladas o fijadas por
Les machines électriques pour démarrage difficile (Temps de fundición a la caja del motor.
montée en vitesse > 1,7 x Temps tE) sont à protéger conformément Es posible efectuar un cambio de las patas atornilladas en la caja
au certificat de contrôle du modèle type CE par une surveillance de del motor, por ejemplo para modificar la posición de la caja de bornes
démarrage. (véase la figura 2). Para ello, terrajar posteriormente rosca en los
La protection thermique de la machine par une surveillance taladros existentes en la carcasa motor para fijar los pies del motor.
directe de la température des enroulements est admise si cela est No obstante, a continuación las superficies de apoyo de las patas
certifié et est mentionné sur la plaque signalétique. deberán situarse de nuevo a un nivel por medio de un trabajo posterior
Sur les moteurs à nombre de pôles variables, il est indispensable y, en caso de necesidad, suplementarse.
de prévoir des dispositifs de protection réciproquement verrouillables, ¡En los motores de freno han de observarse además las
séparés pour chaque palier de vitesse. Dans ce contexte, la mise instrucciones de funcionamiento del freno!
en œuvre d’équipements avec certificat de contrôle du modèle type
CE est recommandée. 2 Operación
En Allemagne, l’établissement d’installations électriques dans En los motores sólo se trabajará cuando no estén bajo
des zones à risque d’explosion est réglementée par les normes tensión.
DIN 57165/VDE 0165 et ElexV. Respecter les normes nationales
équivalentes dans les autres pays ! 2.1 Transporte, almacenamiento
La possibilité d’alimentation par convertisseur statique doit Durante el transporte se utilizarán todas las anillas de
être expressément certifiée. On respectera impérativement les suspensión disponibles.
consignes particulières du constructeur. En protection EExe, les
moteurs, convertisseurs et dispositifs de protection doivent être Para transportar grupos de máquinas (p. ej., reductores,
caractérisés comme faisant un tout interdépendant et les paramètres ventiladores adosados, ...) utilizar únicamente las anillas o
d’exploitation autorisés être définis dans le certificat de contrôle du muñones de suspensión previstos. Los grupos de máquinas
modèle type CE commun (VDE 0165). no deben elevarse colgados de las máquinas individuales.
Les pointes de tension générées par les convertisseurs statiques Comprobar la capacidad de carga de estas anillas.
peuvent encore être accentuées par le câble de liaison entre
convertisseur et moteur. Au sein de l’ensemble convertisseur - câbles Los rodamientos se renovarán si han transcurrido más de 4 años bajo
- machine électrique, la valeur maximale des pointes de tension aux condiciones favorables desde el suministro hasta la puesta en
bornes de la machine ne doit pas dépasser la valeur indiquée dans les servicio (conservación en locales secos, exentos de polvo y de
instructions distinctes du constructeur. On veillera aussi à respecter trepidaciones). Si las condiciones son desfavorables, este período
la directive CEM. se acorta considerablemente.
En caso necesario, aplicar anticorrosivo en las superficies mecanizadas
Les réparations seront confiées à un atelier Siemens ou seront y sin protección (superficie de embrido, extremo del eje, ...).
réceptionnées par un expert agréé. Les travaux seront consignés sur Si preciso se comprobará la resistencia de aislamiento de los
une plaquette supplémentaire de réparation. arrollamientos, v. apartado 2.5.
Les pièces de rechange à l’exception des pièces normalisées ou
équivalentes que l’on trouve dans le commerce (par ex. roulements) 2.2 Emplazamiento
ne seront toujours remplacées que par des pièces de rechange Después de la instalación, ¡las armellas de elevación enroscadas
d’origine (voir liste des pièces de rechange). Ceci vaut aussi et tout deben apretarse fuerte o quitarse!
particulièrement pour les joints et les éléments de connexion. En las máquinas de eje vertical, asegurar que no pueda entrar
agua por el lado D del eje.
Estabilidad de marcha: Son condiciones previas para lograr una
marcha estable, con vibraciones reducidas, una alineación exacta de
los motores y un buen equilibrado de los órganos de transmisión. En
caso dado, puede que sea necesario un equilibrado completo del
motor junto con el órgano de transmisión.
Siemens AG
9
ESPAÑOL
BG90S/L: Para observar las medidas de las patas en la forma de Medición

construcción IM B3, los motores llevan agujeros dobles en las patas La resistencia mínima del aislamiento contra masa de los
posteriores (véase la figura 10). arrollamientos se mide con 500 V c.c. Al hacerlo, la temperatura de
los arrollamientos será de 25°C ± 15°C.
2.3 Caja de bornes La resistencia crítica del aislamiento a la temperatura de servicio
BG56...90L: La parte superior de la caja del motor se puede girar en del arrollamiento se mide con 500 V c.c.
4 x 90 grados en 1LA, 1LP, 1PP.
Control
BG100...160L: La caja de bornes fijada por fundición en la caja del Si teniendo un bobinado nuevo o limpiado o un motor reparado que
motor no se puede girar. haya estado depositado o fuera de funcionamiento por cierto tiempo,
En caso de motores en los que la parte superior de la caja de la resistencia mínima del aislamiento del bobinado contra masa
bornes está atornillada ésta puede ser girada por 4 x 90 grados es inferior a 10 megohmios, ello puede ser causado por humedad. En
(fig. 2 - 5.90). este caso se secarán los arrollamientos.
2.4 Equilibrado, órganos de transmisión Tras un largo período de funcionamiento la resistencia mínima del
aislamiento puede bajar a la resistencia crítica. Mientras el valor
Se han de calar y extraer los órganos de transmisión (acoplamientos, medido no sea menor que el calculado para la resistencia crítica la
poleas, ruedas dentadas, ...) por principio con el dispositivo adecuado máquina podrá seguir funcionando. Si se alcanzara un valor menor
(Fig. 7). habría que parar inmediatamente la máquina.
Los rotores están equilibrados dinámicamente con chaveta media Hay que averiguar cuál es el motivo y en su caso reparar los
de manera estándar. arrollamientos o sus partes, limpiarlos o secarlos.
¡Al montar el órgano de transmisión observar que sea adecuado
el tipo de equilibrado! (Opción: F = equilibrado con chaveta entera) 2.7 Puesta en marcha
Los órganos de transmisión deben equilibrarse de acuerdo con INDICACION:
ISO 1940. Compatibilidad electromagnética
Perturbaciones electromagnéticas. Cuando el par es
Cuando se equilibra con media chaveta, mecanizar la parte muy irregular (p. ej., accionamiento de un compresor de
visible de la chaveta Tp que sobresale (v. Fig. 9). émbolo) se fuerza la formación de una corriente distorsionada, cuyas
oscilaciones armónicas pueden influenciar indebidamente a la red así
Se observarán las medidas generales necesarias como también emitir perturbaciones electromagnéticas
para la protección contra contactos involuntarios de inadmisiblemente altas.
los órganos de transmisión.
Para marcha sin órgano de transmisión, asegurar la chaveta Si la alimentación es a través de un convertidor, las perturbaciones
para que no salga proyectada por la fuerza centrífuga. electromagnéticas varían según la ejecución del convertidor (tipo,
medidas de supresión de perturbaciones, fabricante). Es imprescindible
2.5 Conexiones eléctricas observar las indicaciones del fabricante del convertidor relativas a la
compatibilidad electromagnética. Si en éste se recomienda una línea
INDICACION: ¡Si las aberturas para los cables y conductores de conducción apantallada para el motor, este apantallado tiene mejor
in la caja de bornes están tapadas con una «membrana de efecto si está conectada con la caja de bornes de metal del motor con
fundición», retirarla con la herramienta adecuada (v. Fig. 4)! comunicación conductora y gran superfice (atornillamiento de metal).
¡Durante está operación no dañar la caja de bornes, la placa Tratándose de motores con sensores incorporados (p. ej. termistores
de bornes, las conexiones de los cables, etc., en el interior PTC), es posible que surjan tensiones parásitas en el cable del sensor
de dicha caja! debidas al convertidor.
Ver la Fig. 4 respecto a las uniones por tornillo de los cables y Resistencia a interferencias: Tratándose de motores con
conductores. ¡Atornillar una pieza reductora en las conexiones sensores incorporados (p. ej. termistores PTC), recae en el
con termistores PTC! usuario garantizar una resistencia a interferencias suficiente
La caja de bornes deberá sellarse de forma hermética al polvo y al mediante la elección de cables de señales del sensor (en caso dado,
agua. con apantallamiento y conexión igual a la de la línea de alimentación
del motor) y un aparato de evaluación adecuados.
La tensión y frecuencia de la red tienen que ser las indicadas en la
placa de características. Son admisibles desviaciones de tensión de ¡Antes de la puesta en marcha es imprescindible observar los
± 5 % o de frecuencia de ±2 %, sin que por ello disminuya la potencia. datos y las indicaciones que figuran en las instrucciones
Llevar a cabo el empalme y la colocación de los estribos de maniobra relativas a la protección y las de servicio, así como todas las
según el esquema que se encuentra en la caja de bornes. Empalmar demás suministradas!
el conductor de protección al borne marcado con . ¡Después de montar los motores, comprobar el
funcionamiento correcto del freno (caso de existir)!
En los bornes con pisacables (p. ej. según DIN 46282), los
conductores se distribuirán de tal manera que resulte aprox. la
misma altura de conexión en ambos lados. Este tipo de
conexión requiere doblar en U uno de los conductores, o usar un 3 Mantenimiento
terminal (v. Fig. 6.1). Esto rige igualmente para la conexión del Medidas de seguridad
conductor de protección y para el conductor de puesta a tierra Antes de comenzar cualquier trabajo en el motor o en el
exterior, de color amarillo y verde (v. Fig. 6.2). aparato y, especialmente, antes de abrir las cubiertas
de las partes activas, debe desconectarse el motor
Par de apriete para las uniones atornilladas de las conexiones según las prescripciones. Tener en cuenta los
eléctricas - placa de bornes (excepto regleteros), v. Fig. 5. circuitos adicionales o auxiliares que pudieran
No encender la calefacción anticondensaciones durante la haber junto con los circuitos principales.
operación. Las usuales «5 reglas de seguridad» según, p. ej., DIN VDE
0105 son:
2.6 Control de la resistencia del aislamiento - Desconectar
Antes de la primera puesta en marcha del motor, tras largos períodos - Asegurar contra la reconexión
de almacenamiento o de parada (aprox. 6 meses) hay que medir la - Comprobar si está libre de tensión
resistencia del aislamiento de los arrollamientos. - Poner a tierra y cortocircuitar
Durante la medición y seguidamente después de ella, los bornes - Cubrir o delimitar las partes contiguas que estén bajo tensión.
a veces están sometidos a tensiones peligrosas, por lo que no Estas medidas se suprimirán sólo cuando los trabajos de
deben tocarse. mantenimiento estén terminados y el motor esté
completamente montado.
Resistencia del aislamiento
- La resistencia mínima del aislamiento contra masa de un
arrollamiento nuevo, limpio o reparado es de 10 Megaohmios. INDICACION: Si los motores tienen cerrados los orificios de salida
- En primer lugar se calcula la resistencia del aislamiento del agua de condensación deberán abrirse de cuando en cuando para
crítica Rcrít. Dicho cálculo se efectúa multiplicando la tensión desalojar el agua acumulad.
asignada U N, p. ej. 0,69 kV c.c por el factor constante Las aberturas para el agua de condensación siempre deberán
(0,5 Megaohmios/kV): situarse en la parte más baja del motor.
Rcrít = 0,69 kV * 0,5 Megaohmios/kV = 0,345 Megaohmios.
Siemens AG
10
ESPAÑOL
Cambio de rodamientos, tipo de grasa Mayores desviaciones de los valores calculados pueden aumentar
El plazo para el cambio de los rodamientos [h] bajo condiciones indebidamente el recalentamiento de la máquina eléctrica y han de
normales de servicio, montaje horizontal del motor, temperatura del figurar en la placa de características.
medio refrigerante y velocidades del motor de
La clase térmica del motor, señalada en la placa de características,
25°C 40°C debe corresponder con la clase térmica de los gases combustibles
... 1800/min es aprox. 40.000 h es aprox. 20.000 h que pudieran desprenderse.
... 3600/min es aprox. 20.000 h es aprox. 10.000 h
INDICACION: ¡No sobrepasar las fuerzas axiales y transversales El dispositivo de protección de corriente excesiva con activación
admisibles indicadas en el catálogo! retardada en función de la corriente deberá elegirse de tal manera
La grasa vieja deberá renovarse aprox. cada 3 años, que el tiempo de activación, que se puede ver en la curva característica
independientemente de las horas de servicio. del interruptor correspondiente a la relación IA / IN del motor a
proteger, no sea superior al tiempo de calentamiento tE del motor. La
Con condiciones de servicio especiales, p. ej. cuando la máquina relación IA / IN así como el tiempo de calentamiento tE se pueden ver
está emplazada verticalmente, con servicio continuo o a gran velocidad, en la placa de características. Además, el dispositivo de protección
grandes cargas por vibraciones y golpes, inversiones de sentido de ha de ajustarse para la corriente de medición. En las bobinas con
giro frecuentes, etc., los plazos indicados se reducen conexión en triángulo, los disparadores se conectan en serie con
considerablemente. los ramales de bobina y se ajustan en 0,58 veces de una corriente
de medición. Si no es posible esta conexión, será necesario tomar
Los motores tienen rodamientos radiales rígidos con un disco de medidas de protección adicionales (p.ej. protección térmica de la
cierre (ejecución 2ZC3). Estos discos deberán resistir máquina).
temperaturas desde -30°C hasta +150°C, p. ej. ser de caucho
poliacrílico (ACM). Al bloquearse el rotor, el dispositivo de protección debe disparar en
Tipo de grasa en las máquinas estándar: UNIREX N3 (marca el del tiempo tE indicado para la respectiva clase térmica.
ESSO); las grasas alternativas deben satisfacer DIN 51825-K3N. Deberán protegerse las máquinas eléctricas para un arranque difícil
Las grasas especiales se indican en la placa de características o en (tiempo de aceleración > 1,7 x tE-) de acuerdo con las indicaciones
una aparte. del certificado de control de muestras constructivas de la CE por
Despiezar el motor tanto como sea necesario. Extraer el rodamiento medio de una supervisión del arranque.
con el dispositivo adecuado (v. Fig. 7). Limpiar de impurezas al
alojamiento. La protección térmica de la máquina por vigilancia directa de la
temperatura del arrollamiento se admite cuando figura certificada y
Calentar uniformemente los rodamientos a aprox. 80-100°C y calarlos. señalada en la placa de características.
Evitar golpes fuertes (p. ej. con un martillo, ...).
También se renovarán los elementos de junta deteriorados (p. ej. En los motores de polaridad conmutable, son necesarios, para cada
los anillos de cierre radial del eje, etc.). fase de número de revoluciones, unos dispositivos de protección
Si los anillos de cierre radial del eje no tuvieran muelles, tampoco mutuamente enclavados. Se recomiendan los dispositivos del
se pondrán muelles en los nuevos. certificado de control de muestras constructivas de la CE.
Dispositivo de reengrase ¡En Alemania, al montar instalaciones eléctricas en áreas
En los motores con dispositivo de reengrase, se observarán las amenazadas por explosiones se remite al contenido en DIN 57165/
indicaciones en la placa de características. ¡Efectuar el reengrase con VDE 0165 y ElexV! ¡En el extranjero, se deben observar las
el motor en marcha! disposiciones respectivas del país!
Para el modo de protección del encendido EExe deberán señalarse,
como conjunto, el motor, el convertidor y los dispositivos de protección
y establecerse los datos de funcionamiento admisibles en el
4 Motores con tipo de protección - certificado común de control de muestras constructivas de la CE
(VDE 0165).
mayor seguridad EExe 1MA, 1MF
Los valores punta de tensión generados por el convertidor pueden
¡Para estos motores rigen de forma complementaria o especial las variar de forma inapropiada debido al cable de conexión instalado
informaciones en letra cursiva! entre el convertidor y la máquina eléctrica. En el sistema convertidor-
cable-máquina el valor máximo de las puntas de tensión en los bornes
El mayor peligro en áreas amenazadas por explosiones y grisú de conexión de la máquina no debe superar el valor señalado en las
requiere una observación especialmente cuidadosa de las indicaciones indicaciones específicas del fabricante. Además, se debe cumplir la
generales para la seguridad y puesta en marcha. directiva EMV (de compatibilidad electromagnética).
Las máquinas eléctricas protegidas contra explosiones corresponden Las reparaciones han de efectuarse en los talleres de Siemens o
a las normas de las series EN60034 (VDE 0530) y EN 50014 - 50020 ser sometidas a la aprobación por un perito oficialmente
y pueden ser utilizadas en áreas amenazadas por explosiones sólo reconocido. Los trabajos realizados deben señalarse mediante
con la autorización de las autoridades de supervisión competentes una placa adicional de reparación.
que determinan el peligro de explosión (distribución por zonas).
Como piezas de recambio, con excepción de las piezas normalizadas,
Si el certificado está completado con una X, deberán observarse usuales en el comercio y de idéntica calidad (p.ej. rodamientos), sólo
las exigencias especiales del certificado de control de la se deben utilizar piezas originales (véase listas de recambios): esto
muestra constructiva de la CE. rige en especial para juntas y piezas de empalme.
Los conductos de los cables deben estar autorizados para el uso
en áreas Ex y asegurados contra el autoaflojamiento. Las aberturas
no utilizadas deben cerrarse con tapones autorizados.
En el extremo superior del eje, p.ej. en los modelos IMV3, IMV6,
IMV19 (véase fig. 1), se debe prever en los motores 1MA una
cubierta para evitar la entrada de objetos extraños en la tapa del
ventilador del motor (véase DIN EN 50014/50019). Esta cubierta
no debe impedir la refrigeración del motor por el ventilador.
Si en el certificado de muestra constructiva de la CE o en la placa
indicadora de potencia no existen otros datos sobre el modo de
funcionamiento y las tolerancias, las máquinas eléctricas están
diseñadas para el funcionamiento permanente y para arranques
normales que no se repitan frecuentemente, en los que no se produce
ningún calor de arranque especial. Los motores sólo deberán
utilizarse para el modo de funcionamiento señalado en la placa
indicadora de potencia.
La gama A en EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, parte 1) (voltaje Ò 5%,
frecuencia Ò 2%, forma de curva, simetría de la red) debe cumplirse
para mantener el recalentamiento dentro de los límites admisibles.
Siemens AG
11
ITALIANO
Avvertenze generali BG90S/L: i motori sono dotati di fori doppi sui piedi posteriori in modo
Onde evitare pericoli e danni è assolutamente necessario da rispettare le dimensioni standardizzate dei piedi per la forma di
attenersi alle indicazioni e istruzioni fornite nell’opuscolo costruzione B3 (vedi la fig. 10).
allegato „Avvertenze per la sicurezza e la messa in 2.3 Cassetta terminale
servizio“ e in altre istruzioni analoghe.
Attenersi inoltre alle norme e ai requisiti nazionali, locali e BG56...90L: nel caso di 1LA, 1LP, 1PP la parte superiore della
specifici dell’impianto! morsettiera può essere girata di 4 x 90 gradi.
Le esecuzioni speciali e le varianti costruttive possono BG100...160L: la morsettiera fusa sulla carcassa motore non è
differire in alcuni particolari tecnici da quanto descritto. In girevole.
caso di dubbio si prega di rivolgersi al costruttore indicando il tipo Nei motori con cassetta terminale in alto avvitata questa può
e il numero di matricola oppure di far eseguire i lavori di essere girata 4 x di 90 gradi (fig. 2 – 5.90).
manutenzione da un centro di assistenza Siemens.
2.4 Equilibratura, elementi di trasmissione
1 Descrizione Per calettare o asportare gli elementi di trasmissione (giunti, pulegge,
1.1 Campo di impiego ventilatore ecc.) deve essere utilizzato un utensile apposito (fig. 7).
Uso appropriato dei motori standard: I rotori standard sono equilibrati dinamicamente con mezza
I motori sono costruiti nel grado di protezione IP55 (grado di protezione: chiavetta.
ved. targhetta dei dati) e possono essere installati in ambienti polverosi Quando si montano elementi di trasmissione occorre
o umidi. Il tipo di isolamemento è resistente ai climi tropicali. Se prestare attenzione al tipo di equilibratura corrispondente!
l’immagazzinaggio o l’installazione all’aperto sono effettuati in modo (Option: F = equilibratura con chiavetta intera).
appropriato, non devono essere prese misure supplementari contro
gli influssi climatici. I motori devono essere tuttavia tenuti al riparo da Gli elementi di trasmissione devono essere equilibrati
raggi solari intensi ad es. prevedendo un tettuccio di protezione. conformemente a ISO 1940!
Temperatura ambiente -30° ... +60° Quando si effettua l’equilibratura con mezza chiavetta, la
Altitudine di installazione ≤ 1000 m parte di chiavetta visibilmente in esubero Tp deve essere
asportata (vedi fig. 9).
1.2 Costruzione e principio di funzionamento Osservare le misura di sicurezza necessarie per la
Esecuzione dei motori protezione dai contatti degli elementi di trasmissione.
I motori 1LA ad e 1MA sono autoventilati (per mezzo di ventole). I Se il motore viene messo in servizio senza elemento
motori 1PP sono autoventilati, ad esempio se fungono da motori a di trasmissione è indispensabile assicurare la chiavetta
ventilatori, da ventilatori speciali che vanno montati sui rotori, oppure onde evitare che venga espulsa.
per mezzo di ventilatori esterni. I motori 1LP e 1MF hanno ventilazione
naturale (senza ventilatore).
2.5 Collegamento elettrico
Nei motori montati su piedi i piedi d’appoggio sono avvitati o
Avvertenza: se i fori di passaggio per cavi e conduttori nella
applicati mediante fusione alla carcasse dei motori.
cassetta terminale sono otturati da una pellicola derivante dalla
Un riposizionamento dei piedi avvitati sulla carcassa di montaggio, ad
colata, asportarla con un utensile idoneo (vedi fig. 4).
esempio per modificare la posizione delle morsettiere (vedi fig. 2), è
possibile. A questo scopo maschiare i filetti nei fori esistenti sulla Attenzione a non danneggiare la cassetta terminale, la
scatola del motore per fissare la base del motore. morsettiera, i collegamenti per i cavi e l’interno della cassetta
Tuttavia, successivamente, le superfici d’appoggio devono essere terminale stessa!
riportate, mediante rilavorazione, in un livello e, se necessario, Per i collegamenti a vite per cavi e conduttori vedere la fig. 4. Quando
bisogna aggiungere appositi strati di compensazione. si collegano termistori PTC deve essere inserito anche un
Nel caso dei motori di frenatura bisogna anche rispettare il Manuale riduttore!
d’uso dei freni! La cassetta terminale non deve consentire la penetrazione
di liquidi o polvere.
2 Servizio La tensione e la frequenza di rete devono corrispondere ai dati indicati
Eseguire i lavori sul motore solo in assenza di tensione. sulla targhetta dei dati. Sono consentite oscillazioni di tensione di
± 5% e oscillazioni di frequenza del ± 2% senza che venga
pregiudicata la potenza del motore. Il collegamento e la disposizione
2.1 Trasporto, magazzinaggio delle staffe devono essere effettuati come indicato nello schema di
Per il trasporto devono essere utilizzare tutti gli anelli appositi! collegamento contenuto nella cassetta terminale. Collegare il conduttore
di protezione al morsetto di terra .
Per trasportare parti di macchina (ad es. parti applicate Nel caso di morsetti di collegamento con staffe terminali (ad
sui riduttori o sulle soffianti) utilizzare solo gli appositi es. sec. DIN 46282) i conduttori devono essere distribuiti in
perni e anelli di sollevamento. Non è consentito modo tale che su entrambi i lati l’altezza dei morsetti risulti
sollevare tali parti agganciandole al corpo del motore. all’incirca uguale. Questo tipo di collegamento implica che i
Accertarsi che la capacità del dispositivo di sollevamento sia singoli conduttori vengano piegati a U o che venga utilizzato
sufficiente per il peso del motore. un capocorda (vedi fig. 6.1). Altrettanto vale anche per il
Qualora tra la consegna del motore e la messa in servizio dello stesso collegamento del conduttore di protezione e per il conduttore
trascorrano più di 4 anni in presenza di condizioni ambientali favorevoli di messa a terra esterno (vedi fig. 6.2) in verde-giallo.
(magazzinaggio in locali asciutti, esenti da polvere e vibrazioni) si Le coppie di serraggio dei collegamenti a vite per i collegamenti elettrici
consiglia di sostituire i cuscinetti a rotolamento. In presenza di sono indicate nella fig. 5.
condizioni ambientali sfavorevoli la sostituzione deve avvenire prima.
Durante l’esercizio la scaldiglia non deve essere attiva.
Eventualmente si devono trattare le superfici lavorate non protette
(superfici di accoppiamento, estremità degli alberi …) con 2.6 Verifica della resistenza di isolamento
anticorrosivi.
Prima di procedere alla 1° messa in servizio del motore, dopo lunghi
Può essere inoltre necessario controllare la resistenza di isolamento tempi di magazzinaggio e di fermo macchina (circa 6 mesi) si raccomanda
degli avvolgimenti (vedi par. 2.5). di ricalcolare la resistenza di isolamento degli avvolgimenti.
Durante e immediatamente dopo la misura è presente sui
2.2 Installazione morsetti una tensione pericolosa. I morsetti non devono
Dopo l’installazione i golfari avvitati si devono fissare bene o pertanto essere toccati.
rimuovere!
Se il motore viene installato in posizione verticale l’utente deve Resistenza di isolamento
accertarsi che non possano penetrare liquidi lungo l’albero. - La resistenza di isolamento minima di avvolgimenti nuovi,
Moto dolce: per garantire un funzionamento stabile e privo di scosse puliti o sottoposti a manutenzione è pari a 10 MegaOhm.
è indispensabile che i giunti siano ben allineati e che gli elementi di - La resistenza di isolamento critica Rcrit deve essere calcolata.
trasmissione (giunto, pulegge, ventilatore ecc.) siano ben equilibrati. Il calcolo viene eseguito moltiplicando la tensione nominale UN, ad
Può essere eventualmente necessario equilibrare completamente il es. AC 0,69 kV per il fattore costante (0,5 MegaOhm/kV):
motore con gli elementi di trasmissione. Rkrit = 0,69 kV * 0,5 MegaOhm/kV = 0,345 MegaOhm
Siemens AG
12
ITALIANO
Misura Sostituzione dei cuscinetti, tipo di grasso

La resistenza di isolamento minima degli avvolgimenti verso Intervallo per la sostituzione dei cuscinetti (h) con condizioni di
massa viene misurata con 500 V tensione continua. La temperatura funzionamento normali, posizione orizzontale del motore:
degli avvolgimenti deve essere pari a 25°C ±15°C. 25°C 40°C
La resistenza di isolamento critica deve essere misurata con 500 ... 1800/min ca. 40 000 h ca. 20 000 h
V tensione continua con temperatura di esercizio degli avvolgimenti. ... 3600/min ca. 20 000 h ca. 10 000 h
Avvertenza: non devono essere superate le forze assiali e trasversali
Verifica indicate nel catalogo!
Nel caso di avvolgimento nuovo o pulito o motore riparato, che è stato Indipendentemente dalle ore di esercizio i cuscinetti a rotolamento
depositato per molto tempo o è stato fermo, la resistenza minima vanno sostituiti almeno ogni 3 anni a causa dell’invecchiamento del
di isolamento dell’avvolgimento contro la massa inferiore a 10 grasso.
MegaOhm può essere la causa dell’umidità. È pertanto necessario
asciugare gli avvolgimenti. In presenza di condizioni di esercizio particolari (ad es. installazione
verticale del motore, elevate sollecitazioni da urti e vibrazioni, frequenti
Dopo un periodo prolungato di esercizio la resistenza minima di inversioni di marcia ecc.) i tempi di esercizio consentiti si riducono
isolamento può diminuire e raggiungere il valore critico. Fintanto sensibilmente.
che il valore misurato non risulta inferiore al valore critico calcolato,
il motore può essere mantenuto in servizio. Non appena il valore I motori sono dotati di cuscinetti a sfere scanalate con rondelle di
misurato scende al di sotto del valore critico, il motore deve essere copertura (esecuzione 2ZC3). Il materiale di dette rondelle deve
messo fuori servizio. essere resistente a temperature comprese nel campo tra -30°C e
Ricercare la causa della diminuzione del valore di resistenza e, se +150°C. (ad es. caucciù poliacrilico ACM).
necessario, asciugare, pulire o sottoporre a manutenzione gli
avvolgimenti o parte degli stessi. Tipi di grasso per macchine standard: UNIREX N3 (Esso). Altri tipi
di grasso devono essere conformi alle norme DIN 51825-K3N.
2.7 Messa in servizio I tipi di grasso particolari devono essere specificati sulla targhetta.
Avvertenza: compatibilità elettromagnetica
Emissioni di disturbi: in presenza di forti differenze tra i Smontare il motore quanto necessario per accedere ai cuscinetti.
momenti torcenti (ad es. azionamento di un compressore a Estrarre i cuscinetti a rotolamento con un dispositivo idoneo (vedi fig.
stantuffo) viene indotta una corrente del motore non 7). Asportare la sporcizia depositatasi!
sinusoidale, le cui armoniche possono influire negativamente
Riscaldare uniformemente i cuscinetti ad una temperatura pari a circa
sulla rete e di conseguenza essere causa di interferenze non
80-100°C e calettarli. Evitare i colpi (ad es. martellate).
ammesse.
Nel caso di alimentazione tramite convertitore si possono Se necessario sostituire gli elementi di tenuta usurati (ad es. rondelle
verificare a seconda del tipo di convertitore (tipo, misure antidisturbo, dell’albero).
costruttore) interferenze di diversa intensità. Attenersi rigorosamente Se il motore è dotato di rondelle di tenuta dell’albero senza molla,
alle indicazioni del costruttore relative alle norme EMC. Se si consiglia anche la nuova rondella andrà montata senza molla.
una linea di alimentazione del motore schermata, la schermatura
raggiunge il massimo dell’efficacia se viene collegata elettricamente Dispositivo di lubrificazione
per grandi superfici sulla scatola terminale del motore (con avvitamenti Per i motori dotati di tale dispositivo è indispensabile osservare
di metallo). Sui motori dotati di sensori (ad es. termistori PTC) possono le indicazioni sulla targhetta. La lubrificazione deve essere eseguita
verificarsi interferenze sui conduttori dei sensori stessi dovute al mentre il motore è in funzione.
convertitore.
Resistenza ai disturbi: nel caso di motori dotati di sensori (ad
es. termistori PTC) è l’utente stesso che deve garantire una resistenza 4 Motori con tipo di protezione
ai disturbi sufficiente scegliendo opportunamente i cavi di segnale
dei sensori (event. schermatura, collegamento analogo ai conduttori
antideflagrante - sicurezza aumentata
motore) e dello strumento di analisi dei valori. EExe 1MA, 1MF
Prima di procedere alla messa in servizio del motore si raccomanda Per questi motori valgono a titolo integrativo o specifico le informazioni
di leggere le istruzioni e indicazioni contenute nell’opuscolo allegato in corsivo!
„Avvertenze relative alla sicurezza e alla messa in servizio“ L’elevato grado di pericolo nelle aree con pericolo di esplosione e di
e in eventuali altre istruzioni. deflagrazione richiede il rispetto scrupoloso delle avvertenze di
sicurezza e di installazione.
Una volta terminato il montaggio del motore accertarsi del Le macchine elettriche protette contro le esplosioni rispondono alle
buon funzionamento del freno (se presente). norme delle serie EN 60034 (VDE 0530) ed EN 50014 - 50020. Esse
possono essere impiegate in aree con pericolo di esplosione solo in
conformità con le disposizioni dell’ente di sorveglianza competente, al
3 Manutenzione quale spetta il compito di definire il rischio di esplosione (suddivisione
Misure di sicurezza in zone).
Prima di iniziare qualsiasi lavoro sulla macchina, e Se la certificazione è integrata con un X, allora vanno
soprattutto prima di asportare le coperture di parti osservate le particolari esigenze richieste dalla certificazione
attive, è assolutamente necessario scollegare il motore CE della verifica del prototipo.
come prescritto. Prestare attenzione non solo ai circuiti Gli ingressi dei cavi devono essere omologati per la zona Ex ed
principali ma anche a quelli ausiliari o supplementari. Le essere assicurati in modo che non possano allentarsi da soli. Le
cinque regole di sicurezza secondo DIN VDE 0105 sono: aperture non utilizzate devono essere chiuse mediante tappi omologati.
- disinserire la macchina In caso di estremità d’albero superiore, per es. nella forma costruttiva
- proteggerla da reinserzioni accidentali IMV3, IMV6, IMV19 (v. fig. 1), si deve applicare una chiusura per i
- accertarsi dell’assenza di tensione motori 1MA che impedisca la caduta di corpi estranei all’interno della
- effettuare la messa a terra e cortocircuitare scatola del ventilatore del motore (v. DIN EN 50014/50019). Essa non
- coprire o separare parti sotto tensione situate nelle vicinanze deve impedire il raffreddamento del motore con il suo ventilatore.
Le misure sopracitate devono essere osservate fino a Se nella certificazione CE della verifica del prototipo e/o sulla
quando i lavori di manutenzione non sono stati portati a targhetta motore non vengono fatte indicazioni diverse per quanto
termine e il motore non è stato rimontato completamente. riguarda la modalità operativa e le tolleranze, i macchinari elettrici
sono dimensionati per il funzionamento continuo e per avviamenti
Avvertenza: nell’esecuzione con aperture per la condensa chiuse normali senza frequente ripetizione e quindi senza notevole
(se presente) è indispensabile aprire periodicamente dette aperture riscaldamento in fase di avviamento. I motori possono essere
in modo da consentire la fuoriuscita dell’acqua eventualmente utilizzati solo nella modalità operativa indicata sulla targhetta
accumulatasi. motore.
Affinché il riscaldamento resti nei limiti ammessi, è indispensabile
Le aperture per la condensa devono essere sempre collocate nella che vengano rispettati i parametri per la zona A specificati in En
parte inferiore del motore. 60034-1 (VDE 0530), parte 1): tensione ± 5%, frequenza ± 2%, forma
d’onda, simmetria di rete. Scostamenti maggiori dai valori nominali
possono aumentare in modo non ammesso il riscaldamento della
macchina elettrica e devono essere indicati sulla targhetta dei dati.
Siemens AG
13
ITALIANO SVENSKA
La classe di temperatura del motore indicata sulla targhetta dei

dati deve coincidere con la classe di temperatura del gas Allmänna anvisningar
infiammabile che può eventualmente prodursi. Följ alla uppgifter och anvisningar i den levererade
Il salvamotore ad intervento ritardato va scelto in modo che säkerhets- och idrifttagandeinstruktionen och all annan
il tempo di intervento che si può desumere dalla linea dokumentation.
caratteristica dell’interruttore per il rapporto IA / IN del motore För undvikande av risker och skador är detta ett
da proteggere, non sia superiore al tempo di riscaldamento oundgängligt krav!
tE del motore. Il rapporto IA / IN e il tempo di riscaldamento tE Dessutom gäller givetvis alla nationella, lokala och
sono indicati sulla targa di identificazione. Inoltre il salvamotore systemspecifika bestämmelser och krav!.
va regolato sulla corrente di dimensionamento. Negli avvolgimenti Specialutförande och varianter kan avvika i tekniska detaljer!
a triangolo le bobine vengono collegate in serie con gli avvolgimenti Tag därför kontakt med tillverkaren vid eventuella oklarheter och
e regolati su un valore pari a 0,58 volte la corrente di dimensionamento. uppge därvid typbeteckning och fabrikationsnummer (No ..., se
Se questo collegamento non fosse possibile, sono necessarie märkskylten) eller låt en av Siemens servicecentraler utföra
ulteriori misure di protezione (ad esempio protezione termica della reparationen.
macchina).
Quando il rotore si blocca, il dispositivo di protezione deve
intervenire entro il tempo tE specificato per la rispettiva classe di 1 Beskrivning
temperatura. 1.1 Användningsområde
I macchinari elettrici per avvio pesante (tempo di avviamento > 1,7 Ändamålsenlig användning av standardmotorerna:
x tempo tE) vanno protetti in conformità con quanto indicato nella Motorerna är utförda i kapslingsklass IP55 (kapslingsklass se
certificazione CE del modello di costruzione mediante un monitoring märkskylten). De kan installeras i dammig och fuktig omgivning.
dell’avviamento. Isoleringen gäller även för tropikerna. Vid sakkunnig lagring eller
La protezione termica della macchina tramite sorveglianza diretta sakkunning uppställning utomhus är normalt inga speciella
della temperatura dell’avvolgimento è ammessa se ciò è certificato e skyddsåtgärder nödvändiga på motorerna mot vädrets inflytande.
specificato sulla targhetta dei dati. Motorerna måste dock skyddas mot intensiv solstrålning t. ex. med ett
Nel caso dei motori a doppia polarità, per ogni livello di velocità skyddstak.
servono dei dispositivi di protezione separati con interblocco
reciproco. Si consigliano dei dispositivi dotati di certificazione CE Omgivningstemperatur: -30ºC ... +60ºC
della verifica del prototipo. Uppställningshöjd: ≤ 1000 m
In Germania si rimanda alle norme DIN 57165/VDE 0165 ed
ElexV per la costruzione di impianti in zona a rischio di
esplosione. Negli altri paesi si devono rispettare le
1.2 Konstruktion och funktionssätt
corrispondenti normative nazionali. Motorutföranden:
L’esercizio sul convertitore deve essere espressamente Motorerna 1LA och 1MA har egen kylning (med fläkt). Motorerna 1PP
certificato. Le avvertenze specifiche del costruttore devono essere har egen kylning, antingen - t.ex. när de används som fläktmotorer -
assolutamente rispettate. Per il tipo di protezione dell’accensione av en specialfläkt som sitter på axeltappen eller av en extern fläkt.
EExe il motore, l’inverter e i dispositivi di protezione devono essere Motorerna 1LA-BG56, 1LP och 1MF har självkylning (utan fläkt).
identificati come appartenenti insieme e i dati operativi ammessi På fotmotorer är fötterna fastskruvade på motorhuset resp.
devono essere definiti nella comune certificazione CE della verifica fastgjutna.
del prototipo (VDE 0165). Det är emellertid möjligt att flytta de fastskruvade fötterna på
I picchi di tensione generati dal convertitore possono variare motorhuset, t. ex. För att förändra uttagslådans läge (se fig. 2). Skär
in funzione del cavo di collegamento installato tra convertitore e på efterhand gängor i de borrhålen på motorhuset för att kunna fästa
macchina elettrica. Nel sistema convertitore-cavo-macchina elettrica motorfötterna. I detta fall måste man emellertid bearbeta fötternas ytor
il valore massimo dei picchi di tensione sui morsetti della macchina så, att de har har samma nivå igen. Eventuellt kan man även använda
non deve superare il valore specificato nelle avvertenze del mellanlägg.
costruttore. Deve essere inoltre rispettata la direttiva ECM. Vad det gäller bromsmotorer är det viktigt att även beakta
bruksanivsningen för bromsarna!
Le riparazioni devono essere eseguite presso la Siemens oppure
essere certificate da un tecnico iscritto all’albo. Gli interventi
devono essere segnalati da una targhetta di riparazione supplementare.
Tutte le parti di ricambio - tranne i componenti omologati, equivalenti 2 Drift
e regolarmente commercializzati (per es. i cuscinetti volventi) -
Alla arbeten får utföras endast när anläggningen är
devono essere originali (v. lista dei ricambi); questo vale in particolare
utan elektrisk spänning.
anche per le guarnizioni e i connettori.
2.1 Transport, lagring
Vid transport skall alla förefintliga lyftöglor på motorn användas!
För transport av maskinsatser (t.ex. växel-,

fläkttillsatser, ...) använd endast de för detta ändamål
avsedda lyftöglorna eller -tapparna! Maskinsatser får
inte lyftas genom att hängas på den enskilda maskinen!
Respektera lyftanordningens bärkraft!
Rullagren bör förnyas när tiden från leveransen till motorns idrifttagande
vid gynnsamma villkor (lagring i torra, damm- och vibrationsfria
lokaler) uppgår till mer än 4 år. Vid ogynnsamma villkor reduceras
denna tid väsentligt.
Behandla eventuellt oskyddade och bearbetade ytor (flänsytor,

axeltappar ...) med ett korrosionsskyddsmedel.
Vid behov skall isolationsmotståndet hos lindningen kontrolleras,

se avsnitt 2.5.
2.2 Installation
Drag åt eller ta bort iskruvade lyftöglor efter uppställningen.
Vid lodrät motoruppställning måste förhindras att vätska tränger in
längs axeln på användarsidan.
Lugn gång: En noggrann uppriktning av kopplingen liksom ett väl
balanserat drivdon (koppling, remskivor, fläkt, ...) är förutsättning för
en lugn gång med lite vibrationer. Ibland kan en fullständig balansering
av motorn mot drivdonet vara nödvändig.
Siemens AG
14
SVENSKA
BG90S/L: Motorerna i serie IM B3 har dubbla hål på fötterna baktill (se Kontroll
fig. 10) för att svara mot de standardiserade fotmåtten. Om lindningens minimala isoleringsmotstånd mot massa är
mindre än 10 megaohm på en ny eller rengjord lindning resp. efter en
2.3 Uttagslåda motorreparation och efter att motorn har lagrats eller stått stilla en
BG56...90L: Överdelen på uttagslådan kan svängas 4x90 grader hos längre tid kan detta beror på fukt. Lindningarna skall då torkas.
modellerna 1LA, 1LP, 1PP. Efter längre driftstid kan det minsta isolationsmotståndet sjunka
BG100...160L: Den på motorhuset fastgjutna uttagslådan kan till det kritiska isolationsmotståndet. Så länge det mätta värdet
ej svängas. inte underskrider det beräkande värdet för det kritiska
På motorer med påskruvad uttagslåda-överdel kan man vrida isolationsmotståndet får motorn köras vidare. Underskrids detta
den 4 x 90 grader (fig. 2 – 5.90). värde skall motorn kopplas från.
Orsaken härför skall fastställas, eventuellt skall lindningarna eller
2.4 Balansering, drivdon delar av lindningarna repareras, rengöras eller torkas.
Använd alltid lämpligt verktyg vid på- och avdragning av drivdon 2.7 Idrifttagande
(kopplingar, remskivor, kugghjul, ...) (fig. 7)
OBSERVERA: Elektromagnetisk tolerans
I standardutförandet är rotorn dynamiskt balanserad med Utsändande av störningar: Vid mycket ojämna
halv kil. vridmoment (t.ex. drift av en kolvkompressor) tvingas en
Ge akt på balanseringstypen då drivdonet monteras! inte sinusformad motorström fram, vars översvängningar
(Option: F = balansering med hel kil) kan förorsaka en otillåten inverkan på nätet och därmed
Drivdonen skall balanseras enligt ISO 1940! otillåtna utsändningar av störningar.
Vid matning med omformare uppträder allt efter utförande på
Vid balansering med halv kil skall den synbara delen av kilen omformaren (typ, avstörningsåtgärder, tillverkare) olika starka
som sticker ut TP slipas ned (se fig. 9). utsändningar av störningar. Omformartillverkarens anvisningar för
EMV skall ovillkorligen respekteras. Om en avskärmad matarledning
Vidtag sedvanliga åtgärder för beröringsskydd av rekommenderas för motorn så är denna avskärmning som mest
drivdonen. effektiv, om den förbinds ledande med en stor yta på motorns
Om en motor tas i drift utan drivdon, så måste kilen uttagslåda av metall (med hjälp av en metall-skruvkoppling). Hos
fixeras så att den inte kan kastas ut. motorer med inmonterade sensorer (t.ex. PTC-termistor) kan på grund
av omformaren störspänningar uppträda i sensorledningen.
2.5 Elektrisk anslutning Störningsstabilitet: För motorer med inmonterade sensorer
OBSERVERA: Är öppningarna för kabel och ledningar i (t.ex. PTC-termistor) måste användaren själv sörja för en tillräcklig
uttagslådan slutna med en „gjutskorpa“ så skall denna slås upp med störningsstabilitet genom lämpligt val av sensorsignalledning
ett lämpligt verktyg (se fig. 4). (eventuellt med avskärmning, förbindning som vid motortilledningen)
och interpretationsinstrument.
Härvid får inte uttagslådan, kopplingsplinten, Före idrifttagandet skall alla uppgifter och anvisningar i den
kabelanslutningarna, ... inuti uttagslådan skadas! levererade säkerhets- och idrifttagandeinstruktionen och all
annan dokumentation beaktas!
Skruvfästen för kabel och ledningar se fig. 4. Vid anslutning av PTC- Efter att ha monterats till motorerna skall bromsen (i fall den
termistor skall ett reduceringsstycke skruvas in! finns) kontrolleras med avseende på oklanderlig funktion!
Uttagslådan måste vara damm- och vattentät.
Nätspänning och nätfrekvens måste stämma överens med data på 3 Underhåll

märkskylten. ±5% spännings- eller ±2% frekvensavvikelse ät tillåten
utan sänkning ev effekten. Gör anslutning och tillordning av Säkerhetsåtgärder
kopplingsbyglarna enligt det i uttagslådan förefintliga kretsschemat. Motorn måste skiljas från nätet enligt föreskrift
Anslut skyddsledaren till denna klämma . innan något arbete på motorn eller apparaten
påbörjas, framför allt innan man öppnar skydden
För anslutningsklämmor med klämbyglar (t.ex. enligt DIN över spänningsförande detaljer. Förutom
46282) skall ledarna fördelas så att på plintens båda sidor huvudströmkretsarna skall också ev. sidokretsar eller
ungefär samma klämhöjd uppstår. Denna anslutningstyp hjälpkretsar vara frånkopplade.
kräver därför att en enkelledare måste böjas U-formigt eller Här gäller de sedvanliga "5 säkerhetsreglerna" t. ex.
måste anslutas med en kabelsko (se fig. 6.1). Detta gäller enl. DIN VDE 0105:
även för anslutningen av skyddsledaren och den yttre - Frånkoppling
jordningsledaren (se fig. 6.2) - gröngul. - Säkra mot återinkoppling
- Fastställ att ingen spänning förekommer
Åtdragningsmoment för de elektriska anlutningarnas skruvförband - Jorda och kortslut
(utom på kontaktplintar) (se fig. 5). - Täck över eller spärra av angränsande detaljer som har
spänning pålagd.
Under driften får uppvärmningen för uppehåll inte vara Ovan beskrivna åtgärder får inte upphävas förrän
tillkopplad. servicearbetet är avslutat och motorn är fullständigt
monterad.
2.6 Kontroll av isolationsmotståndet
Före det första idrifttagandet av motorn, efter längre lagrings- eller OBSERVERA: I fall motorerna är utförda med stängda
uppehållstid (ca 6 månader) måste isolationsmotståndet hos lindningen kondensvattenöppningar måste dessa öppnas ibland så att
fastställas. kondensvatten som eventuellt samlats kan flyta bort.
Kondensvattenöppningar skall alltid placeras på motorns lägsta ställe!
Under och omedelbart efter mätningen har klämmorna delvis
farliga spänningar och får inte vidröras. Lagerbyte, fettsorter
Lagerbytesintervallet [h] är under normala driftsvillkor, vid vågrät
Isolationsmotstånd motoruppställning, kylvätsketemperatur eller motorvarvtal på
- Det minsta isolationsmotståndet hos nya, rengjorda eller
reparerade lindningar uppgår till 10 megaohm mot jord. 25°C 40°C
- Det kritiska islolationsmotståndet Rcrit beräknas först. Beräkningen ... 1800/min ca 40 000 h ca 20 000 h
sker genom multiplikation av märkspänningen UN, t.ex. AC 0,69 ... 3600/min ca 20 000 h ca 10 000 h
kV, med den konstanta faktorn (0,5 megaohm/kV); OBSERVERA: De tillåtna axial- och tvärkrafterna (enligt kalalog) får
Rcrit = 0,69 kV ⋅ 0,5 megaohm/kV = 0,345 megaohm inte överskridas!
Oberoende av driftstimmarna bör rullagret förnyas vart 3:e år på grund
Mätning av att fettet åldras.
Det minsta isolationsmotståndet hos lindnigarna mot jord mäts
Under speciella driftsvillkor t.ex. lodrät motoruppställning, stora
med 500 V likspänning. Därvid skall temperaturen hos lindningarna
vibrations- och stötbelastningar, ofta återkommande reverseringsdrift,
uppgå till 25°C ± 15°C.
reduceras de ovan nämnda driftstimmarna väsentligt.
Det kritiska isolationsmotståndet skall mätas vid driftstemperatur
hos lindningen med 500 V likspänning. Motorerna har spårkullager med täckbrickor (2ZC3 utförande).
Siemens AG
15
SVENSKA
Materialet i brickorna bör vara temperaturbeständigt från -30°C till I Tyskland hänvisas vid inrättandet av en elekt-risk anläggning
+150°C, t.ex polyakrylgummi (ACM) i ett område med explosions-risk till DIN 57165/VDE 0165 och
Fettsorter för standardmaskiner: UNIREX N3 (Fa ESSO); ElexV. I ut-landet skall motsvarande föreskrifter som gäller i
utbytesfett måste motsvara DIN 51825-K3N. det aktuella landet respekteras!
Specialfett är angivna på märkskylten eller på en extra skylt. För drift med omformare måste ett intyg ut-tryckligen föreligga. De
separata anvisningarna från tillverkaren skall ovillkorligen
Ta isär motor i den omfattning det är nödvändigt. Dra av rullager med respekteras. För tändskyddstyp EExe måste, motor, omformare och
lämlig anordning (se fig. 7). Rengör lagerstället från föroreningar! skyddsanordningar vara specificerade som sammanhörande enhet
och respektive tillåten driftsdata vara specificerad i det gemensamma
Värm upp rullagret likformigt till ca 80-100°C och dra på det. Hårda EG-typgodkänndande (VDE 0165).
slag (t.ex. med en hammare) skall undvikas. De av omformaren orsakade spänningspet-sarna kan påverkas
ogynnsamt till storleken av den installerade förbindningskabeln mellan
Eventuellt utnötta tätningselement (t.ex. axeltätring, ...), skall likaså om-formaren och den elektriska maskinen. I syste-met omformare-
bytas ut. kabel-elektrisk maskin får det maximala värdet på spänningspetsarna
Är axeltätringar utan fjäder monterade så måste även reservdelen vid ma-skinens anslutningsklämmor inte överskrida det i de separata
sättas in utan fjäder. anvisningarna från tillver-karen nämnda värdet. Dessutom skall EMK-
direktivet respekteras.
Eftersmörjningsanordning
Hos motorer med eftersmörjningsanordning skall uppgifterna på Reparationer måste utföras i en Siemens-verkstad eller kontrolleras
märkskylten eller smörjskylten respekteras. Eftersmörjningen skall av en officiellt erkänd expert. De utförda arbetena skall betecknas
göras när motorn går! på en extra reparationskylt. Som reservdelar får, med undantag av
normerade, i handeln vanligt förekommande och likvärdiga delar (t.ex
rullager), endast originalreserv-delar (se reservdelslista) användas:
detta gäller speciellt också för packningar och anslutningsdelar.
4 Motorer med tändkapslingsklass -
förhöjd säkerhet EExe 1MA, 1MF
För dessa motorer gäller, kompletterande eller speciellt, informationerna
i kursiv skrift!
Den förhöjda risken i områden med explosions-fara, inklusive
gruvgaser, kräver ett specillt noggrant iakttagande av de allmänna
säker-hets- och idrifttagandeanvisningarna.
Explosionsskyddade elektriska maskiner mot-svarar normerna i serien
EN 60034 (VDE0530) och EN 50014 - 50020. De få användas i områ-
den med explosionsfara endast på direktiv av den ansvariga
övervakande myndigheten. Det åligger denna att fastställa storleken
på explo-sionsrisken (zonindelning).
Om certifikatet är markerat med ett ‚X’ ska speciella villkor
enligt EG-typgodkännandet beaktas.
Ledningsintagen måste vara tillåtna för ex-område och säkrade mot
att glapp kan uppstå av sig självt. Inte använda öppningar måste
slutas med tillåtna proppar.
Om axeländan sitter uppåt t.ex. för konstruk-tionerna IMV3, IMV6,
IMV19 (se Fig. 1), skall för 1MA-motorerna en kåpa arrangeras, som
förhindrar att främmande kroppar kan falla ner i motorns fläktkåpa (se
DIN EN 50014/50019). Den får inte hindra kylningen av motorn genom
fläkten.
Om inget annat framgår av EG-typggodkänndet resp. av effektskylten
vad det gäller drifttypen och toleranserna är elektriska maskiner
konstruerade för kontinuerlig drift och normala driftstarter som inte
upprepas för ofta och vid vilka ingen väsentlig startvärme alstras.
Motorerna får endast användas för den på effektskylten angvina
drifttypen.
Området A i EN 60034-1 (VDE 0530, del 1) - spänning ± 5%, frekvens
± 2%, kurvans form, nätsymmetri - måste respekteras, så att upp-
värmningen stannar inom de tillåtna gränserna. Större avvielser från
normvärdena kan höja uppvärmningen av den elektriska maskinen
otillåtet mycket och måste vara angivet på märkskylten.
Den på motorns märkskylt angivna tempera-turklassen måste
stämma överens med tem-peraturklassen på den eventuellt
uppträdande brännbara gasen.
Överströmsskyddsanordningen med strömavhängigt
fördröjd utlösning ska väljas så, att utlösningstiden, som
framgår av brytarens karakteristik för förhållandet IA / IN för
motorn som ska skyddas, inte är längre än motorns
uppvärmningstid t E. . Förhållandet I A / I N samt
uppvärmningstiden tE framgår av typskylten. Dessutom ska
skyddsanordningen ställas in på dimensioneringsströmmen. Hos
lindningar med triangelkoppling kopplas utlösningsdonen i serie med
lindningsfaserna och dimensioneringsströmmen ställs in på det
0,58faldiga. Om en sådan koppling inte skulle vara möjlig krävs extra
skyddsåtgärder (t. ex. ett termiskt maskinskydd).
Skyddsanordningen måste, vid blockerad rotor, koppla från inom
den för respektive tem-peraturklass angivna tE-tiden.
Elektriska maskiner för tung start (starttid > 1,7 x tE-tid) ska skyddas
enligt respektive uppgifter i EG-typgodkänndandet med hjälp av en
startövervakning.
T e r m i s k t m a s k i n s k y d d genom direkt temperaturövervakning
av lindningen är tillåtet när detta finns angivet i intyg och står på
märkskylten.
På pol-omkopplingsbara motorer krävs för varje varvtalssteg
skilda och gentemot varandra förreglade skyddsanordningar. Det
rekommenderas att använda EG-typgodkända anordningar.
Siemens AG
16
ANHANG / APPENDIX / APPENDICE / ANEXO / APPENDICE / BILAGA
DEUTSCH ENGLISH FRANÇAIS
Ersatzteile, vom Werk lieferbar Spare parts, available from the works Pièces de rechange, livrables par l’usine
(s. Bestellbeispiel) (see order example) (voir exemple de commande)
1.00 Lagerung AS 1.00 Bearing, drive end 1.00 Palier côté entraînement
.40 Lagerschild .40 Endshield .40 Flasque-palier
.43 Wellendichtring .43 Shaft sealing ring .43 Bague d’étanchéité
.47 Dichtung .47 Seal .47 Joint
.58 Federscheibe .58 Resilient preloading ring .58 Rondelle élastique
.60 Wälzlager .60 Rolling-contact bearing .60 Roulement
.61 Federband für Lagerschildnabe .61 Spring band for endshield hub .61 Lame élastique pour moyeu du flasque
(nicht immer vorhanden) (not always provided) (pas toujours présente)
3.00 Läufer, komplett 3.00 Rotor, complete 3.00 Rotor, complet

.88 Paßfeder für Lüfter .88 Featherkey for fan .88 Clavette pour ventilateur
4.00 Ständer, komplett 4.00 Stator, complete 4.00 Stator, complet

.07 Gehäusefuß, rechts .07 Frame foot, right .07 Patte de la carcasse, droite
.08 Gehäusefuß, links .08 Frame foot, left .08 Patte de la carcasse, gauche
.18 Leistungsschild .18 Rating plate .18 Plaque signalétique
.19 Schraube .19 Bolt .19 Vis
.20 Abdeckung .20 Cover .20 Recouvrement
.30 Kontaktwinkel .30 Contakt angele .30 Equerre de contact
.31 Erdungswinkel .31 Earthing angele .31 Equerre de mise à la terre
5.00 Klemmenkasten, komplett 5.00 Terminal box, complete 5.00 Boîte à bornes, complète
.10 Klemmenbrett, komplett .10 Terminal board, complete .10 Plaque à bornes, complète
.11 Klemmleiste .11 Terminal strip(e.g. for PTC .11 Bornier (par ex. pour sonde CTP)
(z. B. für Kaltleiteranschluß) thermistor connection) .44 Partie supérieure de la boîte à bornes
.44 Klemmenkasten-Oberteil .44 Top part of terminal box .53 Bouchon
.53 Verschlußstopfen .53 Plug .70 Etrier de serrage
.70 Klemmbügel .70 Terminal clip .71 Etrier de serrage
.71 Klemmbügel .71 Terminal clip .83 Joint (torique sur (HA 180...200)
.83 Dichtung .83 Seal .84 Couvercle de la boîte à bornes
.84 Klemmenkasten-Deckel .84 Terminal box cover .85 Joint
.85 Dichtung .85 Seal .89 Vis
.89 Schraube .89 Screw .90 Parie supérieure de la boîte à
.90 Klemmenkastenoberteil .90 Top part of terminal box, can bornes, orientable de 4 x 90 °,
4x90 Grad drehbar, komplett be turned through 4 x 90 complète (pour montage ultérieur)
(für nachträglich Anbau) degrees, complete (for retrofitting) .92 Couvercle de la boîte à bornes
.92 Klemmenkasten-Deckel .92 Terminal box cover .93 Joint
.93 Dichtung .93 Seal .95 Partie supérieure de la boîte à bornes
.95 Klemmenkasten-Oberteil .95 Top part of terminal box .98 Joint
.98 Dichtung .98 Seal .99 Plaque d’adaptation
.99 Adapterplatte .99 adapter plate
6.00 Palier côté opposé à
6.00 Lagerung BS 6.00 Bearing, non-drive end l’entraînement
.10 Wälzlager .10 Rolling-contact bearing .10 Roulement
.11 Federband für Lagerschildnabe .11 Spring band for endshield hub .11 Lame élastique pour moyeu du flasque
(nicht immer vorhanden) (not always provided) (pas toujours présente)
.20 Lagerschild .20 Endshield .20 Flasque-palier
.23 Wellendichtring .23 Shaft sealing ring .23 Bague d’étanchéité
7.00 Belüftung, komplett 7.00 Ventilation, complete 7.00 Ventilation, complète

.04 Lüfter .04 Fan .04 Ventilateur
.40 Lüfterhaube .40 Fan cowl .40 Capot du ventilateur
Auf- und Abziehvorrichtungen für Wälzla- The devices for pressing on and pulling off Les dispositifs d’emmanchement et
ger, Lüfter und Abtriebselemente sind nicht the rolling-contact bearings, the fan and the d’extraction pour roulements, ventilateurs et
lieferbar! transmission elements cannot be ordered! organes de transmission ne sont pas livrables.
DIN 125 1.49 DIN EN 50262

Normteile sind nach Abmessung, Werkstoff und 4.05 (s. Fig. 3) DIN 912 DIN 931
Oberfläche im freien Handel zu beziehen. 4.11
Standard commercially available parts are to be 4.39 5.52
purchased in accordance with the specified 4.10 5.19 5.96
dimensions, material and surface finish. 4.38 DIN 128 5.49
Les pièces normalisées peuvent être obtenues 5.78 5.79
dans le commerce d’après leurs dimensions, le 5.91 DIN 7985
DIN 933
matériau et l’état de surface. 7.12 DIN 471 5.94
Las piezas estándar se comprarán en comercios 6.29 DIN 625
1.60
del ramo según las dimensiones, material y 7.49 Lagertyp:
6.10 Type of bearing:
superficie especificados.
6.02 DIN 472 Type de roulement:
Le parti standard sono reperibili sul mercato
Tipo de cojinete:
secondo le dimensioni, il materiale e la finitura
Tipo di cuscinetto:
della superficie. 3.38 DIN 6885 Lagertyp:
Normerade detaljer kan erhållas i öppna handeln, 4.04 (s. Fig. 3) DIN 580
och skall specificeras beträffande storlek, material
och ytbehandling.
Fig. 2
Siemens AG
17
ANHANG / APPENDIX / APPENDICE / ANEXO / APPENDICE / BILAGA
ESPAÑOL ITALIANO SVENSKA
Piezas de recambio, suministro desde Parti di ricambio disponibili da magazzino Reservdelar, kan levereras från fabriken
fábrica (v. ejemplo de pedido) (vedere esempi di ordinazione) (se beställningsexempel)
1.00 Rodamiento D 1.00 Cuscinetti lato albero 1.00 Lager AS

.40 Escudo portacojinetes .40 Coperchio del cuscinetto .40 Lagersköld
.43 Anillo obturador .43 Anello di tenuta dell’albero .43 Axeltätring
.47 Sello .47 Anello di tenuta .47 Packning
.58 Arandela flexible .58 Anello elastico .58 Fjäderbricka
.60 Rodamiento .60 Cuscinetto a rotolamento .60 Rullager
.61 Cinta elástica para el cubo del escudo .61 Nastro elastico per il mozzo dello .61 Fjäderband för lagersköldsnav
portacojinetes (no se emplea siempre) scudo di supporto (non sempre (finns ej alltid)
inserito)
3.00 Rotor, completo 3.00 Rotor, komplett
.88 Chaveta para ventilador 3.00 Rotore completo .88 kil för fläkt
.88 Chiavetta per ventilatore
4.00 Estator, completo 4.00 Stator, komplett
.07 Pata derecha de la carcasa 4.00 Statore completo .07 Fot för hus, höger
.08 Pata izquierda de la carcasa .07 Piede di sostegno destro .08 Fot för hus, vänster
.18 Placa de características .08 Piede di sostegno sinistro .18 Märkskylt
.19 Tornillo .18 Targhetta dei dati .19 Skruv
.20 Tapa .19 Vite .20 Lock
.30 Angular de contacto .20 Coperchio .30 Kontaktvinkel
.31 Angular exterior de puesta a tierra .30 Angolare di contatto .31 Jordingsvinkel
.31 Angolare di messa a terra
5.00 Caja de bornes, completa 5.00 Uttagslåda, komplett
.03 Sello 5.00 Cassetta terminale completa .03 Packning
.04 Sello .03 Guarnizione .04 Packning
.10 Placa de bornes, completa .04 Guarnizione .10 Kopplingsplint, komplett
.11 Regletero (p. ej. para conexión .10 Morsettiera completa .11 Kontaktplint (t.ex. för
con termistor PTC) .11 Morsettiera ad es. per il anslutning av PTC-termistor)
.44 Parte superior de la caja de collegamento di termistori PTC .44 Överdel till uttagslåda
bornes .44 Parte superiore della cassetta .53 Avslutningspropp
.53 Tapón terminale .70 Klämbygel
.70 Pisacables .53 Tappon .71 Klämbygel
.71 Pisacables .70 Staffa .83 Packning
.83 Sello .71 Staffa .84 Lock till uttagslåda
.84 Tapa de la caja de bornes .83 Anello di tenuta .85 Packning
.85 Sello .84 Coperchio della cassetta .89 Skruv
.89 Tornillo terminale .90 Överdel till uttagslåda 4 x 90
.90 Parte superior de la caja de .85 Guarnizione Dgrader vridbar, komplett
bornes, girable en 4 x 90 grados, .89 Vite (för montering i efterhand)
completa .90 Parte superiore della cassetta .92 Lock till uttagslåda
(para montaje posterior) orientabile 4 volte di 90°, .93 Packning
.92 Tapa de la caja de bornes completa (per montaggio .95 Överdel till uttagslåda
.93 Sello successivo) .98 Packning
.95 Parte superior de la caja de .92 Coperchio della cassetta .99 Adapterplatta
bornes terminale
.98 Sello .93 Guarnizione 6.00 Lager BS
.99 platina adaptadora .95 Parte superiore della cassetta .10 Rullager
terminale .11 Fjäderband för lagersköldsnav
6.00 Rodamiento N .98 Guarnizione (finns ej alltid)
.10 Rodamiento .99 piastra adattore .20 Lagersköld
.11 Cinta elástica para el cubo del escudo .23 Axeltätring
portacojinetes (no se emplea siempre) 6.00 Cuscinetti lato opposto albero
.20 Escudo portacojinetes .10 Cuscinetti a rotolamento 7.00 Ventilation, komplett
.23 Anillo obturador .11 Nastro elastico per il mozzo dello .04 Fläkt
scudo di supporto (non sempre .40 Fläktkåpa
7.00 Sistema de ventilación, inserito)
completo .20 Coperchio dei cuscinetti
.04 Ventilador .23 Anello di tenuta dell’albero
.40 Capota del ventilador På- och avdragningsanordningar för
7.00 Ventilatore completo rullager, fläkt och drivdonselement kan inte
¡No se pueden suministrar los dispositivos .04 Ventilatore levereras!
para calar y extraer los rodamientos, .40 Cappa del ventilatore
ventiladores y órganos de accionamiento!
I dispositivi per il calettamento e l’estrazione
di cuscinetti, ventilatori e elementi di
trasmissione non possono essere ordinati!
Bestellbeispiel
Order example 1.40 Lagerschild
Exemple de commande 1LA7 163-4AA60
Ejemplo de pedido Nr. E4A6 4567 890077
Esempio di ordinazione
Beställningsexempel
Siemens AG
18
5.89
1MA/1MF
5.84
Siemens AG
5.91
5.92
5.83 * Teile entfallen bei
5.98 * Parts not included with
5.49 * Certaines pièces sont
5.94 supprimées pour le type
* Pazas inexistentes en
5.96 * Parti non
5.90 5.95 * Delar ingår inte för
1LP, 1PP, 1MF
5.98 5.44
5.03
1MA/1MF: 5.04
5.52 5.19
5.53 5.79 5.10
5.78
5.99 5.71
5.70 6.10 6.23
4.00
7.49*
7.40*
7.04*
1.40 6.29
6.20 1.40 AH90 1.61
4.19
4.18
1.60
1.58
1.43 Bei Aluminium-Lagerschilden (1.40 AH90) ist in die Nabe ein Federband (1.61) eingelegt (Sicke
im Freistich einhaken).
1.49 In the case of aluminium bearing plates (1.40 AH90) a spring strip (1.61) is inserted in the
hub (hook-in bead in undercut) .
Sur les flasques aluminium (1.40 AH90), un ressort à ruban (1.61) est inséré dans le moyeu
(Accrocher le jonc par dégagement par rainure).
En las placas de cojinete de aluminio (1.40 AH90) en el cubo se halla montado un fleje de
muelle (1.61) (enganchar la acanaladura en la entalladura).
Nel caso degli scudi di cuscinetti in alluminio (1.40 AH90) un nastro elastico (1.61) è inserito
nel mozzo (agganciare la nervatura nello scarico).
Fig. 2 BG 56...90L Hos aluminium-lagersköldar (1.40 AH90) finns ett fjäderband (1.61) i naven (fäst falsen i det
fria uttaget).
19
20
5.91 5.89
5.92
5.84
5.93 * Teile entfallen bei
1MA/1MF: 5.98 * Parts not included with
* Certaines pièces sont 7.49*
5.94 supprimées pour le type
* Pazas inexistentes en
5.90 5.95 5.19 * Parti non
* Delar ingår inte för
5.10 1LP, 1PP, 1MF
5.96
1MA/1MF: 5.52
5.79
1MA/1MF: 5.53
5.78
5.93
1MA/1MF: 5.98 5.71 5.11
5.70 7.12* 7.40*
4.20 7.04*
4.00 6.29
6.23 6.20
6.10
3.00 3.88*
IM B3 1.47 1.40/6.20 1.61/6.11
4.19 6.02
(BG160)
1.40 4.18
IM B5
3.38
4.08 4.10 Bei Aluminium-Lagerschilden (1.40/6.20) ist in die Nabe entweder ein Federband
4.11 1MA6/1MF6 (1.61/6.11) eingelegt (Sicke im Freistich einhaken) oder ein Stahlring eingegossen.
1.60 With aluminium end shields (1.40/6.20), either a spring band (1.61/6.11) is inserted
1.58 4.07 (bead hooked in undercut) or a steel ring is cast in the hub.
Les flasques-paliers en aluminium comportent (1.40/6.20) soit une lame élastique
1.43 (1.61/6.11) introduite de telle manière que le bossage vienne se placer dans la gorge,
4.31
soit un anneau en acier inséré par coulée.
1.49 4.38 En el cubo del escudo portacojinetes de aluminio (1.40/6.20) puede haber una banda
1MA7/1MF7 elástica (1.61/6.11) cuyos abultamientos se enganchan en el canal, o hay embebido
un anillo de acero.
4.30 4.39
Nel mozzo degli scudi in alluminio è stato (1.40/6.20) inserito o un anello in acciaio
4.31 fuso, o un nastro flessibile (1.61/6.11) il cui rilievo è innestato nelle gole.
(Bei 1..7 BG100L - Füße angegossen) 4.38 I Lagersköldar av aluminium (1.40/6.20) är ett fjäderband (1.61/6.11) antingen inlagt
(In the case of 1..7 BG100L – cast feet are involved) 4.39 i nevet (vulsten inpassad i underskärningen) eller ingjutet i en stålring.
Fig. 2 BG 100...160L (Avec 1..7 BG100L – Pieds coulés)
(En 1..7 BG100L – patas fijadas por fundición)
(nel caso di 1..7 BG100L - piedi applicati mediante fusione)
(Hos 1..7 BG100L – fastgjutna fötter)
DEUTSCH / ENGLISH / FRANÇAIS / ESPAÑOL / ITALIANO / SVENSKA
BG 100...160L 4.04
4.05
z. B. Öffnung für Kabel und Leitungen - unten

e.g. opening for cables and leads - bottom
p. e. traversées pour câbles et conducteurs - en bas
p. ej abertura pasacables - abajo
ad es. passaggio per conduttori e cavi - parte inferiore
t.ex. öppning för kabel och ledningar - nedtill
Fig. 3 Ausführung mit seitlich angeordnetem Klemmenkastenoberteil (4x90° drehbar)

Motor with top part of terminal box mounted on side (can be turned through 4x90°)
Exécution avec partie supérieure de la boîte á bornes disposé sur le côté
Motor con la parte superior de la caja de bornes adosada lateralmente (puede girarse 4x90°)
Esecuzione con parte superiore della cassetta terminale disposta lateralmente (orientabile 4x90°)
Utförande med överdel till uttagslådan (4x90°° vridbar) monterad på sidan
Verschraubungen mit Mutter (z. B. DIN EN 50 262)
Screwed connections with nut (e.g. DIN EN 50 262) Kaltleiterverschraubungen mit Reduktionsstück und Mutter (z. B. DIN EN 50 262)
Presse-étoupe avec écrou (p.e. DIN EN 50 262) Screwed PTC thermistor connections with adapter and nuts (e.g. DIN EN 50 262)
Uniones atornilladas con tuerca (p. ej DIN EN 50 262) Presse-étoupe pour sonde CTP avec pièce de réduction (p. e. DIN EN 50 262)
Collegamenti a vite con dado (es DIN EN 50 262) Conexión de termistor PTC con reductor y tuercas (p.ej. DIN EN 50 262)
Skruvförband med mutter (t.ex. DIN EN 50 262) Collegamenti a vite per termistori PTC con riduttore e dado (ad es. DIN EN 50 262)
Skruvförband för PTC-termistor med reduceringsstycke och mutter (t.ex. DIN EN 50 262)
Blechmutter
Sheet metal nut O-Ring /o-ring
Ecrou à tôle O-ring /o-ring
Mutter
tuerca para chapa Joint torique /joint torique
Nut junta tórica /junta tórica
Dado di lamiera
Ecrou Guarnizione a o-ring /guarnizione a
Plåtmutter Tuerca
O-Ring /o-ring o-ring
Dado
O-ring /o-ring O-Ring /o-ring
Mutter Joint torique /joint torique Mutter
Nut junta tórica /junta tórica
Ecrou Guarnizione a o-ring /guarnizione a o-ring
Tuerca O-Ring /o-ring
Dado
Mutter Reduktionsstück / Adapter / Pièce de réduction
Klemmenkastenwand Pieza reductora / Riduttore / Reduceringsstycke
Wall of terminal box
Paroi de la boîte á bornes
Pared de la caja de bornes
Cassetta termina l parete
Vägg till uttagslådan
1MA/1MF: EEx e - bescheinigte Verschraubung mit Mutter

1MA/1MF: EEx e - certify screwed connections with nut
1MA/1MF: EEx e - certifier presse-étoupe avec écrou
1MA/1MF: EEx e - certificar uniones atornilladas con tuerca
1MA/1MF: EEx e - certificare collegamenti a vite con dado
1MA/1MF: EEx e - intyga skruvförband med mutter Einbaulage Blechmutter
Installation length sheet metal nut
O-Ring /o-ring Emplacement pour écrou à tôle
O-ring /o-ring posición del montaje tuerca para chapa
Mutter Joint torique /joint torique Posizione di montaggio dado di lamiera
junta tórica /junta tórica Monteringsläge påtmutter
Nut
Ecrou Guarnizione a o-ring /guarnizione a o-ring
Tuerca O-Ring /o-ring
Dado
Mutter Ausbrechöffnung (Gußhaut)
Klemmenkastenwand Cast iron skin
Wall of terminal box Membrane de fabrication
Paroi de la boîte á bornes
Membrana de fundición
Pared de la caja de bornes
Pellicola residua della colata
Cassetta termina l parete
Vägg till uttagslådan
Gjutskorpa
Fig. 4 BG 100...160L
(1LA7/9, 1LP7/9, 1PP7/9)
Ausschlagen der Öffnungen für Kabel und
Leitungen im Klemmenkasten
Knocking out the openings for cables and
leads in the terminal box
Rupture des membranes de fabrication
aburant les entées de câbles et de
conducteurs sur la boîte á bornes
Martillando las aberturas pasacables de la caja
de bornes
Asportare la pellicola per cavi e conduttori
nella cassetta terminale
Utslagning av öppningarna för kabel och
ledningar i uttagslådan
21
Gewinde- ∅ / Thread- ∅
∅ du filetage / ∅ de la rosca M4 M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16
Diametro del filetto / Gängdimeter
Anziehdrehmoment
Tightening torque min 0,8 1,8 2,7 5,5 9 14 27
Couple de serrage Nm
Par de apriete
Coppia di serraggio
Åtdragningsmoment
max 1,2 2,5 4 8 13 20 40
Die obigen Anziehdrehmomente gelten soweit keine anderen Werte angegeben sind!
The above values of tightening torque are applicable unless alternative values are given elsewhere.
Les couples de serrage indiqués ci-dessus sont valables pour autant qu’aucune valeur spécifique ne soit donnée.
Estos pares de apriete rigen mientras no se indiquen otros.
Le coppie di serraggio indicate qui di sopra sono valide se non sono indicati altri valori.
Ovanstående åtdragningsmoment gäller om ej andra värden angivits!
Fig. 5 Anziehdrehmomente für Schraubenverbindungen der elektrischen Anschlüsse - Klemmenbrettanschlüsse (außer Klemmenleisten)
Tightening torques for screwed electrical connections - terminal board connections (except for terminal strips)
Couples de serrages des bornes de la plaque à bornes (ne concerne pas les borniers)
Pares de apriete para uniones atornilladas de las conexiones eléctricas en la placa de bornes (exceptuando las regletas de bornes).
Coppie di serraggio per le viti di attacco di collegamenti elettrici / dei portamorsetti (escluse morsettiere)
Åtdragningsmoment för de elektriska anslutningarnas skruvförband (utom på kontaktplintar)
I II Fig. 5.1
Nm Nm
min max min max Anziehdrehmoment für Verschraubungen aus Metall (I) und Kunststoff (II)
Tightening torque for screw unions in metal (I) and plastic (II)
M 12 x 1,5 4 6 2 3,5
Couple de serrage pour visserie métallique (I) et plastique (II)
M16x1,5 5 7,5 3 4 Par de apriete para las atornilladuras de metal (I) y materia sintética (II)
M25x1,5 6 4 Coppia di serraggio per viti di metallo (I) e plastica (II)
9 5
Åtdragningsmoment för skruvkopplingar av metall (I) och plast (II)
M 32 x 1,5
8 12 5 7
M40x1,5
... 25 mm2 ... 10 mm2 ... 25 mm2 ... 10 mm2 ... 25 mm2
DIN 46 234 DIN 46 234
Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabelschuh Anschluß eines einzelnen Leiters Anschluß von zwei etwa gleich dik- Anschluß eines einzelnen Leiters Bei Anschluß mit DIN- Kabelschuh
ist dieser nach unten abzuwinkeln! mit Klemmbügel. ken Leitern mit Klemmbügel. unter äußerem Erdungswinkel. unter äußerem Erdungswinkel.
If connections are made with DIN Connecting a single conductor If connections are made with DIN
cable lugs, bend the cable lugs Connecting a single conductor with Connecting two conductors of al- under the outer earthing angle. cable lugs, under the outer ear-
downwards. a terminal clip. most equal thickness with a terminal thing angle.
Lorsque le raccordement est clip. Raccordement d'un seul Lorsque le raccordement est
réalisé par cosses DIN, celles-ci Raccordement d'un seul conduc- Deux conducteurs de diamètre à conducteur à une équerre extérieu- réalisé par cosses DIN, à une
doivent être pliées vers le bas. teur à une borne à étrier. peu pré équivalents, raccordés à re de mise à la terre. équerre extérieure de mise à la
une borne à étrier. terre.
Si la conexión se efectúa con Conexión de un solo conductor bajo Si la conexión se efectúa con
terminales para cables DIN, habrá Conexión de un solo conductor con Conexión de dos conductores de el angular exterior de puesta a tierra. terminales para cables DIN, bajo
que doblarlos hacia abajo. un pisacables. diámetro aproximadamente igual, el angular exterior de puesta a tierra.
con un pisacables. Allacciamento di ogni singolo con- Nel collegamento con capocorda
Nel collegamento con capocorda duttore sotto angolare di messa a conforme alle norme DIN, sotto
conforme alle norme DIN, questo Allacciamento di ogni singolo con- Allacciamento di due conduttori di terra esterno. angolare di messa a terra esterno.
va piegato verso il basso. duttore con staffa. stesso o pressocchè indentico Vid anslutning med kabelsko enl.
Vid anslutning med kabelsko enl. spessore con staffa. Anslutning av en enkelledare under DIN under extern jordningsvinkel.
DIN skall denna bockas nedåt. Anslutning av en enkelledare med Anslutning av två ungefär lika tjocka extern jordningsvinkel.
klämbygel. ledare med klämbygel.
Fig. 6.1 Fig. 6.2

Fig. 6 Anschließbare Querschnitt je nach Klemmengröße (ggf. reduziert durch Größe der Leitungseinführungen)
Conductor cross-sections connectable to the various terminals (may be reduced by size of cable entries)
Sections raccordables suivant la taille de la borne (réduction éventuelle par la taille des entrées de câbles)
Sección conectable según tamaño del borne (en caso dado, más pequeña debido al tamaño de las entradas de línea)
Diametri dei collegamenti a sec. delle misure dei morsetti (eventualmente sono ridotte le dimensioni delle aperture per
i conduttori) Anslutningsbara ledarareor för olika klämstorlekar (ev. reducerat med hänsyn till genomföringens storlek)
Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)

Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout d’arbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
Spessore (protezione della centratura null’estremità d’albero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen l axeltappen)
Fig. 7 Lagerwechsel / Changing bearings / Remplacement des roulements

Cambio de cojinetes / Sostituzione dei cuscinetti / Lagerbyte
Siemens AG
22
Zwischenscheibe (Schutz der Zentrierung im Wellenende)

Spacer washer (to protect centring bore in shaft end)
Rondelle (protection du centrage en bout d’arbre)
Disco intermedio (protege el centrado en el extremo del eje)
Spessore (protezione della centratura null’estremità d’albero)
Distansbricka (skydd av centreringen l axeltappen)
Zum Aufziehen von Abtriebselementen (Kupplung, Zahnrad, Riemenscheibe usw.), Gewinde im Wellenende benutzen und - sofern möglich -
Abtriebselemente nach Bedarf erwärmen. Zum Abziehen geeignete Vorrichtung verwenden. Es dürfen beim Auf- und Abziehen keine Schläge
(z.B. mit Hammer oder ähnlichem) oder größere als die laut Katalog zulässigen radialen oder axialen Kräfte über das Wellenende auf die Motorlager
übertragen werden.
Use the tapped hole provided in the end of the shaft for fitting drive components such as couplings, gearwheels, belt pulleys, etc. and, if possible,
heat the components as necessary. Use a suitable puller tool for removing the components. Do not strike the components, e.g. with a hammer
or similar tool, when fitting or removing them and do not exert more than the maximum value of radial or axial force - according to the catalog
- transmitted to the motor bearings through the shaft extension.
Pour monter les organes de transmission (accouplements, roues dentées, poulies à courroie, etc.), utiliser le taraudage du bout d’arbre. Au besoin
et lorsque cela est possible, chauffer les organes de transmission. Pour le démontage, utiliser un dispositif approprié. Aucun coup (par ex. marteau)
supérieur aux efforts axiaux et radiaux admissibles mentionnés au catalogue ne doit être transmis par l’arbre aux roulements en cours de montage
ou de démontage.
Para calar los órganos de transmisión (acoplamientos, rueda dentada, polea, etc.) utilizar la rosca en el extremo del eje y - siempre que sea posible
- calentar convenientemente dichos órganos. Utilizar el dispositivo adecuado para la extracción. Durante las operaciones de calado o extracción
no golpear (p. ej. con martillo o similar) ni ejercer sobre los cojinetes del motor a través del extremo del eje fuerzas axiales o radiales superiores
a las admisibles según catálogo.
Per calettare gli elementi di transmissione (giunti, ruote dentate, pulegge, ecc.), utilizzare il foro filettato nell’estremità d’albero e, se possibile,
riscaldare gli elementi di transmissione . Per l’estrazione vanno adoperati attrezzi adatti. Sono da evitare colpi o martellate, e forze radiali o assiali
trasmesse dall’estremità d’albero ai cuscinetti maggiori di quelle consentite sec. il catalogo.
Använd axeltappens gänga vid pådragning av drivdon (koppling, kugghjul, remskiva etc) och värm om möjligt upp drivdonen om så behövs. Använd
lämpliga verktyg för avdragningen. Några slag (t.ex. med hammare e.dyl.) får aldrig förekomma vid på- och avdragning, och radiella och axiella
krafter som är större än de som anges i katalogen får inte överföras till motorlagren via axeltappen.
Fig. 8 Auf- und Abziehen von Abtriebselementen / Pressing on and pulling off drive elements
Emmanchement et extraction d’organes de transmission / Calado y extracción de órganos de transmisión
Calettamento ed estrazione degli elementi di transmissione / På- och avdragning av drivdon
TP
Fig. 9 Auswuchtung mit halber Paßfeder / Balancing with half featherkey

Equilibrage avec demi-clavette / Equilibrado con media chaveta
Equilibratura con mezza chiavetta / Balansering med halv kil
Siemens AG
23
S
90
BG 90
L
BG
S
90
BG 90
L
BG
Fig. 10 BG 90S,L
Geschäftsgebiet Niederspannungsmotoren / Low-Voltage Motors Division

D-97615 Bad Neustadt an der Saale
Änderungen vorbehalten / Subject to change without prior notice / Sous réserve de modifications
Sujeto a modificaciones/ Con riserva di modifiche/ Förbehåll för ändringar
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bestell-Nr. / Order No.: 610.43 428.21.d

Printed in the Federal Republic of Germany
10.01 24 De-En-Fr-Sp-It-Sv
ELECTRIC MOTOR

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

SERIE BM
Use and maintenance
M.G.M. motori elettrici S.p.A.
Stabilimento e Uffici – Head office and production:

51030 Serravalle Pistoiese (PT) – Italy – S.R. 435 Km 31
Tel.+39(0)573/91511 – Fax +39(0)573/518138
e-mail: mgm@mgmrestop.com
http:\\www.mgmrestop.com
We would like to thank you for trusting us and buying our product. Before starting the
motor, we advise you to read these instructions carefully, which should be kept together
with it. Should any difficulty arise, please contact the M.G.M. organisation, specifying the
type of product and its serial number. These instructions are valid for electric motors
belonging to the BM series (BM, BMS, BMPV, BMM, BMSV). BM series includes
asynchronous three-phase or single-phase totally enclosed fan cooled brake motors. The
motors brake in case of power supply failure. BM series-motors are used as components
in industrial applications. Performance and characteristics shown on the motor nameplate
are guaranteed for installations in ambients having a temperature range between -15°C
and +40°C at an altitude below 1000 m. above sea level. On motor nameplate is shown
mark CE which testifies the conformity of the product to the 73/23/EEC directives "low
voltage", 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic compatibility" and their subsequent amendments,
directives 93/68/EEC and 92/3 I/EEC.
Receipt and Storage

When receiving the motor, it is essential to check that:
- all the characteristics shown on the motor nameplate correspond to the requested ones;
- the motor has not been damaged during transportation; any damage must be pointed out to
the carrier immediately. The motors must be stored in a sheltered, dry and dust-free place.
Installation, Maintenance, Adjustment, Replacement operations of components must
be carried out by qualified personnel, using proper tools and working instruments.
Above all, it is essential to verify that motor or plant are disconnected from the supply
line and that on board terminals there is no voltage left. In case of uneffective braking
during regulation, maintenance or replacement operations of components, check that
no load is applied to the driveshaft.
Installation
When the installation is started, be sure that the characteristics expected from the motor are in
accordance with the ones shown on the motor nameplate, being careful to the supply voltage
and to the maximum braking torque. Make sure that the braking torque supplied by the brake
assembly is suitable for the application required. Check that all gaskets are in perfect
conditions and well housed into their seats; check that the cable inlet openings are tightly
closed and the terminal box screws well tightened; besides, the protection level shown on the
plate is to be respected. The motor must be installed in a ventilated room away from heat
sources and in such a position to allow free air intake for a proper ventilation. The motor must
be also mounted in such a position that easy inspection and maintenance is allowed, avoiding
possible danger arising from contact with moving parts or parts of the casing, whose
temperature might exceed 50 °C. When mounting the motor, check that the fixing screws have
proper diameter to be fitted with the holes provided on flange or feet. Is the motor equipped
with feet, a rigid and solid surface is to be used, in order to have minimum vibrations during
operation. During the mounting operation, check that motor and machine coupling is accurately
aligned, as an imperfect alignment could cause vibrations. In case of motors with flange, make
sure that coupling surfaces are thoroughly cleaned and that the centering is properly done so
to allow screws going through easily. In case of motors with feet, when using couplings with
joints, check that the motor axis and the driven machine axis are in line. When using pulleys,
check that the belt tension is not too high.
Braking Torque Adjustment
The braking torque can be adjusted up to the maximum rate as shown on nameplate. To adjust
the braking torque it is possible to operate on the screw of the adjustable springs - if there are
some - or vary the number or the type of fixed springs (78) inserted into the brake (75). To
adjust the braking torque by varying number of fixed springs it has to be operated according to
instructions given on par. "Brake coil replacement". Then, loosen the connecting screws (77)
and after taking out the brake moving element (74) draw the fixed springs out in order to
reduce the braking torque. The compression by the springs on the moving element must be as
even as possible. After adjusting check that the brake correctly releases.
Brake Disc Replacement
Loosen the end cover screws (82) of the end cover (76) and remove it. After removing the fan
snap ring (72), sliding the fan (71), removing the elastic washer and the hand release - if they
are present -loosen the connecting screws (77), unscrew the fixing screws (79) and draw out
the brake coil -brake moving element group (74-75). Take off the old brake disc (73) and insert
the new one. For re-assembling, proceed backwards and remember to adjust the air gap. It is
advisable to handle the new brake disc with clean hands, as even a small trace of grease will
decrease the braking performance and increase the noise.
Brake Coil Replacement
Disconnect the two terminals of the brake coil inside the terminal box. Unscrew the end cover
screws (82) of the end cover (76) and remove it. After removing the fan snap spring (72),
sliding the fan (71), removing the elastic washer and the hand release - if they are present -
loosen the fixing screws (79) and take out the brake coil (75). Insert the new brake coil,
proceeding backwards with the operations described. Remember to adjust the air gap.
Air Cap Adjustment
The air gap between the brake moving element (74) and the brake coil (75), which can be
surveyed by means of a thickness gauge, must be approx. 0.2/0.3 mm when it reaches value
near 0.6 mm. In order to set the air gap back to the required value, operate on the connecting
screws (77), by turning the fixing screws (79) to obtain the brake coil's (75) forward
displacement towards the rear cover (84). With a constant air gap (0.2/0.3 mm) at the fixing
screws operate on connecting screws again clockwise so to block the brake coil in the new
position. Once the operation is completed, check the air gap again and, if necessary, (air gap
with a value different from 0.2/0.3 mm) repeat the operation.
Seasonal Maintenance
The frequency of inspection depends on the particular application of the motor (environment
conditions, number of starts/stops, applied moment of inertia, and so on); during the first
inspection it is recommended not to exceed one million starts/stops.
- Periodically check that the motor properly operates without abnormal noise or vibrations
which could mean deterioration of bearings. Bearings mounted on MGM motors are of life-
lubricated double-screen waterproof type..
- Check that motor mounting through flange and feet is correct.
- Check that current absorption does not exceed value given on plate.
- Check that air openings for ventilation are not obstructed.
- Check that feeding cables and earth grounding are correctly tightened.
- As a result of normal wear of the brake disc lining, check that the air gap does not exceed
0.5 mm.
- Periodically remove dust from brake assembly.
- Check the wear on both friction surfaces of the brake disc to be sure that their thickness is
not less than 2 mm. Furthermore, check that there are no cracks or damages on disc surfaces
and, above all, in hub toothing.
60 – Air gap 76 – End cover
71 – Fan 77 – Connecting screw
73 – Brake disc 78 – Adjustable or fixed springs
74 – Brake moving element 79 – Fixing screw
75 – Brake coil 84 – Rear cover
Wiring
Before connecting the motor to the power supply it is necessary to connect the earth through
terminal cables placed inside terminal box and on motor casing. These terminal cables must be
cleaned and protected against corrosion.
For connection to distribution line, after selecting type of motor as shown on nameplate,
relevant diagrams are to be followed. For operation through inverter, motor is required to have
double terminal box in order to feed separately brake from motor; check that at low running
motor is properly ventilated. Standard motors can run in both directions of rotation. The
direction in a 3-phase motor can be changed by inverting two terminals between then.
For connection of motor to supply mains and to earthing proper section conductors are to be
used, which must comply with regulations in force. After connection, check that terminal nuts
are properly tightened. For single-phase motors or possible auxiliaries connection (thermal
protections, heating elements, auxiliary fan) connection diagrams inside motor terminal box are
to be followed and kept together with this instruction leaflet. It is recommended to use proper
protection devices against overcurrent. Make connection of motor and brake according to
diagrams. Brake coil is fed through a rectifier located inside the terminal box. Rectifier line
voltage from a.c. side is shown on motor plate. Into diagrams 2-3-4 rectifier can be equipped
either with type Q or type M. For connections diagrams Q and M are to be followed. In" case of
whatever difficulty please contact us.
RADDRIZZATORI – RECTIFIER – GLEICHRICHTER
RECTIFICADOR – REDRESSEUR
BASSA VELOCITA’ – LOW SPEED – NIEDRIGE GESCHINDIGKEIT
BAJA VELOCIDAD – BASSE VITESSE
ALTA VELOCITA – HIGH SPEED – HOHE GESCHINDIGKEIT
ELEVATA VELOCIDAD – GRANDE VITESSE
RECTIFIER Q
RECTIFIER M
Single terminal board

BM
Double terminal board
BM
BMD
BMDA
For any possible spare part request, please indicate item number, motor type and serial number.
2 Key 75 Brake coil

3 Bearings 76 End cover
4 Front cover (B3) 77 Connecting screw
7 Stator 78 Adjustable or fixed springs
28 Terminal board box screws 79 Fixing screw
30 Terminal board 80 Brake group O-ring (BM 80-90-100)
32 Cable gland 81 Rotor
36 Flange cover (B5) 82 End cover screw
37 Flange cover (B14) 83 Brake group key (BM 71-80-90-100)
38 Elastic washer 84 Rear cover
51 T-key for manual shaft rotation (on request only) 85 Hexagonal hub
71 Fan 86 Fixing hub snap ring
72 Fixing fan snap ring 87 Terminal board box with rectifier
73 Brake disc 88 Tie rod
74 Brake moving element 89 Rubber sleeve
BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

REDUCTION GEARS

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

1. Introduction: Page 24
1.1 How to consult the manual Page 24
1.2 Scope of the manual Page 24
1.3 Warranty Page 24
1.4 General warnings Page 24
1.5 Reproduction and copyright restrictions Page 24
1.6 Revisions Page 24
2. Technical Data: Page 24

2.1 Code description Page 25
2.2 Configurations Page 25
2.3 Versions of gear-coupling unit with active clutch safety system Page 27
3. Supply condition: Page 28
4. Packing, Handling, Receiving, Storage: Page 28

4.1 Packing Page 28
4.2 Handling Page 28
4.3 Receiving Page 29
4.4 Handling the machine without packing Page 30
4.5 Storage Page 30
5. Installation: Page 30
5.1 General instructions Page 30
5.2 Installation instructions for flange mounted gear unit Page 31
5.3 Installation instructions for foot mounted gear unit Page 31
5.4 Installation instructions for shaft mounted gear unit Page 31
5.4.1 Mounting the reaction arm on the gear unit Page 31
5.4.2 Installing the gear unit with an FS output Page 31
5.4.3 Disassembling the torque coupling and gear unit Page 31
5.4.4 Installing the gear unit with an FP output Page 31
5.4.5 Disassembling the gear unit with an FP output Page 32
5.5 Installing the gear unit type “RPR” Page 32
5.6 Installation instructions for gear unit-coupler assembly with active clutch safety system Page 32
5.7 Accessory installation instructions Page 33
6. START-UP OF AUXILIARIES (BRAKES - CLUTCHES- ETC.): Page 33

6.1 Negative multi-disc brake Page 33
6.2 Disk brake Page 33
6.3 Installation instructions for gear unit-coupler assembly with active clutch safety system Page 33
7. Lubrication: Page 33
7.1 Gear unit lubrication Page 33
7.1.1 Viscosity
7.1.2 Additives Page 33
7.2 Expansion tank Page 34
7.3 Brake lubrication Page 34
7.4 Grease features Page 35
7.5 Lubricant table Page 35
7.6 Diagrams and oil checking with auxiliary cooling system Page 35
8. Checks: Page 36
8.1 First start-up checks Page 36
8.2 No-load tests Page 36
9. Maintenance: Page 36
9.1 Routine maintenance Page 36
9.2 Oil Change Page 37
9.3 Unscheduled maintenance Page 37
10. MAINTENANCE OF AUXILIARIES (BRAKES - CLUTCHES- ETC.): Page 37

10.1 Procedure to replace disks or seals for multi disc brake Page 37
22
10.2 Procedure to replace disc brake pads Page 37
10.3 Maint. proc. for hydr. power pack on gear unit-coupler assembly with active clutch safety
system Page 37
11. Scrap disposal: Page 37

11.1 Machine demolition Page 37
11.2 Ecology information Page 37
12. Problems and relative solutions: Page 37
13. legislative statements: Page 115
ENGLISH
14. Service Network: Page 117
∞∞∞∞∞∞∞∞∞∞∞∞∞∞∞∞
Installation and maintenance “S” series gear units

2.1. INTRODUction: (see chapter 1.) Page 24
2.2. TECHNICAL DATA: (see chapter 2.) Page 25
2.3 . SUPPLY CONDITION: (see chapter 3.) Page 28
2.4 . PACKING, HANDLING, RECEIVING, STORAGE: (see chapter 4.) Page 28
2.5. Installation: Page 38
2.5.1 General instructions (see chapter 5.1) Page 38
2.5.2 Installation instructions for flange mounted gear unit (see chapter 5.2) Page 31
2.5.4 Installation instructions for shaft mounted gear unit (see chapter 5.4) Page 31
2.5.4.1 Mounting the reaction arm on the gear unit (see chapter 5.4.1) Page 31
2.5.4.2 Installing the gear unit with an FS output Page 38
2.5.4.3 Disassembling the torque coupling and gear unit Page 39
2.5.7 Accessory installation instructions (see chapter 5.7) Page 33
2.6. START-UP OF AUXILIARIES

(BRAKES - CLUTCHES- ETC.): (see chapter 6) Page 33
2.7. LUBRICATION: (see chapter 7.) Page 33
2.8. CHECKS: (see chapter 8.) Page 36
2.9. Maintenance: (see chapter 9.) Page 36
2.10. MAINTENANCE OF AUXILIARIES
(BRAKES - CLUTCHES- ETC.): (see chapter 10.) Page 37
2.11. SCRAP DISPOSAL: (see chapter 11.) Page 37
2.12. PROBLEMS AND RELATIVE SOLUTIONS: (see chapter 12.) Page 37
2.13. LEGISLATIVE STATEMENTS: (see chapter 13.) Page 115
2.14. SERVICE NETWORK: (see chapter 14.) Page 117
23
1. Introduction: foreseen at the moment the project has been studied.
Improper use of the gearbox is forbidden.
Brevini Riduttori S.p.A. would like thank you for choosing one of Any change or replacement of machine parts, which has not been
its products and is pleased to include you among its preferred authorized by BREVINI RIDUTTORI S.p.A. , may represent an
Customers. accident risk and therefore releases the manufacturer from any
The company hopes you will be satisfied when using the gear civil or penal liabilities, and makes the warranty unvalid.
unit.
1.4 General warnings
1.1 How to consult the Manual Personnel must be informed about the following subjects
It is easy to consult this manual by referring to the table of regarding machine operating safety:
contents which can be used to find the subject of interest very - Accident risks.
quickly. The chapters are organized into a hierarchical structure - D.P.I. devices designed to ensure operator safety (individual
that makes it easier to find the required information. protection devices: goggles, gloves, hard-hat, etc.).
- General accident-prevention rules or those set forth by
1.2 Scope of the Manual international directives and by the laws of the country where the
This manual provides the Gear unit user with all the information machine will be used.
necessary to ensure correct installation, use and maintenance When delivered, check that the Gear unit has not been damaged
in compliance with the safety restrictions set forth by current during transport and that any accessories are complete.
standards. - Before standing to work, the operator must be familiar with
To understand this manual even better, we would like to describe machine features and must have read this entire manual.
the following terms used in the document:
1.5 Reproduction and copyright restrictions
HAZARDOUS AREA: area within or in proximity to the machine BREVINI RIDUTTORI S.p.A. reserves all rights.
in which the presence of an exposed person represents a risk to It is prohibited to reproduce all or a portion of the structure and
the safety and health of that person. contents of this manual, unless expressly authorized by BREVINI
RIDUTTORI S.p.A.. Furthermore, it is prohibited to store such
EXPOSED PERSON: any person who is inside all or part of a information on any type of support (magnetic, magnetic-optical,
hazardous area. microfilm, photocopies, etc.).
OPERATOR: person assigned to install, operate, adjust, perform 1.6 Revisions

routine maintenance and clean the machine. Subsequent revisions of the manual will be issued as a result of
machine functional changes or replacements.
SKILLED TECHNICIAN: a specialized person who performs
unscheduled maintenance or pairs requiring special knowledge 2. Technical data:
of the machine, its operation, safety devices and relative Each gear unit is supplied with an identification nameplate
operating methods. and a manufacture’s declaration (as per the enclosure II B)
which have been prepared according to EEC directive 392 and
subsequent amendments. The identification nameplate contains
ATTENTION: Operator accident-prevention standards the main technical data regarding the functional and construction
features of the gear unit. Therefore, it must always be visible and
undamaged.
WARNING: The machine and/or its parts may be
damaged 1) Reduction ratio
2) Serial number
3) Type or gear unit/Gear unit output
PRECAUTION: Additional information regarding the 4) Year built
operation being carried out 5) Gear unit input
NOTE: Provides useful information 6) Gear unit weight
For any doubts or if the manual has been damaged or lost,

please do not hesitate to contact the BREVINI RIDUTTORI
S.p.A. Technical Service Department.
1.3 Warranty Conditions

BREVINI RIDUTTORI S.p.A. warrants that its products shall be
free from defects for a period of 12 months from the date the
product is shown to have been placed
in operation by original user and/or in any case for a period of
maximum 18 months from the date of shipment.
The warranty shall not be valid if the defect or not conformity will
prove to be depending on not correct on not suitable applications
of the product, or if the product has been uncorrectly placed in
operation.
The warranty by BREVINI RIDUTTORI S.p.A. is expressly
limited to the repair or replacement of the defected product,
which is returned our factory after notification of failure, and
thereafter if the product is found by BREVINI RIDUTTORI S.p.A.
to be, in fact, defective.
BREVINI RIDUTTORI S.p.A. shall not be liable for any damages,
either material or economic, resulting from or caused by any 1
defects. Brevini Riduttori S.p.A. will only be liable for repair or
replacement of the product.
The gearbox is intended to be used in suitable environment
and for suitable applications in appliance with what has been 2 3 4 5 6
24
2.1 Code description
ED 2090 MR 20 FL350 B3
Gear
unit Reduction
Gear unit
Reduction
Gear unit Construction
family size output ratio input form
2.2 Configurations
ENGLISH
Horizzontal Position Vertical Position
in line
Right angle
Magnetic drain plug Oil level plug Breather and filling plug
25
in line Horizzontal Position
Right angle
Vertical Position
FL620 - FL635 BRAKES 5” AND 9” BRAKES
Magnetic drain plug Breather and filling plug

oil level plug Brake opening control coupling
26
2.3 Versions of gear-coupling unit with active clutch safety system
ENGLISH
BREATHER AND FILLING
TAPPO CARICO PLUG
E SFIATO TAPPO MAGNETICO
MAGNETIC DRAIN PLUG E SCARICO
SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL

TAPPO
OIL LEVELLIVELLO
PLUG PRESA COMANDO ELETTROVALVOLA
SOCKET
PRESAPRESSURE
CIRCUIT PER RILEVAMENTO
GAUGE
SOCKET (1/4 GasCIRCUITO
PRESSIONE plug) (Tappo 1/4 Gas)
27
3. Supply condition: To move packages, use lifting equipment that is suitable for the
type of packing and for which the capacity is indicated on such
The exterior of the gear units are painted with a synthetic equipment.
epoxy primer (“RAL 5010” blue), unless otherwise indicated in
the contracts. Such protection can withstand normal industrial
environments, including outdoor sites, while additional synthetic
top coats can also be applied. If the machine will be used under
particularly aggressive environmental conditions, special types
of paints can also be applied.
The machined external parts of the gear unit, such as the ends
of the hollow and non-hollow shafts, support surfaces, spigots,
etc. are protected with rust-inhibitor oil (tectyl). The internal parts
of the gear unit casings and drives are also protected with rust-
inhibitor oil.
All the gear units, unless otherwise indicated in the contracts,
are supplied without lubrication (as indicated by a special
adhesive sticker attached to the gear unit to notify the user
of such a supply condition).
4. Packing, handling, receiving, storage:

Do not tilt or turn the package upside down while lifting or during
4.1 Packing transport.
Brevini Riduttori S.p.A. products are packed and shipped in

crates or on pallets, depending on the specific case. If the packages are unloaded from a fork-lift truck, make sure the
- All Brevini products, unless otherwise indicated in the contracts, weight is balanced on the forks.
are packed with wrapping that can withstand normal
industrial environments.
4.2 Handling
Note: the weight shown on the nameplate does not include any
accessories: such as brakes, motor flanges, wheel flanges, etc.;
consequently, to obtain the gear unit + accessories total weight,
please add, depending on the gear unit size, a max approximate
extra weight of 40 kg. for input accessories; for output
accessories, please calculate a max value equal to approx. the
8% of the gear unit weight depending on the unit size.
If necessary, place wooden wedges under the package to make

lifting easier.
28
ENGLISH
The strap holding the product to the packing is sharp. It
If the packages are unloaded with a hoist and, in any case, with may hit the operator while the product is being unloaded.
a hook, make sure that the load is balanced and for slinging The packing must be eliminated as follows:
use lifting accessories that are legally certified. For packages - use a pair of shears to cut the straps (warning: the ends may
shipped on pallets, make sure that the lifting accessories do not hit the operator)
damage the machine. - cut or remove the external packing
- cut the internal strap (warning: the ends may hit the
operator)
- remove the machine from the pallets.
If the machine has been damaged or if there are any defects
or missing parts, immediately notify the BREVINI RIDUTTORI
S.p.A. Service department: Tel. ++3905229281, Fax
++390522928300.
4.4 Handling the machine without packing
While lifting and positioning the package, avoid any violent

impacts or bumps.
4.3 Receiving

Before removing the machine from its packing make sure
it is solidly attached to the lifting accessories so that it cannot
slide or flip over. Before handling the machine, remove the wood
blocks inserted in the packing to keep it stable during shipment.
Lift the machine making sure the load remains balanced during
the various operations.
When the Machine is receiving, make sure the supply

corresponds to what is specified in the order. Also check that
the package and its contents have not been damaged during
transport.
29
4.5 Storage
- Deep the package away from any passage areas.
If the product must be stored for more than 2 months, do the following:
- Protect the shafts and the spigots with a film or grease and/or rust-inhibitor
liquids
- Completely fill the gear unit and any multi-disk brake with suitable oil (see
tparagraph 7.4)
-Store the machine in a cool place at a temperature ranging from -5°C to
+30°C
- Protect the packages against dirt, dust and moisture.
NOTE: For extended storage of more than 6 months, the rotating seals
will no longer be efficient. It is recommended to check them periodically
by turning the internal gears by and rotating the input shaft. For a
negative multi-disk brake, release the brake by using a hydraulic pump
or similar device (see paragraph 8.1 for the brake opening pressure). It is
recommended to replace the gaskets when the machine is started.
- If possible, insert wooden wedges between the package and
the floor.
5. Installation:
5.1 General instructions
Install the Product carefully following the steps listed below:

- When installing the Gear unit, make sure the oil, breather,
level and drain plugs are in the correct position. Their position
will vary according to the assembly position (see paragraph 2.2
Configurations).
_ If the gear unit is supplied in the multi-disk brake configuration,
make sure that the brake oil, breather, level and drain plugs are
in the correct position?. Their position will vary according to the
assembly position (see paragraph 2.2 Configurations).
- The brakes in general must be correctly connected to their
specific control circuits and, for hydraulically controlled brakes,
they must be bled like the hydraulic circuit.
- When installing RPR or MDU series gear units, be very careful
- Do not stacks pieces on top of each other not to damage any grease pipes or those used to empty the oil in
- Do not walk on or place pieces on top of the package. the gear unit (located on the side of the gear unit support). They
should be positioned so that it is easy to access the grease gun
and any oil expansion tank (during installation protect the pipes
and the tank).
- The Gear unit is normally supplied with a flange for coupling the
electric, hydraulic and air motors.
- The customer is responsible for installing suitable guards
for the input shafts, as well as couplings, pulleys, belts, etc.,
according to the current safety standards in force in the country
where the machine is used.
- For Gear units installed outdoors, use rust-inhibitor paint and
protect the oil guard and relative sliding guides with water-
repellent grease and provide protection against bad weather.
Note: BREVINI RIDUTTORI S.p.A. advises against filling its

products with oil prior to installation
- Do not store any material inside the package.
30
5.2 Installation instructions for flange mounted gear unit - Insert it above the shaft of the gear unit whose external surface
was previously lubricated.
-They must be attached to a rigid structure with a clean support - degrease the internal surface of the gear unit shaft and the
surface that is perpendicular to the drive axis. machine shaft.
- The spigots and the coupling surfaces of the gear unit must - Insert the gear unit on the machine shaft or vice versa
be clean without any dents. The checks described above are (excessive axial force should not be
particularly important ensure perfect alignment between the necessary).
driven shaft and the output shaft of the gear unit. This is even - Position the center line of the
more important for gear units with a splined fermale output shaft coupling on the center line of the
which cannot bear any radial or axial loads. useful section of the machine shaft
- Lubricate all the spigots of the gear unit and the housing seat (see fig. No. 1). During this operation
with grease or oil. refer to dimension “a” which will vary
- After having inserted the gear unit into its housing and having according to the size of the coupling,
placed it in the correct position, fit the reference pins in their seats, as indicated here in the table No. 1
ENGLISH
then tighten the attachment bolts (recommended minimum class - Use a torque wrench and
8.8), applying torque as indicated in the table “torque setting” gradually tighten all the bolts in the
paragraph 8.1, making sure that such torque settings are coupling in a circular direction (not
compatible with the other parts (nuts and/or structure). diametrically opposed) until they Fig. n. 1
are fully tightened at a torque setting
NOTE: It is recommended to use class 10.9 or 12.9 bolts where corresponding to the value reported
the application involves severe impacts, frequent stops, starts, in the table No. 1.
reversals or when it exceeds 70% of the maximum tolerated - Check that the 2 rings remain concentric and parallel while
torque. tightening, keeping in mind that the maximum tolerated
parallelism error is 0.25-0.35% of the external diameter of the
NOTE: During installation, for right angle gear units with a male couplings.
input shaft, the input axis may not be in the ideal position.
To solve this problem, it is recommended to do the following: NOTE: Excessive tightening may permanently deform the inner
- for connections using couplings which can compensate for the ring, thus refer to the torque settings indicated in the table.
misalignments, measure the existing misalignment, check the
acceptable misalignment from the coupling and, if the value is
greater, shim the motor to obtain the acceptable clearances 5.4.3 Disassembling the coupling and the gear unit
- for a connection with mechanical devices that cannot be used
to compensate for the clearances, align the motor using shims. - Gradually release the attachment bolts in a circular direction.
Initially each bolt must be backed off only a quarter of a turn
5.3 Installation instructions for a foot mounted gear unit to prevent the attachment elements from seizing and to avoid
tilting.
- Make sure that the assembly feet rest on a flat surface. If not, - Remove the gear unit from the driven shaft. To do this a hole
shim them so that all are level. on the gear unit shaft can also be used to pump oil under low
- An improper support for the feet may break the unit. pressure so that it can be pulled off gradually.
- Attach the unit using bolts with a minimum class 8.8 tightened - remove the coupling from the gear unit shaft.
at the torque settings indicated in paragraph 8.1.
Table No. 1
5.4 Installation instructions for a shaft mounted gear unit Dimensions Bolts
Disk type a
d. sh. dxD H2 n Tipo Ma
Particular attention is required when installing these gear units, SD 62 M 50 62 x 110 29 10 M6 x 25 12 17
therefore follow the instructions described below.
SD 100 M 75 100 x 170 43 12 M8 x 35 29 30
5.4.1 Mounting the reaction arm on the gear unit SD 125 M 90 125 x 215 52 12 M10 x 40 58 35
SD 140 M 100 140 x 230 58 10 M12 x 45 100 40
- Check that spigots of the gear unit and the reaction arm are SD 165 M 120 165 x 290 68 8 M16 x 55 240 45
clean, not dented and that there are no traces if paint. SD 175 M 130 175 x 300 68 8 M16 x 55 240 45
- Lubricate the couplings and insert the reaction arm on the gear SD 185 M 140 185 x 330 85 10 M16 x 65 240 55
unit spigot, then insert any dowels. SD 185 H 140 185 x 330 112 15 M16 x 80 240 55
- Attach the reaction arm using minimum class 8.8 bolts.
- It is recommended to use class 10.9 or 12.9 bolts where the SD 220 H 165 220 x 370 134 20 M16 x 90 240 67
application involves severe impacts, frequent stops or starts, SD 240 H 180 240 x 405 144 15 M20 x 100 490 72
reversals or when it exceeds 70% of the maximum gear unit SD 280 H 220 280 x 460 172 20 M20 x 120 490 87
torque. SD 340 H 260 340 x 570 200 20 M24 x 120 820 102
- Check that the reaction arm anchor system does not lock the SD 390 H 300 390 x 660 212 24 M24 x 140 820 120
gear unit, but allows it to move freely in space in order to absorb
the movements imposed in it by the shaft.
For torque settings refer to the table “torque setting” paragraph 5.4.4 Installing the gear unit with an FP output
8.1, making sure that such settings are compatible with the other
parts (nuts and/or attachment structures). - Insert the stop ring, if provided, in its housing on the shaft
pos.n°1.
5.4.2 Installing the gear unit with an FS output - Grease the seats of the o-rings pos. N°2 and 3 on the cover
pos.n°4; then insert the respective o-rings in their seats; then
NOTE: the connection couplings are supplied ready for insert the cover on the shaft.
installation, therefore they need not be disassembled prior to the - Insert the other stop ring pos.n°5, then the tongue pos.n°6 in
initial installation. their respective seats on the shaft.
- Assemble the torque arm pos. N°7 on the reduction gear.
- Slightly unscrew three bolts of the torque coupling located at - Suitably lubricate both the shaft and its seat (reduction gear
120° until the inner ring can just be turned by and (excessive female shaft); then carry out coupling of the shaft and the
tightening might deform the inner ring). reduction gear (do not force).
31
- Place the cover indicates the point of major eccentricity, corresponding to the
pos. n°4, clamping 7
maximum meshing reached between the pinion and the fifth
it with the screws 4 3 wheel; whether the gear unit is placed inside or outside the fifth
and the respective 9
wheel. (see fig.)
“B”
dowty washers pos. The value of clearance between the sides of the pinion teeth
n°8 (supplied with and the fifth wheel, is obtained by multiplying the value of the
accessories), taking 5 6 teething module by the two fixed values of 0.03 and 0.04.
care to gradually
screw the screws in a Example: for teething of m = 20, simply multiply 20 x 0.03
circular direction (not 1
= 0.6 and 20 x 0.04 = 0.8, to obtain two values
in the diametrically “A1” of 0.6 and 0.8; this means that the clearance of
opposite direction) until 8
the sides of the teeth for perfect meshing must
completely clamped have a value which falls between 0.6 and 0.8
using a torque given in “A” = Obligatory locking groove
“A1” or “B” = alternative extraction groove mm., thus the gear unit is placed with the notch
the “tightening torque” in correspondence with the three coloured teeth,
table, paragraph 8.1 (usually green), of the fifth wheel, turn the gear
(screw classes 8.8), by means of medium loctyte. unit to move it closer to the fifth wheel, inserting
- Assemble all the other screws and relative dowty washers the shim value as resulting from the described
pos.n°9 (omitting one at the top),insert further lubricant in the calculation in the sides of the teeth which are
hole which has been left open; then assemble this last screw as meshed with the fifth wheel or the pinion; then
well to thus close the coupling in a lubricated hermetic chamber, clamp the gear unit.
by means of medium loctyte.
Check the clearance between the sides at different points
around the pitch circle of the fifth wheel a second time.
5.4.5 Disassembling the gear unit with an FP output
After having positioned the gear unit and checked the situation,
- Whilst suitably supporting the reduction gear free the torque tighten the fixing screws (minimum recommended class 8.8) by
arm. applying a tightening torque as shown in the “tightening torque”
- Remove the screws pos.n°9 replacing them with longer screws, table, paragraph 8.1, making sure that they are compatible with
suitable for the room available. their counterparts (nuts and/ or fixing structure).
- Remove the screws pos. N°8; then screw the screws pos. n°9
gradually in a circular direction (not in the diametrically opposite ATTENTION when positioning gear unit with eccentric, all
direction) until the reduction gear is unlocked. the holes for oil level, load and discharge, engine controls,
laminated brake etc .etc.- will be moved out of place with
WARNING: the dowty type washers in pos. N°8 and 9 cannot respect to the “BREVINI” drawings.
be reused when reassembling the reduction gear after repairs
or any other type of operation; they must always be replaced 5.6 Installation instructions for gear unit-coupler assembly
with new washers. with active clutch safety system
5.5 Installing the gear unit type “RPR” When preparing to install this kind of assembly, the first thing to
remember is that the whole internal drive is held in place by the
- The units must be fixed to a rigid structure and the supporting clutch on the assembly.
surface should be thoroughly clean, with no trace of soldering Consequently, if the output shaft doesn’t rotate, it will be difficult
waste, at right angles to the driving axes. to install the assembly in its housing if the gear unit fitting holes
- The centring and coupling surfaces of the gear unit must be do not coincide with the holes in the interface on the vehicle
clean and dent free. itself.
The measures described above are essential for ensuring To line up these holes, you have to release the clutch so that the
perfect meshing between the gear pinion and the fifth wheel. output shaft can rotate freely.
Fifth wheel constructors usually mark three teeth of the fifth To do this, use a hand-operated hydraulic pump, as the clutch
wheel green; the point of major ovality of the pitch ø used for can be opened with a minimum pressure of 3 to 5 bar, then
positioning the gear unit. proceed carefully with the steps listed below:
(for the location of the symbols see chapter 2.2.1)
ATTENTION It is advisable to contact the constructors of the fifth - lift the assembly with suitable lifting equipment and fit the
wheel direct if there are no coloured (usually green) teeth on the gear unit output shaft into its housing on the vehicle, keeping it
fifth wheel, or other distinguishing marks. supported all the time and trying to mate the fitting holes in the
assembly with those in the vehicle.
If the gear unit is of the type with a rest and an eccentric to - connect the hand-operated hydraulic pump to the assembly
regulate the clearance between the pinion and the ring gear, via the 1/4 gas hole
then there should be a notch on the fifth wheel (see fig.) which - power up (12 Volt) the solenoid valve on the on the power pack
so that the valve is excited.
- Using the pump, increase the pressure on the assembly slowly
and gradually it can be rotated by hand.
ATTENTION: if the solenoid valve is not excited, the hydraulic

pump simply pumps the oil into the assembly.
- at this point, the assembly can be rotated easily so as to align

the fitting holes with the interface on the vehicle; this done,
insert the pins (if needed) and attachment bolts (recommended
minimum class 8.8) , applying torque as indicated in the “torque
setting” table, paragraph 8.1, making sure that these settings are
compatible with the nuts and/or structure.
- if this operation is performed with the gear unit output shaft not
Notch Painted Teeth inserted in its housing, it will be very difficult to get the assembly
32
fitting holes in phase with the shaft spline, and the only way to 6.3 Gear unit-coupler assembly with active clutch safety
set the timing will be by trial and error. system
- After fixing the assembly in position, cut off the current to the
solenoid valve, disconnect the hand-operated hydraulic pump - the hydraulic pump used by the power pack is reversible,
and refit the 1/4 Gas plug. thus guaranteeing the same constant pressure at all times,
regardless of the direction of rotation
5.7 Accessory installation instructions ATTENTION: the pressure relief valve on the power pack has
been pre-set to the right pressure (25.5 ± 2 bar). It is absolutely
Motor Assembly: forbidden to alter this valve setting.
While assembling the gear unit on the motor, the coupling
must be lubricated with a thin layer of grease or with a no-grip - power up the solenoid valve with direct current (12 Volt) via
lubricant. the socket on the power pack (see chapter 2.2.1 for location of
Carefully insert the motor shaft in to the coupling and make sure symbol)
ENGLISH
that the motor spigot perfectly matches the gear unit spigot.
After checking that the motor is properly centered, tighten all - to prime the hydraulic pump (after filling the assembly with
the attachment bolts applyng the torque indicated in the table lubricating oil), simply start the coupler PTO rotating, as the
“torque setting” paragraph 8.1. pump is self-priming.
Accessory Assembly: 7. LUBRICATION:

To mount pinions, pulleys or couplings, use suitable equipment
avoid seizing. As an alternative, heat the piece to 80°-100° C. 7.1 Gear unit lubrication
Lubricate the grooves with a thin layer of grease or a no-grip The Brevini gear units are supplied without oil, therefore the
lubricant and tighten attachment bolts applyng the torque user must the lubricant according to what is indicated in the
indicated in the table “torque setting “ paragraph 8.1. table shown in paragraph 7.4.
6. START-UP OF AUXILIARIES (BRAKES - CLUTCHES- ETC.): Basic oil specifications

The basic parameters of the selected oil are:
6.1 Negative multi-disk brake - viscosity at nominal operating conditions
- additives
NOTE: The negative multi-disk brake is used only as a parking The oil must lubricate the bearings and the gears and all these
brake, or in special situation as an emergency brake. components work inside the same box, in different operating
- Connect the fittings of the system hydraulic cirsuit to the brake conditions. We will look at these parameters one by one.
control hole (see paragraph 2.2 “configuration”) of all the gear
units with these features installed in the system. 7.1.1 Viscosity
- Pressurize the hydraulic circuit and then bleed all brakes. Nominal viscosity is referred to a temperature of 40 °C, but
Slightly unscrew the brake control fitting, and maintain pressure rapidly decreases with an increase in the temperature of the
until only oil is expeloled without any air. Then re-tghten the gear unit.
fitting. If the operating temperature is between 50 °C and 70 °C, a
nominal viscosity can be chosen according to the following guide
6.2 Disk brake table, choosing the highest viscosity if the highest temperature
is foreseen.
- Connect the fittings of the system brake circuit to the brake
control hole “A” (see fig. No. 2) of the brake clamp located on n2 [rpm] 50 °C 70 °C
the gear unit for all the gear units with these features installed in
the system. >20 VG150 VG220
Bleed The brakes after injecting oil into the circuit (remove the air <5 VG220 VG320
from the brake circuit).
- At least two persons are needed to carry aout this operation. <5 VG320 VG460
NOTE: For the bleeding operation Fig. n. 2 7.1.2 Additives

it is recommended, after having B In addition to the normal antifoaming and antioxidant additives,
removed the rubber guard of the it is important to use lubricating oils with additives that have EP
bleder valve “B”, to attach a piece of (extreme-pressure) and antiwear properties, according to ISO
rubber hose with a lenght of about 6743-6 L-CKC or DIN 51517-3 CLP. Clearly, therefore, products
20 cm to collect any oil into a can with stronger EP characteristics will have to be found for slower
(wich should not be doumped in gear unit speeds. It should be remembered that the chemical
the environment since such oil is a compounds replacing hydrodynamic lubrication are formed to
major polluttant). the detriment of the original EP load. Therefore, with very low
speeds and high loads it is important to keep to the maintenance
- Slightly unscrew (1 turn) the bleeder intervals so as not to diminish the lubricating characteristics of
valve “B” and keep activating the the oil excessively
brake control until only oil without
any oir is expelled from the vlave.
Immediatelly close the valve and
release the brake control. A
NOTE: if oil not expelled the first time the brake control is actived
close the bleeder valve and release the brake control. Then
open the valve again and activate the brake control and continue
in this manner until only oil is expelled.
- Repeat this operation for all gear units with these features
installed in the system, then top-up the oil in the brake circuit.
33
Checking the oil with non-forced lubrication - The lubricant oil used in the gear unit-coupler assembly with
If the gear unit is fitted horizontally, the oil level should be at the active clutch safety system is the same as the oil used in the
centre if proper lubrication is to be guaranteed (see fig. 7). clutch pump.
- Turn the gear unit a few times to eliminate any air pockets and
then check the various levels.
7.2 Expansion tank
ATTENTION: make sure the expansion tank is installed higher

than the top part of the gear unit.
For applications with an expansion tank, do the following: (see

figure 3).
- Remove the plug “A”
- To enhance gear unit ventilation A
Fig. 7 (only during the filling phase) it is also
possible to remove one of the top of
the gear unit.
For applications with a very low output rotation speed (n2 ≤ 5 - As the oil rises to the top of the open
rpm) it is advisable to fix the level at a value higher than 50-100 plug in the top part of the gear unit,
mm (see fig. 8). replace the plug.
max
To check the oil level, simply use a transparent tube, positioning - Continue filling until the oil reaches
it as shown in fig. 8. the min. visual level plug on the tank
If the output speed is extremely low (n2 ≤ 1 rpm), or if long gear which should not to be exceeded to
unit downtimes are foreseen, it is advisable to fill the entire provide space for the volume of the
casing. In this case, a special “expansion tank” must be fitted. hot oil to expand.
- Replace the plug. min
- With the gear unit running under
steady-state thermal conditions, and
the oil at its maximum expansion
temperature, never exceed the max. Fig. nϒ 3
level.
- Run the gear unit for a few minutes
to eliminate any air pockets, then check the various levels.
Vertical in-line fitting and right-angled fitting with expansion tank
Fig. 8
If a gauge is fitted for checking the level visually (or by means of

an electrical signal), this must be fitted as shown in the diagram
in fig. 9. Position the breather cap above the level indicator,
using a tube of the right length, connecting the upper (empty)
part of the gear unit to just below the breather. This will prevent
oil from spilling out.
Fig. 9
Filing and level

- The gear units are equipped with oil level, breather, filer
and drain plugs and their position changes according to the
installation configuration.
- Check the exact position of the plugs using the diagrams on
paragraph 2.2 “configuration”. 7.3 Brake lubrication
- Unscrew the level-filler plugs, put oil into the Gear unit and
when this oil flows out of the level hole, replace the plugs. Multi-disk brake
- In the RPR or MDU series, one of the support bearings must be - The Brevini multi-disk brakes are supplied without oil.
lubricated with grease, using the grease gun located above the - The user must select the lubricant features.
gear unit attachment flange, and using a generic type of grease - To lubricate the multi-disk brake unit, Brevini Riduttori
with the features indicated in paragraph 7.3. recommends using mineral oils with enhanced heat and aging
34
resistance and viscosity ISO VG 32, with a viscosity index
greater than or equal to 95. Table of lubricant oils suitable for alimentary use
- Hydraulic oils are suitable, in general. (Approved according to USDA-H1 and NSF-H1 specifications)
Hydraulic oils
Lubricant
Multi-disk brake filling and level ISO VG 32 ISO VG 46 ISO VG 68
- The multi-disk brakes are equipped with oil level, filler and drain Agip Rocol Foodlube H1 power 32 - -
plugs and their position changes according to the installation Aral Eural Hyd 32 Eural Hyd 46 Eural Hyd 68
configuration. Bel-Ray No-Tox HD Hydr Oil 32 No-Tox HD Hydr Oil 46 No-Tox HD Hydr Oil 68
- Check the exact position of the plugs using the diagrams on BP Enerpar M 32 Enerpar M 46 Enerpar M 68
page 7. Chevron Lubricating Oil FM 32 Lubricating Oil FM 46 Lubricating Oil FM 68
- Unscrew the level/filler plugs, put oil into the brake and when Esso Nuto FG 32 Nuto FG 46 Nuto FG 68
this oil flows out of the level hole, replace the plugs. Keystone Nevastane SL 32 Nevastane SL 46 Nevastane SL 68
- Turn the brake a few times to eliminate any air pockets and Klüber Summit Hysyn FG 32 Summit Hysyn FG 46 Summit Hysyn FG 68
then check the various levels. Mobil DTE FM 32 DTE FM 46 DTE FM 68
ENGLISH
Nils Mizar 32 Mizar 46 Mizar 68
Optimol Optileb HY 32 Optileb HY 46 Optileb HY 68
Disk brake
Pakelo No-Tox Oil Hydr. ISO 32 No-Tox Oil Hydr. ISO 46 No-Tox Oil Hydr. ISO 68
- Disk brake do not require any lubrication. Royal Purple Poly-Guard FDA 32 Poly-Guard FDA 46 Poly-Guard FDA 68
Shell Cassida Fluid HF 32 Cassida Fluid HF 46 Cassida Fluid HF 68
7.4 Grease features Texaco Cygnus Hydraulic Oil 32 Cygnus Hydraulic Oil 46 Cygnus Hydraulic Oil 68
Tribol Food Proof 1840 - 32 Food Proof 1840 - 46 Food Proof 1840 - 68
Type of soap: stearate hydroxide lithium 12 or equivalent Gear Oils
Consistency: NLGI No. 2 Lubricant
ISO VG 150 ISO VG 220 ISO VG 320
Base Oil: Mineral oil with viscosity from 100 to 320 cST Agip Rocol Foodlube H1 Torque 150 - Rocol Foodlube H1 Torque 150
at 40°C Aral Eural Gear 150 Eural Gear 220 -
Additives: Rust inhibitors Bel-Ray No-Tox Syn Gear 150 No-Tox Syn Gear 220 No-Tox Syn Gear 320
Viscosity index: 80 Minimum Chevron - Lubricating Oil FM 220 -
Pour point: -10° C maximum Esso - Gear Oil 220 -
Keystone Nevastane EP 150 Nevastane EP 220 Nevastane EP 320
7.4 Lubricant table Klüber Klüberoil 4 UH1 N 150 Klüberoil 4 UH1 N 220 Klüberoil 4 UH1 N 320
Mobil DTE FM 150 DTE FM 220 DTE FM 320
Nils Ripress Synt Food 150 Ripress Synt Food 220 Ripress Synt Food 320
Mineral Optimol Optileb GT 150 Optileb GT 220 Optileb GT 320
Lubricant
ISO VG 150 ISO VG 220 ISO VG 320 Pakelo No-Tox Oil Gear ISO 150 No-Tox Oil Gear ISO 220 No-Tox Oil Gear ISO 320
Agip Blasia 150 Blasia 220 Blasia 320 Royal Purple Poly-Guard FDA 150 Poly-Guard FDA 220 Poly-Guard FDA 320
Aral Drgol BG 150 Drgol BG 220 Drgol BG 220 Shell Cassida Fluid GL 150 Cassida Fluid GL 220 Cassida Fluid GL 320
BP Energol GR-XP 150 Energol GR-XP 220 Energol GR-XP 320 Texaco Cygnus Gear PAO 150 Cygnus Gear PAO 220 Cygnus Gear PAO 320
Castrol Alphamax 150 Alphamax 220 Alphamax 320 Tribol - Food Proof 1840 - 220 Food Proof 1840 - 320
Cepsa Engranajes HP 150 Engranajes HP 220 Engranajes HP 320
Dea Falcon CLP 150 Falcon CLP 220 Falcon CLP 320 7.6 Diagrams and oil checking with auxiliary cooling system
Elf Lubmarine Epona Z 150 Epona Z 220 Epona Z 320
Esso Spartan EP 150 Spartan EP 220 Spartan EP 320 Horizontal gear unit
Fuchs Renep Compound 104 Renep Compound 106 Renep Compound 108
See paragraph 7.1 for levels.
Fuchs Lubritech Gearmaster CLP 150 Gearmaster CLP 220 Gearmaster CLP 320
Klüber Klüberoil GEM 1-150 Klüberoil GEM 1-220 Klüberoil GEM 1-320
Mobil Mobilgear XMP 150 Mobilgear XMP 220 Mobilgear XMP 320
Nils Ripress EP 150 Ripress EP 220 Ripress EP 320
Omv Gear HST 150 Gear HST 220 Gear HST 320
Optimol Optigear BM 150 Optigear BM 220 Optigear BM 320
Q8 Goya NT 150 Goya NT 220 Goya NT 320
Repsol Super Tauro 150 Super Tauro 220 Super Tauro 320
Shell Omala 150 Omala 220 Omala 320
Texaco Meropa 150 Meropa 220 Meropa 320
TotalFinaElf Carter EP 150 Carter EP 220 Carter EP 320
Tribol 1100 - 150 1100 - 220 1100 - 320
Synthetic
Lubricant
ISO VG 150 ISO VG 220 ISO VG 320
Agip - Blasia SX 220 Blasia SX 320
Aral Drgol PAS 150 Drgol PAS 220 Drgol PAS 220 Vertical gear unit
BP Enersyn EXP 150 Enersyn EXP 220 Enersyn EXP 320 See paragraph n° 7.2 for definition of levels, also for right angle
Castrol Alphasyn 150 Alphasyn 220 Alphasyn 320 gear units
Cepsa Engranajes HPX 150 Engranajes HPX 220 Engranajes HPX 320
Dea Intor HCLP 150 Intor HCLP 220 Intor HCLP 320
Elf Lubmarine - Epona SA 220 Epona SA 320
Esso Spartan SEP 150 Spartan SEP 220 Spartan SEP 320
Fuchs Renolin unisyn CLP 150 Renolin unisyn CLP 220 Renolin unisyn CLP 320
Fuchs Lubritech Gearmaster SYN 150 Gearmaster SYN 220 Gearmaster SYN 320
Klüber Klübersynth EG 4-150 Klübersynth EG 4-220 Klübersynth EG 4-320
Mobil Mobilgear SHC XMP 150 Mobilgear SHC XMP 220 Mobilgear SHC XMP 320
Nils - Ripress EP 220 -
Omv - Gear SHG 220 Gear SHG 320
Optimol Optigear Synthetic A 150 Optigear Synthetic A 220 Optigear Synthetic A 320
Q8 El Greco 150 El Greco 220 El Greco 320
Shell Omala HD 150 Omala HD 220 Omala HD 320
Texaco Pinnacle EP 150 Pinnacle EP 220 Pinnacle EP 320
TotalFinaElf Carter SH 150 Carter SH 220 Carter SH 320
Tribol 1510 - 150 1510 - 220 1510 - 320
35
8. CHECKS: Values Table Torque Setting Bolts
8.1 First start-up checks dxp 4.8 5.8 8.8 10.8 12.9
mm. kN Nm kN Nm kN Nm kN Nm kN Nm
Before starting the machine check the following:
- Check that all the oil plug are in the correct position (see 3x0,5 1.2 0.9 1.5 1.1 2.3 1.8 3.4 2.6 4.0 3
paragraph 2.2 “configuration”). 4x0,7 2.1 1.6 2.7 2 4.1 3.1 6.0 4.5 7.0 5.3
- Check that all oil levels are correct. 5x0,8 3.5 3.2 4.4 4 6.7 6.1 9.8 8.9 11.5 10.4
- Check that all the grease guns are full of grease.
- Check that the operating pressure (see table on the right) is 6x1 4.9 5.5 6.1 6.8 9.4 10.4 13.8 15.3 16.1 17.9
sufficient to fully open the multi-disk brake to avoid overheating 7x1 7.3 9.3 9.0 11.5 13.7 17.2 20.2 25 23.6 30
and any premature wear of brake disks.
8x1 9.9 14.5 12.2 18 18.9 27 28 40 32 47
9x1,25 9.3 13.6 11.5 16.8 17.2 25 25 37 30 44
Opening pressure
(bar) Static torque 10x1,5 14.5 26.6 18 33 27 50 40 73 47 86
Type of brake (Nm)
10x1,25 15.8 28 19.5 35 30 53 43 78 51 91
Max. Min.
12x1,25 23.8 50 29 62 45 95 65 139 77 163
FL620/12 21 26 210
12x1,75 21.3 46 26 56 40 86 50 127 69 148
FL635/12 12 15 315
14x1,5 32 79 40 96 61 150 90 220 105 257
FL250.4C 10,24 13,28 181
14x2 29 73 36 90 55 137 80 201 94 235
FL250.6C 10,53 13,28 186
16x1,5 43 121 54 150 82 229 121 336 141 393
FL350.6C 15,80 19,92 278
16x2 40 113 50 141 76 214 111 314 130 369
FL350.8C 16,20 19,90 381
10x2,5 49 157 60 194 95 306 135 435 158 509
FL450.6C 20,48 25,59 360
18x1,5 57 178 70 220 110 345 157 491 184 575
FL450.8C 21,03 25,59 492
20x2,5 63 222 77 275 122 432 173 615 203 719
FL650.10C 14,20 19,92 428
20x1,5 72 248 89 307 140 482 199 687 233 804
FL650.12C 14,56 19,92 528
22x2,5 78 305 97 376 152 502 216 843 253 987
FL650.14C 15,00 19,92 633
22x1,5 88 337 109 416 172 654 245 932 266 1090
FL750.10C 18,40 25,59 556
24x3 90 383 112 474 175 744 250 1080 292 1240
FL750.12C 18,95 25,59 684
24x2 101 420 125 519 196 814 280 1160 327 1360
FL750.14C 19,49 25,59 819
27x3 119 568 147 703 230 1100 328 1570 384 1840
FL960.12C 15,56 21,98 1019
27x2 131 615 162 760 225 1200 363 1700 425 1990
FL960.14C 15,56 21,98 1189
30x3,5 144 772 178 955 280 1500 300 2130 467 2500
FL960.16C 15,56 21,98 1359
30x2 165 850 204 1060 321 1670 457 2370 535 2380
FL960.18C 15,56 21,98 1528
d = bolt diameter p = bolt pitch
kN = axiale pre-loading Nm = torque setting bolts
ATTENTION: Given the type of brake, the operating pressure
should never drop below the minimum brake opening pressure
to avoid the braking action. 8.2No-load tests
ATTENTION: The gear units and any multi- disk brakes are - After a brief period of operation (5-10 minutes) check the oil
shipped without oil. The customer is responsible for filling such levels under no-load conditions, topping up those levels which
devices (see lubrication chapter paragraph 7). have gone down check that nuts and bolts of the various
attachments are properly tightened.
- Check that all the bolts with ISO metric threads are correctly - Check that the brakes lock and release at the right time and all
tightened (see table “torque setting values”). operate correctly.
9. MAINTENANCE:
Introduction
Maintenance can be “routine or unscheduled”.
ATTENTION: All maintenance activities must be carried out

under safety conditions.
9.1 Routine maintenance:
The operator is responsible for routine maintenance and must

carry out the following activities.
- After a brief operating period of about 100 hours (breaking-
in), change the oil in the gear unit and the multi-disk brake (if
installed) and wash the interior of the unit with cleaning liquid.
- Check that there are no metallic parts with unusual dimension in
the magnetic plug of the gear unit and in any multi-disk brake.
- Change the oil in the gear unit while it is hot so that it is easier
to drain.
36
- Subsequent oil changes will be made every 200-2500 hours of compressed air to clean away any dust from the pad seats in the
operation or, in any case, each year. brake clamp, then insert the new pads.
- Do not mix different types of oil. - Mount one of the pins “A” in its seat, place the two springs “B”
- Periodically check the levels (about once a month) ant top up in their position, put them under tension, them mount the other
if necessary. pin in its seat.
- Activate the brake a few times to re-position the pistons of the
ATTENTION: when checking the oil levels in gear units brake clamp with the new pads.
equipped with a multi-disk brake or hydraulic motor or both, if - Brake a few times to check if bleeding is required.
the levels have risen, this means that oil is penetrating either
from the brake seals or from the motor rotary seal. Contract the 10.3 Maint. proc. for hydr. power pack on gear unit-coupler
“Brevini Service Department”. assembly with active clutch safety system
- For each unit it is recommended to keep a chart that will be duly - The power pack “B” has an inspectable 100 µ bronze filter,
filled out and updated each time maintenance in performed. upstream of the pressure relief valve.
ENGLISH
- With each routine
9.2 Oil Change maintenance job (oil
change) on the gear
- Use the diagrams on paragraph 2.2 “configuration” to identify unit-coupler assembly
the oil plug according to the gear unit configuration and always you are advised
paragraph 2.2 for the multi-disk brake configuration. either to change the
Unscrew the drain plug and the filler plug to help drain the oil power pack filter, by
from the gear unit. Once the oil has been emptied, replace the unscrewing the cap “A”, A C
drain plug. If the gear unit is equipped with a multi-disk brake, or at least to regenerate
repeat the same operation with the multi-disk brake. it by washing thoroughly
- In the MDU series, starting with size “550”, a pipe is supplied with solvent and blow-
to empty the oil in the gear unit, therefore it must be emptied cleaning inside the filter
using a suction pump, removing the plug from the emptying pipe with air.
located on the flange attaching the gear unit and fitting to it. - If the power pack
- Wash the interior of the gear unit with a suitable cleaning “B” has to be replaced: B
liquid that is recommended by the lubricant manufacturer. If the empty the lubricant oil
gear unit is equipped with a multi-disk brake, repeat the same out of the assembly,
operation with the multi-disk brake, as follows: cut off the current to the solenoid valve, disconnect the oil
Put liquid into the gear unit and the multi-disk brake (if any), hen delivery tube, unscrew and remove the 4 bolts pos. “C” and then
replace the filter plugs; run the device for a few minutes at a high withdraw the power pack for replacement.
speed, then remove the cleaning liquid again from the gear unit - To reassemble, go through the above steps in reverse order;
and the multi-disk brake. (if any). see par. 6.3 for resetting the power pack.
- See paragraph 7 Lubrication for filling instructions.
11. Scrap disposal:
9.3 Unscheduled maintenance
11.1 Machine demolition
Brevini Riduttori prohibits the gear unit to be opened to carry
out any operation that is not included in routine maintenance If the machine must be scrapped, it, should become non-
procedures. Brevini Riduttori do not undertake any liability for operational:
all those operations out of routine maintenance which may have - Disassemble the various parts.
caused damages to people or things. When the need arises, - Disconnect any motor unit.
contact the nearest Brevini Service Centres as listed on page But first after having completely emptied all the oil from gear
117. unit.
10. MAINTENANCE OF AUXILIARIES (BRAKES - CLUTCHES- ETC.): 11.2 Ecology information
10.1 Procedure to replace disks or seals for multi disk brakes The disposal of gear unit packaging materials, replaced parts,
components or the gear unit and lubricants must comply with
“Brevini Riduttori S.p.A.” prohibits this operation to be performed environmental restrictions, without polluting the soil, water or air.
on its units, therefore if braking action becomes inefficient contact The party receiving the materials is responsible for carrying out
the nearest Brevini Service Centres as listed on page 117. the operation in conformity with the current standards in force in
the country in which the machine is used.
10.2 Procedure to replace pads
for disk brakes Fig. n. 4
Instructions for suitable waste treatment
- Iron, aluminium, copper materials: these are recyclable
- Use a screwdriver or similar To force materials which must be sent a to a special authorized collection
tool to pry between the disk and center.
the pad to make the position - Plastic and rubber materials: these materials must be delivered
of the brake clamp retract up to to a dump or to special recycling centers.
the start of the stroke. Carry out - Used oils: deliver to a special C.Di.R.A. (in Italy the Consorzio
this operation first on one side Obbligatorio Oli Esausti).
and then on the other for both
pistons. 12. Problems and relative solutions:
- Use a pin remover and hammer
to remove one of the two pins “A” If malfunctions occur, consult the following table.
from its seat (see fig. 4), remove A If the problems continue, contact the nearest Brevini Service
the two springs “B”, then remove Center as listed on page 117.
the other pin.
- With a mechanical clamp pull
out the two worn pads, use B
37
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION “S” Serie
1) Incorrect motor as- 1) Check coupling be-
With motor sembly tween gear unit!motor 2.5. INSTALLATION:
running the 2) Internal malfunction 2) Contact a Service
output shaft malfunction Center 2.5.4.2 Installation of gear unit with FS output
doesn’t turn
3) Brake blocked 3) Check hydraulic circuit
- Glean and degrease the internal surface of the gear unit shaft
1) Level too high 1) Lower oil leve and machine shaft.
Oil leak from 2) Incorrect breather - Lubricate the coupling housing (fig.1 point A).
2) Check breather position
breather during position - If the coupling is new there is no need to disassemble it and
operation 3) Possible wear of 3) Contact a Service grease it.
multidisk brake seals or - If the coupling is being overhauled, disassemble it and grease
Center
hydraulic motor the zones marked “C” (see fig. 1).
1) Unscrew and thorougly - Remove cap “Z” (see fig. 1) in order to bleed off the air when
1) Clogged breather plug clean the plug fitting the shaft.
Oil leak 2) Clean the area and - Fit the coupling on to the gear unit without tightening the bolts,
2) Stiffening of seals due check for leakage again
from seals to prolonged storage after a few days leaving cap “Z” loose (see fig. 1).
3) Contact a Service
3) Damaged or worn seals Center
C
1) No pressure to the Z
Disk brake 1) Check hydraulic circuit
brake
doesn’t brake
2) Worn brake pads 2) Replace brake pads
1) Gear unit incorrectly 1) Check the connection A
installed and in-line configuration
Excessive 2) Coupling structure 2) Strengthen the struc-
vibrations weak ture
3) Internal malfunction Center
Excessive 1) Contact a Service
noise 1) Internal malfunction Center
Excessive 1) No ventilation 1) Remove fairing
B B
heating 2) High thermal power 2) Insert oil circulation
1) No pressure to the 1) Check connection to
brake hydraulic circuit
Multi-disk
brake doesn’t 2) Internal malfunction Center B B
release
3) No pressure in the 3) Check hydraulic circuit
circuit Fig. 1
Multi-disk brake 1) Residual pressure in the
doesn’t to look hydraulic circuit 1) Check hydraulic circuit
1) Pressure delivered to - If the gear unit is in a vertical working position with the output
Multi-disk 1) Check hydraulic circuit
brake
brake doesn’t
2) Contact a Service shaft underneath, make sure the coupling can’t come out and
brake 2) Worn disks fall; in any event, never tighten the coupling bolts before fitting
Center
the shaft into its housing.
- Fit the gear unit on to
the machine shaft or
vice versa (excessive
axial force shouldn’t be
necessary); there should
be no interference when
assembling, so make
sure the shaft and Z
gear unit are properly
aligned.
- Refit cap “Z” (see fig.
2), then position the
coupling (see fig. 2
point A)
- Using a torque wrench,
tighten all the bolts
gradually in a circular
sequence (i.e. not in a
diametrically opposite D
sequence) until they are A
all tightened to torque Fig.
value “T” in table N° 1.
- Set the torque wrench
to 3 - 5% above the
setting given in table N° 1, then tighten the coupling bolts to the
new setting.
38
Table 1
X [mm]
per tipo di chiave
Tipo giunto
y
T
d
[Nm]
S300 3009-185X30 85 M16 90 50 100 58

S400 308-185X30 11 M0 490 55 115 58
S600 308-0X370 134 M0 490 55 115 58
S850 308-40X405 144 M0 490 55 115 58
S1200 308-80X460 17 M4 840 65 10 70
S1800 308-300X485 176 M4 840 65 10 70
S2500 308-340X570 06 M7 150 — 15 85
S3500 308-360X590 10 M7 150 — 15 85
ENGLISH
- Set the torque wrench again to setting “T” in tab. 1, then
recheck the torque on the coupling bolts, taking care not to
tighten the bolts further; if this happens , repeat the torquing
procedure.
- When the fitting of the coupling has been completed correctly,
check the assembly visibly to make sure that the front surfaces Fig. 5
of the internal and external rings are on the same plane (see fig.
2 point D).
2.5.4.3 Disassembling the coupling and gear unit gasket holder cover, being careful not to exceed the following
axial loads:
- Gradually loosen the attachment bolts, proceeding in a circular
direction. Initially, loosen each bolt by just a quarter of a turn to
avoid bending and seizing. Axial load [N]
ATTENTION: because of the high axial force, if the bolts are S300 30000
unscrewed totally in one or two turns this could cause the two S400 30000
rings in the coupling to separate violently, putting the operators
in danger. S600 45000
- If the coupling rings do not come apart S850 50000

spontaneously after unscrewing the bolts, S1200 70000
transfer some of the bolts (two bolts at
180° - four bolts at 90°) into the internal S1800 80000
ring extraction holes(see fig. 3).
- Slide the coupling along its axis to S2500 100000
release it and remove cap “Z” (see fig. 4), S3500 115000
and introduce pressurised oil (max. 1000 Fig. 3
bar) through the1/8” G hole to facilitate
the detachment of the gear unit from the - If the coupling is assembled a long time before it is started up,
machine shaft. then you will have to separate the coupling rings (after removing
- If this method doesn’t free the gear unit (because of the shaft the gear unit) and clean the mating surfaces thoroughly,
coupling being unable to hold the pressure), then, if there is removing any traces of dirt, rust, etc.
- Before reinstalling the overhauled coupling, top up with
lubricant in the zones marked “C” (see fig. 2).
Fig. 4
sufficient space, you can try the method illustrated in fig. 5, using
hydraulic pushers, pressing against the 2 180° bosses on the
39
ATTESTATO DI CONFORMITA’ - UNI EN 10204 - 2.1
CONFORMITY CERTIFICATE - UNI EN 10204 - 2.1
KONFORMITÄTSBESCHEINIGUNG - UNI EN 10204 - 2.1
ATTESTATION DE CONFORMITE - UNI EN 10204 - 2.1
CERTIFICADO DE CONFORMIDAD - UNI EN 10204 - 2.1
ATESTADO DE CONFORMIDADE - UNI EN 10204 - 2.1
La Brevini Spa dichiara sotto la propria responsabilità, sulla base dei risultati ottenuti dai test standard di verifica
effettuati sui prodotti costruiti con gli stessi materiali e con lo stesso metodo di produzione, che il prodotto, é
conforme alle prescrizioni dell’ordine ed alle regole tecniche corrispondenti ai regolamenti ufficiali.
DIRETTORE DI PRODUZIONE
Brevini Spa under its own responsability, on the basis of the results of its standard tests aimed to verify
products which are manufactured using the same materials and production method, declares that the products
comply fully with the order requirements and with all technical norms corresponding to the official regulations.
MANUFACTURING DIRECTOR
Die Brevini Spa erklärt vollverantwortlich, auf der Grundlage der erzielten Ergebnisse der Standard-Prüftests, die
auf den mit gleichen Materialien und mit der selben Produktionsmethode konstruierten Produkten durchgeführt
wurden, daß das in der vorigen Seite genannte Produkt mit den offiziellen Regelungen übereinstimmenden
technischen Regeln entspricht
PRODUKTIONSLEITERS
La Sté Brevini Spa déclare sous son entière et seule responsabilité, sur la base des résultats obtenus suite aux
tests standard de contrôle effectués sur les produits fabriqués à partir des mêmes matériaux et des mêmes
procédés de fabrication, que le produit est conforme aux prescriptions de la commande et aux standards
techniques des réglementations officielles.
DIRECTEUR DE PRODUCTION
Brevini Spa declara bajo su propia responsabilidad, sobre la base de los resultados sacados de los ensayos
estándares de verificación efectuados en los productos fabricados con los mismos materiales y con el
mismo método de producción, que el producto cumple las prescripciones del pedido y las reglas técnicas
correspondientes a los reglamentos oficiales.
DIRECTOR DE PRODUCCIÓN
A Brevini Spa declara sob sua responsabilidade, com base nos resultados obtidos em testes padronizados
de verificação efetuados nos produtos construídos com os mesmos materiais e com o mesmo método de
produção, que o produto está em conformidade com as prescrições do pedido e com as normas técnicas
correspondentes aos regulamentos oficiais.
DIRETOR DE PRODUÇÃO
116
14. RETE DI ASSISTENZA - SERVICE NETWORK - NORMATIVERKLÄRUNGEN - DECLARATIONS NORMATIVES
- DECLARACIONES NORMATIVAS - DECLARAÇÕES DE NORMAS
Europa - Europe - Europe - Europa - Europa - Europa

BREvINI HyDROSAm s.r.l. BREvINI GETRIEBE BREvINI AUSTRALIA PTy. LTD.
Via Aldina 4/C PIv DRIvES GmbH P.O.Box 35 - BEENLEIGH
4001 Lippo di Calderara di Reno (BO) iIndustriestraße, 3 QLD 407 - AUSTRALIA
Tel.: 0039 - 051 - 75436 D-6135 BAD HOMBURG DEUTSCHLAND Tel.: +61 - 7 - 8073400
Fax: 0039 - 051 - 75474 Tel.: +49 - 617 - 10 - 0 Fax: +61 - 7 - 8073654
info@brevinihydrosam.com Fax: +49 - 617 - 10 - 15
info@brevini.de BREvINI NEw ZEALAND LTD.
BREvINI LOmBARDA S.p.A. Unit P, 150 Harris Rd., East Tamaki
Via 1° Maggio, 5 Z.I. BREvINI IRELAND AUCKLAND, NEW ZEALAND
4050 Lurano (BG) Unit D1, Allenwood Business Park, entrance Cryers Rd.
Tel.: +39 - 035 - 800430 Allenwood, Naas, Co. KILDARE, PO Box 58-418 Greenmount
Fax: +39 - 035 - 800791 IRELAND Tel.: +64 - 9 - 500050
info@brevinilombarda.it Tel.: +353 - 45 - 890100 Fax: +64 - 9 - 745055
Fax: +353 - 45 - 860093 info@brevini.co.nz
BREvINI PIEmONTE s.r.l. info@breviniireland.com
Corso Francia, 94 BREvINI CHINA GEARBOXES Co. Ltd.
10143 TORINO BREvINI NORGE A.S. N° 1308 Lao Hu Min Road Xu Hui District
Tel.: +39 - 011 - 749045 Elveveien, 38 - P.O. BOX 2071 0037 SHANGHAI - CHINA
Fax: +39 - 011 - 7493407 355 LARVIK - NORWAY Tel.: +86 - 1 - 64964351 / 6496315
sbpma@tin.it Tel.: +47 - 3311 - 7100 Fax: +86 - 1 - 548056
Fax: +47 - 3311 - 7011 shanghai@brevinichina.com.cn
BREvINI CENTROSUD s.r.l. brevini@brevini.no
Via Montenero 15 BREvINI CHINA BEIjING OFFICE
Tor Lupara - Guidonia Montecelio BREvINI SvENSkA AB Room 402, Blbg F, Roman Garden
00159 ROMA Box 728, Koppargatan 9 N° 18 Huixin West Street
Tel.: +39 - 0774 - 36546 r.a. 601 16 Norrköping - SWEDEN Chaoyang District
Fax: +39 - 0774 - 365017 Tel.: +46 - 11 - 4009000 BEIJING 10009 - CHINA
info@brevinisud.it Fax: +46 - 11 - 4009009 Tel.: +86 - 10 - 64981716
info@brevini.se Fax: +86 - 10 - 64976986
BREvINI vENETA s.r.l. beijing@brevinichina.com.cn
Via del Laghetto 431/a - z.i. s.i.i.z. BREvINI U.k. Ltd.
4501 Badia Polesine (RO) Planet House, Centre Park, WARRINGTON BREvINI kOREA CO. LTD.
Tel.: +39 - 045 - 53593 Cheshire WA1 1QX - ENGLAND Shintry Technotown Room 305
Fax: +39 - 045 - 590036 Tel.: +44 - 195 - 63668 1254, SHIN JUNG 3-DONG
mail@breviniveneta.it Fax: +44 - 195 - 64801 YANG CHON-KU, SEOUL - KOREA
sales@breviniuk.com Tel.: +8 - - 065 - 9563 /4 /5 /85
BREvINI NEDERLAND B.v. Fax: +8 - - 065 - 9586
Röntgenweg 4-BP49 BREvINI FINLAND Oy brevini@chollian.net
408 AB ALPHEN AAN DEN RIJN Luoteisrinne, 5
HOLLAND FIN - 070 ESPOO - FINLAND BREvINI LATINO AmERICANA
Tel.: +31 - 17 -476464 Tel.: +358 - 0 - 743 188 INDÚSTRIA E COmÉRCIO LTDA.
Fax: +31 - 17 - 45388 Fax.:+358 - 0 - 743 189 Av. Mal. Arthur Costa e Silva, 963
info@brevini.nl info@brevini.fi 13487 - 30 - Limeira
SÃO PAULO - BRAZIL
BREvINI BELGIO S.A. Tel. : +55 - 19 - 345 980
4 - 43 Rue Théodore Baron Fax.: +55 - 19 - 345 667
B-5000 NAMUR - BELGIQUE Resto del mondo - Overseas - Restliche brevini@brevini.com.br
Tel.: +3 - 81 - 9194 welt - Reste du monde - En el resto del
Fax: +3 - 81 - 3086 mundo - Resto do mundo BREvINI S. E. ASIA Pte. Ltd.
info@brevini.be Block 13, Lorong 8
BREvINI USA Toa Payoh Braddell Tech.
BREvINI DANmARk A/S 400 Corporate Woods Parkway #01 - 09, SINGAPORE 319261
Vaevergangen 30 Vernon Hills, Illinois Tel. : +65 - 356 - 89
DK-690 KARLSLUNDE - DENMARK 60061 U.S.A. Fax.: +65 - 356 - 8900
Tel.: +45 - 4615 4500 Tel.: +1 847-478-1000 brevini@brevini-seasia.com.sg
Fax: +45 - 4615 4915 Fax: +1 847-478-1001
mail@brevini.dk info@breviniusa.com BREvINI INDIA Pvt. Ltd.
101 Faizan Apartments
BREvINI ESPAÑA S.A. BREvINI CANADA LTD. 134 S.V. Road, Jogeshwari West
Pol.Ind. Los Huertecillos, C/Abedul, s/n 36 Galaxy Blvd. TORONTO Mumbai - 40010 - INDIA
8350 CIEMPOZUELOS MADRID ON M9W 5R8 CANADA Tel.: +91 - - 67946
ESPAÑA Tel.: +1 - 416 - 674591 Fax: +91 - - 679463
Tel.: +34 - 91 - 8015165 Fax: +1 - 416 - 6741478 brevinid@vsnl.com
Fax: +34 - 91 - 8015170 bbartley@brevini.ca
brevini_es@brevini.es BREvINI jAPAN LTD.
BREvINI AUSTRALIA PTy. LTD. KIBC Bldg 5F, 5-2 5-chome
BREvINI POwER TRANSmISSION 4 Binney Road Minatojima-Minamimachi, Chuo-ku
FRANCE Kings Park -NSW 148-AUSTRALIA 650-0047 KOBE, JAPAN
198, avenueFranklin Roosevelt Tel.: +61 - - 96711000 Tel. : +81 - 078 - 304 - 5377
69516 VAULX EN VELIN CEDEX FRANCE Fax: +61 - - 96711044 Fax.: +81 - 078 - 304 - 5388
Tel.: +33 - 04 - 781555 brevini@brevini.com.au bmfv@silver.ocn.ne.jp
Fax: +33 - 04 - 781545
brevini@brevini-france.fr BREvINI AUSTRALIA PTy. LTD. BREvINI POwER TRANSmISSION
Suite 4 / Hardy St. South Africa Pty. Ltd.
SOUTH PERTH WA 6151-AUSTRALIA Unit 11 - Hentha Industrial Park
Tel.: +61 - 8 - 477755 14 Wolverhampton Street, Apex Benoni
Fax: +61 - 8 - 9474 9755 1507 JOHANNESBURG
SOUTH AFRICA
Tel.: +7 11 - 41 - 9949
Fax: +7 11 - 41 - 9908
ccrause@brevinisa.co.za
117
Distributori esclusivi - Sole Distributors - Lizenznehmer - Societé sous licence - Distribuidores exclusivos - Distribuidores exclusivos
BIASETTON OLEODINAmICA s.r.l. NAHUm GOLDENBERG Ltd.

VIA DEGLI ARTIGIANI 90 16 Melchet St., P.O.Box 72
16163 GENOVA KIRIAT - ONO 55100 - ISRAEL
Tel.: +39 - 010 - 7051 Tel.: +97 - 3 - 5347976
Fax: +39 - 010 - 710655 Tlfax: +972 - 3 - 5343049
info@biasetton.it info@hydrocad.com
HANS mEIER AG ANTRIEBSTECHNIk k C w ETERNAL ENTERPRISE Co Ltd.
Industriestrasse 1 N° 666, Jung-An St., 702 Tainan
CH - 8627 GRÜNINGEN - SWITZERLAND TAIWAN - R.O.C.
Tel.: +41-1-936 700 Tel.: +886 - 6 - 96 5396
Fax: +41-1-936 705 Fax: +886 - 6 - 96 5700
hsmeier@active.ch kcw0323@seed.net.tw
HABERkORN GmbH TESPO s.r.o.
Holzriedstraße 33 Purkynova, 99
A-6961 Wolfurt - AUSTRIA 61 64 BRNO - CZECH Rep.
Tel. +43 5574/695-0 Tel.: +40 - 5 - 411 187
Fax. +43 5574/8491-801 Tlfax: +420 - 5 - 4112 2186
wolfurt@haberkorn.com tespo@tespo.cz
IOw TRADE Sp. z.o.o. EX JUGOSLAVIA(SLOVENIA, CROAZIA, ecc.) -
Ul. Zwolenska, 17 GRECIA - TURCHIA - LIBANO - SIRIA - CIPRO -
04 - 761 WARSZAWA - POLAND MAROCCO - ALGERIA - TUNISIA - LIBIA - EGITTO -
Tel.: +48 - - 615 811 ARABIA SAUDITA - EMIRATI ARABI - IRAK - IRAN:
Fax: +48 - - 615 850
iow@iow.pl GOING di G.A. Cattaneo
Piazza Cavour, 22
TECNIDRA S.A.I.C. 4069 TRESCORE BALNEARIO (BG)
Libertad 606 (1657) Loma Hermosa Tel.: +39 - 035 - 45850
BUENOS AIRES - ARGENTINA Fax: +39 - 035 - 45817
Tel.: +54 - 11 - 4769 0034 goingcat@mediacom.it
Fax: +54 - 11 - 4769 1006
tecnidra@ciudad.com.ar
118
GREASE LUBRICATION PLANT

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

fluid-engineering-company TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION
FLENCO
fluid-engineering-company
USER AND MAINTENANCE
“FX2” ELECTRIC PUMPS

DUAL LINE SYSTEM FOR OIL AND GREASE
Edition March 2003
“FX DUE” SERIES ELECTRIC PUMPS FOR DUAL LINE SYSTEM – USER AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 1
TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION
Index
Foreword 1
Manufacturer’s Address 1
Servicing requests 1
Spare parts orders 2
General Information Concerning this Manual 3
Symbols: meaning and use 3
Figures - layouts 3
"FXDUE" electric pump models for dual line systems 4
1. MACHINE CONFORMITY TO EEC RULING FOR

MACHINES 89/392 AND SUBSEQUENT AMENDMENTS 1-1
1.1 Foreword 1-1
1.2 E.C. Conformity Statement 1-2
1.3 Identity Plates 1-3
1.4 Reference Standards 1-4
1.5 Glossary 1-5
2. Technical Data and Description 2-1

2.1 General 2-1
2.2 Dual Line Lubrication System 2-1
2.2.1 Operation of the pump 2-3
2.2.2 Operation of reverser 2-9
2.2.3 Operation of end of line pressure switch 2-11
2.3 “FXDUE” Electric Pumps – Technical Data 2-13
2.4 Working Environment Conditions 2-15
2.4.1 General 2-15
2.4.2 Lighting 2-15
2.4.3 Vibration 2-16
2.4.4 Noise 2-16
2 “FX DUE” SERIES ELECTRIC PUMPS FOR DUAL LINE SYSTEM – USER AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
2.4.5 Pump Demolition 2-15
3. Safety and Accident Prevention 3-1

3.1 General Safety Regulation 3-1
3.2 Foreseen, Unforeseen and Incorrect Uses 3-3
3.3 Residual Risks 3-3
3.4 Accident Prevention Safeguards 3-4
3.4.1 Indication plates 3-4
4. Transport and Installation 4-1

4.1 Packing Shipment and Transport 4-1
4.2 Lifting and Unloading 4-2
4.2.1. General 4-2
4.2.2 Lifting the pump 4-3
4.3 Installation of “FXDUE” Pumps 4-4
4.3.1 General 4-4
4.3.2 Positioning 4-4
4.3.3 Suitability of the area 4-7
4.3.4 Anchorage 4-7
4.3.5 Electrical connection 4-8
4.3.6 Commissioning 4-10
5. Electrical Equipment Operation 5-1

5.1 General 5-1
5.2 Controls and indicator 5-1
5.3 Operating modes 5-3
5.3.1 Continuous cycle 5-3
5.3.2 Times cycle 5-3
5.3.3 Alarms 5-3
6. Maintenance 6-1
6.1 Safety Precautions 6-1
6.1.1. Introduction 6-1
6.1.2 Danger notes 6-1
6.1.3 Caution notes 6-3
6.2 Lubricant 6-4
6.3 Skills Required for Servicing Personnel 6-5
6.3.1 General skills 6-5
6.3.2 Duties of skilled personnel 6-6
6.3.3 Operations to be carried out when servicing 6-8
6.3.4 Cutting down dead time after a failure 6-8
6.4 Setting in Maintenance Mode 6-9
6.5 Maintenance 6-9
6.5.1 Pumping element operation 6-9
6.5.2 Cleaning the pumping element 6-11
6.5.3 Cleaning the filler filter 6-11
6-6 General Information 6-12
6.6.1 Calculation of lubricant volume required 6-12
6.6.2 Tubing maximum length 6-13
6.6.3 Classification of lubricants 6-14
6.6.4 Characteristics of recommended greases 6-15
6.6.5 Characteristics of recommended oils 6-18
6-7 Recommended Spare Parts 6-19
FOREWORD
This manual, intended for operators and service personnel, contains the
“Conformity Statement as per 89/392/EEC (and its subsequent amendments)”,
technical data, rules for transport, handling, safety and the maintenance
schedule for “FXDUE” electric pumps dual line system for grease and oil.
+ NOTE:
Operators and Service Engineers for the pumps are to read and
understand the contents of this manual.
This manual and all the attached documentation are to be kept for the
entire life of the pump, in a place accessible to all those involved in its
running and maintenance.
MANUFACTURER’S ADDRESS
SERVICING REQUESTS
For information concerning maintenance, installation etc. of the pumps
FLENCO S.p.A. is always at your disposal
For any request for intervention by our Servicing personnel or for information,
contact :
FLENCO fuid-engineering-company S.p.A

Sede Legale, Amministrativa e Stabilimento
Corso Torino, 2 10051 AVIGLIANA
TORINO (ITALIA)
Tel. 011/9343611 Fax 011/936.77.17
E-MAIL flenco@flenco.it
SPARE PART ORDERS

In due time the pump may require some component replacements.
Using the “Spare Parts List” the components required can be ordered.
+ NOTE:
The Customer has the obligation to always purchase components
with the same characteristics as indicated in the Spare Parts List.
When ordering spare parts it is necessary to specify:
• Address for the delivery
• Order number
• Pump serial number
• Part/group name
• Part/group code
• Quantity required for each part/group.
The order is to be addressed to:
FLENCO fuid-engineering-company S.p.A

Sede Legale, Amministrativa e Stabilimento
Corso Torino, 2 10051 AVIGLIANA
TORINO (ITALIA)
Tel. 011/9343611 Fax 011/936.77.17
E-MAIL flenco@flenco.it
GENERAL INFORMATION CONCERNING THIS MANUAL
SYMBOLS: MEANING AND USE

Certain symbols are used in this manual to call the attention of the reader and
underline important details concerning the procedure.
The table below lists and explains the symbols used in the manual.
SYMBOL MEANING EXPLANATIONS, HINTS, REMARKS

Danger A danger that has a danger risk, even fatal for the user
Caution A warning of possible deterioration on the machine or other

personal object of the user.
Warning A warning or note concerning important functions or useful

Note information.
Read carefully the information that is highlighted with this
symbol.
Visual check The eye symbol informs the reader that a visual check is
needed. It informs the reader that a measurement value is to
be read or an indication is to be checked.
FIGURES - LAYOUTS
The mechanical assembly drawings in this manual are, at times, shown in a
simplified version.
The Maintenance procedures (Chapter 6) for each control or replacement

operation for a component/subassembly include figures, taken from the unit
assembly drawing, and on this the parts to be removed are indicated (e.g.
screws, ring nuts, bearings, rollers etc.). These have the same numbers as the
assembly drawing they are extracted from and which is used as reference for
further details or clarifications (should this be necessary) during the
maintenance operations.
"FXDUE" ELECTRIC PUMP MODELS FOR DUAL LINE

SYSTEMS
This manual is valid for the following pump models:
MODEL OUTPUT (cm3 /min) TANK CAP. LUBRICANTS

3
5015230 120 30 dm
5015231 120 60 dm3
5015232 120 100 dm3
5015233 240 30 dm3
5015234 240 60 dm3 GREASE
3
5015235 240 100 dm
5015236 120 10 dm3
5015260 100 10 dm3
5016021 120 30 dm3
5016022 120 60 dm3
5016023 120 100 dm3
5016024 240 30 dm3 OIL
3
5016025 240 60 dm
5016026 240 100 dm3
+ NOTE:
All models include: reverser, safety valve, tank filling filter, pressure
gauge, base plate and tubing to pump.
1. MACHINE CONFORMITY TO EEC RULING FOR

MACHINES 89/392 AND SUBSEQUENT
AMENDMENTS
1.1 FOREWORD
“FXDUE” series electric pumps have been designed and constructed taking into
consideration the safety requirements indicated in the EEC ruling 89/392 and
its subsequent amendments.
The pumps have also been designed and constructed to conform to current
Common Market standards concerning safety and quality of industrial
machinery.
1.2 E.C. CONFORMITY STATEMENT

The pump is accompanied by the EC Conformity Statement.
DECLARATION BY THE MANUFACTURER

(Directive 89/392 EEC, Art. 4.2 and Annex II, sub B)
PROHIBITION TO PUT INTO SERVICE
MANUFACTURER: FLENCO fuid-engineering-company S.p.A
ADDRESS: Corso Torino, 2 - 10051 AVIGLIANA - TORINO (ITALIA)
Tel. 011/934.36.11 Fax 011/936.77.17
HEREWITH DECLARES THAT :
“FXDUE” SERIES ELECTRIC PUMPS FOR DUAL LINE SYSTEMS
Type XXXXXXXXXX
Serial Number XXXXXXX
CONFORMS TO THE LEGAL REQUIREMENTS THAT TRANSPOSE THE MACHINE

SPECIFICATIONS 89/392 AND SUBSEQUENT AMENDMENTS.
The manufacturer prohibits the use of the machinery/equipment covered by this statement in
any way other than that described in this user and maintenance manual
Furthermore the manufacturer declares that it is not allowed to put the machinery into service
until the machinery into which it is to be incorporated or of which it is to be a component has
been found and declared to be in conformity with the provisions of Directive 89/392 and with
national implementing legislation i.e. as a whole, including the machinery referred to in this
declaration.
(NAME)
(Plant Manager)
(Signature)
Avigliana, li __-/-__/2002
1.3 IDENTITY PLATES

An identity plate is applied to the pump (according to the type of lubrication)
as indicated below.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

The more important standards that have been used in designing the pump,
besides the already mentioned 89/392/EEC are the following:
EN 292-1 1992 Machine safety.

Basic concepts, general principles for the project

Basic concepts, general principles for the project.
EN 294 1992 Machine safety.

Safety distances to prevent hazardous areas that can be
reached by upper parts
EN 349 1994 Machine safety

Minimum distance to prevent bodily harm
pr EN 614-1 Machine safety

Project ergonomic principles.
pr EN 811 1992 Machine safety.

Safety distance to avoid hazardous areas that could be
reached by lower limbs
pr EN 953 1993 Machine safety

General requirements for the designed construction of
protections (fixed and moving).
pr EN 954-1 1992 Machine safety.

Safety concerning control system parts.
pr EN 982 1992 Safety requirements
pr EN 983 1993 Safety requirements for pneumatic systems and

components powered hydraulically

Electrical system for industrial machines
1.5 GLOSSARY
Barrier: Part that ensures protection from direct contacts in all usual access
directions (IEV 826-03-13)
Control circuit (of a machine): Circuit used to control machine operation and
to protect the power circuits.
Purchaser: The buyer
Component: Part of the electrical equipment, usually specified by its

function, but used in various applications.
Direct contact: Contact of persons or animals with live parts (IEV 826-03-05).
Device: Unit of an electrical system that transmits, but does not use,
electricity.
Control device: Device inserted in a control circuit and used to control line
operations (e.g. position sensors, manual control switches, relays,
electromagnetic control valves).
List of materials: List of the components that are parts of mechanical

assemblies, fluid or electrical systems, indicated with quantity, code and name
of supplier.
Manufacturer: Manufacturer of the machine.
Supplier: Body (such as manufacturer, agent, fitter, system installer) that

supplies the equipment or services for the line (the user may also be the
constructor).
Industrial machine: Machine activated by energy used to shape or mould a

material by means of cutting, impact, pressure, electrical, heat or optical
techniques, rolling or a combination of these processes, or associated
machines or equipment, used together with these machines, used to transfer
raw materials, parts being processed or tools (including accessories) to
assemble/disassemble, to powder or coat, to verify or test or to package.
The associated electrical equipment, including logic controls and associated

software, as well as actuators and sensors are considered as part of the
machine.
Machinery (machine): A group of parts or components, at least one of which

is moving, connected to each other with appropriate machine actuators,
control and power circuits etc. linked together for a specifically defined
application, in particular for the transformation, processing, handling or
packaging of a material.
The term “machinery” also includes a group of machines that, to obtain the
same result, are arranged and controlled in such a way as to have an
integrated operation.
Machinery means also the interchangeable equipment to modify the machine

operation, that is put on the market to be assembled by the actual operator
with a machine or a group of different machines or with a tractor, since this
equipment is not a spare part or a tool.
Marking :Signs or letters to identify the type of component or equipment,

marked by the manufacturer of the component or equipment.
Safety precaution: A means that removes or reduces a hazard.
Obstruction: An element intended to prevent an accidental direct contact, but

that does not prevent a direct intentional contact (IEV 826-03-14).
Hazard: Source of possible injury or damage to health. (3.5 of European

Standard EN 292-1)
Informed person: Person sufficiently informed or supervised by a skilled

person able to avoid hazards that could arise (e.g. operators or maintenance
staff).
Skilled person: Person with sufficient technical knowledge or experience to be

able to safeguard against hazards that could occur.
Safe operating procedure: A working method that reduces risks.
Safety protections: Protective guard or device used as a safeguard to protect

persons from an actual or latent danger.
Safeguarding (protection criteria) : Safety measures that consist in the use

of specific technical safety measures called safety protections (guards, safety
devices) to protect persons from hazards that cannot be reasonably eliminated
or sufficiently limited during the project stage. (3.19 of European Standard
EN292.
Operator in charge: Operator responsible for certain operations or

assessments that could be necessary during the processing or maintenance.
Redundancy: Application of more than one device or system, or part of

device or system, to ensure that in the case of a failure when one is operating,
another is available to carry out the same operation.
Guard: Part of a machine used specifically to give protection by means of a

physical barrier. According to how it is made, a guard may be called a hood,
cover, shield, door, enclosure, fencing etc. (3.22 of European Standard EN
292-1)
Risk: Combination of sufficiently serious probabilities to cause injuries or

danger to health in a hazardous situation. (3.7 of Standard EN 292-1)
Ambient temperature: Temperature of the air or other means where the

equipment is used (IEV 826-01-04)
User : Body that uses the machine and associated electrical equipment.
+ NOTE:
The terms are taken from the European Standards, those listed above
are more frequently used in this manual.
2. TECHNICAL DATA AND DESCRIPTION
2.1 GENERAL
For the problem of oil and grease distribution in lubrication systems (also for
high pressures up to 40 Mpa) an ideal solution can be found using “FXDUE”
electric pumps for dual line systems.
FLENCO have a wide range of pumps both for grease and for oil, that can
satisfy all requirements with convenient and versatile solutions within a vast
selection of outputs and pressures
2.2 DUAL LINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM

Dual line lubricating systems (Fig.2-1) are usually used in large plants such
as: steel mills, overhead travelling cranes, quay cranes, paper mills, cement
factories, pressing machines etc.
STIFF TUBES
6 OUTETS DISTRIBUTOR FLEXES

ELECTRIC PISTON PUMP
WITH REVERSER
END OF LINE PRESSURESWITCH ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT FOR

COMMAND AND CONTROL FILTERS IN LINE
MAIN LINE
BRANCH LINES
Figure 2-1 – Dual line lubrication system
The distributors have been studied for use primarily with grease (oil can be
used) and the systems can reach working pressures of 20/40 MP with total
piping lengths of over 70 metres.
These systems require very high performance pumps (high reliability, high
output and pressure characteristics and operating autonomy) and electrical
equipment for the system command and control.
In a dual line system these components are necessary:
• Electric pump
• Line reverser
• End of line pressure switches
• Metering elements
• Command and control panel
The primary line lubrication, (lines from the pump to the blocks) are dual. This
is obtained through the reverser that alternately links the pump to one of the
two pipelines on the primary line and while one line is pressurised,
depressurises the other line connecting it to the reservoir.
After all the distributors have delivered, the pressure on the pressurised line
rises since the pump continues to deliver, but all the outlets for lubrication are
closed ( a by-pass valve protects the system from overpressure).
The increase in pressure is read on the end of line pressure switch (there is
one for each line) and this sends a signal to the control unit when a set value
is reached. The system controls the reverser that then reverses the lines.
The reverser not only pressurises the lines alternately but also releases the
pressure on the line that is not connected to the pump. As a consequence in
all dual line systems there is always a return line that connects the reverser to
the pump reservoir and alternately depressurises the two lines.
If the pressure were not to discharge, the dual line metering device pistons
would not be able to move since both lines would be pressurised and the
system would lock.
In such cases even with a maximum tube length, the lubrication of the system
would be limited, not only by load losses that the lubricant meets when
moving, but also by the impossibility to have sufficient tube depressurising if
the total length is excessive.
The maximum tube length allowed depends also on: temperature, tube
diameter, maximum pump pressure and lubricant viscosity. Recommended
primary and secondary tube lengths and diameters are indicated in section 6-6
GENERAL INFORMATION in this manual.
2.2.1 OPERATION OF THE PUMP

The worm screw (fig.2-3 item 1) receives its rotational movement from the
electric motor and transmits it to the worm wheel (Fig.2-3 item 2) with a ratio
of 18:1.
An off centred cam has been machined into the same axis as the worm wheel
(Fig. 2-3 item 3) and via the ball bearing (Fig. 2-3 item 4) forces the pumping
elements (Fig. 2-3, item 5) of the pistons arranged around the perimeter of the
ring (Fig. 2-3 item 6) to move alternately.
The ring has an internal channelling which conveys the delivery of each pump
to a single exit. According to the total requested delivery, the ring can carry 12
or 6 pumping elements. If not all pumping elements are used (for delivery
requirements) those not in use are replaced by a cap (Fig.2-3, item 7).
Pumping takes place by means of an alternating piston movement (Fig. 2-2,

item A). At the first return stroke the piston expels the lubricant until the
intake apertures (B) are completely shut off.
Figure 2-2 Pumping element

At this point, the useable volume of lubricant, still in chamber (C) forces the
valve (Fig. 2-2 item D) to back off. The lubricant passes the valve and flows
from the pumping element through the ball valve (Fig.2-2 item E).
The outward movement of the piston causes a vacuum in chamber (C) and as
soon as the intake apertures (B) are uncovered the lubricant is sucked in. The
cycle is repeated at each rotation of the pump main shaft.
+ NOTE: The operation principle is the same for pumps for grease
(Fig. 2-3) and for oil (Fig. 2-4)
The versions designed to operate with grease are fitted with an archimedean
screw (Fig. 2-3, item 8) that rotates at the same speed as the worm wheel and
pushes the greases downwards to facilitate the flow to the intake apertures of
the pump elements.
The grease downward movement is further facilitated by the paddle (Fig.2-5,

item 1) connected to the central shaft (Fig.2-3, item 9) which rotates on the
basis of a series of gears (Fig.2-3, items 10, 11, 12) (reduction).
When grease is present, the movement of the paddle causes a torsion effect
on the blade (Fig.2-5, item 2) and as a consequence, on the central pin of the
group (Fig.2-5, item 3) on the cover of the tank.
The torsion effect is countered by the spring (Fig.2-5, item 4), which can be
adjusted in relation to the consistency of the grease employed.
It follows that, when the pump is in movement, if the level of the grease in the
tank is enough to cover the blade the spring is compressed and the
microswitch controlling minimum level (Fig.2-5, item 5) is released.
This situation continues until the thrust of the blade is sufficient to overcome
the force of the spring; if this is not the case, the microswitch activates to
indicate minimum level.
The controlling of the minimum level is subordinate to the pump rotation and
therefore is not carried out during a pause.
Still concerning the grease version, the control of the maximum level (tank full
during transfer) is by means of a specific group. This group indicates, through
the microswitch (Fig.2-5, item 7) the vertical movement of the over-turned bowl
(Fig.2-5, item 6).
In the oil versions the levels (minimum and maximum) are indicated by two
floats (Fig.2-6, items 1 and 2).
Figure 2-3 “FXDUE” electric pump for grease
Figure 2-4 “FXDUE” electric pump for oil
Figure 2-5 “FXDUE” pump grease tank, capacity 30 dm3
Figure 2-6 “FXDUE” pump oil tank, capacity 30 dm3
2.2.2 OPERATION OF THE REVERSER

The reverser (Fig 2-7) is located near the pump and is controlled by two
pressure switches on the ends of the dual line.
Figure 2-7 Dual line reverser

The switching of the valve that reverses the direction of the lubricant on the
two lines is obtained by a screw and nut screw system worked by the low
power asynchronous motor.
When the line pressure (2) reaches the calibration value of the corresponding
pressure switch at the end of the line n (PR2) this closes a contact that
activates the relay (R1). Relay R1 supplies itself via the closed contact R2,
limit switch M1 (normally closed) and its own contact (R1).
A second contact of R1 supplies the motor starting clockwise rotation.
The motor pulls the valve of the reverser by a screw-nut screw mechanism and
continues to move it until it reaches limit switch M1. The M1 contact opens
causing the interruption of relay R1 and the motor is shut down.
The same cycle is repeated for line 1. The reverser is balanced and bistable.
After switching has taken place (lubricant sent on one of the two lines) the
motor is deactivated and any interruption in power supply has no effect.
The diagram below shows the reverser wiring circuit.
2.2.3 OPERATION OF END-OF-LINE PRESSURE SWITCH

The pressure switch (Fig. 2-8) is installed at the end of the main line of a dual
line system to monitor correct system functioning. The pressure switch controls
the inversion (from line 1 to line 2) sending a signal to the electrical control
equipment when the set pressure is reached. The pressure switch consists of a
steel block for connection of the two lines, two gauges, two air dump valves,
two pressure regulators and two microswitches.
Figure 2-8 - End of line pressure switch

When the pressure of the lubricant in the line connected at that moment (the
other line is discharging) reaches the value set on the pressure regulation
valve (item 1) the rod (item 2) having overcome the resistance of the springs
(items 3 and 4) activates the exchange switch (item 8).
The signal generated by the microswitch is sent to the system electrical

control and command equipment. The alternating pressurising of the two lines
is indicated by the indication light.
The signal is also sent to the line reverser that commands the lubricant
inversion from one line to the other.
The next inversion command will be sent after the line being pressurised
reaches the set value and at the same time the pressure in the other line
decreases to a value equal to or higher than to the functioning differential
ensuring the correct delivery by the metering valves.
+ NOTE:
The functioning differential is the difference in pressure needed for switching of the
microswitch contacts.
The various values depend on the distance “X” between rod 2 in idle position
and the contact of microswitch 8. This distance is usually 3.3 mm. To increase
the differential by 0.6 Mpa (6 bar) distance “X” needs to be reduced by approx.
3 mm.
The line pressure switch calibration is performed by loosening counter nut “C”
and rotating (to the desired calibration) adjustment screw “R”.
+ NOTE:
The same procedure is used for regulation valve “1” on the other line.
+ NOTE:
For systems where the pressure does not exceed 10 Mpa (100 bar) spring 3 can be
removed, using only spring 4.
2.3 “FXDUE” ELECTRIC PUMPS - TECHNICAL DATA

This section indicates the main technical characteristics of the “FXDUE”
electric pumps:
TablE 2-1 “FXDUE” electric pumps dual line systems for grease - Technical data
MODEL 5015230 5015231 5015232 5015233 5015234 5015235

TANK CAPACITY (dm3) 30 60 100 30 60 100
WEIGHT WITHOUT LUBRICANT (Kg) 50 58 70 50 58 70
PUMP CODE 7017010 7017007
N° PUMP ELEMENTS 6 12
MAX. OUTPUT (cm3/min) 120 240
MAX. WORKING PRESSURE (MPa) 40 MPa
TYPE OF LUBRICANT ≤ NLGI 2
DELIVERY DIAMETER 1 / 2” BSP
RETURN DIAMETER 1 / 4” BSP
TANK FILLING 1 / 4” BSP or Hydraulic greaser
SECURITY VALVE DISCHARGE 1 / 4” BSP
MOTOR POWER (Kw) 0,55
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE (V) 220 / 380 / 415
FREQUENCY (Hz) 50 / 60
SPEED (r.p.m.) 1500
PROTECTION IP55
REDUCTION RATIO 1/18
REVERSER MOTOR Asynchronous 24V, 3W, 250 rpm
REVERSER SWITCHING TIME 3,5 s
REVERSER TRANSLATION SPEED 4,16 mm/sec
REVERSER SWITCHING STROKE 15 mm
REVERSER CONNECTION DIAMETER 1/2" BSP
MODEL 5015236 5015260

TANK CAPACITY (dm3) 10 10
WEIGHT WITHOUT LUBRICANT (Kg)
PUMP CODE 7017013
TYPE OF LUBRICANT ≤ NLGI 2
TANK FILLING 1 / 4” BSP or Hydraulic greaser
SPEED (r.p.m.) 1500
PROTECTION IP55
Table 2-2 “FXDUE” electric pump dual line systems for oil - Technical data
MODEL 5016021 5016022 5016023 5016024 5016025 5016026

TANK CAPACITY (dm3) 30 60 100 30 60 100
WEIGHT WITHOUT LUBRICANT (Kg) 50 58 70 50 58 70
PUMP CODE 7017008 7017009
TYPE OF LUBRICANT ≥ 45 cSt (ambient temperature)
TANK FILLING
SPEED (r.p.m.) 1500
PROTECTION IP55
2.4 WORKING ENVIRONMENT CONDITIONS
2.4.1 GENERAL
"FXDUE" series electric pumps for dual line systems are to be installed in a
suitably equipped area with all the provisions required so that the operating
personnel works in safety conditions that comply to current national laws.
DANGER!
Sufficient working space is to be provided to ensure the safety of operators and
maintenance personnel.
Working environment conditions:
• Working environment temperature range -30°C to +80 °C
• Air relative humidity less than 30 %
• No corrosive vapours
• No excessive heat sources
DANGER !
The pumps are not to be used in explosive or potentially explosive atmospheres.
2.4.2 LIGHTING
The pump is to be located in a suitably lighted environment with special
attention for servicing operations.
National regulations and EEC standards are to be respected.
DANGER!
Where maintenance is to be carried out in a poorly lit area, use extra lamps ensuring
that work is carried out under safety conditions as foreseen by current regulations.
2.4.3 VIBRATIONS
The vibrations caused by the pump are not dangerous to the health of those
operating on it
Excessive vibrations could be caused by a fault and maintenance is to be
informed immediately to have it eliminated so that the pump is not damaged

and there is no hazard for personnel using it.
2.4.4 NOISE
The noise from the pump when running, at a distance of 1.5 m, measures 71
dB.
2.4.5 PUMP DEMOLITION
+ NOTE:
If the pump is to be destroyed at the end of its life cycle, this operation is to be
carried out by authorised and specialised personnel conforming to the current laws
of the user’s country.
Before starting to disassemble and destroy ensure that there is sufficient

space around the punp to permit the authorised personnel to work in safety.
To disassemble the pump and proceed with its demolition it is necessary to:
• Disconnect all power circuits
• Check that lubrication circuit has discharged
• Dismantle the components separating them according to the type of material.
+ NOTE: Do not emit polluted substances into the atmosphere.
• Set aside materials and components that can be recycled.
• Arrange for the collection of unusable components by the specific authorised

disposal bodies.
3. SAFETY AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION
3.1 GENERAL SAFETY REGULATIONS

The pumps have been constructed on the basis of the most modern technical
know-how and their use is absolutely safe.
In spite of the various safety devices designed by FLENCO and installed on

the pumps, hazards for the service personnel can only be completely
eliminated if the personnel has been specifically trained or has sufficient
technical preparation.
The personnel is responsible for the following operations:
• Pump commissioning or in any case operation management.
• Other types of operations on the system and especially in connection with

maintenance, control and repairs on any of its components before powering
up the system, while running or after it has been shut down.
The personnel are to be accurately informed concerning any potential hazards

that could occur while carrying out their jobs, and also in relation to operation
and the correct use of the available safety devices.
Furthermore the personnel are to scrupulously observe the following safety

regulations to prevent hazardous situations from arising.
+ NOTE:
FLENCO S.p.A. declines any form of responsibility concerning any
damage to persons or things caused by operations carried out on the
pump ignoring the instructions given in this section.
• Maintenance operations are to be carried out only by authorised and suitably

trained personnel or that have sufficient technical training.
• Before carrying out any maintenance operation perform the following:
− Carefully read the technical documentation;
Know which protections and safety devices are on the pump, their
locations and how they function;
• It is forbidden to replace, cut-off or partially remove safety devices or

safety guards (guards, grids, doors etc.)
• Protections and safety devices are to be serviced to ensure correct

functioning; if found faulty they are to be immediately repaired or replaced.
• If, under ecceptional circumstances, to perform a particular specialised

technical intervention concerning maintenance, inspection or repairs, the
persons performing these operations have to either totally or partially
deactivate some safety devices, open or remove guards they shall, as soon
as these operations are finished, immeditely restore the safety devices or
guards to an efficient state. While restoring normal operating conditions
they shall verify that upon termination normal safety conditions have been
fully restored, and in particular safety devices and guards involved in the
operation. The personnel shall also ensure that, after intervention nothing
has been left inside the machine and in particular mechanical parts, tools or
devices used during the intervention that could cause damage or
malfunctioning on.the system.
• Personnel carrying out maintenance, inspection and repairs, for their own
safety, before starting any operation are to take all the necessary safety
precautions, especially those that are to be carried out manually. Maximum
attention is to be paid before starting if:
− The operations are to be performed very near to the system operating

area.
− The work to be carried out is near high voltage devices
− The point of intervention is part of a hydraulic, pneumatic, lubrication or

cooling system.
− Those who are to perform the operations, before starting, shall carefully
check that the following conditions are observed:
− The system main switch is OFF and the specific preventive measures
have been taken (warning signboards, locking devices etc.) so that the
system cannot be accidentally powered.
− Any mechanical systems or units with spring controlled movement are

in home position;
− Pressurized tanks have been discharged.
• Personnel, before starting any work on hydraulic, pneumatic, lubrication or

cooling systems and in particular on tubing, tanks, flexible tubes and other
components under pressure shall first reduce the internal pressure of the
system to be serviced to ambient pressure. When checking the operation of
these systems, and especially during tightness tests, use specific hydraulic
fluids avoiding the use of compressed air that could provoke hazardous
explosions causing injury to the personnel.
• If, in order to carry out a certain specialised technical intervention on an

electrical or electronic device it is necessary to work with the electric
cabinet (or control panel) open, and for exceptional reasons with the switch
ON, take the maximum precautions and work with extreme care. During these
operations the presence of high voltages is a mortal danger for the
personnel.
• The maintenance, inspection and repairs personnel, to safeguard themselves

shall observe all instructions indicated on the specific warning signboards.
3.2 FORESEEN, UNFORESEEN AND INCORRECT USES

The pumps have been designed and built for automatic lubrication systems
(grease or oil).
+ NOTE:
The use of the pump for other purposes is to be considered as
improper use of this. FLENCO S.p.A. declines any responsibility for
subsequent consequences.
3.3 RESIDUAL RISKS

The project studies have assessed all the possible risks concerning pump use
and maintenance and all the necessary precautions have been taken to avoid
risks and safeguard exposed persons
However, on the pump the following residual risks remain that can be
eliminated or reduced taking the following precautions:
• Impact risks, shearing after access to moving parts inside the reservoir of
the grease pump.
DANGER:
It is absolutely forbidden to remove the cover of the reservoir for
grease pumps. To prevent this, the cover is sealed with lead seals.
The removal of these seals automatically cancels any warranty rights.
3.4 ACCIDENT PREVENTION SAFEGUARDS

3.4.1 INDICATION PLATES
On the pump the following indication and safety plates have been affixed.
WARNING!!
It is severely forbidden to fill with grease removing the reservoir cover.
Lubrication filling is only to be carried out through the specific hole.
4. TRANSPORT AND INSTALLATION
4.1 PACKING SHIPMENT AND TRANSPORT

The pump is transported on trucks, covered with protective cardboard and fixed
by bands to the pallets.
Pump handling is to be carried out using a truck lift.
+ NOTE:
FLENCO S.p.A. decline all responsibilities concerning any damage to persons or

things caused by incorrect handling of the loads carried out by unqualified
personnel and/or inadequate lifting equipment.
The dimensions of the pallets used for the different types of pumps are
indicated on the figure below:
Figure 4-1 - Pallet dimensions
4.2 LIFTING AND UNLOADING
4.2.1 GENERAL
The personnel that will be involved with the handling of the pump must be
capable of carrying out such activities to avoid incorrect operations that could
damage the pump.
Lifting is to be carried out taking into consideration the dimensions and

weights.
CAUTION:
The capacity of the lifting equipment must be sufficient for the load (conforming to
ISO standard 2408).
Safety margins foreseen by current regulations are to be respected. Never use lifting
equipment that does not conform to safety standards.
+ NOTE:
FLENCO S.p.A. decline all responsibilities concerning any damage to persons or

things caused by incorrect handling of the loads carried out by unqualified
personnel and/or inadequate lifting equipment.
DANGER:
Before starting any lifting or handling operation the personnel is to observe the
safety distance from other persons and check that there are no obstructions that
could interfere with the operation.
Where necessary enclose the area with mobile barriers and place work in progress
signboards prohibiting the entry of unauthorised persons.
4.2.2 LIFTING THE PUMP

To lift the pump scrupulously follow the instructions that follow:
1. Sling the pump on the relevant brackets as shown in figure 4-2.
+ NOTE: The brackets are only used to lift and transport the pump.
Figure 4-2 - Lifting the pump

2. Start the handling manoeuvres very slowly to ensure that the load is
balanced.
3. Gently place the pump where it is to be installed.
4.3 INSTALLATION OF “FXDUE” PUMPS
4.3.1 GENERAL'
The installation of a lubrication system is to be carried out by qualified
personnel observing the regulations concerning hydraulic systems.
The pumps are to be installed on suitable frames or bases (prepared by the

customer) and are to have sufficient space around them to allow the operators
to work in safety in accordance with the current standards. It is to be borne in
mind that:
• The metering and distribution devices are normally to be installed on plates

for easier servicing.
• In areas exposed to high temperatures (over 100°C) tubing, distributors,

valves etc. are to be protected with suitable coverings.
• In hazardous areas, or where frequent maintenance takes place, metering

devices, valves, distributors and in some cases the tubing is to be carefully
protected with sheet metal boxes or U drawn pieces.
• Avoid hot bending of tubes. If large diameter pipes are to be installed that
require welding, after the welding the pipes are to be pickled. To guarantee
absolute stability the pipes must be anchored and brackets applied. For the
main pipes use drawn steel PN400 and annealed copper PN100 - 150 for
secondary pipes.
• The lubricant used is to be one of those recommended by the manufacturer

and indicated in the table.
4.3.2 POSITIONING
For the positioning and all data necessary for correct installation (overall
dimensions, connections etc.) consult figures 4-3 and 4-4.
It is important to check:
• Suitability of the installation area
• Anchorages
• Electrical connections
• Preparation for commissioning.
BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

Figu 4-3 - “FXDUE” electric pump dual line system for grease - overall dimensions
Figure 4-4 - “FXDUE” electric pump dual line system for oil - overall dimensions
fluid-engineering-company INDEX
4.3.3 SUITABILITY OF THE AREA

The pump is to be installed in a closed, or at least covered, area.
The floor must be of the industrial type in cement to support the weight of the
pump, and must be levelled and flat.
CAUTION:
Remove any grease or oil from the floor that could cause accidents due to slipping.
The area is to be provided with the necessary air and electrical supply
connections required for operation and maintenance.
+ NOTE: It is the responsibility of the customer to ensure that it
conforms to safety standards.
4.3.4 ANCHORAGE
The pump is to be anchored to the floor by four blocks using the four holes on
the base.
+ NOTE: Under no circumstances are flexible supports to be used.
4.3.5 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

The customer is responsible for the electrical connections, preparing the
supply line and connections needed in accordance with the laws in force.
CAUTION:
Work on the electrical installation is to be carried out by skilled personnel qualified
to work on electrical installations.
FENCO recommend that the connections in the cabinet are carried out as
indicated in figure 4-5. Refer to figure 4-6 for the wiring diagram.
INDEX
ATTENTION:
Before any other operation check that the electric motor is set to run with the
voltage and frequency installed in the Customer’s Plant.
The cross section, number of cables and absorption according to the operating
voltages and frequencies as well as the motor connection diagram are set out
here below.
∆ Υ ∆ Υ Cable min.
Section (mm2)
Power
(Kw)
Frequency
(Hz)
Connection Connection Current Current
230 V 400 V 2,8 A 1,6 A 1,5 0,55 50
265 V 460 V 2,8 A 1,6 A 1,5 0,55 60
Figure 4-5 – Cabinet layout and terminal strip connection
INDEX
4.3.6 COMMISSIONING
Before starting up the pump check:
• Lubricant reservoir filling. The reservoir is always and only to be filled using
the specific filler block fitted with filter (for grease pumps) to avoid that
abrasive material, metal impurities, textile or other fibres, sand, dust etc.
accidentally enter into the reservoir causing damage or malfunctioning of
the lubrication system. In this way the formation of air bubbles inside the
reservoir is avoided since this could cause cavitation in the pumps, locking
the lubrication system. For oil pumps fill through the special hole on the
reservoir cover.
CAUTION:
Fill the reservoirs using pumps (manual or pneumatic) for the transfer. The same
pumps are to be used to fill the tubes
• Filling the tubes. After the system has been assembled it is necessary to fill
the tubes. This must be done carefully to avoid air bubbles that would
interfere with the correct system operation. Fill the system section by
section keeping the ends of each line section disconnected and pumping in
lubricant until it flows from the filled section in a compact and uniform
manner.
• Electric motor rotation. Check that the pump electric motor rotates in the
direction indicated by the arrow on the protective casing.
Figure 4-6 - Electrical diagram (sheet 3)
INDEX
INDEX
5. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION
5.1 GENERAL
This chapter describes the controls, indicators and use of the electrical control
and command equipment (code 5011040) for the “FXDUE” electric pump for
dual line system.
5.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

All the controls and indicators are on the control panel (Fig. 5-1).
Figure 5-1 - Control Panel
Table 5.1 - Description of controls and indicators
REF. DESCRIPTION FUNCTION

IG MAIN SWITCH When ON the system is powered.
LS1 LINE OF VOLTAGE Green warning light. When on it
indicates that the system is powered.
LS3 PAUSE TIME Green warning light. When on it
indicates that the system is in pause.
LS6 MINIMUM LEVEL Red warning light. When on it indicates
that the lubricant is at minimum level.
LS9 MAXIMUM LEVEL Red warning light. When on it indicates
that lubricant maximum level has been
reached.
LS4 PUMP ALARM Red warning light. When on it indicates
that there is a fault on the system
(minimum or maximum level, no
pressure on line 1/2)
LS7 LINE 1 White warning light. When on it
indicates that lubrication is taking place
on line 1.
LS8 LINE 2 White warning light. When on it
indicates that lubrication is taking place
on line 2
LS5 PUMP ON Blue warning light. When on it indicates
that the pump is operating.
LS10 THERMAL RELAY Yellow warning light. When on it
indicates that the motor protection
thermal relay has triggered.
TM1 WORK TIME Timer. Used to set the work time
(seconds, minutes, hours, 10 hours)
TM2 PAUSE TIME Timer. Used to set the pause time
(seconds, minutes, hours, 10 hours)
SL1 CONTINUE/TIMED Two position switch. When on
CONTINUE it impedes the pause time
(set on TM2) and continually lubricates.
When on TIMED it allows lubrication
and pause according to the times set
on TM1 and TM2
PS1 RESET Push-button. To be pressed after the
removal of a fault to start up the
lubrication cycle again.
INDEX
5.3 OPERATING MODES

The system can operate in these modes:
• Continuous cycle
• Timed cycle
5.3.1 CONTINUOUS CYCLE

To enable the continuous cycle, proceed as follows:
1. Set SL1 on “CONTINUE”
2. Turn main switch IG to ON
3. Check that pressure switches PR1 and PR2 switch over their contacts
alternately reversing lines 1 and 2.
5.3.2 TIMES CYCLE

To enable the timed cycle proceed as follows:
1. Set SL1 on “TIMED”
2. Turn main switch IG to ON
3. Check that the work/pause cycle runs as set on “WORK TIME” and “PAUSE
TIME” timers.
If switch SL1 remains on “TIMED” the lubrication cycle will take place
automatically closing main switch IG.
Each time the machine is started up a pre-lubrication will take place.
The end of line pressure switches PR1 and PR2 reverse the supply line
through relays inside the inversion valve.
5.3.3 ALARMS
If the lubrication cycle does not take place within the time set on timer TM2 an
alarm procedure is generated that:
• De-energises remote switch TL causing the pump to stop
• Causes the “PUMP ALARM” red light to flash.
After the cause that generated the alarm has been removed, press push-button
PS1 that resets the circuit for a new cycle.
6. MAINTENANCE
6.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
6.1.1 INTRODUCTION
Personnel operating and servicing the die are to be well trained and have in
depth knowledge of safety regulations; unauthorised personnel are to remain
outside the working area when in operation.
The accident prevention precautions contained in this section are to be

strictly observed always, when the system is running or being serviced, to
prevent damage to personnel and equipment.
These precautions are repeated and given in further detail throughout the
Manual, whenever a procedure is required that could cause damage or
accidents, These notes are indicated with the caption CAUTION or DANGER:
• The CAUTION notes are to be found before an operation that, if not carried
out correctly, could cause damage to the equipment;
• The DANGER notes are to be found before an operation that, if not carried
out correctly, could cause an accident.
6.1.2 DANGER NOTES
• High voltages can cause death upon contact. Always work with extreme care
and in accordance with the current accident prevention laws.
• Always cut off main and auxiliary power supplies on the equipment before
starting maintenance operations on the system. Place the warning
signboards MACHINE BEING SERVICED - DO NOT POWER ON near the main
power switches.
• Parts moving when the equipment is running can cause serious injuries.
Avoid contact with these parts. Before starting any work on the equipment
make sure that they cannot be accidentally set in motion by connected
equipment.
INDEX
• Never cut off safety devices or protections installed on the equipment. If

this is really necessary, indicate the condition with warning signboards and
work with extreme care. Restore all safety devices and protections as soon
as possible.
• If the system is not correctly connected to ground this could cause serious
injury to operators. Always make sure that ground connections have been
made and that they comply to current standards.
• Avoid using flammable or toxic solvents such as petrol, benzene, ether or

spirits.
• Avoid prolonged contact with solvents and do not breathe in the vapours.
Avoid using them near naked flames or heat sources, make sure the area is
well ventilated.
• Before starting up the equipment make sure that the service personnel is at
a safe distance and that no tools or parts have been left near the equipment.
• Always use protective goggles and gloves when servicing equipment.
• Equipment installation must always conform to health and safety standards.

All moving parts and transmissions must always be protected from
accidental contact.
• Always make sure that all guards are installed and properly closed before
starting up the equipment.
• Long overloads or faults can cause overheating of the electric motors and
other electrical equipment, causing harmful fumes; immediately cut off power
for safety and do not approach the system until the fumes have been
dispersed by adequate ventilation. When making repairs on the system do
not breathe in the stagnated fumes that remain in the system.
• Never use water jets in the case of fire on the system; cut off all power and
use CO2 extinguishers.
• Always make sure that there is nothing under pressure before starting any
type of maintenance on components.
• Keep away from holes and bleed taps when discharging pressure from the
system.
• Carefully inspect all fittings to make sure there is no dirt or defects on the
threads before making the connections.
• Make sure all fittings and joints are correctly locked before pressurising the
equipment after servicing.
• Always keep at a safe distance from any component that could be moved by
hydraulic pressure when this has not been completely discharged. Never
wear anything that could be caught in the equipment and act as conductors
(chains, bracelets, ties, scarves etc.)
• Make sure that the tools to be used are in perfect condition and have
insulating grips where necessary. Check that the insulation on cables and
conductors on testing equipment are in no way damaged or broken.
6.1.3 CAUTION NOTES !
• Before starting up the equipment again after a failure inspect and check
carefully to highlight any damage.
• When using a meagohmeter to check insulation on electrical equipment,

make sure that all electronic control equipment is disconnected so as not to
damage the components.
• Always use tools that are in good condition and that are intended for the
operation to be carried out; the use of improper or inefficient tools can
cause serious damage.
• Make repairs in a clean environment and where possible, dustless. Protect

all connecting spaces with plastic plugs and carefully cover machined
surfaces of disassembled parts until they are to be assembled on the
machine.
• Before reassembling a unit, always spread a slight film of vaseline oil on

internal parts and coupling surfaces. Replace all seals and gaskets with
original parts before reassembling the component.
6.2 LUBRICANTS
When handling lubricants the following preventive measures are to be taken to
safeguard health:
• Avoid prolonged, excessive or repeated skin contact with lubrication

products and do not breathe in the vapours or fumes.
• Protect the skin by wearing suitable protective garments and accessories

(overalls, goggles, protective gloves complying to safety standards) or apply
a protection product.
• Carefully clean dirty skin using abundant water and soap.
• Take off and change clothes and shoes soaked in oil.
• Never put oily rags in pockets.
INDEX
CAUTION:
It is compulsory, as specified by current standards, to have toxicological charts for
all lubricants used. If these are not in your possession, ask your lubricant supplier
for them.
DANGER !
Lubricants are highly inflammable. Scrupulously observe the instructions indicated
on the containers.
The disposal of exhausted lubricants is to comply with the following

environment protection laws:
• Lubricants can contaminate water and soil. Never pour lubrication products
on the ground, into water or into sewers or drains. Disregaring these laws
can be prosecuted by law. When using lubricants it is advisable to have an
oil agglomerate on hand.
• Carefully recover exhausted lubricants separating mineral based products

from synthetic ones. When disposing observe current laws concerning
disposal of exhausted oils.
+ NOTE:
Always use the same type of lubricants when filling for the first time. If this is not
possible due to organisation or management reasons, use only products that
conform to the lubricants table indicating those we recommend.
CAUTION:
Never mix lubricants of different qualities, since their composition and the additives
contained in them are not the same.
If it is foreseen that a different type of lubricant will have to be used, check

first that the two products are compatible. If in doubt the lubricant used up to
that point should be completely emptied and removed by thorough washing.
6.3 SKILLS REQUIRED FOR SERVICING PERSONNEL
6.3.1 GENERAL SKILLS

In order to be able to solve any problem that may arise when servicing fully
automated manufacturing systems, service personnel must:
• be fully aware of current regulations concerning accident prevention during

operations carried out on the machines, and be capable of carrying them
out,
• have read and understood the “Safety and Accident Prevention” section,
• Know the fundamental structure and functions of special part manufacturing

systems,
• know how to use and consult the manufacturing papers and line
documentation,
• be involved in the efficient operation of the line,
• assume the responsibility or make autonomous decisions concerning

interventions on fully automated manufacturing systems,
• be willing to adapt to technological modifications on the machines,
• note irregularities in the manufacturing process and if necessary take

measures in merit.
INDEX
6.3.2 DUTIES OF SKILLED PERSONNEL

The professional operators required for servicing the die are:
⇒ Mechanical service engineer
Typical activities:
⇒ Preventive maintenance operations, overhauling and when necessary,

repairs on mechanical assemblies, and in particular:
− adjustment of mechanical clearances
− check on movements
− check on mechanical backlash
− mechanical unit repairs.
Technical know ledge required:
− good knowledge of mechanical, pneumatic and hydraulic installations,
− knowledge of the controls used on the machine
− basic knowledge of control and electrical regulation techniques
− capability to assess overhaul results and decide measures to be taken,
− capability to make out a report on the overhaul,
− knowledge of measuring and testing methods to determine the actual

condition of the machine
Qualifications required:
− Completed instruction as industrial mechanic with specialisation in

technical field for automated systems.
− Experience in maintenance on automated systems
⇒ Lubrication operator
Typical activities
Routine operations emptying and filling lubricant reservoirs on fully

automated manufacturing systems.
− Check on level of remaining lubricant.
− Lubricant reservoir cleaning and replacement of contents
− Topping up consumed lubricant reserves by grease pump, oiler, oil drum

etc..
− Replacement of old or used lubricants.
Technical know ledge required:
− Knowledge of lubricants and greases used
− Capability to work independently according to scheduled lubrication

programs.
− Knowledge of correct methods to dispose of used lubricants , respecting

the environment.
Qualifications required:
These operations can be carried out by skilled personnel that have had a
sufficiently long period of training.
6.3.3 OPERATIONS TO BE CARRIED OUT WHEN SERVICING

When making any form of servicing look for symptoms that could precede a
failure, in particular:
• Traces of wear
• Loosened fittings or connections
• Contacts that have changed colour
• Bleed air from hydraulic and lubrication channels after all maintenance
operations.
6.3.4 CUTTING DOWN DEAD TIME AFTER A FAILURE

It should be remembered that maintenance operations correctly carried out
reduce the stoppage time to a minimum after a failure.
Timely repairs avoid further deterioration.
Whenever possible use original spare parts and be precise in making the
repairs.
INDEX
6.4 SETTING IN MAINTENANCE MODE

To set the pump in maintenance mode the following instructions are to be
observed:
− The routine and special maintenance personnel must have read and well
understood all the instructions contained in this section and in Chapter 3 of
this manual.
Routine and special maintenance operations are only to be carried out by

authorised and skilled personnel, and with the die off the machine.
− All maintenance operations are to be carried out in safety conditions

conforming to the current regulations in merit.
− Before starting any type of maintenance, always ensure that pressurised

systems have been discharged.
6.5 MAINTENANCE
Maintenance operations to keep the “FXDUE” pumps working efficiently:
• Pumping elements operation check
• Cleaning of pumping elements
• Cleaning of filler filter
6.5.1 PUMPING ELEMENTS OPERATION

In all lubrication pumps and especially those for grease, the pumping group,
due to the high processing precision, is the most critical and delicate.
Therefore the lubricant that passes through should be perfectly clean.
Unfortunately it is not possible in practice to filter grease to the optimal
value, even if the charging filter ensures a good protection, but unfortunately it
is not absolute.
To check the correct operation of the pumping elements (without removing

them from their seats) proceed as follows:
1. Unscrew the cap (Fig. 6-1, item 1) of the pumping element and remove the
spring (item 2) from its seat.
Figure 6-1 - Pumping element

2. Lightly press a screwdriver against the bottom of the valve (item 3) and start
the pump.
3. Check that a pulsing output comes out of the hole (output from one pumping
element). If the output is consistent and more or less continuous, this
indicates that the ball (item 4) does not close properly and also part of the
output of the other pumping elements is coming out.
4. If no slight valve (item 3) movement (approx. 1mm) is felt on the

screwdriver, this means it is locked. It could also happen that the piston
(item 5) is stuck in back position because the spring (item 6) is not able to
push it (in both cases it is probable that there is sticking caused by
impurities.
+ NOTE: The same procedure is valid for all the pumping elements.
5. Accurately clean or replace all the pumping elements group (code 7234030).
6.5.2 CLEANING THE PUMPING ELEMENTS

The cleaning of the pumping elements is a reasonably easy operation since
access is immediate. To clean, proceed as follows:
1. Unscrew the entire pumping group (code 7234030) and remove it from its
seat.
2. Check that the piston (Fig.6-1 item 5) slides freely (it is not necessary to
withdraw it completely) and without clearance and that it turns to the spring
(item 6)
3. Unscrew the cap (item 1), remove the spring (item 2), the valve ( item 3) and
wash all the parts with an industrial detergent.
4. Blow the exterior of the pumping casing (part 7) where the balls (item 4)
are located. Blow into the interior, still where the balls are located.
INDEX
+ NOTE: Do not remove the ball from its seat.
5. Check that the valve edge (item 3) on the side without holes does not have
any longitudinal scores (length 1 or 2 mm). If scores are found, remove them
with abrasive paper (grain 1000) so that it slides freely again.
6. Check the piston by moving it manually to hear the characteristic noise

caused by the air expansion when it overcomes the valve resistance (item
3). If this is not so, replace the pumping element (code 7234030).
7. Lubricate the parts with oil and reassemble the pumping element.
6.5.3 CLEANING THE FILLER FILTER

Before loading the lubricant the filter must be cleaned :
1. Unscrew the inspection cap and remove the filter (item 7076049) from its
seat.
+ NOTE: Degree of filtering is 300 micron
2. Wash the filter with industrial detergent and blow it dry. If the filter is very
clogged or damaged, replace it.
6.6 GENERAL INFORMATION
6.6.1 CALCULATION OF LUBRICANT VOLUME REQUIRED

Table 6-1 indicates, according to the length and diameter of the bearings
(sliding type), the volume (mm3) of lubricant required. This volume is to be
delivered every two hours for grease and every hour for oil. For more frequent
deliveries, reduce the lubricant volume using smaller capacity valves. With
rolling bearings proceed as for sliding bearings considering 25 mm length for
each row of balls or rollers. The table is valid for sliding bearings up to a
speed of 600 r.p.m. and for ball or rolling bearings up to a speed of 1800
r.p.m.
Table 6.1 - Lubricant volume
LENGTH (mm)
∅ 12 19 25 38 51 57 76 82 102 110 127 140 152 165 178 204 230 250
mm
12 16 16 16 32 32 48 48
19 16 16 32 32 48 64 80 96
25 16 32 32 48 64 96 112 128 144 160 196 212
38 32 48 64 96 128 160 192 224 256 288 320 352
51 48 80 96 144 208 240 304 352 400 442 496 560 608 656 704
57 64 112 144 208 288 352 416 456 560 640 704 768 848 912 992
76 96 144 192 288 384 464 560 656 752 848 944 1040 1136 1232 1328 1504 1696
82 176 240 332 480 608 720 848 960 1088 1200 1328 1456 1568 1696 1336 2224 2280
102 224 304 448 608 752 896 1056 1200 1360 1504 1648 1808 1952 2112 2416 2704 3008
110 368 544 736 912 1104 1280 1472 1648 1824 2016 2192 2384 2560 2928 3296 3664
127 448 656 880 1104 1328 1536 1760 1984 2192 2416 2640 2864 3088 3520 3952 4400
140 512 784 1040 1296 1552 1808 2064 2336 2592 2848 3104 3360 3632 4144 4656 5184
152 608 896 1200 1504 1808 2112 2416 2704 3008 3312 3616 3920 4224 4816 5424 6032
165 688 1040 1392 1728 2080 2432 2784 3120 3472 3824 4160 4512 4864 5552 6240 6944
178 784 1184 1584 1984 2368 2768 3168 3552 3952 4352 4736 5136 5536 6320 7120 7904
190 896 1344 1792 2240 2688 3136 3584 4016 4464 4912 5360 5808 6256 7152 8048 8944
204 1008 1504 2016 2512 3008 3520 4016 4528 5024 5520 6032 6528 7040 8032 9040 1004
8
216 1120 1680 2240 2800 3360 3920 4480 5040 5600 6160 6720 7280 7840 8960 1008 1120
0 0
230 1248 1872 2480 3104 3728 4352 4960 5600 6208 6832 7456 8080 8688 9936 1118 1243
4 2
240 1376 2048 2736 3424 4112 4800 5488 6176 6848 7536 8224 8912 9600 1097 1233 1371
6 6 2
250 1504 2256 3008 3776 1698 5280 6032 6816 7536 8288 9040 9792 1054 1206 1356 1507
4 4 8 2
6.6.2 TUBING MAXIMUM LENGTH

Table 6-2 indicates the maximum length for main and secondary tubing
according to the tube outer diameter. The lengths have been calculated at an
operating temperature of 20°C.
Table 6.2 - Tubing maximum length
TUBE OUTSIDE TUBE MAXIMUM

DIAMETER (mm) LENGTH (m)
OIL GREASE
Light Heavy NLGI 1
MAIN LINES
6 70 20 10
8 85 35 15
INDEX
10 100 70 20
12 240 170 38
20 300 250 64
25 590 500 90
SECONDARY LINES
4 4 - -
6 10 7 5
8 60 12 7
+ NOTE: Suitably decrease the length indicated in the table when the
tubes are to be bent.
6.6.3 CLASSIFICATION OF LUBRICANTS

For liquid industrial lubricants the viscosity grading has been fixed starting
from a numeric succession set in mathematical progression, that at the same
time indicates the actual viscosity situation of the grading existing on the
market. Table 6-3 indicates the average viscosity value in cST at 40°C, the
viscosity minimum and maximum interval and the ISO symbol. Table 6-4
indicates the corresponding NLGI - ASTM for greases.
Table 6.3 - Average viscosity value
AVERAGE VISCOSITY ISO TYPE OF

VISCOSITY VALUE INTERVAL (cSt) ISYMBOL OIL
(cSt)
Min. Max.
2,2 1,98 2,42
3,2 2,88 3,52
4,6 4,14 5,06
6,8 6,12 7,48
10 9 11 LIGTH
15 13,5 16,5
22 19,8 24,2
32 28,8 35,2
46 41,1 50,6
68 61,2 74,8
100 90 110
150 135 165
220 198 242
320 288 352
460 414 506 HEAVY
680 612 748

1000 900 1100
1500 1350 1650
Table 6.4 - Average viscosity value
NLGI GRADE ASTM PENETRATION INDEX TYPE OF GREASE

(1/10 mm)
000 445 - 475
00 400 - 430 FLUID
0 355 - 385
1 310 - 340
2 265 - 295
3 220 - 250 SOLID
4 175 - 205
5 130 - 160
6 85 - 115
NLGI National Lubricating Grease Institute

ASTM American Society Testing and Materials
6.6.4 CHARACTERISTICS OF RECOMMENDED GREASES

Table 6-5 indicates the main characteristics of the greases we recommend.
The penetration index refers to a temperature of 25°C.
+ NOTE: The greases marked with an asterisk (*) are recommended for
working at high temperatures or for supports with very high

loads.
INDEX
Table 6-5 Characteristic of recommended greases
MANUFACT. LUBRICANT DROPPING PENETRAT. LUBRICANT TYPE OF

CODE POINT INDEX COMPOSITION SYSTEM
AGIP F.1 GR MU/EP0 180 °C 350/370* Lithium with EP additives Progressive
AGIP AGIP F.1 GR MU/EP1 180 °C 310/340* Lithium with EP additives Dual line
AGIP F.1 GR MU 185 °C 265/295* Lithium Dual line
AGIP F.1 GR MU/EP2 180 °C 265/295* Lithium Dual line
EPEXA 0 155 °C 355/385 Sodium Progressive
EPEXA 1 160 °C 310/340 Lithium - Calcium EP Dual line
EPEXA 2 165 °C 265/295* Lithium - Calcium EP Dual line
ANTAR EPEXA M02 165 °C 265/295* Lithium - Calcium MO S2 Dual line
MULTISERVICE 180 °C 265/295* Lithium - Calcium Dual line
ROLEXA 1 175 °C 310/340 Lithium - Calcium Dual line
ROLEXA 2 180 °C 265/295* Lithium - Calcium Dual line
APIGREASE LT - M 195 °C 250/270 Lithium + Disulphide Dual line
APIGREASE LT - S 195 °C 245/280 Lithium Dual line
API APIGREASE PGX - 0 180 °C 355/385 Lithium with EP additives Progressive
APIGREASE PGX - 1 190 °C 300/340 Lithium with EP additives Dual line
APIGREASE PGX - 2 190 °C 250/295* Lithium with EP additives Dual line
MPG - 0 186 °C 365 Lithium + additives Progressive
BARDAHL MPG - 2 186 °C 260* Lithium + additives Dual line
NO MELT GREASE 0 Infusibile 365 Silica gel + additives Dual line
ENERGREASE GP3G 100 °C 220/250* Calcium Dual line
ENERGREASE LS 2 190 °C 265/295* Lithium Dual line
BP ENERGREASE LS -EP 1 190 °C 310/340 Lithium with EP additives Dual line
ENERGREASE LS -EP 2 190 °C 265/295* Lithium with EP additives Dual line
BP GREASE 0/11 EP 175 °C 340/370 Lithium with EP additives Progressive
BR FIRE GREASE 1 Infusible 290/310* Silica lead Dual line
B. R. BR GREASE X1 180 °C 350/380 Lithium Calcium Lead Dual line
BR GREASE X2 180 °C 310/350 Lithium Calcium Lead Dual line
BR GREASE EP 1 Extra 180 °C 310/340 Lithium with EP additives Dual line
SPHEEROL APT 1 183 °C 310/340 Lithium Dual line
SPHEEROL APT 2 183 °C 265/295* Lithium Dual line
CASTROL SPHEEROL BN Infusible 265/295* Bentone Dual line
SPHEEROL EPL 0 175 °C 350/360 Lithium with EP additives Progressive
SPHEEROL EPL 1 183 °C 310/340 Lithium with EP additives Dual line
SPHEEROL EPL 2 183 °C 265/295* Lithium with EP additives Dual line
Dura-Lith GREASE EP 0 170 °C 370 Lithium Progressive
CHEVRON Dura-Lith GREASE EP 2 180 °C 280* Lithium Dual line
Multi-Move GREASE 1 290 °C 330* Complex Calcium Dual line
Table 6-5 Characteristic of recommended greases (Cont.)

CODE POINT INDEX. COMPOSITION SYSTEM
STABYLA-2 EP 190 °C 265/295 Lithium with EP additives Dual line
STABYLL-TS MO 185 °C 265/295 Lithium + semisin +Mos2 Dual line
ALMETYN 1 260 °C 310/340 Al. Comp. + EP additives Progressive
REINER ALMETYN 2 270 °C 265/295 Al. Comp. + EP additives Progressive
URETHYN E/M2 260 °C 265/295 Synthetic + EP additives Progressive
URETHYN E2 257 °C 265/295 Synthetic + EP additives Progressive
GERALYN 2 240 °C 265/295 Al. Comp. Dual line
GERALYN P2 Senza 265/295 Betone + Synthetic Dual line
GLEITMO 500 185 °C 265/295 Lithium + MOS2 Dual line
GLEITMO GLEITMO 585 M 170 °C 265/295 Lithium + white solid Dual line
GLEITMO 805 160 °C 265/295 Lithium + white solid Dual line
GLEITMO 523 220 °C 265/295 Complex Lithium Dual line
BEACON EP 1 182 °C 300/330* Lithium with IP properties Dual line/Prog.
ESSO CAZARK 1 100 °C 310/340* Calcium Dual line/Prog.
CAZARK 2 102 °C 265/295* Calcium Dual line
BEACON EP 0 180 °C 355/385 Lithium Progressive
EURO EP 0 100 °C 360/370 Calcium+Lead+EP additives Dual line/Prog.
EUROIL EUROLITEX EP 1 180 °C 360/345 Lithium + additives Dual line/Prog.
EUROLITEX EP 0 180 °C 380/385 Lithium Progressive
OLIO FIAT GRASSO LAMBDA 1 EP 185 °C 310/340 Lithium with EP additives Dual line/Prog.
FINA BENTEX 0 Infusibile 355/385 Bentone with EP additives Progressive
FINA FINA 5628 204 °C 280/290* Lithium Dual line/Prog.
FINA MARSON HTL 1 180/190 °C 320/330 Lithium Dual line/Prog.
FINA MARSON LM 180 °C 280/305* Lithium with additives Dual line/Prog.
GUN GREASE EP 0 170 °C 350/370 Lithium with EP additives Progressive
GAZELLE GUN GREASE EP 1 180 °C 310/340 Lithium with EP additives Dual line/Prog.
GUN GREASE 301 180 °C 310/340 Lithium with additives Dual line/Prog.
GREASE 429/0 95 °C 330/360 Classic base Dual line/Prog.
HARRISON GREASE 430 EP 0 175 °C 330/360 Lithium with EP additives Dual line/Prog.
GREASE 433/3 180 °C 300/330 Lithium Dual line
HOUGRTON COSMOLUBE MF 180/190 °C 290/310 Lithium+Calcium with Lead Dual line
CX EL - HM 200 °C 360 Lithium Disulphide Mo Progressive
KLUBER KH380 AA MF Infusibile 320 Synthetic Disulphide Mo Dual line/Prog.
STABURAGSB 15/A400 280 °C 400 Sodium Progressive
STABURAGSB 30/A280 Infusible 270/280* Thickened Dual line/Prog.
GRASSO STELI SC/TC 200/210 °C 280/290* Lithium Dual line
LUBRO GRASSO TECALEM 120/130 °C 280/290* Aluminium Dual line
GRAS. TECALEM UT/TC 100/110 °C 380/400* Aluminium Progressive
Mobilgrease LARITAL 2 150 °C 265/295* Lithium Dual line
Mobilgrease SPECIAL 170 °C 275/305* Lithium Dual line/Prog.
MOBILPLEX 46 260 °C 310/340* Complex Dual line/Prog.
MOBIL MOBILPLEX 47 230 °C 295/325 Complex Dual line/Prog.
Mobiltemp GREASE 78 260 °C 295/340 Infusible thickened soap Dual line/Prog.
Mobillux GREASE 180 °C 265/295* Lithium Dual line
Sovarex GREASE L 0 225 °C 370/390 Calcium Lead Additives Progressive
Sovarex GREASE L 1 230 °C 340/370 Calcium Lead Additives Dual line/Prog.
LMP/180/0 191 °C 355/385 Lithium + Mo S2 Dual line/Prog.
MOLY LMP/180/1 191 °C 310/340 Lithium + Mo S2 Dual line/Prog.
LMP/180/2 191 °C 265/295* Lithium + Mo S2 Dual line
BR 2 185 °C 265/295* Lithium Dual line
FB 180 - 265/295* Disulphide Mo Dual line
MOLIKOTE LONGTERM W2 195 °C 265/295* Lithium + solid white oxides Dual line
LONGTERM 1-2 175 °C 265/295* Lithium disulphide Mo Dual line
1132 - 245/275* Synthetic disulphide Dual line
INDEX
Table 6-5 Characteristic of recommended greases (Cont.)

CODE POINT INDEX COMPOSITION SYSTEM
OLEOBLIZ EVERLUB 5F - 310/340 Thickened oil Dual line/Prog.
SFERUL LF 180 °C 31/340 Lithium Dual line/Prog.
LITEEX - EP/ 1 180 °C 310/340 Lithium with EP additives Dual line/Prog.
MATIC - EP/0 100 °C 355/385 Calcium + EP additives Progressive
ROL OIL MATIC - EP/1 100 °C 310/340 Calcium + EP additives Dual line/Prog.
MERCURY/2 180 °C 265/295* Lithium Dual line
ROLEX/0 180 °C 355/385 Lithium Progressive
HONDA 400 100/110 °C 410/440 Special EP comp. Progressive
PLX 0 180 °C 360/380 Lithium Lead + EP additives Progressive
PLX 1 180 °C 340/360 Lithium Lead + EP additives Dual line/Prog.
IGLEA PLX 2 180 °C 275/305* Lithium Lead + EP additives Dual line/Prog.
SILEX TG 1 Infusible 310/340* Silicon gel stabilised Dual line/Prog.
SLEP 2 185 °C 260/270* Lithium Lead + EP additives Dual line
KANDAR EP1 185 °C 340 Lithium Lead + EP additives Dual line/Prog.
SILEX TPS Infusible 310/340* Synthetic oil Dual line/Prog.
Alvania Grease EP1 185 °C 310/340 Lithium with EP additives Dual line/Prog.
Alvania Grease EP2 185 °C 265/295* Lithium with EP additives Dual line
SHELL Alvania Grease 1 185 °C 310/340 Lithium Dual line/Prog.
Alvania Grease 2 185 °C 265/295* Lithium Dual line
RETINAX T 90 °C 355/385 Lime Progressive
UNEDO Grease 1 95 °C 310/340 Lime Dual line
NYCTEA 1 185 °C 310/340 Lithium Dual line/Prog.
TOTAL NYCTEA 2 185 °C 265/295* Lithium + additives Dual line
MULTIS EP1 180 °C 310/340 Lithium with EP additives Dual line/Prog.
MULTIS EP01 180 °C 350/385 Lithium with EP additives Progressive
SIGNAL G EP 300 185 °C 350 Lithium + Lead Dual line/Prog.
VISCOL SIGNAL G SIL 81 Infusibile 270/340* Bentone + EP additives Dual line
SIGNAL G EP 380 Infusibile 380 Complex Dual line/Prog.
SIGNAL POLAR 185 °C 330 Lithium + additives Dual line/Prog.
6.6.5 CHARACTERISTICS OF RECOMMENDED OILS

Table 6-6 indicates the main characteristics of the oils we recommend.
Table 6-7 Characteristic of recommended oils
CLASS ISO/UNI CODE APPLICATION FIAT CASTROL ESSO

A AN 68 LUBRICATION T 68 MAGNA 68 NURAY 68
WITHOUT
RECOVERY
CB 68 MODERATELY R 68 MAGNA 68 TERESSO 68
LOADED GEARS PERFECTO T68 NUTO 68
C CB 150 R 150 MAGNA 150 NUTO 150
CC 150 EPZ 150 ALPHA SP 150 SPARTAN EP 150
CC320 VERY LOADED EPZ 320 ALPHA SP 320 SPARTAN EP 320
CC460 GEARS EPZ 460 ALPHA SP 460 SPARTAN EP 460
G GS 68 MAGNA BD 68 FEBIS K 68
G 68 MAGNA BDX 68
GUIDES GS 220 MAGNA CF 220 FEBIS K 220
MAGNA CF X220
HM 46 HYDROSTATIC HTF 46 HYSPIN AWS 46 NUTO H 46
AIR NUTO H 68
H HM 68 LUBRICATION HTF 68 HYSPIN AWS 68 NUTO HP 68
SYSTEMS
HG 68 HYDRAULIC RCS 68 MAGNA AX 68 FEBIS K 68
SYSTEMS AND
GUIDES
Table 6-7 Characteristic of recommended oils (Cont.)
CLASS ISO/UNI CODE APPLICATION IP MOBIL SHELL

A AN 68 LUBRICATION IP ARULA OIL 68 RUBREX 400 VITREA OIL 68
WITHOUT
RECOVERY
CB 68 MODERATELY HERMEA OIL 68 OIL HEAVY MED VITREA OIL 68
LOADED GEARS HYDRUS OIL 68 TELLUS OIL C68
CB 150 HERMEA OIL 150 OIL EXTRA HEAVY VITREA OIL 150
C
CC 150 MELLANA OIL 150 MOBILGEAR 629 OMALA OIL 150
CC320 VERY LOADED MELLANA OIL 320 MOBILGEAR 632 OMALA OIL 320
CC460 GEARS MELLANA OIL 460 MOBILGEAR 634 OMALA OIL 460
BANTIA OIL HG68 VACRA OIL N2 TONNA OIL T 68
G G 68 TONNA OIL TX 68
GUIDES BANTIA OIL HG220 VACTRA OIL N4 TONNA OIL T 220
HYDROSTATIC HYDRUS OIL 46 MOBIL DTE 25 TELLUS OIL 46
HM 46 AIR HYDRUS OIL X46 HYDRAULIC OIL 46
H HM 68 LUBRICATION HYDRUS OIL 68 MOBIL DTE 26 TELLUS OIL 68
SYSTEMS
HG 68 HYDRAULIC BANTIA OIL HG68 MOBILVAC. OIL 1409 TONNA OIL T 68
SYSTEMS AND TONNA OIL TX 68
GUIDES
INDEX
Table 6-7 Characteristic of recommended oils (Cont.)
CLASS ISO/UNI CODE APPLICATION AGIP ELF KLUBER

LUBRICATION RADULA 68 MOVIXA 68 CRUCOLAN 68
A AN 68 WITHOUT ACER 68
RECOVERY
CB 68 MODERATELY ACER 68 POLYTELIS 68 CRUCOLAN 68
LOADED GEARS
C CB 150 ACER 150 POLYTELIS 150 CRUCOLAN 150
CC 150 BLASIA 150 REDUCTELF SP 150 LAMORA 150
CC320 VERY LOADED BLASIA 320 REDUCTELF SP 320 LAMORA 320
CC460 GEARS BLASIA 460 REDUCTELF SP 460 LAMORA 460
EXIDIA 68 MOGLIA 68 POLADO 68
G G 68
GUIDES EXIDIA 220 MOGLIA 220 POLADO 220
HYDROSTATIC OSO 46 ELFOLNA 46 LAMORA 46
HM 46 AIR
H HM 68 LUBRICATION OSO 68 ELFOLNA 68 LAMORA 68
SYSTEMS
HG 68 HYDRAULIC EXIDIA 68 HYGLISS 68 LAMORA 68
SYSTEMS AND
GUIDES
CHAIN LUBRICATION

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

User and
Maintenance Manual
AIR-OIL LUBRICATION UNIT

with gear electro-pump in accordance
with point 1.7.4, ann. I, Dir. EEC 89/39
Mod. 4030-102
Table of contents:
0.0 Introduction
1.0 General description
2.0 Technical characteristics
3.0 Maintenace procedure
DECLARATION OF COMPLIANCE
Registred name : mecgi srl

Address via Lago Maggiore, 71 36077 Altavilla Vicentina
Model : Centrale di Lubrificazione cod. 4030-102
Year of manufacture : 2012
Marking : CE (EC)
0.0 Introduction
This user’s and maintenance manual refers to a AIR-OIL LUBRICATION UNIT, for use in mineral
oil lubrication systems.
It is recommended that this manual is carefully kept in good condition and is always available to
persons requiring to consult it. To request further copies, updates or clarifications with respect to
this manual contact the Engineering Department at mecgi srl.
AIR - OIL LUBRIFICATION SYSTEM cod.: 4030-102
The use of the pump referred to in this manual must be entrusted to qualified personnel with a knowl-
edge of hydraulics and electrical systems.
The manufacturer reserves the right to update the product and/or the user’s manual without the obli-
gation to revise previous versions. It is however, possible to contact the Engineering Department for
the latest revision in use.
The pump, and any accessories mounted on it, should be carefully checked immediately on receipt
and in the event of any discrepancy or complaint the mecgi srl Sales department should be con-
tacted without delay mecgi srl. declines to accept any responsibility for injuries to persons or damage
to property in the event of the non-observance of the information presented in this manual.
Any modification to component parts of the system or the different destination of use of this system
or its parts without prior written authorisation from mecgi srl will absolve the latter from any responsi-
bility for injury or damage to persons and/or property and will release them from all obligations arising
from the guarantee.
Air-Oil Lubrication System
Air-oil system has been studied especially for lubrication of chains and is composed
mainly of:
4030-102 Central pumping oil with a 30 lt. tank, delivery 500 cc/min and pressure adjustable from 2 to 20 bar
which allows you to adjust the total amount of oil (increasing the pressure increases the amount
of oil in the unit of time).
Schema 4030-102
3291114 Distributor of 4 lubrica-
tion points individually
adjustable.
1132250 4 mixing elements with

the possibility to individ-
ually adjust the amount
of air
1090-286 Electro valve command

compressed air that can
be supplied directly from
the customer air net-
work or produced by our
compressor box code
5020-012 specifically
designed for this appli-
cation
1090-287 Pressure regulator

that supplies the com-
pressed air distribu-
tion circuit of the air-oil
system.
All the above elements are mounted

in a modular box to the compres-
sor unit 5020-012 to make it can be
easily matched.
mecgi srl - page 2

1.0
AIR DESCRIPTION OF LUBRICATION UNIT 4030-101
- OIL LUBRIFICATION SYSTEM cod.: 4030-102
This lubrication unit is particularly suitable for feeding lubrication systems; the versions for single line
lubrication systems equipped with non-volumetric injectors or dosing valves. The working pressures
are < 20 bar (290 psi) with continuous or intermittent service - system 01
The unit is made up of a gear pump, an electric motor, a tank, an intake filter, an easily accessible
monobloc valve external to the tank, a manometer for indicating the line pressure and a minimum
level electric contact.
1.1 Gear pump

The pump serves the lubrication circuit having the following characteristics:
- Flow rate of 500 cm3/min, both at 1,500 rpm.
- Maximum pressure on intermittent service is 20 bar
- Working temperature +5°C to + 40°C.
The system must only be used with mineral lubricating oil having a viscosity of from 15 to 1000
cSt at the working temperature of the fluid;
1.2 Electric motor

Motor, standard, three-phase, 4 pole, frequency 50-60 Hz and 90W power,
Size 56 Grade of protection IP 55 Insulation class F Continuous service S1
1.3 Tank
Version Dimensions lxdxh (mm) Weight (Kg)
30 litre, Steel L520 - P330 – h320 23
1.4 Minimum level indicator

Magnetic type
Reversible float with contact normally closed on minimum level. Maximum switching power 50W -
50VA;
maximum switching voltage 220VAC – 150VDC, maximum current 3A; On request a minimum level
and lubricant reserve indicator is available: fitted with floats and two switches (minimum and zero)
1.5 Intake filter

Degree of filtering: 260 micron
1.6 Valve block

Mounted external to the tank and easily accessible, it is composed of a by-pass valve which can be
easily set externally; delivery connection or delivery coupling both of G1/8 UNI-ISO 228/1 (1/8 BSP)
with seating for double taper and tube of 6 diameter; coupling for manometer of G1/8 UNI-ISO 228/1
(1/8 BSP); non-return valve or release valve for functioning of systems with direct response doser
valves.
1.7 Manometer
Technical data: ø 43 mm - connection 1/8”G - range bar da 0:40
mecgi srl - page 3

2.0 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.1 DIMENSIONS
Allow sufficient space for the installation, leaving minimum 100 mm (3.93 in.) around the
machine in order to facilitate any maintenance intervention.
520
200
380 580
2.2 ELECTRIC MOTOR

Three phase Hz Kw
V 380 - 440 Y / 220 - 255 ∆ 50 / 60 0,09
V 460 - 480 Y / 265 - 280 ∆ 60 0,108
2.3 HYDRAULIC FITTING

Gear pump is connected to valve block via ø 4mm (0.15 in.) nylon tubing.
2.4 Other data

Insulation Class F
Protection grade IP 55
Working Temperature + 5 ÷ + 40 °C
Operating Humidity 90 % relative humidity.
Storage Temperature - 20 ÷ + 50 °C
Continuous sound pressure level < 70 dB(A)
mecgi srl - page 4

3.0 CORRECT USE
3.1 Putting into service
Damage to the power supply cable and housing could result in contact with high voltage live parts and hence
be a danger to life:
- carefully check the integrity of the power supply cable and the unit before use;
- In the event of there being damage to the power supply cable or the unit, DO NOT put the system into service!;
- Replace the damaged power supply cable with a new one;
- The unit can be opened and repaired ONLY by qualified personnel;
- In order to prevent dangers of electric shock due to direct or indirect contact with live parts it is necessary that
the electrical power supply line is adequately protected by a suitable differential magneto-thermal circuit
breaker with an intervention threshold of 0.03 Ampere and a max. operating time of 1 second.
The breaking capacity of the circuit breaker must be ≤ 10 kA and the nominal current In = 6 A.
- The connection of the pressure switch mounted directly on the tank must be 24 VAC/DC.
- The pump MUST NOT be submersed in fluids or utilised in environments which are particularly aggressive or
explosive/inflammable if not prepared for this purpose beforehand by the supplier.
- For correct fixing verify the distance between centres shown in the diagram in Section 2.
- Use gloves and safety glasses as required in the lubrication oil safety chart;
- DO NOT use aggressive lubricants with NBR gaskets and seals; if in doubt consult the Engineering Depart-
ment of mecgi srl, who will provide a chart with the details of recommended oils;
- DO NOT ignore dangers to health and observe all hygiene standards;
- WARNING! All electrical components must be grounded. This refers to both electrical components and
control devices. In this regard ensure that the ground cable is correctly connected. For reasons of safety the
ground cable must be approx. 100 mm longer than the phase cables. In the event of accidental detachment
of the cable, the ground terminal must be the last to be removed.
action to be taken prior to start up
- Verify the integrity of the pump;
-Fill the tank with suitable lubricant (min/max indication on the tank);
- Verify that the pump is at operating temperature and the tubing free from air bubbles;
- Check that the electrical connections have been effected correctly (CEI 64/8, IEC 364);
- Verify the correct connections of the level and any pressure switch to the control panel
- On starting the pump, check that the direction of rotation of the electric motor: If rotating in the wrong
direction invert the cable connections.
The minimum level indicator is supplied, unless otherwise specified by the customer, with the contact closed
for minimum level. Should the user require to use a normally open contact it will be necessary to open the tank
and to invert the operating direction of the float.
3.2 Use
1) press the start button of the machine to which the Dragon pump is connected;
2) verify the starting of the pump;
3) verify the adequate lubrication of the machine (if doubt exists as to the correct functioning consult the
Engineering Department of mecgi srl to request test procedures).
3.3 Transport and storage
Transport and storage is effected in a cardboard package. No particular precautions are required except as
noted on the package itself. handling can be effected by one person.
! Lift the unit with taking account of the right way up indicated on the cardboard carton
! The machine components can withstand temperatures, during storage, from -20 to +50°C; however, in order
to avoid damage, starting of the machine should occur at a minimum temperature of -5°C.
3.4 Assembly/Disassembly
mecgi srl - page 5

No pump assembly operations are envisaged. For wall mounting ensure adequate space is available (as
shown in the installation diagram) to avoid abnormal postures and possible impacts; four fixing holes are pro-
vided with different characteristics depending on the version (see section 2) Subsequently it will be necessary,
as previously described, to connect the pump to the machine hydraulically and then to connect the control
panel.
During the disassembly phase ensure the tank is empty. Disconnect the electrical and hydraulic parts. Where
the machine is to be scrapped, do not dispose of potentially polluting parts in the environment, following local
regulations for their correct disposal.
At the time of the machine being scrapped it is necessary to remove and destroy the identification plate and
all other relative documents.
3.5 Regulation
the only parameter which can be modified is the pressure; to modify the set value rotate the regualting screww
clockwise (to increase) or anticlockwise (to decrease).
3.6 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

! does not require any special tool for checking or maintenance tasks. However, it is recommended the use
only of appropriate and in good conditions tooling, protective devices (gloves, glasses) and clothing (according
to current regulation) to avoid injury to persons or damage to machine parts. For an easy maintenance, it is
advised to assemble the machine in a comfortable and reachable location.
Prior to any maintenance intervention: Verify that power supply and hydraulic feeding are disconnected. Empty
the reservoir.
Periodical checks
INSPECTION WORK CYCLE

Lubrication status 1000
Oil level 2000
Cleanliness of refilling and suction filters 4000
Deposits on the bottom of the reservoir 6000
During maintenance or disposal of the machine care should be taken to properly dispose of environmentally
sensitive items. Refer to local regulations in force in your area. When disposing of this unit, it is important to
ensure that the identification label and all the other relative documents are also destroyed.
3.7 Repairs
The following diagnostic table indicates the main anomalies which may be encountered, the probable causes
and possible solutions.
The anomalies shown are:
• the pump fails to deliver sufficient oil or no oil at all
• the pump fails to deliver oil at the prescribed pressure
• failure to release line pressure (only on systems with volumetric valves)
• failure to effect lubrication cycle
In case of doubts and/or problems which cannot be resolved do not attempt to disassemble parts of the
machine but contact the Engineering Department of mecgi srl
mecgi srl - page 6

DIAGNOSTIC TABLE
INDICATION PROBABLE CAUSE SOLUTION
Pump does not deliver oil. • Pump is drawing off air because the reservoir is empty • Refill the reservoir and discharge air from the system
Pump delivers oil incorrectly
• Suction filter dirty or fouled • Wash the filter with petrol and blow compressed air through it
• The internal connections are loose Tighten all connections ensuring there are no leakages
• Internal connections are loose • Tighten all connections ensuring there are no leakages
• Wear of the pump • Replace the pump
• Pressure adjusting valve loosening: before flowing down • Tighten the adjusting screw until oil flows out from the delivery valve
through the delivery valve, oil flows back immediately to
the reservoir
Pump delivers oil at an • Release valve damaged • Replace the valve

improper pressure
• Wrong calibration of the adjusting valve • Pump outlet must be connected to a hose - approximately 300 mm
(11.81 in.) long - with a manometer connected to the free end.
Adjust pressure by turning the screw and reading the correspond-
ing pressure value on the manometer
Pressure in line not released • Presence of dirt under the valve • Disassemble and clean the valve. Replace it, if necessary
• Adjusting valve is faulty • Disassemble and overhaul the valve. Replace it, if necessary
Emptying main line of • Loose fittings at pump outlet or on system • Tighten all connections ensuring there are no leakages.
system during pause time
3.8 Dangers present in use
The verification of conformity with the essential safety requirements and regulations of the Machine Directive is effected
by means of the compilation of a check list which has been pre-prepared and is contained in the technical file.
The lists which are utilised are of three types:
• list of dangers (as in EN 414 referring to EN 292)
• application of essential safety requirements (Machine Dir. - att. 1, part 1)
• electrical safety requirements (EN 60204-1)
The following is a list of dangers which have not been fully eliminated but which are considered acceptable:
• in the version of the pump without a release it is possible to encounter squirts of oil (for this reason appropri-
ate protective clothing must be worn)
• contact with oil -> see the requirements for the use of suitable personal protective clothing
• use of unsuitable lubricant -> the characteristics of the fluid are shown on the pump and in the manual (in
case of doubt contact the Eng. Dept of Dmecgi srl)
• protection against direct and indirect contact must be provided by the user
• given the purpose of the pump it must always be functioning; for this reason it is necessary to pay
attention to the electrical connections which, in the case of a power failure, the customer’s machine is restarted
only by means of a reset, while the lubrication pump is able to restart
INADMISSIBLE FLUIDS
Fluids Danger
Lubricants containing abrasive components Premature wear of pump
Lubricants containing silicon Pump failure
Petrol – solvents - flammable liquids Fire – explosion - seal damage
Corrosive products Pump damage - danger to persons
Water Pump oxidization
Food Products Contamination of product
mecgi srl - page 7

UNIT SPARE PARTS LIST
10 4090-015 Magnetic plug 1

9 4090-014 Visual level 2
8 4090-013 Filling cup 1
7 3079071 Extends electric level 1
6 0039843 Connector 1
5 0039842 Base connector 1 11 3130052 Suction filter 1
4 1655570 Magnetic level 1
3 3088172 Suction tube assembly 1 12 3099130 Gear pump 1
2 3404026 Electro pump 1 13 3301374 Electric motor 1
N° Code Description Q.ty N° Code Description Q.ty
DIMENSIONS
mecgi srl - page 8

Mixing Valve
mecgi srl - page 9

Mixing Valve
mecgi srl - page 10

psa.com
mecgi srl - page 11

com
ITALIA U.K. GERMANY FRANCE

Dropsa SpA Dropsa (UK) Ltd Dropsa GmbH Dropsa Ame
t. +39 02-250791 t. +44 (0)1784-431177 t. +49 (0)211-394-011 t. +33 (0)1-3993-0033
f.+39 02-25079767 f. +44 (0)1784-438598 f. +49 (0)211-394-013 f. +33 (0)1-3986-2636
CHINA U.S.A. AUSTRALIA BRAZIL

Dropsa Lubrication Systems Dropsa USA Incorporated Dropsa Australia Pty Dropsa Do Brasil Ind.e
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd t. +1 586-566-1540 t. +61 (02)-9938-6644 Com.Ltda
t. +86 (021) 67740275 f. +1 586-566-1541 f. +61 (0)2-9938-6611 t. +55 (0)11-563-10007
f. +86 (021) 67740205 f. +55 (0)11-563-19408
mecgi srl - page 12

DECLARATION OF COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS EC
mecgi s.r.l.
Via Lago Maggiore ,71
Altavilla Vic. (Vi) - ITALIA
Tel.+ 39 0444 574884 Fax +39 0444 371096
E-mail: info@mecgi.it
CERTIFIES that
Air-oil lubrification system : 4030-102
has been constructed in conformity with the Directives Of The Council Of The European
Community on the standardization of the legislations of member states
2006/42 Machinery Directive / 2006/42
2006/95 Electrical Safety: Low Voltage Directive/2006/95
company: mecgi srl Altavilla vicentina -VI
FIRMA:
data:
INSTRUCTIONS
AND MAINTENACE
AIR COMPRESSOR UNIT
ARRANGED FOR AIR-OIL Mod. 5020-012
LUBRICATION SYSTEMS
chapters:
01 WARRANTY CONDITIONS 11 DIRECTIVES AND REFERENCE NORMS
02 IMPORTANCE OF THE MANUAL 12 SAFETY
03 INTENDED USE 13 PRESSURE SWITCH
04 LIMITS OF USE 14 CHECKS BEFORE SWITCHING ON
05 LEGEND 15 SWITCHING ON
06 TECHNICAL DATA 16 SWITCHING OFF
07 TRANSPORT, UNPACKING AND HANDLING 17 INTERRUPTION IN THE ELECTRIC
08 POSIZIONING AND INSTALLATION POWER SUPPLY
09 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION 18 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM
10 FIRST START-UP 19 GENERAL WARNINGS
name : mecgi srl

adress via Lago Maggiore, 71 36077 Altavilla Vicentina
Model : Air compressor unit arranged for air-oil lubrication
system cod. 5020-012
year of construction : 2012
Directive : EC
Air compressor unit arranged for air-oil lubrication system cod.: 5020-011
7 3 6
mecgi srl - pag. 2

Dear Customer,
First of all we thank you for your trust in buying your new “Reciprocating compressor with belt drive”.
We are sure that you will be satisfied with your purchase, considering the technological level achieved by our products, thanks to our
constant commitment which encourages us to grow every day and to cope professionally with the continuous technological, productive
and commercial transformations.
In the certainty that we will be able to fulfil all your future working requirements, we remain at your disposal for any information you
may require and take this opportunity of wishing you every success in your work.
1 WARRANTY CONDITIONS
WARRANTY
1) Within the limits established in this guarantee, the undersigned manufacturer undertakes to repair all construction defects that
may arise during the guarantee period, set at 12 (twelve) months from the date of sale for a daily use of 8 (eight) working
hours.The obligations deriving from the guarantee cease in the event of suspension or variation of the agreed terms of payment.
2) The guarantee ceases if the buyer does not correctly follow the rules described in the “Instructions for use and maintenance” of
the compressor.
3) The guarantee does not cover: faults and defects due to normal wear of those parts which are by nature subject to rapid and
continuous wear and faults resulting from the use of tools and accessories not supplied directly by the manufacturer.
4) In order to benefit from the right to the guarantee, when the defect arises the purchase must promptly notify the manufacturer,
at any rate no later than 8 (eight) days after the date of discovering the fault, and must allow the manufacturer, if necessary,
to carry out the required inspections and repairs.
5) The buyer must send the faulty part, covered by the guarantee, at his own expense to the manufacturer for repair or
replacement. As contemplated in this clause, the guarantee obligation is considered fulfilled with the delivery to the buyer of the
adequately repaired or replaced part.
6) During the guarantee period contemplated in clause 1) the labour costs, for the duration of the work alone, will be at the
manufacturer’s expense. If the repairs or replacements have to be carried out on the place of installation of the compressor, the
travel and lodging expenses of the personnel will be borne by the buyer.
7) All breakages resulting from incorrect manoeuvres, lack of skill, fortuitous events or for which the user can be held responsible,
are excluded from the guarantee, whether the user is directly responsible or through a third party, or when the buyer has made
modifications or carried out repairs without the manufacturer’s consent in writing, irrespective of whether or not there is a
connection between said modifications or repairs and the defects found.
8) It is expressly agreed that the manufacturer shall be relieved of all responsibility for any damage of lost or decreased
production suffered by the buyer, resulting from faults or defects in construction for which this guarantee is applicable.
2 IMPORTANCE OF THE MANUAL

READ THE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL: BEFORE USING THE COMPRESSOR THE AUTHORISED OPERATORS
MUST READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL PARTS OF THIS MANUAL.
This technical manual of “Instructions for use and maintenance” has been drawn up according to the indications given by the European
Directives, in order to ensure easy and correct understanding of the topics dealt with by the operators authorised to perform the use and
maintenance of the compressor concerned. If, despite the care taken by the manufacturer when drawing up the manual, these operators
find any problem in understanding it, in order to avoid incorrect personal interpretations that might endanger safety, they are requested to
apply promptly to the manufacturer for the correct explanations and any further information.
Before using the compressor, the authorised operators must read and understand all parts of this technical manual of “Instructions for
use and maintenance” and strictly follow all the rules in it, in order to ensure their own safety and that of other people, obtain the best
compressor performance, and ensure the maximum efficiency and long life of all its components. This manual must be at the disposal of
the authorised operators at all times and must always be kept safely, near the compressor.
MANUAL: this manual must always be at the disposal of the authorised operators and must be kept safely, near the
compressor. This manual must be handed over together with the compressor if it is transferred to another user.
If the manual is lost or spoilt, ask the manufacturer for a new copy, specifying the compressor identification data (see ce
marking) and the revision.
RESPONSABILITY: the Manufacturer declines all responsibility for any damage to persons, animals and things
resulting from failure to observe the rules and warnings described in this manual.
UPDATES: this manual reflects the state of the art at the time the compressor was sold and cannot be
considered inadequate only because it may be updated later in the light of new experience.
Instructions amd Maintenance Manual

PERUFFO AIR SRL
2 Via delle Fontanine, 8/16 - 36040 Brendola (VI) Italia
mecgi srl - pag. 3
Cod. OQ7.5ARG200–EN
Emiss. 19-07-02 Rev.10 - Agg. 06-04-10
2.1 NOTES FOR CONSULTATION 2.4 RESERVED RIGHTS

The general danger signal and the framed text in capital All information (text, drawings, diagrams, etc.) given here is
letters draw the operator’s attention to the warnings given in this reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced and made
manual: known (completely or in part) with any means of reproduction
N.B. (Nota Bene): framed text in capital letters. (photocopies, microfilm or other) without the Manufacturer’s
Bold print:: Highlights some significant sentences in the text. authorisation in writing.
Italics: Describes the captions of the figures and tables All the trade marks mentioned belong to their respective owners.
2.2 INTENDED RECEIVERS (AUTHORISED OPERATORS) 3 INTENDED USE
GENERAL OPERATOR
This is a professionally trained operator, over 18 years of The compressor has been designed and made for the following
age, in compliance with the laws in force in the country of intended use:
use, authorised only to switch on, use, fine-tune FIELD OF USE Industrial and handicrafts sector
(obligatorily with the guards enabled and the machine In a closed, covered environment,
switched off) and switch off the compressor sufficiently lit, suitable for the legal
HANDLING OPERATOR requirements in force in the country of use
This is a qualified technician, approved to perform only PLACE OF USE concerning safety and health in the work
operations on the mechanical / hydraulic / pneumatic place. The compressor must stand on a
parts to carry out adjustments, maintenance and/or horizontal plane (level) which ensures its
repairs even with the guards disabled (with the consent of stability in relation to its overall dimensions.
the safety manager). Compression of air for the use of suitable
MECHANICAL / HYDRAULIC / PNEUMATIC pneumatic tools complying with the
OPERATOR regulations in force (e.g.: guns for blowing,
This is a qualified technician, approved to perform only washing, painting or sandblasting,
INTENDED USE
operations on the mechanical / hydraulic / pneumatic screwdrivers, stapling guns, nailing guns or
parts to carry out adjustments, maintenance and/or grease guns). Service not exceeding 50%
repairs even with the guards disabled (with the consent of with a time of continuous operation not
the safety manager), absolutely respecting the exceeding 15 min.
instructions given in this manual or any other specific Only one general operator in possession of
GENERAL
document supplied exclusively by the manufacturer. the requirements described above (cap.
OPERATOR
ELECTRICAL OPERATOR 4.2)
This is a qualified technician (electrician in possession of Tab. 3
the technical and professional skills required by the
regulations in force), approved to perform only operations 4 LIMITS OF USE
on electric devices to carry out adjustments, maintenance
and/or repairs even with the system live and with the The compressor has been designed and made exclusively for the
guards disabled (with the consent of the safety manager), intended use described in table 3, so any other type of use is
absolutely respecting the instructions given in this manual absolutely forbidden, in order to guarantee, at all times, the safety
or any other specific document supplied exclusively by of the operator and the efficiency of the compressor itself.
the manufacturer. LIMITS OF USE: it is absolutely forbidden to use the
COMPANY SAFETY MANAGER compressor for improper applications, other than the
This is a qualified technician designated by the Customer, use intended by the manufacturer.
in possession of the technical and professional skills ENVIRONMENT: it is absolutely forbidden to start the
required by the regulations in force concerning the safety compressor in environments with a potentially explosive
and health of workers in the place of work. atmosphere and/or in the presence of combustible
MANUFACTURER’S TECHNICIAN powders (e.g.: wood powder, flour, sugar and grain).
This is a qualified technician made available by the
Manufacturer and/or by the authorised Dealer to carry out AIR JETS: it is absolutely forbidden to point jets of
the requested technical assistance, routine and special compressed air towards persons, animals and things.
maintenance jobs and/or operations not listed in this PIPES: it is absolutely forbidden to use air pipes and
manual which require a specific knowledge of the couplings that are not suitable and/or that do not comply
compressor. with the regulations in force.
2.3 MACHINE OFF STATUS GUARD: during use it is obligatory to be constantly on
guard that no unauthorised persons go near the
It is obligatory to disconnect the supply of electric power compressor.
before carrying out any kind of maintenance work and/or
adjustment on the compressor.
1) Main electric switch turned “OFF” and padlocked;
2) Electric power supply switch (Customer) turned “OFF”;
3) Pressurised air discharged from the compressor (see pressure
gauge on compressor).
4) Reservoir air outlet valve closed.

PERUFFO AIR SRL 3
Via delle Fontanine, 8/16 - 36040 Brendola (VI) Italia
Emiss. 19-07-02 Rev.10 - Agg..06-04-10
mecgi srl - pag. 4
10 7 11 4 2
5 legend:
1) oli level glass

2) Pressure switch button
3) Pressure switch
2LOUHÀOOFDS
5) Oil drain cap
6) Condensate drain valve
$LUÀOWHU
8) Receiver
9) Retain valve
10) Electrical Motor
11) Compression unit
9 8 1 5 3
Manual condensation drain
6 TECHNICAL DATA
Model ???? codice Noise Level Tank N° Nominal Capacity Operating Motor speed Weight
solo gruppo dB(A) Lt cilindri Power pressure 400V/50 Hz kg.
compressore ?? (stadi) HP (kW) L/min bar
P60CV3/5 5020-011 76 5 3 (1) 3 (2,2) 440 10 1200 65
mecgi srl - pag. 5

systema must be equipped with valve and removable

7 TRANSPORT, UNPACKING AND container or connected to special.
HANDLING OF THE COMPRESSOR MAINTENANCE: it is forbidden to weld or machining in
• Check the integrity of the packaging. general. the tank In case of defects or corrosion, it is
• Unpack the machine (paying attention to any indications on the necessary to replace the tank.
packaging).
• Check the (outer) good condition of the machine. 9 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
• Transport the compressor to the intended installation area and 9.1 Electrical diagram
assemble the dumper and/or the wheels supplied (Fig. 8).
• Dispose of the packing in compliance with the current waste
disposal regulations.
FAULTS: if any faults are found it is forbidden to use
the compressor. you must apply to your dealer or to
the manufacturer for technical assistance.
LIFTING: the machine packaging must be lifted with a
fork-lift truck (suitable for the use), respecting the
instructions applied on the outside of the packaging. It
is forbidden to flip the compressor or to use hooks
and/or ropes for the lifting.
HANDLING: use always only the handle to move the
compressor.
DISPOSE: it is recommended to dispose of the
packaging according to the different types of material,
absolutely respecting the laws in force in the country of
use. single phase three phases
8 POSIZIONING AND INSTALLATION
PLACE: it is obligatory to install the compressor in a
place with adequate ventilation which enables the
ambient temperature to be maintained between +2 °c
and +40 °c, with humidity between 5 and 95%. Do not
leave the unit exposed to weathering.
CONFORMITY: classification and conformity
assessment must be performed at installation by the
manufacturer of the final product.
1) Check the correspondence of the nominal data plate with
the actual characteristics of the plant.
2) Place the compressor at least 50 cm from the wall so that
the air inlet to the flywheel is easily conveyed on the
pump allowing a regular cooling. For proper lubrication
place the compressor on a horizontal plane.
3) To prevent damage to the compressor place it on a flat
surface (tilt max: 10 °).
4) Connect the hose from the compressor output air 9.2 Connections
connection;
5) Connect the pipe connection to the pneumatic circuit air Single phase version: The compressor is equipped with a plug
inlet (Customer). type CEE7 / 7. If necessary the plug must be replaced by an
expert..
8.1 AIR TANK
An auxiliary air tank is always required if the pipe system is not Three phases version: The electric power supply line must be
very long, so as to have a sufficient storage capacity and thus made using cables with a suitable section (*) for the machine
avoid rapid cycles. The air tank must be provided with a safety power and it must include 3 phase cables + 1 earth cable for the
valve, a suitable pressure gauge and a system for draining three phases version.
condensate. • It is necessary to install between the power
supply line and the compressor control panel:
- either an automatic magnetothermal switch with
CHECK VALVES: If an air storage tank outside the
appropriate circuit breaking capacity and operating
compressor is used, do NOT fit check valves between
sensitivity curve “D”;
the compressor and the tank.
- or a disconnecting switch with suitable capacity
CONDENSATE: the water condensate is a polluting
mixture and should not be dispersed into the equipped with delayed fuses, AM curve, for motor
environment or the drainage system. The drain starting.
• the electrical connection of the compressor to the
electric power line must be carried out by a qualified
PERUFFO AIR SRL 5
Emiss. 19-07-02 Rev.10 - Agg..06-04-10
mecgi srl - pag. 6

electrician, in possession of the technical and 10.2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES

professional skills required by the regulations in The compressor group (13) passes the air into the receiver (10)
force. through the connection pipe and the non return valve.
• The switch must be within easy reach of the operator. When the air pressure arrives to the set-pressure, the air pressure
(*) For the section of the cables, follow the switch (3) shuts of the supply of the electric motor (12). At the
indications given in the “electric data table” in the sametime discharges the air head in the cyklinders and in the
manual. The cables must be of an approved type, delivery pipe through the Rilsan tube and the valve pressure
with a suitable degree of insulation. switch.
ELECTRIC POWER MAINS: the electric power mains GRUPPO

POMPANTE
VALVOLA
RITEGNO
SERBATOIO RIDUTTORE UTILIZZO
to which the compressor is connected must satisfy the

technical characteristics given in the previous tables
and comply with the requirements contemplated by the VALVOLA SICUREZZA
PRESSOSTATO
regulations in force in the country of use.
BRAKDOWNS: the manufacturer declines all The next re-start will occur when the pressure in the air receiver
responsibility for compressor breakdowns or falls. The pressure switch is supplied with a delayed discharged
malfunctions caused by sudden changes in the electric valve which make easier the starting of the motor. Then the
voltage beyond the tolerances contemplated by the compressor is operating correctly when there is a bleed of air
power distribution board (voltage ±10%). every time the motor is switched off and extended a bleed of air
LOCALI UMIDI: everywhere but especially in damp every time it’s switched on with no pressure in the tank.
areas, we recommend use of adapters, power strips or The safety valve is connected directly to the air receiver and will
extension cords though suitable section, however, a action should the pressure switch fail and gives security to the unit.
value not less than indicated in the table features. do
not touch the appliance with wet hands and feet. 11 DIRECTIVES AND REFERENCE NORMS
RESPONSABILITY: the manufacturer declines all
responsibility for any damage caused to persons, REFERENCE DESCRIPTION
animals and/or things due to the incorrect electrical
connection of the compressor. “Machinery Directive - On the approximation of the
2006/42/CE laws of the Member States relating to machinery”.
DAMAGES: failure to respect the above warnings may
cause irreparable damage to the electrical equipment of “Low Voltage Directive - Of the European Parliament
and of the Council of 12 December 2006 on the
the compressor and the consequent voiding of the
2006/95/CE harmonisation of the laws of Member States relating to
guarantee. Electrical Equipment designed for use within certain
voltage limits”.
10 FIRST START-UP “Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive - Of the
10.1 Preliminary checks Council, of 15 December 2004, on the approximation
Before starting the compressor for the first time it is compulsory to 2004/108/CE of the laws of the Member States relating to
ensure that: Electromagnetic Compatibility and repealing Directive
89/336/EC”.
• The incoming voltage is the same as indicated on the data “Simple Pressure Vessels Directive – Of the European
plate 2009/105/CE Parliament of the Council of the 16 Semptember 2009
• All electrical connections have been made with cables of relating to simple pressure vessels.”
adequate size and type “Compressors and vacuum pumps. Safety
EN 1012-1 : 1997
• The main automatic switch (on the wall) is of the correct type requirements. Compressors”.
and size. “Fundamental safety standards on the Electrical
EN 60204-1 : 2006
• electrical connections are intact equipment of machines”.
EN 12100-1-2 : “Safety of machinery - Basic concepts, general
• the internal pipes of the air / oil system are intact.; principles for design”.
2005
Tab. 2
Main electric switch turned in “0” (OFF) position (Fig. 12).
The compressor has been designed and made considering the
• Connect a suitable plug to the compressor (if any) and plug in
assessments emerging from an accurate analysis of risks and
the socket.
aiming to achieve, considering the present state of the art, the
• At the first start and all new electricity connection, it is essential
objectives established by the essential safety and health
for the three-phase versions, check the direction of rotation
requirements contemplated by the European Directives.
indicated by an arrow located on the motor.
TAB. 2 lists the European Directives and Norms (EN) to which
The first start-up of the compressor (operative test)
reference has been made.
must obligatorily be carried out by a specialized
technician.
STARTS AND STOPS: Start and stop actions have

to be made only through the on-off switch situated on
pressure switch;stop the compressor at the plug can
cause grave damage to the electric motor in the next
starting.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE: for the smooth running
of the machine at full load continuously at the
maximum pressure, ensure that the temperature of
the working area does not exceed +25 °C.

PERUFFO AIR SRL
Emiss. 19-07-02 Rev.10 - Agg..06-04-10
mecgi srl - pag. 7
12 SAFETY NOT BREATHEBLE AIR

Single phase version: The compressor is equipped with a safety The compressed air can not be used for
and protection device for the motor called motor-protector, located medical or inhaled by people and / or animal.
on the motor terminal box.
Tab. 3
Three phases version: The compressor is equipped with
Pressure switch or Motor protector, positioned inside the pressure
switch control). 12.2 RESIDUAL RISK
We inform the authorised operators that, although the
SAFETY DEVICE: it is forbidden to tamper with, manufacturer has taken all the technical and constructive
exclude, remove and/or replace any safety device precautions possible to make the compressor safe, there remain
present in the compressor. some potential residual risks described in Tab. 4,Tab. 5 e 6.
Motor protection devices are actuated when the motor is
overheating as a result of operating problems, interrupting the RESIDUAL RISK OF BEING STRUCK BY
power supply. We recommend that you wait several minutes RISK No.1 PRESSURISED AIR AND/OR PIPES
before the manual reset of the motor protector.
MOTOR PROTECTOR: in case of repeated Low and accidental. There may be
intervention of motor protector contact an authorized FREQUENCY OF exposure if the operator decides of his own
service. EXPOSURE accord to perform an action that is incorrect,
REPLACEMENT OF SAFETY DEVICE: it is forbidden and not reasonably foreseeable.
obligatory to request the intervention of the technical
assistance of the manufacturer or the authorised EXTENT OF
dealer for the replacement of any safety device. Slight injuries (normally reversible).
DAMAGE
12.1 SAFETY SIGNALS Respect of the correct procedure for
These are yellow adhesive labels with black decals, applied on the STEPS TAKEN connecting/disconnecting air pipes (v. Fig.
front and sides of the compressor. The meaning of each signal is 7). Safety signals (Tab. 3).
explained in TAB. 3 Tab. 4
RESIDUAL
CLEANNESS: it is obligatory to keep the safety DANGER OF BURNS
signals clean to ensure good visibility. RISK No.2
DAMAGING: it is absolutely forbidden to remove Low and accidental. There may be
and/or damage the safety signals applied by the FREQUENCY OF exposure if the operator decides of his own
manufacturer. EXPOSURE accord to perform an action that is incorrect,
it is obligatory to replace any damaged safety signals, forbidden and not reasonably foreseeable.
asking the manufacturer to supply replacements.
EXTENT OF
Slight injuries (normally reversible).
RISKS DAMAGE
SIGNAL MEANING Respect the dangerous zones. (v. Fig. 7).
GENERAL RISK STEPS TAKEN
Safety signals (Tab. 3).
The compressor must work with the doors Tab. 5
closed (five languages).
RESIDUAL
DANGER OF CRASHING
RISK OF ELECTRIC CURRENT RISK No.2
Inside the compressor and the electric panel.
Low and accidental. There may be
RISK OF NOISE FREQUENCY OF exposure if the operator decides of his own
During compressor operation the noise may EXPOSURE accord to perform an action that is incorrect,
reach dangerous levels for your hearing. forbidden and not reasonably foreseeable.
RISK OF PRESSURISED RESERVOIR EXTENT OF

Serious injuries (non reversible).
The reservoir reaches dangerous pressure DAMAGE
levels.
Protection grid
RISK OF CRUSHING THE HANDS STEPS TAKEN Respect the dangerous zones. (v. Fig. 7).
When the protective doors are open there is the Safety signals (Tab. 3).
risk of contact with the cooling fan or with the Tab. 6
transmission belts.
RISK OF HIGH TEMPERATURE
There is the risk of burns in contact with hot
parts.
RISK OF PRESSURISED AIR
Accidental malfunctions during the connection of
the pipes and the filling and discharging phase.

PERUFFO AIR SRL 7
Emiss. 19-07-02 Rev.10 - Agg..06-04-10
mecgi srl - pag. 8
14 Wrong direction of rotation. (Only for Three phases)

13 PRESSURE SWITCH 15 Extremely dusty atmosphere. Need heavy duty air inlet filter.
Air pressure switch, has already been set at the test stage, do not
16 Drive belt too tight. (Only for belt driven)
change pressure valve(increase of pressure is dangerous for the
motor and for the other items. Do not exceed the pressure 17 Drive belt slack. (Only for belt driven)
Check that motor capacitors are working ((Single phase units
indicated on the catalogue). 18 only).
Check in receiver pressure is haigher then pressure switch cut-
The MAX SET pressure indicated in the data plate 19 in pressure (motor will restart when
must not be exceeded for any reason, this could receiver pressure drops below cut-in pressure).
cause damage to the machine itself. 20 Check pressure switch and auxiliary valve operation.
21 Overload motor protector trips
Tab. 7
13.1 PRESSURE REGULATION
13.1 WARNING
Keeeping the tap open, rotate the regulation knob (rif. 10 Fig. 1,e 14 CHECKS BEFORE SWITCHING ON
Insert a pressure regulator after the exit of air from
Fig. 11) pulling it up first and then rotating clockwise to increase the
compressor SWITCHING ON: before switching on the
pressure and anti-clockwise to reduce it. Never exceed the max.
Set value having verified the requested value on the gauge push compressor the authorised operators must perform
down the knob locking it into the chosen value. the checks listed.
At the end of operation return to 0 bar. On tank there is, if required, DAMAGING: it is absolutely forbidden to switch on the
a direct outlet for max. pressure. compressor if any damage and/or abnormal situation
The pressure of air supplied depends on the value of is found. if necessary, ask for the manufacturer’s
the set pressure and the ecxcessive air consumption intervention and notify the company safety manager..
is shown by the low gauges values.
1 ENSURE THAT THERE ARE NO UNAUTHORISED

13.2 ALARMS / PROBLEMS:
PERSONS IN THE VICINITY OF THE COMPRESSOR.
CHECK
PROBLEM ENSURE THAT THE COMPRESSOR IS CORRECTLY
POINT NO. 2
INSTALLED (SEE CHAP. 10).
Compressor never stop 20
2, 9, 10, 11, ENSURE THAT ALL THE PANELS HAVE BEEN
Knock or rattles 3
13, 17 CORRECTLY FASTENED.
Air delivery has dropepd off 1, 5, 17, 20
ENSURE THAT THE AIR PIPES ARE CONNECTED TO
Trip motor overload or draws 7, 8, 9, 10, 11,
4 THE SYSTEM (CUSTOMER) AND THAT THE AIR
excessive currents 13, 16 OUTLET VALVE IS OPEN.
Excessive repeated starts and stops 3, 5, 6
Overheating of the compressor 4, 6, 9, 14 ENSURE THAT ROUTINE MAINTENANCE WAS
Compressor will not come up to REGULARLY CARRIED OUT THE LAST TIME THE
7 5
speed COMPRESSOR WAS SWITCHED OFF (SEE CHAP.
Lights flicker when compressor run 7, 8 24).
Abnormal piston, ring or cylinder wear 12, 15
7, 8, 18, 19, ENSURE THAT YOU HAVE READ AND UNDERSTOOD
Motor will not run 6
21 ALL PARTS OF THIS MANUAL.
Tab. 6
Tab. 8
N° Descrizione azione 15 SWITCHING ON

1 Clogged intake filter.
Loose pulleys wom coupling, or motor with excessive end play PRELIMINARY CHECKS: before switching on the
2 in shaft. compressor the authorised operators must perform
3 Receiver needs draining. the checks listed inpar. Errore. L'origine riferimento
4 Poor ventilation. non è stata trovata.
5 Air leaks in piping (on machine or in outside system). PROTECTIONS: Ensure that all guards and
6 Receiver checks valve leaking. protection panels are properly set.
Check line voltage, motor terminals for good contact, tight SERVICE: ensure to use the compressor with a
7 starter connections, correct motor maximum duty of 50% in one hour at full load with a
overload and fuses. time of continuous operation not exceeding 15 min.
8 Poor power regulation (unbalanced line).
Leaking, broken carbonized or loose valves or restricted air • Turn or push the button of Pressure switch into“1” (ON)
9 passages. position (Fig.1, rif. 3) (Fig. 12).
10 Wom or scored connecting rod bearing, or piston pin. Compressor operation is fully automatic, controlled by pressure
Defective bearing on crankshaft or on motor shaft. Loose motor switch, which stops when the reservoir pressure reaches the
11 fan.
maximum value and restart it when it comes down to the
12 Piston rings broken or not seated in, wom or stuck in grooves.
minimum.
13 Cylinders or piston rings scratched, wom or scored.

PERUFFO AIR SRL
mecgi srl - pag. 9
Emiss. 19-07-02 Rev.10 - Agg..06-04-10
Usually the pressure difference between the maximum and Ordinary maintenance is defined as a set of activities
minimum value is about 2 bar (29psi). designed to maintain the conditions of use and operation
of the equipment through various types of operations
PROTEZIONE TERMICA: Il motore è dotato di performed by the operator involved.
protezione termica, inserita nella scatola della Le life of the compressor depends from the maintenance
morsettiera del motore nelle versioni monofase, activities.
all’interno del pressostato in quelle trifase. Sono CONDENSATE DISPOSE: humidity of the air which
a riarmo manuale, tarate al collaudo e non ondenses in the air receiver, must be drained, at
devono per nessun motivo essere modificate. least weekly through tap, both to retain the space
in the air receiver and to extend its life.
16 SWITCHING OFF To protect the environment, the condensate must be
disposed of according to regulations on pollutants.
• Turn or push the button of Pressure switch into“0”
(OFF) position (Fig.1, rif. 3) (Fig.4). 18.1.1 Check belt tension
PRESSURE RELEASE: before disconnecting the Drive belts require a precise tensioning of the belt because at low
air pipes, ensure that the automatic discharge values there are slippings on the pulley causing overheating, and
phase has taken place and that there is no rapid wear of the belt. High values cause excessive load on the
pressure in the pipes. THERE IS A RESIDUAL bearing causing fast wear of the same and motor over heating.
RISK (Tab. 4). The correct tension value is obtained pushing with a finger on the
intermediate area and obtain a deflection about X=0,6÷0,8 cm
17 INTERRUPTION IN THE ELECTRIC (Fig. 6).
POWER SUPPLY
18.1.2 CHANGING THE AIR FILTER CARTRIDGE
POWER CUT: if there is a sudden power cut Procedure to be followed to change the cartridge:
while the test is being carried out, the appliance 1. Stop the compressor.
does not perform the discharge phase and 2. Switch off the power: turn the pressure switch to “0” (Fig. 12).
keeps the air under pressure. it is absolutely
forbidden to disconnect the air pipes when ATTENTION: HOT PARTS
under pressure. THERE IS A RESIDUAL RISK
(Tab. 4).
3. Remove the air filter element (Fig. 4) unscrewing the fixing bolt
of the cover and with slight pressure on the lower edge of the
18 MAINTENANCE PROGRAM same.
4. Remove the air filter element or cartridge.
BEFORE DOING ANY JOB INSIDE THE 5. Eliminate any impurities present inside the filter with a clean
MACHINE, UNLESS THERE ARE COMMANDS rag.
THAT REQUIRE THE MACHINE TO BE 6. Fit the new air cartridge and close the cover
SWITCHED ON: “MACHINE OFF STATUS” (V. 7. Dispose of the old filter in conformity with the local regulations
PAR. 2.3. in force.
AIR FILTER REPLACE: improper maintenance
18.1 ORDINARY MAINTENANCE of the oil filter can damage the plant. change the
filter cartridge as indicated in the maintenance
table. the cartridge should be changed more
Frequency Check point Check operation often if operating conditions require it. cartridges
Drain the water left unchanged for longer than the
every recommended period can damage the unit.
Air receiver condensate from the
2 weeks
receiver (Fig.1,rif. 8) 18.1.3 OIL CHARACTERISTICS
every Air suction Clean the air filter element
(a dirty air filter reduce the OIL REPLACE: Never mix oils of different makes or
month filter types. Use only non toxic oils when there is the risk of
efficiency).
Transmission Check the correct tension inhaling the air distributed.
belts of the belts HANDLING: handling oil without adequate
protections is very dangerous. wear protective gloves.
Check the oil level and
&KHFNÀOWHUVDQGFOHDQWKHÀOWHUV
100h eventually proceed to refill The compressor is filled byPeruffo Air with mineral oil WLADOIL
RIWKHSXPSXQLWVDQGÀOWHUV
,QOHWÀOWHUV
Oil Level (if the
on varies
sideinwalls;
white or dark
WKHÀOWHUV SAE 15W/40.
clogging
immediatelyresults in lower
replace the This lubricant is formulated to the highest quality standards and is
FRPSUHVVRUHIÀFLHQF\
oil). factory authorized, tested and approved for use in piston
every compressors.
6 Safety valve Check and replace if
necessary. Recommended duration
months Type of oil
(hours)
Air suction Replace the filter element Mineral SAE 15W/40 o ISO 100 300
1 year
filter the suction filter.
Synthetic ISO 100 500

PERUFFO AIR SRL 9
Emiss. 19-07-02 Rev.10 - Agg..06-04-10
mecgi srl - pag. 10
18.2 EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE 18.3 SAFETY VALVE

The safety valve is tested and calibrated by the manufacturer
For extraordinary maintenance includes all activities in accordance with current standards.
designed to maintain the conditions of use and operation Performance tests for the safety valve should be performed by
of the equipment through various types of operations authorized persons.
performed exclusively by the manufacturer's technician
Frequency Check point Check operation
19 GENERAL WARNINGS
Check the tightening torque ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS: the original spare
after Compressor of the rod head (Fig. 2) parts must be requested exclusively from the
1st hour unit offsetting the settling. manufacturer.
(Torque 25Nm).
after first 20 Completely replace the oil of 19.1 DEMOLITION
hours
Lubricant
the compression unit. When demolishing the compressor, abide scrupulously by the
every Completely replace the oil of regulations in force in the country concerned regarding the
300 hours
Lubricant
the compression unit. protection of the environment.
every Compressor Replacing piston rings and CER CODES: all the compressor components
800h unit bearings must obligatorily be identified according to the
definitions of the “ewc codes” (european waste
18.2.1 CHANGING THE OIL catalogue) and disposed of, appointing
Procedure to be followed for changing the oil: authorised and specialised firms, absolutely
1. Stop the machine with the stop pushbutton on the pressure respecting the regulations in force in the country
switch. of demolition.
2. Switch off the power: turn the isolating switch to “0” position
(Fig. 12). CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THE PRODUCT:
3. Ensure that there is no pressurized air or oil in the oil reservoir. this mark on the product or on the
documentation indicates that the product
RELEASE THE PRESSURE: air and oil under must not be disposed of with other domestic
high pressure can cause serious injury. shut waste at the end of its working life. to avoid
down the compressor and relieve the system of damage to the environment or to health
all pressure before removing valves, caps, caused by the incorrect disposal of waste,
plugs, fittings, bolts and filters. the user is invited to separate this product
4. Remove the bolt (Fig. 9) and drain always completely the from other types of waste and to recycle it
circuit. (If you can do when the oil is hot because it is more fluid responsibly so as to favour the sustainable
and discharges better). reuse of material resources.
5. When drain is completed remember to close the cap (Fig. 9) domestic users are invited to contact the
and fill the sump (Fig. 10) until the red line or reference to the dealer from which they bought the product or
"max", where present (Fig. 5) the local office in charge of providing
6. Start the compressor and let it run for several minutes making information on separate waste collection and
sure that there are no leaks and the oil level is correct (Fig. 5). on recycling for this type of product.
company users are invited to contact their
OIL DISPOSE: used oil must be disposed of in supplier and to check the terms and
conformity with the local regulations in force conditions of their purchase contract. this
product must not be disposed of with other
18.2.2 CHECKING AND TOPPING UP THE OIL LEVEL commercial waste.
N.B.: If the oil level is below the reference mark “MIN” (Fig. 5),
top up the oil.
Procedure to be followed to top up the oil:

1. Stop the machine with the stop pushbutton on the pressure
switch.
2. Switch off the power: turn the isolating switch to “0” position
(Fig. 4).
3. Ensure that there is no pressurized air or oil in the oil reservoir.
RELEASE THE PRESSURE: air and oil under high

pressure can cause serious injury. shut down the
compressor and relieve the system of all pressure
before removing valves, caps, plugs, fittings, bolts and
filters.
4. fill the sump (Fig. 10) until the red line or reference to the
“MAX", where present (Fig. 5).
5. Start the compressor and let it run for several minutes making
sure that there are no leaks and the oil level is correct (Fig. 5).
Instructions amdmecgi
Maintenance
srl - Manual
pag. 11
PERUFFO AIR SRL
Emiss. 19-07-02 Rev.10 - Agg..06-04-10
Fig. 2 Fig. 4
Fig. 3
Fig. 7
Fig. 5
PESO
X
Fig. 6
11
Fig. 7
Fig. 8 “OFF” “ON”
MODELLO Fig. 12
Fig. 11 Fig. 10
Fig. 9
“OFF” “ON” Fig. 12
MODELLO HP 2 HP 3 HP 4 HP 5,5 HP 7,5 HP 10

Sezione minima cavi in entrata 400V/3/50Hz n°x 4x1 4x1 4x1 4 x 1,5 4 x 2,5 4 x 2,5
(230V/50Hz) mm² (3 x 1) (3 x 1,5) (3 x 1,5) (3 x 2,5) (3x 4) (3x 4)
Taratura termico motore 400V/3/50Hz 4 5,5
A 7,5 9,5 12,5 16
(230V/50Hz) (7,5) (9,5)
Pressostato tipo Mod. NE-MA NE-MA NE-MA NE-MA CONDOR CONDOR
Tab. 9
mecgi srl - pag. 12

mecgi srl - pag. 13

EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
THE MANUFACTURER:
mecgi s.r.l.
Via Lago Maggiore ,71
Altavilla Vic. (Vi) - ITALIA
Tel.+ 39 0444 574884 Fax +39 0444 371096
E-mail: info@mecgi.it
DECLARES THET THE MACHINE

AIR COMPRESSOR UNIT ARRANGED FOR AIR-OIL LUBRICATION SYSTEMS : 5020-012
complies with the following community directives:
(89/392/CEE + 91/368/CEE), EMC (89/336/CEE) e BT (73/23/CEE) EN 292/1, EN 292/2, EN 50081-2, EN50082-2, CEI EN 60204-1, EN 1050,
“Direttiva Macchine” 2006/42/CE
(on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to machinery)
“Low voltage Directive” 2006/95/EC
(of the European Parliament and of the Council of 12 December 2006 on the harmonization of the laws of Member
States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits)
“Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive” 2004/108/EC
(Of the Council, of 15 December 2004, on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to Electroma-
gnetic Compatibility and repealing Directive 89/336/EC)
“Pressure Equipment Directive” 2009/105/EC
(Of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 September 2009 relating to simple pressure vessels)
and with the following harmonized standards:

EN 1012-1 : 1997
(Compressors and vacuum pumps. Safety requirements. compressors)
EN 60204-1 : 2006
(Fundamental safety standards on the Electrical equipment of machines)
EN 12100-1-2 : 2005
(Safety of machinery – Basic concepts, general principles for design)
Company: mecgi srl Altavilla vicentina -VI
FIRMA:
data:
BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

FLUID COUPLING

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

Manuale d’uso Installation and
e manutenzione maintenance manual
Codice 6881G Edizione 11/2011 Code 6881G Issue 12/2013
Identificazione della macchina - machine identification

Uso previsto: per avviamento macchina - Foreseen use: for machine starting
GIUNTO IDRODINAMICO - FLUID COUPLING
Rotofluid Rotofluid SCF Rotofluid DCF Rotofluid CA

Tipo - Size ....................................................................................................................................................................... codice - code ........................................................
Accessorio - Accessories ............................................................................................................................. codice - code ........................................................
N° matricola - Serial number N° ..........................................................................................................
Livello olio - Oil level ........................................................................................................................................... Ugelli - Nozzle .....................................................
Dispositivi di protezione - Protections

Tappo termo fusibile
Fusibile plug 96 °C 120 °C 145 °C 180 °C ................................
Tappo termo espansibile

Trip plug 96 °C 120 °C 145 °C 180 °C ................................
Tappo con termostato T09

T09 with thermostat 100 °C 120 °C 140 °C 160 °C ................................
DICHIARAZIONE DEL COSTRUTTORE

Noi, firmatari della presente, dichiariamo sotto nostra esclusiva responsabilità, che la macchina in oggetto è
conforme a quanto prescritto dalle Direttive 89/392/CEE, 91/44/CEE, 93/68/CEE.
E’ fatto divieto alla macchina oggetto della Dichiarazione di essere messa in servizio prima che la macchina in cui
sarà incorporata sia stata dichiarata conforme alle disposizioni della direttiva 98/392/CEE.
DECLARATION OF MANUFACTURER
As signatories of the current letter, we declare under our own exclusive responsibility, that the machine in object
complies to the directives 89/392/EEC, 93/44/EEC, 93/68/EEC.
It is forbidden to the machine in object of the Declaration to be set in service before that the machine in which it will
be incorporated is declared compliant to the regulation of the Directive 98/392/EEC.
Luogo e data di emissione - Place and date of issue Nome - Name Funzione: Dirigente Firma - Signature
SOLBIATE OLONA (VA) ......................................................................... Fortunato Pezzimenti Office Duty: Manager
s.r.l.
TRASMISSIONI Sede Legale Uffici Commerciali Stabilimento
DI POTENZA Head Office and Sales Factory
Via Monte Rosa, 14 Via Venezia, 31
POWER
20149 MILANO - ITALY 21058 SOLBIATE OLONA
TRANSMISSION
Tel. 02.76110319 (Varese) - ITALY
Fax: 02.76110041 Tel. 0331.641294
info@westcar.it - www.westcar.it Fax: 0331.376014
INDICE INDEX
pagina page
DESCRIZIONE GIUNTO COUPLING DESCRIPTION AND

3 3
E PRINCIPIO DI FUNZIONAMENTO WORKING PRINCIPLE
LETTERA ALLA CONSEGNA 4 4 DELIVERY LETTER
IDENTIFICAZIONE GIUNTO 5 5 COUPLING IDENTIFICATION
MODALITA’ DI GARANZIA 6 6 WARRANTY INFORMATION
NOTE GENERALI ALLA CONSEGNA 7 7 GENERAL DELIVERY NOTES
PRESCRIZIONI DI SICUREZZA 8 8 SAFETY PRESCRIPTIONS

PESI E DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO WEIGHTS AND OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF
13 13
DEI GIUNTI ROTOFLUID®‚ ALFA ROTOFLUID®‚ ALFA COUPLINGS
PESI E DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO WEIGHTS AND OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF
16 16
DEI GIUNTI ROTOFLUID®‚ BETA ROTOFLUID®‚ BETA
TRASPORTO E POSIZIONAMENTO 18 18 TRANSPORT AND POSITIONING
CALETTAMENTO DEL GIUNTO COUPLING MOUNTING
21 21
E SISTEMI DI SICUREZZA AND SAFETY SYSTEM
CONFORMAZIONE DEL GIUNTO COUPLING STRUCTURE
28 28
E SISTEMI DI CUREZZA AND SAFETY SYSTEM
RIEMPIMENTO, TARATURA OIL FILLING, CALIBRATION
34 34
E SOSTITUZIONE DELL’OLIO AND CHANGE
RIEMPIMENTO OLIO 34 34 OIL FILLING
TARATURA OLIO 36 36 OIL CALIBRATION
SOSTITUZIONE OLIO 42 42 OIL CHANGE
SOSTITUZIONE OLIO PER IL GIUNTO OIL CHANGE FOR VERTICAL
44 44
ROTOFLUID®‚ VERTICALE ROTOFLUID®‚ COUPLING
TARATURA OLIO PER IL GIUNTO OIL CALIBRATION FOR VERTICAL
46 46
ROTOFLUID®‚ VERTICALE ROTOFLUID®‚ COUPLING
OLIO DI TRASMISSIONE 47 47 TRANSMISSION OIL
SOSTITUZIONE DEL TAPPO FUSIBILE FUSIBLE PLUG OR TRIP PLUG
49 49
O DEL TAPPO ESPANSIBILE REPLACEMENT
SMONTAGGIO DEL GIUNTO 54 54 COUPLING DISASSEMBLING
APERTURA DEL GIUNTO ROTOFLUID®‚ 58 58 ROTOFLUID® COUPLING OPENING
PARTI DI RICAMBIO CONSIGLIATE 61 61 SUGGESTED SPARE PARTS
RICERCA GUASTI 62 62 TROUBLE SHOOTING

MONTAGGIO E ALLINEAMENTO MOUNTING AND ALIGNMENT
64 64
ROTOFLUID WAG-G ROTOFLUID TYPE WAG-G
MONTAGGIO E ALLINEAMENTO ROTOFLUID MOUNTING AND ALIGNMENT
66 66
KLM ROTOFLUID TYPE KLM
MONTAGGIO E ALLINEAMENTO GIUNTO MOUNTING AND ALIGNMENT
68 68
ELASTICO ROTOFLEXI ROTOFLEXI FLEXIBLE COUPLING
ALLINEAMENTO GIUNTI ELASTICI PIN COUPLINGS
69 69
SERIE “AB” “AB” SERIES ALIGNMENT
PROFILO ESTERNO 70 70 CA OUTLINE
COPPIE SERRAGGIO 72 72 TIGHTENING TORQUE

PRESCRIZIONI RELATIVE ALLA RULES FOR THE CORRECT
73 73
CONSERVAZIONE PRESERVATION
ALLEGATO “ATEX” 74 74 ENCLOSURE “ATEX”
2
DESCRIZIONE GIUNTO COUPLING
E PRINCIPIO DESCRIPTION AND
DI FUNZIONAMENTO WORKING PRINCIPLE
Il giunto idrodinamico The ROTOFLUID® fluid fluid coupling

ROTOFLUID® è un organo di is a
is a transmission
coupling transmitting
mechanism
trasmissione a fluido (olio), power utilizing
working fluids
with fluids (oil)
(oil) and
designed
is designed for and intended
progettato e realizzato per and realized to allow gradual
to allow for gradual startup of
consentire avviamenti graduali in startings in absence
a drive (soft of impact,
start). The fluid
assenza d’urto, senza without oversizing the
coupling eliminates impacts power of
sovradimensionare la potenza the
frominstalled
startup,motor
allowswith
the acorrect
installata del motore con consequent
sizing of the decrease
drive motor,in current
thus
conseguente diminuzione degli decreasing
input, current
especially input,
in the starting
assorbimenti di corrente, especially in the starting phase.
phase.
specie nella fase di spunto.
The ROTOFLUID® coupling is
Il giunto ROTOFLUID® è made up of two impellers with
composto da due giranti ad opposite frontal hydrofoils, which
alette frontali contrapposte tra form the pump-turbine circuit.
loro, che costituiscono il circuito
pompa-turbina. Inside the coupling, in the
pump-turbine circuit, there is the
All’interno del giunto, nel circuito suitable oil, used as a
pompa-turbina, si trova dell’olio transmission means.
idoneo che viene impiegato
come mezzo per la trasmissione. During its starting, the driving
impeller speeds the oil
Durante l’avviamento la girante towards the driven impeller with
motrice accelera l’olio verso la a continuous rotary motion, thus
girante condotta con moto making it rotate too.
circolatorio continuo, trascinan-
dola così in rotazione. Owing
Due to to the centrifugal
centrifugal force, force,
the oil
inside
the oil the coupling
contained begins
inside to a
forms
Per effetto della forza centrifuga rotate, thus beginning to
transmission ring, which allows“drive”
the other half of the coupling with
l’olio all’interno forma un anello to reach, in full condition of
it, and at full load the driven side
di trasmissione che consente operation,
has a slightlya speed
lower slightly
speed duelower to
il raggiungimento a regime di than the inlet
residual slippage.one, with a residual
una velocità in entrata, con uno slippage.
scorrimento residuo.
Congratulations for having
Complimenti per la scelta del chosen the ROTOFLUID®
giunto ROTOFLUID® tra la vasta coupling among the wide
gamma di apparecchiature: range of equipment:
IDRODINAMICHE FLUID
IDRODINAMICHE CON FLUID WITH DELAYED
AVVIAMENTO RITARDATO STARTING
IDROMECCANICHE HYDROMECHANIC
ELETTRONICHE ELECTRONIC
che la WESTCAR produce per Produced by WESTCAR
risolvere ogni specifica esigenza to meet precise starting
di avviamento. requirement.
La WESTCAR si augura che WESTCAR hopes that all youitsare

possiate utilizzare al meglio e completely
products satisfied
and serviceswith
canallbe
completamente tutte le of our products and reminds
completely used at one’s best
prestazioni dei sui prodotti e you that
and service that
remembers assistance
the is
ricorda che il servizio di available worldwide through
assistance service is guaranteed our
assistenza è garantito nel mondo global dealer network
world wide through the supply
attraverso la rete dei distributori. network.
1 3
LETTERA DELIVERY
ALLA LETTER
CONSEGNA
Gentile Cliente, Dear Customer,
Premesso che non esistono Stated

Althoughthat there
there are
are nono specific
norme giuridiche specifiche per specific juridical regulations
legal regulations applying to
questo tipo di macchine, ad applying
this type to
of this kind ofWESTCAR
coupling,
ogni modo questa risponde alle machines, this one is
couplings conform to however
and are in
norme generali UNI EN 292.1 E in compliance
compliance with
with thethe
292.2 nel rispetto della general UNI EN 292.1 and
DIRETTIVA COMUNITARIA 292.21 regulations, in
89/392/CEE e ai successivi observance with the 89/392/
EMENDAMENTI 91/368, 93/44 EEC COMMUNITY DIRECTIVE
e 93/68. and the subsequent 91/368,
93/44 and 93/68
Il giunto ROTOFLUID® non AMENDMENTS.
presenta pericolo per
l’operatore se impiegato The ROTOFLUID® coupling
secondo le istruzioni fornite does not represent any risk for
dalla WESTCAR. the operator, provided that it is
used according to instructions
Il corretto impiego di questo supplied by WESTCAR.
manuale garantisce la
sicurezza del cliente, The correctour
Following use of this manual
instructions and
dell’operatore e delle guarantees
guidelines as thepresented
safety of inthethis
persone da eventuali rischi Customer,
manual willofinsure
the operator,
the safety and
of
residui dovuti all’inosservanza of the people
personnel andfrom any possible
machinery.
di alcuni principi fondamentali. risks owing to the inobservance
of
Thissome fundamental
manual must be attached
Questo manuale deve essere principles.
to the machine’s documentation
allegato alla documentazione where the coupling is placed
della macchina su cui viene This manual and
into service mustreferred
be attached
to for
alloggiato il giunto e to the machine’s
information documentation
concerning safety
conservato per tutta la sua vita where the coupling
and operational is placed
information.
per le importanti and preserved
It must be always as long
at theas it
informazioni contenute, works for the
operator’s important
disposal for any
riguardanti la sicurezza e per information contained
further reference for use.
ogni ulteriore consultazione concerning the safety.
d’uso e manutenzione deve It must be always
WESTCAR at the
trusts that this
essere sempre a disposizione operator’s
manual fully disposal
meets the for any
dell’operatore further reference
manufacturer andfor use.
user’s
information requirements.
La WESTCAR si augura che WESTCAR hopes that this
questo manuale soddisfi manual fully meets
This manual the
is the property of
pienamente le esigenze manufacturer and user’s
WESTCAR, which reserves all
d’informazione per il information
its rights and requirements.
the contents
costruttore e l’utilizzatore. may not be made available to
This
third manual
parties.isTherefore,
the property its of
Questo manuale è di proprietà WESTCAR,
reproductionwhich reserves all
is prohibited.
della WESTCAR che se ne his rights and points out that
riserva tutti i diritti e ricorda it cannot be available to third
che non può essere messo a parties.
disposizione di terzi. Therefore, the reproduction of
E’ quindi vietata anche la test and pictures is prohibited.
riproduzione del testo o delle
illustrazioni.
WESTCAR s.r.l. WESTCAR s.r.l.
4 2
IDENTIFICAZIONE COUPLING
GIUNTO IDENTIFICATION
GIUNTI ROTOFLUID ALFA

Per qualsiasi comunicazione For any communication to be
con il costruttore, distributore per montaggio in linea addressed to the manufacturer,
o rivenditore, citare distributor or re-seller always
sempre la: ROTOFLUID ALFA COUPLINGS quote:
Grandezza For in-line installation Size

IDENTIFICAZIONE
ROTOFLUID (SCF DCF) COUPLING
ROTOFLUID (SCF DCF)
GIUNTO
Grandezza 10 IDENTIFICATION
Size 10
Grandezza 20 DATADI
DATA DIFABBRICAZIONE
FABBRICAZIONE- N° SERIE Size 20
Grandezza 30 MANUFACTUREDATE
MANUFACTURE DATEN° SERIES Size 30
Grandezza 30P Size 30P
Grandezza 40P
Per qualsiasi comunicazione Size 40P
For any communication to be
Grandezza 50
con il costruttore, distributore o Size 50
addressed to the manufacturer,
Grandezza 55
rivenditore, citare sempre la: Size 55
distributor or re-seller always
IDENTIFICAZIONE
Grandezza 60 COUPLING
Size 60
quote:
GIUNTO
Grandezza 65 IDENTIFICATION
Size 65
Grandezza 70P
GRANDEZZA DATA DI FABBRICAZIONE Size
SIZE 70P
Grandezza 75P MANUFACTURE DATE Size 75P
Grandezza 10 GRANDEZZA Size 10
For
Per qualsiasi comunicazione
Grandezza SIZE Sizeany communication
20 to be
Grandezza 90P20 Size 90P
con il costruttore, distributore o
Grandezza addressed
Size 30 to the manufacturer,
Grandezza 95P30 Size 95P
rivenditore,
Grandezza citare sempre la:
30P distributor
Size 30Por re-seller always
Grandezza 1200 Size 1200
quote:
Size
Grandezza
Grandezza 1200D 40P
CODICE DI IDENTIFICAZIONE Size 40P 1200D
Grandezza 50 Codice - CODE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
Size 50
GRANDEZZA
Grandezza
ROTOFLUID - CA 55 SIZE
Size
ROTOFLUID55 - CA
Grandezza
Grandezza 55S60 Size
Size 55S 60
Grandezza
Grandezza 55D10
Grandezza 65 GRANDEZZA Size
Size
Size 55D 10
65
Grandezza
Grandezza 65S20
Grandezza 70P SIZE Size
Size
Size 65S 20
70P
Grandezza
Grandezza 65D30
Grandezza 75P Size
Size 65D
Size 30
75P
Grandezza
Grandezza 75PS
Grandezza 30P
80P Size
Size 75PS
Size 30P
80P
Grandezza
Grandezza 75PD 40P Size
Size 75PD40P
Grandezza 85P GIUNTI
CODICE
DATA DIROTOFLUID BETA
DI IDENTIFICAZIONE
FABBRICAZIONE Size 85P
Grandezza 80P50
Grandezza
Size
Size 50
90P
Grandezza 85PD
Grandezza 55 per montaggio conDATE
IDENTIFICATION
MANUFACTURE puleggia
CODE Size 85PD
Size 55
Grandezza 90P60
Grandezza
Grandezza 1200 Size 90P
Size
Size 60
1200
Grandezza
Grandezza 65
1200P ROTOFLUID BETA COUPLINGS Size
Size 65
1200P
Grandezza 70P For pulley mounting Size 70P
CODICE
Grandezza 75P IDENTIFICATION
Size 75P
CODICE
D’IDENTIFICAZIONE
IDENTIFICATION
CODE
Grandezza
D’IDENTIFICAZIONE 80P Size
CODE 80P
(stampigliato sul giunto) (printed on the coupling)
Grandezza
(stampigliato sul85Pgiunto) DATADI
DATA DIFABBRICAZIONE
FABBRICAZIONE- N° SERIE Size
(printed 85P
on the coupling)
Grandezza 90P Size
Example90P
Esempio MANUFACTUREDATE
MANUFACTURE DATEN° SERIES
Grandezza
Esempio 95P Size
Example95P
11512+5456
Grandezza 1200 GRANDEZZA 11512+5456
Size 1200
SIZE
11512+5456
Grandezza 1200P 11512+5456
Size 1200P
CODICE IDENTIFICATION
DATA DI MANUFACTURE
D’IDENTIFICAZIONE
FABBRICAZIONE CODICE DI IDENTIFICAZIONE CODE
DATE
(stampigliato
DATA DI sul
stampigliato sulgiunto
giunto) IDENTIFICATION CODE (printed onthe
MANUFACTURE
printed on thecoupling
coupling)
FABBRICAZIONE
(in codice a lettere mese e DATE
Esempio
anno)
(in codice a lettere mese e Example
(in codice a lettere mese e
GRANDEZZA
anno) Example
anno)
SIZE
11512+5456
Esempio
(stampigliato sul giunto) 11512+5456
AL
(printed on the coupling)
AL BL
Esempio Example
BL CODICE DI IDENTIFICAZIONE CL
CL DI
DATA Codice - CODE
IDENTIFICATION CODE MANUFACTURE
AL DL
AL
FABBRICAZIONE
DL DATE
(inBL
codice a lettere mese e
BL
ELcodice a lettere mese e
(in
EL CL
anno) CL
anno)
DL
(stampigliato sul giunto) DL
(printed on the coupling)
5
EL EL
MODALITÁ WARRANTY
DI GARANZIA MODALITIES
INFORMATION
I giunti ROTOFLUID® vengono TheROTOFLUID®

The ROTOFLUID® couplings have
couplings
sottoposti ai seguenti controlli: undergone
have undergonethe following tests and
the following
Controllo dimensionale de i singoli checks:
tests and checks:
pezzi. Dimensional
Dimensional check
checkfor each single
for each
Bilanciatura in classe Q2.5 dei part.
single part.
singoli componenti. Class
Classbalancing
balancing Q 2.5 of each
Q 2.5 of each
Controllo delle tenute su tutta la single components.
single components.
superficie e delle guarnizioni con Seal
Sealtest
testononallall
thethe
surfaces and
surfaces
pressione interna a 4 bar. gaskets
and gaskets with an inner4 bar.
with an inner pressure of
Controllo della concentricità e Concentricity and verticality
pressure of 4 bar.
perpendicolarità di tutti i pezzi checks of all the pieces
Concentricity and verticality
assemblati rispetto l’asse di assembled, in comparison with the
checks of all the pieces
rotazione. rotation axis.
assembled, in comparison
In tutti i casi il giunto è coperto dalla with
In the rotation
all cases, axis.
couplings are covered
seguente formula di garanzia: by the following warranty: are
In all cases, couplings
covered by the following
1. La garanzia viene assicurata 1. WESTCAR ensures the warranty
warranty:
dalla WESTCAR per 24 mesi a for 24 months, starting from the
partire dalla data di consegna. delivery date. ensures the
1. WESTCAR
2. La WESTCAR si impegna ad 2.
warranty forundertakes
WESTCAR 24 months, to
eliminare ogni riconosciuto eliminate
starting from the deliveryout
any defects found date.
difetto dovuto ad errata and caused by awarrants
2. WESTCAR wrong planning,
that
progettazione o difetti di materiali as
thewell as material
couplings orfree
are machining
from
o di lavorazione, che dovessero defects,
defects due to design andwithin
which might present
manifestarsi entro i termini previsti the terms mentioned in point 1.
workmanship which may
al punto 1. 3. The buyer will have to
present themselves within the
3. Di ogni difetto il compratore write within eight days to inform
warranty period.
dovrà dare, entro otto giorni, WESTCAR for each defect found out.
3. WESTCAR must be notified
notizia scritta alla WESTCAR.
of any defects, in writing, with
Sono a carico del compratore i eight
All the days of receiving
transport the
risks and freights
costi ed i rischi del trasporto delle product.
of the defective and repaired parts
parti difettose e delle parti riparate or of those replaced – possible
o di quelle fornite in sostituzione, All transport
customs dutiescosts and
included – are at
ivi compresi eventuali oneri the buyer’s charge. Boththe
associated risks for the
doganali. La riparazione o la returned
repair parts
and the are the sole
replacement of the
sostituzione delle parti difettose responsibility
defective of considered
parts are the customer,as
costituisce piena soddisfazione includingsatisfaction
complete but not limited to;
of warranty
degli obblighi di garanzia. freight costs, potential duties
obligations.
Non sono comprese nella garanzia andwarranty
The taxes. does not include
le parti che dovessero risultare the parts damaged because of a
danneggiate a causa di careless use, a wrong
The warranty does maintenance
not
trascuratezza o negligenza and
covertheparts
damages occurreddue
damaged during
nell’uso, errata manutenzione, transportation
to improper use, faulty any
or caused by
danni da trasporto e da qualsiasi circumstance,
maintenance,which cannot be
misapplication
circostanza che nono possa related
or subject to abuseoror
to the working
riferirsi a difetti di funzionamento o manufacturing
damages occurringdefects. during
di fabbricazione transportation.
La garanzia è esclusa in tutti i The warranty is excluded in all the

All WESTCAR products
casi di uso improprio o cases of improper use, incorrect
are covered by “Product
applicazioni scorrette e dall’inos- applications and inobservance of
Insurance” all over the world.
servanza delle informazioni the information contained in this
contenute nel seguente manuale. manual.
Tutti i prodotti WESTCAR sono All WESTCAR products are co-

coperti da “Assicurazione del vered by “Product Insurance” all
prodotto” in tutto il mondo. over the world.
6 WESTCAR s.r.l. 4 WESTCAR s.r.l.

NOTE GENERALI GENERAL
ALLA DELIVERY
CONSEGNA NOTES
Al ricevimento della macchina Upon receipt of the coupling,

controllare che: check that:
1 1
L’imballo sia integro The packing is intact.
2 2
I dati di spedizione The shipping data
(indirizzo del destinatario, (receiver’s address, No. of
n° colli, n° ordine) items, No. of order)
siano corrispondenti al correspond with the
documento di accompanying document.
accompagnamento.
In caso di danni o parti Should some parts be

mancanti avvisare damaged or missing, please
immediatamente il inform the courier, WESTCAR
trasportatore, la WESTCAR or its re-seller.
o il suo rivenditore.
5 7
PRESCRIZIONE SAFETY
DI SICUREZZA PRESCRIPTIONS
Prima di eseguire qualsiasi Before

Before any
any cleaning,
cleaning,
intervento di pulizia, regulation maintenance
regular maintenance or or
oil oil
regolazione, manutenzione topping up on the coupling,
level adjustment on the it
o rabbocco olio sul giunto is necessary:
coupling, it is necessary:
bisogna:
1A 1A
Arrestare il motore di comando. Stop the driving motor
1B 1B
Togliere tensione e scollegare Cut off tension
Disconnect the and
power to the
l’alimentazione sul disconnect
machine and the feeding
use on the
appropriate
sezionatore di linea e line disconnecting
warning tags. switch and
segnalarne l’intervento. signal the intervention carried
out.
LAVORI IN CORSO
WORK IN
PROGRESS
1C 1C
Attendere il completo Wait until the motor and the
arresto del motore e delle driven masses have
masse condotte della completely stopped and
macchina e verificare che la verify that the machine is in
macchina sia in condizione safety
a securecondition.
condition.
di sicurezza.
1D 1D
Solo a questo punto è Only at this point it is
possibile accedere al giunto possible to reach the
rimuovendo i ripari. coupling by removing the
protections.
protective covers.
8 6
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL FRIZIONAMENTO THE OIL INSIDE
FRICTIONING
DELL’OLIO ALL’INTERNO INSIDE THE COUPLING
THE COUPLING
DEL GIUNTO GENERA GENERATES HEATHEAT.DUE
CALORE, PERTANTO BEFORE CARRYING OUT
TO THE ROTATIONAL
PRIMA DI QUALSIASI ANY INTERVENTION
PROCESS. BEFORE ON
INTERVENTO SUL THE
ANY COUPLING,
MAINTENANCE IT ISON
GIUNTO BISOGNA THEREFORE
THE COUPLING NECESSARY
IT IS
ATTENDERE CHE LA TO WAIT UNTIL
NECESSARY TO THE
WAIT
TEMPERATURA NON SIA TEMPERATURE IS NOT
UNTIL THE TEMPERATURE
SUPERIORE A 40°C ED HIGHER THAN THAN
IS NO HIGHER 40°C AND
IMPIEGARE GUANTI USE
40°C.AUSE
PAIR OF
FIREPROOF
IGNIFUGHI DI PROTECTION FIRE-PROOF
GLOVES FOR PROTECTION
PROTEZIONE. GLOVES.
TO PROTECT AGAINST
PERICOLO DI USTIONE DANGER
SCALDING. OF SCALDS.
Per la sua natura, durante Because

Due to theof design
its nature, the
of the
l’avviamento e la coupling
coupling, external body is
the external
trasmissione viene made rotate too,
body rotates also during
during the
trascinato in rotazione starting
operation. and the
anche il corpo esterno del transmission.
It is necessaryIttoisprovide
giunto, pertanto bisogna therefore
protectivenecessary
covers with toholes
prevedere ripari di provide for fixed
for ventilation, protections
equipped
protezione di tipo fisso con with safety
air intakes for
microswitches.
prese d’aria per la ventilation, equipped with
ventilazione, equipaggiati safety microswitches..
con microinterruttori
di sicurezza.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON RIMUOVERE O DO NOT REMOVE
REMOVE OR
MANOMETTERE IL TAPPO TAMPER
OR TAMPERTHEWITH
FUSIBLE
FUSIBILE O ESPANSIBILE PLUG OR TRIP PLUG
THE FUSIBLE PLUGS
MONTATO SUL GIUNTO. ASSEMBLED ON
INSTALLED IN THETHE
QUALORA SIA COUPLING.
COUPLING. SHOULD AN
INTERVENUTO UN OVERHEATING HAVE
IF THE PLUGS HAVE
SURRISCALDAMENTO CHE CAUSED
TRIPPED THE
DUE PIN
TO FUSION
HA PROVOCATO LA OR
OVERHEATING,THE
DAMAGED SAME,
ONLY
FUSIONE DELLA REPLACE THEM WITH
REPLACE THEM WITH
PASTIGLIA O UN ORIGINAL PLUGS PLUG
THE EQUIVALENT WHICH
DANNEGGIAMENTO CAN STAND THE
ORIGINALLY PROVIDED.
DELLO STESSO, COUPLING MAXIMUM
SOSTITUIRLI CON TAPPI TEMPERATURE.
ORIGINALI E IDONEI ALLE
MASSIME TEMPERATURE
DEL GIUNTO.
7 9
PERICOLO DANGER
NON IMPIEGARE DO
DO NOT
NOT USE
USESTANDARD
STANDARD
GUARNIZIONI NORMALI GASKETS
GASKETS(NBR)
(NBR)FOR
FOR
(NBR) PER APPLICATIONS WITH
APPLICATIONS WITH
APPLICAZIONI CON TEMPERATURES
TEMPERATURES
TEMPERATURE HIGHER
HIGHER THAN
THAN120°C.
120°C.
RAGGIUNGIBILI SUPERIORI DANGER
There isOF SEALS
a danger
A 120°C. PERICOLO DI DAMAGING WITH
of the seals being
DANNEGGIAMENTO DELLE CONSEQUENT
damaged and OIL
hot oil
TENUTE CON LEAKAGES.
leaks.
CONSEGUENTE
FUOIRIUSCITA DELL’OLIO.
Impiegare guarnizioni in Use VITON gaskets and

VITON e adeguati tappi suitable fusible plug or
fusibili o espansibili. trip-plug.
Il giunto ROTOFLUID® è stato The ROTOFLUID® coupling

costruito per il has been manufactured to be
funzionamento in presenza able to work with
d’olio di trasmissione. transmission oil.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON IMPIEGARE IL NOT USE
DO NOT USE THE
THE
GIUNTO IN ASSENZA COUPLING WITHOUT
COUPLING WITHOUT
D’OLIO O CON QUANTITA’ TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSIONOILOILOR
OR
INSUFFICIENTI. WITH INSUFFICIENT
WITH INSUFFICIENT
PERICOLO DI QUANTITIES.
QUANTITIES. DANGER
DANGEROFOF
SURRISCALDAMENTO OVERHEATING
OVERHEATINGOR OR
O GRIPPAGGIO DEI BEARINGS DRYING UP
BEARING SEIZURE.
CUSCINETTI. SEIZURE.
PERICOLO DANGER
NON IMPIEGARE OLI NON DO NOT USE
USE OILS
OILSWHICH
WHICH
PREVISTI DAL ARE NOT
NOT PROVIDED
PROVIDEDBYBY
COSTRUTTORE (VEDI THE MANUFACTURER
MANUFACTURER
CAPITOLO “OLIO DI (SEE “OIL
“OIL TRANSMISSION”
TRANSMISSION”
TRASMISSIONE”). CHAPTER).
CHAPTER).
PERICOLO DI DANGER OF
DANGER OF SEALS
SEAL
DANNEGGIAMENTO DAMAGING.
DAMAGE.
DELLE TENUTE.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON RIEMPIRE DO NOT
NOT FILL TH
OVERFILL THE
ECCESSIVAMENTE I GIUNTI COUPLINGS TOO MUCH
COUPLING (OVER THE
(OLTRE I CARICHI AMMESSI (OVER THE LOADING
RECOMENDED LIMIT BY
DAL COSTRUTTORE ADMITTED BY THE
THE MANUFACTURER
[45° STANDARD]). MANUFACTURER
(45° STANDARD). DANGER
PERICOLO DI [45° STANDARD]).
OF OIL LEAKS DUE TO
FUORIUSCITA DELL’OLIO DANGER
EXCESSIVE OF PRESSURE
OIL LEAKAGES
DOVUTA A CAUSED BY AN
BROUGHT ON BY THE
SOVRAPPRESSIONE PER OVERPRESSURE
THERMAL EXPANSION CAUSED,
OF
DILATAZIONE TERMICA IN TURN, BY THE OIL
THE OIL.
DELL’OLIO. THERMAL EXPANSION.
10 8
Il giunto di serie è previsto per The
Our current
standard coupling cancan
couplings work
un funzionamento in continuo continuously
work continuously (in service
(rotazione senza arresti) per (rotation with no stoppings),
without stopping) for for
periodi non superiori a 4 o 5 periods
periods not
not longer
longerthan
than44oror5
giorni ininterrotti. uninterrupted
5 days. days.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PER FUNZIONAMENTI FOR
FOR UNITERRUPTED
LONGER
ININTERROTTI DI DURATA WORKINGS LASTING
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE
SUPERIORE IMPIEGARE OLI LONGER,
USE MORE USE MORE
LUBRICATING
PIU’ LUBRIFICANTI O PER LUBRICATING OILS OR IN
OIL OR OUR SPECIAL
IMPIEGHI GRAVOSI CASE OF HEAVIER
COUPLING VERSION USES,
WITH
L’ESECUZIONE SPECIALE USE THE SPECIAL VERSION
ADDITIONAL BEARING
DEL GIUNTO CON OF COUPLING WITH
LUBRICATION.
CUSCINETTO A FORCED LUBRICATION
LUBRIFICAZIONE BEARING.
INDIPENDENTE.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON SUPERARE IL NUMERO DO NOT EXCEED
EXCEED THE
THE
MASSIMO DI AVVIAMENTI MAXIMAL
MAXIMUMNUMBER
NUMBEROFOF
PER ORA INDICATI DALLA STARTING PER
STARTS PER HOUR
HOUR
WESTCAR (VEDI CATALOGO SUGGESTED
SUGGESTED BY
BY WESTCAR
WESTCAR
TECNICO). (SEE TECHNICAL
TECHNICAL
PERICOLO DI CATALOGUE).
CATALOGUE).
SURRISCALDAMENTO. DANGER OF OVERHEATING.
OVERHEATING.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
EVITARE DI ESPORRE IL EXPOSING THE
AVOID EXPOSING THE
GIUNTO A FONTI DI CALORE COUPLING TOTO HEAT
HEAT SOUR-
CHE POSSONO SOURCES,
CES, WHICHWHICH CAN
CAN SUPER-
SOVRALIMENTARE LA SUPERCHARGE
CHARGE ITS ITS
SUA TEMPERATURA. TEMPERATURE. IF
TEMPERATURE. IF IT
A HIGH
IS NOT
IN CASO CONTRARIO O PER AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
POSSIBLE TO AVOID IT OR
INSTALLAZIONE IN CAN INSTALLATION
FOR NOT BE AVOIDED, IT
IN HOT
AMBIENTI CALDI BISOGNA WILL BE NECESSARY
PLACES, IT IS NECESSARYTO
PREVEDERE UNA PROVIDE
TO FOR
PROVIDE ADEQUATE
FOR
ADEGUATA VENTILAZIONE FORCED VENTILATION,
ADEQUATE FORCED
FORZATA DI FOR COOLING.FOR
VENTILATION,
RAFFREDDAMENTO. COOLING.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL GIUNTO IDRODINAMICO THE STANDARD FLUID
STANDARD NON E’ COUPLINGS ARE NOT
PREVISTO PER IL EXPECTED TO WORK IN
FUNZIONAMENTO IN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERES
ATMOSFERA ESPLOSIVA O OR IN PROXIMITY OF
IN PROSSIMITA’ DI FLAMMABLE
ATMOSFERE O SOSTANZE ATMOSPHERES OR
INFIAMMABILI. SUBSTANCES.
Richiedere l’esecuzione Required theversion

The special special with
version
the
con certificato ATEX. with
ATEXATEX certicicate.
certificate is required.
9 11
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON URTARE E NON DO
DO NOT
NOT BUMP
STRIKEAND
THE
PICCHIARE SUI GUSCI DEI BEAT ON THE COUPLINGS
COUPLING CASING.
GIUNTI. SHELLS.
DANGER OF IRREPERABLE
PERICOLO DI INCRINATURE DANGER
DAMAGEOF ORIRREPARABLE
LOSS OF
O SBILANCIATURE CRACKS
BALANCE. LOSS OF
OR
IRREPARABILI. BALANCE.
PERICOLO DANGER
NON APPLICARE DO NOT APPLY
MASSE SBILANCIATE E NON UNBALANCED MASSES
ASPORTARE ALETTE O AND DO NOT REMOVE
PARTI ESTERNE DEI GIUNTI. THE HYDROFOILS OR THE
QUESTO CAUSA EXTERNAL PARTS OF THE
SBILANCIAMENTO, COUPLINGS. THIS CAUSES
VIBRAZIONI E POSSIBILI UNBALANCE, VIBRATIONS
INDEBOLIMENTI DEL AND POSSIBLE COUPLING
GIUNTO. WEAKENING.
Impiegare unicamente gli To attach the coupling to the

appositi dispositivi suggeriti motor, use the suitable
dalla WESTCAR per il devices suggested by
fissaggio del giunto al motore. WESTCAR only.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON ESPORRE IN DO NOT PERMIT
PROSSIMITA’ DEL GIUNTO ELECTRICAL CABLES IN
CAVI ELETTRICI. PROXIMITY OF THE
PERICOLO DI COUPLING.
CORTOCIRCUITO IN CASO DANGER OF SHORT
DI FUORIUSCITA DELL’OLIO CIRCUIT, IN CASE OF HOT
CALDO. OIL LEAKAGE.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PER LA SOSTITUZIONE DI TO REPLACE
ONLY THEWESTCAR
ORIGINAL SPARE
PARTI DI RICAMBIO PARTS USE
SPARE ORIGINAL
PARTS SHOULD BE
IMPIEGARE SOLO PEZZI SPARE PARTS ONLY.
USED.
ORIGINALI.
L’inosservanza di quanto Should observe

Please the abovethe
notabove
be
sopra può far insorgere observed, some
guidelines; damages for
otherwise
pericoli per la macchina the machine
damage and the people
to machinery or
e le persone. can occur.
injury to personnel can
occur.
12 10
PESI E DIMENSIONI DI WEIGHTS AND OVERALL
INGOMBRO DEI GIUNTI DIMENSIONS OF ALFA
ROTOFLUID® ALFA ROTOFLUID® COUPLINGS
Qui di seguito vengono The overall dimensions with the

indicate le dimensioni coupling minimum and
d’ingombro di massima con maximum B dimensions, are
le quote B minime e massime listed below. The weights are to
del giunto, i pesi sono intesi be understood complete with oil
completi di olio ed in assenza and without accessories.
di accessori.
The axial dimensions and the
L’ingombro assiale ed il peso total weight of the coupling
totale del giunto con gli with the accessories are shown
accessori è dato dalla somma with the sum of the various
dei vari elementi. accessories amount of the
various elements.
Identificare il tipo di giunto e
rilevare i valori sulla riga della Identify the type of coupling
grandezza giunto. and observe the values on the
line which refers to the
I pesi e le dimensioni coupling size.
d’ingombro sono da
considerarsi di massima, per These are only approximate
ulteriori informazioni weights and dimensions.
richiedere i relativi fogli For further information consult the
tecnici. corresponding technical sheets.
GIUNTO ELEMENTI ELASTICI TERMINALI
COUPLING FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS OUTPUT OPTIONS
ALFA 'K' 'KO'
'A' 'LR' / 'BR' 'FR' / 'FBR' MOZZO 'V' MOZZO 'V' MOZZO 'S' MOZZO 'B' FASCIA FRENO
FOGLIO TEC. 'V' HUB 'V' HUB 'S' HUB 'B' HUB 'D' / 'FF'
TECH. SHEET BRAKE DRUMS
40-010 / 40-011
“LR” / “BR” “FR” / “FBR” “A” “BR” / “LR”
“FR” / “FBR”
B
A min. Kg C Kg C Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg C C D E Kg
max
98
10 192 4 15 0.5 20 0.2 25 0.7 30 0.5 45 1.2 35 0.4 30 0.6 60 160 4
116
125
20 230 6 20 0.7 24 0.4 43 1.6 45 1.2 55 2.4 44 0.7 44 0.9 60 160 4
135
162
30 290 13.2 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
190
162
30P 327 21 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
190
198
40P 338 22 22 2 36 1.3 65 3.5 60 3.8 70 5.8 76 2.5 70 6 95 250 20
206
50 430 179 30 25 4 40 1.8 59 4.5 70 5.8 80 8.2 92 3 80 8 118 315 32
55 430 211 40 25 4 40 1.8 59 4.5 70 5.8 80 8.2 92 3 80 8 118 315 32
60 520 192 46 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
65 520 240 66 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
240
70P 640 86 40 10 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 180 40 190 500 70
280
265
75P 640 127 40 10 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 180 40 190 500 70
280
80P 810 270 180 50 16 50 10 - - 110 20 - - 145 15 140 26 236 630 100
85P 810 340 252 50 16 60 30 - - 110 20 - - 145 15 170 65 236 630 100
90P 1000 364 350 62 70 - - - - - - - - 200 20 210 120 236 630 100
95P 1000 479 505 62 70 - - - - - - - - 220 25 250 175 236 630 100
1200 1300 462 1800 62 70 - - - - - - - - 290 100 250 175 - - -
11 13
ROTOFLUID ALFA SCF a camera di ritardo semplice ROTOFLUID ALFA SCF with simple delay chamber
GIUNTO
COUPLING ELEMENTIELEMENTS
FLEXIBLE ELASTICI TERMINALI
outPut oPtIons
COUPLING FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS outPut oPtIons
ALFA 'SCF-K'
ALFA 'SCF-K' FASCIA FRENO
FOGLIO TEC. MOZZO 'V' MOZZO 'V' MOZZO 'S' MOZZO 'B' FASCIA FRENO
'A' 'LR' /'BR' 'FR'/'FBR' MOZZO 'D' / 'FF'
FOGLIO
TECH. TEC.
SHEET 'A' 'LR' /'BR' 'FR'/'FBR' 'V' HUB'V' MOZZO
'V' HUB'V' MOZZO
'S' HUB'S' MOZZO
'B' HUB'B' 'D' / dRums
'FF'
BRAKE
GIUNTO
TECH. /SHEET
40-010 40-011 'V' HUB 'V' HUB 'S' HUB 'B' HUB
BRAKE
“BR” /dRums
GRANDEZZAGIUNTO
40-010 / 40-011 “LR” / “BR” “FR” / “FBR” “A” “LR”

SIZE
“LR” / “BR” “FR” / “FBR” “A” “BR”/ /“FBR”

“FR” “LR”
COUPLINGSIZE
COUPLING
GRANDEZZA
B
A B
min. Kg C Kg C Kg C Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D E Kg
A min.
max. Kg C Kg C Kg C Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D E Kg
max.
217 15,6
30 290 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
274
217 16,4
15,6
30 290 217 23,4 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
30P 327 274 16,4 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
274
217 24,4
23,4
30P 327 274 24,4 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
40P 338 256 25,7 22 2 36 1.3 65 3.5 60 3.8 70 5.8 76 2.5 70 6 95 250 20
40P
50 338
430 256
259 25,7
35,8 22
25 2
4 36
40 1.3
1.8 65
59 3.5
4.5 60
70 3.8
5.8 70
80 5.8
8.2 76
92 2.5
3 70
80 6
8 95
118 250
315 20
32
50
55 430
430 259
291 35,8
45,8 25
25 4
4 40
40 1.8
1.8 59
59 4.5
4.5 70
70 5.8
5.8 80
80 8.2
8.2 92
92 3
3 80
80 8
8 118
118 315
315 32
32
55 430 291
282 45,8 25 4 40 1.8 59 4.5 70 5.8 80 8.2 92 3 80 8 118 315 32
60 520 282 54,4 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
60 520 312 54,4 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
65 520 312
330 74,4 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
65 520 330
350 74,4 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
70P 640 390 99 40 10 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 180 40 190 500 70
350
70P 640 375
390 99 40 10 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 180 40 190 500 70
75P 640 390 140 40 10 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 180 40 190 500 70
75P 640 375 140 40 10 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 180 40 190 500 70
80P 810 388
390 196 50 16 50 10 - - 110 20 - - 145 15 140 26 236 630 10
404
388 0
10
80P 810 196 50 16 50 10 - - 110 20 - - 145 15 140 26 236 630
85P 810 404
458 268 50 16 60 10 - - 110 20 - - 145 15 140 26 236 630 10
0
0
10
85P 810 458
424 268
390 50 16 60 10 - - 110 20 - - 145 15 140 26 236 630 10
0
90P 1000 62 70 - - - - - - - - 200 20 210 120 236 630
524
424 430
390 0
10
90P 1000 599 545 62 70 - - - - - - - - 200 20 210 120 236 630 10
95P 1000 524 430 62 70 - - - - - - - - 220 25 250 175 236 630 0
706
599 595
545 0
10
95P 1000 706 595 62 70 - - - - - - - - 220 25 250 175 236 630 0
ROTOFLUID ALFA DCF a camera di ritardo doppia ROTOFLUID ALFA DCF with double delay chamber
GIUNTO
COUPLING ELEMENTIELEMENTS
FLEXIBLE ELASTICI TERMINALI
outPut oPtIons
COUPLING FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS outPut oPtIons
ALFA 'DCF-K'
ALFA 'DCF-K' FASCIA FRENO
FOGLIO TEC. MOZZO 'V' MOZZO 'V' MOZZO 'S' MOZZO 'B' FASCIA FRENO
'A' 'LR' /'BR' 'FR'/'FBR' MOZZO 'D' / 'FF'
FOGLIO
TECH. TEC.
SHEET 'A' 'LR' /'BR' 'FR'/'FBR'
MOZZO
'V' HUB'V' 'V' HUB'V' MOZZO
'S' HUB'S' MOZZO
'B' HUB'B' 'D' / dRums
'FF'
BRAKE
GIUNTO
TECH. /SHEET
40-010 40-011 'V' HUB 'V' HUB 'S' HUB 'B' HUB
BRAKE dRums
GRANDEZZAGIUNTO
40-010 / 40-011 “LR” / “BR” “FR” / “FBR” “A” “BR” / “LR”

SIZE
“LR” / “BR” “FR” / “FBR” “A” “BR”/ /“FBR”

“FR” “LR”
COUPLINGSIZE
COUPLING
GRANDEZZA
B
A B
min. Kg C Kg C Kg C Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D E Kg
A min.
max. Kg C Kg C Kg C Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D Kg D E Kg
max.
257 16.2
30 290 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
314
257 17.2
16.2
30 290 257 24 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
30P 327 314 17.2 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
314
257 25
24
30P 327 314 25 22 1.5 30 0.9 51 2.7 55 2.4 60 3.8 63 1 60 2.6 75 200 12
40P 338 328 27,2 22 2 36 1.3 65 3.5 60 3.8 70 5.8 76 2.5 70 6 95 250 20
40P
50 338
430 328
334 27,2
38 22
25 2
4 36
40 1.3
1.8 65
59 3.5
4.5 60
70 3.8
5.8 70
80 5.8
8.2 76
92 2.5
3 70
80 6
8 95
118 250
315 20
32
50
55 430
430 334
366 38
48 25
25 4
4 40
40 1.8
1.8 59
59 4.5
4.5 70
70 5.8
5.8 80
80 8.2
8.2 92
92 3
3 80
80 8
8 118
118 315
315 32
32
55 430 366
362 48 25 4 40 1.8 59 4.5 70 5.8 80 8.2 92 3 80 8 118 315 32
60 520 362 58 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
60 520 392 58 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
65 520 392
410 78 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
65 520 410
465 78 34 8 44 2.2 73 8.6 80 8.2 90 13 110 5 85 15 150 400 50
70P 640 505 106 40 16 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 140 43 190 500 70
465
70P 640 505
490 106 40 16 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 140 43 190 500 70
75P 640 505 147 40 16 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 140 43 190 500 70
75P 640 490 147 40 16 50 5 84 16 90 13 110 20 122 9 140 43 190 500 70
80P 810 505
488 208 50 16 50 10 - - 110 20 - - 145 15 140 43 236 630 10
504
488 0
10
80P 810 208 50 16 50 10 - - 110 20 - - 145 15 140 43 236 630
85P 810 504
588 280 50 32 - - - - - - 145 15 170 81 236 630 0
10
- - 0
85P 810 588 280 50 32 - - - - - - 145 15 170 81 236 630 10
504 405 - - 0
10
90P 1000 62 80 - - - - - - - - 220 25 250 188 236 630
604
504 445
405 0
10
90P 1000 679 560 62 80 - - - - - - - - 220 25 250 188 236 630 10
95P 1000 604 445 62 80 - - - - - - - - 220 25 250 188 236 630 0
786
679 610
560 0
10
95P 1000 786 610 62 80 - - - - - - - - 220 25 250 188 236 630 0
14
ROTOFLUID ALFA WAG-G e KLM ROTOFLUID ALFA WAG-G and KLM
WAG-G SCF WAG-G DCF WAG-G
WAG-G SCF WAG-G DCF WAG-G
KLM SCF KLM DCF KLM

KLM SCF KLM DCF KLM
Grandezza WAG-G SCF WAG-G DCF WAG-G KLM SCF KLM DCF KLM
Grandezza WAG-G SCF WAG-G DCF WAG-G KLM SCF KLM DCF KLM
Size A B Kg. B Kg. B Kg. B Kg. B Kg. B Kg.
Size A B Kg. B Kg. B Kg. B Kg. B Kg. B Kg.
30 290 300 26,3 355 28,7 395 29,3 303 26,1 358 28,5 398 29,1
30 290 300 26,3 355 28,7 395 29,3 303 26,1 358 28,5 398 29,1
30P 327 300 34,1 355 36,5 395 37,1 303 33,9 358 36,3 398 36,9
30P 327 300 34,1 355 36,5 395 37,1 303 33,9 358 36,3 398 36,9
40P 338 336 36,2 394 39,9 466 41,2 339 37,3 397 41 469 42,5
40P 338 336 36,2 394 39,9 466 41,2 339 37,3 397 41 469 42,5
50 430 317 44,2 397 50 472 52,2 337 52,9 417 58,7 492 60,9
50 430 317 44,2 397 50 472 52,2 337 52,9 417 58,7 492 60,9
55 430 413,5 79,3 493,5 85,1 568,5 87,2 369 62,9 449 68,7 524 70,5
55 430 413,5 79,3 493,5 85,1 568,5 87,2 369 62,9 449 68,7 524 70,5
60 520 422 86 512 94,4 592 98 383 96,5 473 104,9 553 108,5
60 520 422 86 512 94,4 592 98 383 96,5 473 104,9 553 108,5
65 520 470 107,2 560 115,6 640 119,2 431 116,5 521 124,9 601 128,5
65 520 470 107,2 560 115,6 640 119,2 431 116,5 521 124,9 601 128,5
70P 640 478,5 146,7 588,5 159,7 703,5 166,7 433 161,5 543 174,5 658 181,5
70P 640 478,5 146,7 588,5 159,7 703,5 166,7 433 161,5 543 174,5 658 181,5
75P 640 533,5 187,5 643,5 200,5 758,5 207,5 488 202,5 598 215,5 713 222,5
75P 640 533,5 187,5 643,5 200,5 758,5 207,5 488 202,5 598 215,5 713 222,5
80P 810 586 262 704 278 804 290 606 352 724 368 824 380
80P 810 586 262 704 278 804 290 606 352 724 368 824 380
85P 810 656 346 774 362 874 374 676 424 794 440 894 452
85P 810 656 346 774 362 874 374 676 424 794 440 894 452
90P 1000 748 550 808 590 888 605 739 594 799 634 879 649
90P 1000 748 550 808 590 888 605 739 594 799 634 879 649
95P 1000 863 710 983 750 1063 765 854 749 974 789 1054 804
95P 1000 863 710 983 750 1063 765 854 749 974 789 1054 804
ROTOFLUID CA ALFA WAG-G e KLM ROTOFLUID CA ALFA WAG-G and KLM

con camera anulare with annular chamber
CA WAG-G CA KLM CA K FRV/ FBRV AB
CA WAG-G CA KLM CA K FRV/ FBRV AB
Grandezza CA WAG-G CA KLM CA K FRV / FBRV AB

Grandezza CA WAG-G CA KLM CA K FRV / FBRV AB
Size A B Kg. B Kg. B Kg. A B Kg. A B Kg.
Size A B Kg. B Kg. B Kg. A B Kg. A B Kg.
55S 480 669,5 107,3 625 78,4 467 68 190 139 12,7 186 109 12
55S 480 669,5 107,3 625 78,4 467 68 190 139 12,7 186 109 12
55D 480 669,5 109,3 625 80,4 467 70 190 139 12,7 186 109 12
55D 480 669,5 109,3 625 80,4 467 70 190 139 12,7 186 109 12
65S 580 710 153,2 671 139,4 480 112 232 163 21,6 224 123 23
65S 580 710 153,2 671 139,4 480 112 232 163 21,6 224 123 23
65D 580 710 156,2 671 142,5 480 115 232 163 21,6 224 123 23
65D 580 710 156,2 671 142,5 480 115 232 163 21,6 224 123 23
75PS 710 840 265,5 795 243,5 572 205 271 194 36 330 196 59
75PS 710 840 265,5 795 243,5 572 205 271 194 36 330 196 59
75PD 710 840 270,5 795 248,5 572 210 271 194 36 330 196 59
75PD 710 840 270,5 795 248,5 572 210 271 194 36 330 196 59
80P 820 879,5 445 901 467 565 355 -- -- -- 330 196 59
80P 820 879,5 445 901 467 565 355 -- -- -- 330 196 59
85PD 890 1081 510 1101 477 226 420 -- -- -- 400 318 113
85PD 890 1081 510 1101 477 226 420 -- -- -- 400 318 113
85PD-915 915 1081 560 1101 527 226 470 -- -- -- 400 318 268
85PD-915 915 1081 560 1101 527 226 470 -- -- -- 400 318 268
90P 1010 1154 750 1145 848 318 550 -- -- -- 550 318 268
90P 1010 1154 750 1145 848 318 550 -- -- -- 550 318 268
15
PESI E DIMENSIONI DI WEIGHTS AND OVERALL
INGOMBRO DEI GIUNTI DIMENSIONS OF BETA
ROTOFLUID® BETA ROTOFLUID® COUPLINGS
Qui di seguito vengono indicate The overall dimensions

le dimensioni d’ingombro e with the coupling minimum and
pesi, minimi e massimi, delle maximum B dimensions, are
diverse grandezze e dei vari tipi listed below. The weights are to
di giunti. I pesi del giunto sono be understood complete with
da intendersi completi di olio and without accessories.
ed in assenza di pulegge.
The axial dimensions and the
L’ingombro assiale ed il peso total weight of the coupling
totale del giunto con gli with the accessories are shown
accessori è dato dalla somma with the sum of the various
dei vari elementi. accessories.
Identificare il tipo di giunto e Identify the type of coupling

rilevare i valori sulla riga della and observe the values on the
grandezza giunto. line which refers to the cou-
pling size.
I pesi e gli ingombri indicati
sono da considerarsi di These are only approximate
massima, per ulteriori weights and dimensions. For
informazioni richiedere i further information consult the
relativi fogli tecnici. corresponding technical sheets.
TIPI DI GIUNTI ROTOFLUID® BETA

KINDS OF ROTOFLUID® BETA COUPLINGS
BETA “Z” – “I” BETA “X” BETA “J” BETA “H”

FOGLIO TEC. 40-200 FOGLIO TEC. 40-250 FOGLIO TEC. 40-210 FOGLIO TEC. 40-220
GRANDEZZA GIUNTO
TECH. SHEET 40-200 TECH. SHEET 40-250 TECH. SHEET 40-210 TECH. SHEET 40-220
COUPLING SIZE
MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX.

A B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg B Kg A
10 192 133 4.1 144 4.2 - - - - - - - - 143 4.7 143 4.7 192 10
20 230 170 6.1 185 6.2 218 7 218 7 185 6.5 218 9 185 6.9 218 9.3 230 20
30 290 218 13.5 262 14 218 14 285 16 218 15 285 20 262 16.7 285 20 290 30
30P 327 218 21.5 262 22 218 22 285 24 218 23 285 28 262 24.7 285 28 327 30P
40P 338 247 22,5 301 23.5 247 23 325 35 247 24 325 31 301 27.6 325 31.3 338 40
50 430 244 32.5 274 33.5 244 32.5 334 35.5 244 40 334 45 334 41.8 334 41.8 430 50
55 430 286 41 351 43 286 41 426 46 286 48 396 55 396 52 426 60 430 55
60 520 302 50 302 50 302 50 402 56 302 65 402 80 402 70 402 70 520 60
65 520 390 72 390 72 350 69 475 79 350 83 475 100 475 93 475 93 520 65
70P 640 - - - - 380 111 485 121 380 115 485 125 485 131 485 131 640 70P
75P 640 - - - - 420 142 535 158 420 150 535 160 535 174 535 174 640 75P
80P 810 - - - - 386 192 481 207 386 185 481 200 - - - - 810 80P
85P 810 - - - - 460 270 555 290 460 250 555 270 - - - - 810 85P
16 12
ROTOFLUID BETA SCF a camera di ritardo semplice ROTOFLUID BETA SCF with simple delay chamber
TIPI
KINDS OFDIROTOFLUID
GIUNTI ROTOFLUID
®
®
BETA
BETA COUPLINGS
BETA “Z”– “I” KINDSBETA
OF ROTOFLUID
“X”
®
BETA COUPLINGS
BETA “J” BETA “H”
BETA “Z”– “I” BETA “X” BETA “J” BETA “H”
GIUNTO
FOGLIO TEC.40
40-200 FOGLIO TEC.40
40-220
SIZE
TECH. SHEET - 200 TECH. SHEET - 250 TECH. SHEET - 210 TECH. SHEET - 220
GIUNTO
COUPLINGSIZE
TECH. SHEET 40 - 200 TECH. SHEET 40 - 250 TECH. SHEET 40 - 210 TECH. SHEET 40 - 220
COUPLING
GRANDEZZA
GRANDEZZA

A B MIN.Kg BMAX.
Kg B MIN.Kg BMAX.
Kg B MIN.Kg BMAX.
Kg B MIN.Kg BMAX.
Kg A
30 290 273 15,9 317 16,4 273 16,4 340 18,4 273 17,4 340 22,4 317 19 340 22,4 290 30
30 290 273 15,9 317 16,4 273 16,4 340 18,4 273 17,4 340 22,4 317 19 340 22,4 290 30
30P 327 273 23,9 317 24,4 273 24,4 340 26,4 273 25,4 340 30,4 317 27 340 30,4 327 30P
30P 327 273 23,9 317 24,4 273 24,4 340 26,4 273 25,4 340 30,4 317 27 340 30,4 327 30P
40P 338 305 26,2 359 27,2 305 26,7 383 38,7 305 28 383 35 359 31,5 383 35 338 40
40P 338 305 26,2 359 27,2 305 26,7 383 38,7 305 28 383 35 359 31,5 383 35 338 40
50 430 324 38,3 354 39,3 324 38,3 414 41,3 324 46 414 51 414 47,5 -- -- 430 50
50 430 324 38,3 354 39,3 324 38,3 414 41,3 324 46 414 51 414 47,5 -- -- 430 50
55 430 366 46,8 431 48,8 366 46,8 506 51,8 366 54 476 61 476 57,8 506 65,8 430 55
55 430 366 46,8 431 48,8 366 46,8 506 51,8 366 54 476 61 476 57,8 506 65,8 430 55
60 520 392 58,4 -- -- 392 58,4 492 64,4 392 74 492 89 492 78,4 -- - 520 60
60 520 392 58,4 -- -- 392 58,4 492 64,4 392 74 492 89 492 78,4 -- - 520 60
65 520 480 80,4 -- -- 440 77,4 565 87,4 440 92 565 109 565 101,4 -- -- 520 65
65 520 480 80,4 -- -- 440 77,4 565 87,4 440 92 565 109 565 101,4 -- -- 520 65
70P 640 - - - - 490 118 595 128 490 128 595 138 595 144 -- -- 640 70P
70P 640 - - - - 490 118 595 128 490 128 595 138 595 144 -- -- 640 70P
75P 640 - - - - 530 143 645 159 530 163 645 173 645 187 -- -- 640 75P
75P 640 - - - - 530 143 645 159 530 163 645 173 645 187 -- -- 640 75P
80P 810 - - - - 504 201 599 224 504 201 599 224 - - - - 810 80P
80P 810 - - - - 504 201 599 224 504 201 599 224 - - - - 810 80P
85P 810 - - - - 578 279 673 307 578 266 673 294 - - - - 810 85P
85P 810 - - - - 578 279 673 307 578 266 673 294 - - - - 810 85P
ROTOFLUID BETA DCF a camera di ritardo doppia ROTOFLUID BETA DCF with double delay chamber
TIPI
KINDS OFDIROTOFLUID
GIUNTI ROTOFLUID
®
®
BETA
BETA COUPLINGS
BETA “Z”– “I” KINDSBETA
OF ROTOFLUID
“X”
®
BETA COUPLINGS
BETA “J” BETA “H”
BETA “Z”– “I” BETA “X” BETA “J” BETA “H”
GIUNTO
SIZE
GIUNTO
FOGLIO
TECH. TEC.40
SHEET 40-200
- 200 FOGLIO
TECH. TEC.40
SHEET 40-250
- 250 FOGLIO
TECH. TEC.40
SHEET 40-210
- 210 FOGLIO
TECH. TEC.40
SHEET 40-220
- 220
COUPLINGSIZE
TECH. SHEET 40 - 200 TECH. SHEET 40 - 250 TECH. SHEET 40 - 210 TECH. SHEET 40 - 220
GRANDEZZA
COUPLING
GRANDEZZA

A B MIN.Kg BMAX.
Kg B MIN.Kg BMAX.
Kg B MIN.Kg BMAX.
Kg B MIN.Kg BMAX.
Kg A
30 290 313 16,5 357 17 313 17 380 19 313 18 380 23 357 19.7 380 23 290 30
30 290 313 16,5 357 17 313 17 380 19 313 18 380 23 357 19.7 380 23 290 30
30P 327 313 24,5 357 25 313 25 380 27 313 26 380 31 357 27.7 380 31 327 30P
30P 327 313 24,5 357 25 313 25 380 27 313 26 380 31 357 27.7 380 31 327 30P
40P 338 377 27,7 431 28,7 377 28,2 455 40,2 377 29 455 36 431 32,8 455 36,5 338 40
40P 338 377 27,7 431 28,7 377 28,2 455 40,2 377 29 455 36 431 32,8 455 36,5 338 40
50 430 399 40,5 429 41.5 399 40.5 489 43.5 399 48 489 53 489 49.8 -- -- 430 50
50 430 399 40,5 429 41.5 399 40.5 489 43.5 399 48 489 53 489 49.8 -- -- 430 50
55 430 441 49 506 51 441 49 581 54 441 56 551 63 551 60 581 68 430 55
55 430 441 49 506 51 441 49 581 54 441 56 551 63 551 60 581 68 430 55
60 520 472 62 -- -- 472 62 572 68 472 77 572 92 572 82 -- - 520 60
60 520 472 62 -- -- 472 62 572 68 472 77 572 92 572 82 -- - 520 60
65 520 560 84 -- -- 520 81 645 91 520 95 645 112 645 105 -- -- 520 65
65 520 560 84 -- -- 520 81 645 91 520 95 645 112 645 105 -- -- 520 65
70P 640 - - - - 605 125 710 135 605 135 710 145 710 151 -- -- 640 70P
70P 640 - - - - 605 125 710 135 605 135 710 145 710 151 -- -- 640 70P
75P 640 - - - - 645 150 760 166 645 170 760 180 760 194 -- -- 640 75P
75P 640 - - - - 645 150 760 166 645 170 760 180 760 194 -- -- 640 75P
80P 810 - - - - 604 213 699 236 604 213 699 236 - - - - 810 80P
80P 810 - - - - 604 213 699 236 604 213 699 236 - - - - 810 80P
85P 810 - - - - 678 291 773 319 678 278 773 306 - - - - 810 85P
85P 810 - - - - 678 291 773 319 678 278 773 306 - - - - 810 85P
17
TRASPORTO E TRANSPORT AND
POSIZIONAMENTO POSITIONING
I giunti ROTOFLUID® The ROTOFLUID® couplings

vengono normalmente are normally shipped in
spediti in appositi imballi, suitable packaging, boxes (for
scatole (per pesi fino a 40 weights up to 40 Kg.) boxes
Kg), scatole su pallet o on pallets or cases
casse (per pesi oltre i 40 Kg). (for weights over 40 Kg).
Al ricevimento della fornitura Upon receipt of the

the shipment,
supply,
impiegare un mezzo di use a lifting device
means suitable
suitable to
sollevamento adeguato al the weight
for the (see
stated the chapter
weight.
peso (vedi capitolo “WEIGHTS
(see the chapter OVERALL
AND
“PESI E DIMENSIONI DI DIMENSIONS”)
“WEIGHTS AND OVERALL
INGOMBRO”). DIMENSIONS”)
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON FAR ROTOLARE DO NOT
NOT MAKE
ALLOWTHE
THE
L’IMBALLO PER NESSUNA PACKING ROLL FOR
PACKAGE TO TIP ANY
OVER.
RAGIONE. REASON. DANGER OF
DANGER OF DAMAGING
PERICOLO DI DAMAGING
THE PRODUCT INSIDE.
DANNEGGIAMENTO.
Dopo aver aperto l’imballo After the container has been

verificare che non vi siano opened, verify that there are no
danni o parti mancanti e che damaged or missing parts
il contenuto sia conforme and that the content is in
all’ordine. compliance with the order.
On the contrary,
If something inform or
is missing
In caso contrario informare WESTCAR
damaged inform distributor
or the
entro otto giorni dalla data di within
WESTCAReight or
daysthefrom the
distributor
ricevimento la WESTCAR o il date of receipt.
within eight days from the
distributore. date of receipt.
18 13
Il giunto nell’imballo si trova coupling is
The coupling is placed
placed in
in the
the
con l’asse in verticale. with the
package with the vertical
vertical
axis.pointing up.
axis
Per il sollevamento avvitare For lifting

For the coupling lifting, screw
the coupling, screw
sul foro di estrazione del a threaded
a threaded rodpin equipped
equipped withwith
giunto un perno filettato a lifting hook, on the
a lifting hook, into the
fornito di gancio di extraction hole.
extraction hole.
sollevamento.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON SOLLEVARE IL GIUNTO DO NOT
ONLY LIFT
LIFT THE
THE COUPLING
COUPLING
IMPIEGANDO MEZZI USING INADEQUATE
WITH ADEQUATE
DIFFERENTI DA QUELLO MEANS, DIFFERING FROM
EQUIPMENT!
PREVISTO E NON THE SUGGESTED ONE
ADEGUATI.
Imbracare il gancio con funi di Lift the

Sling thecoupling
couplingby by means
portata adeguata al peso del of ropes, which
appropriate canorstand
ropes cablesthe
giunto (vedi capitolo “PESI E coupling
which areweight
rated adequately
for the given
DIMENSIONI DI INGOMBRO”) (see the (see
weight. chapter
the “WEIGHTS
chapter
e trasportarlo in prossimità AND OVERALL
“WEIGHTS ANDDIMENSIONS”)
OVERALL
del luogo d’installazione sul and carry it in proximity
DIMENSIONS”) and carry of the
it
motore. installation place on the motor.
in proximity of the installation
place on the motor.
Put it down on a clean pallet,

Depositare con cura su di un carefully by taking care not to
pallet pulito facendo damage the trip plug,
attenzione a non danneggiare whenever it is present.
l’eventuale tappo espansibile
qualora ne sia provvisto.
14 19
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON DISPERDERE DO NOT
NOT DISPERSE
THROW AWAY THE
L’IMBALLO IN AMBIENTE MA PACKAGE IN
THE PACKAGINGTHE
RIVOLGERSI AD APPOSITE ENVIROMENT BUT
MATERIAL. PLEASE
AZIENDE AUTORIZZATE APPLY TO THE SUITABLE
RECYCLE RESPONSIBLY!
PER LO SMALTIMENTO AUTHORISED ENTERPRISES
FOR ITS DISPOSAL
Per l’installazione in For the installation

installationin in
atmosfere aggressive (aria aggressive environments
aggressive environments
salmastra, acidi corrosivi, (brackish air,
(brackish air, corrosive
corrosiveacids,
acids,
ecc.) sgrassare le superfici etc.) degrease
degrease thethecoupling
coupling
del giunto, proteggendo le surfaces, by
surfaces, protecting
while the the
protecting
guarnizioni e proteggere con seals, and protect with some
seals, and paint the surface
della vernice adeguata paint
of theadequate
coupling to thea paint
with
all’ambiente e resistente alla suitable for the working to
environment and resistant
temperatura che può the temperature,
environment which
of the can be
coupling
raggiungere durante il reached during the working.
and adequate for the working
funzionamento.
temperature of the coupling.
Oppure impiegare Or alternatively use the special

l’esecuzione speciale del coupling version, with
giunto con superfici anodised surfaces.
anodizzate.
Nel caso il giunto venga Should the

the coupling
couplingbe be
installato in ambienti molto installed in
installed in very
very dusty
dustyor or
polverosi o aggressivi aggressive environments
aggressive environments
(atmosfere salmastre, miniere, (brackish atmospheres,
(brackish atmospheres,mines,
cave di marmo, macchine per marble quarries, machinewood
mines, marble quarries, for
legno, ecc.) prevedere working machines, etc.) the
the wood etc.), provide for
l’impiego di feltri o ripari di use of felts
provide feltor guards
seals for the
or guard
protezione delle tenute covers for the shaft endshaft,
seals protection on the seals
sull’albero per to protect
to its life.
extend their life.
salvaguardarne la vita.
Nel caso di giunto “ALFA” Should the

the “ALFA“
“ALFA“coupling
couplingbe
equipaggiato di accessori equipped
be equippedwithwith
fittings (flexible
accessories
(elemento elastico, mozzo, element, hub, etc.), it is
(flexible element, hub, etc.), it
ecc.) è necessario rimuoverli necessary
is necessaryto remove
to remove them,
themto
per avere accesso alla parte be able to enter the back
for accessing the rear of the part
posteriore. (see the ENCLOSURE “A”).
coupling.
If it is a “BETA” coupling, it is
Trattandosi di giunto “BETA” Being a “BETA”
necessary coupling,
to attach it is
the pulley
bisogna provvedere al necessary to assemble the
if it is not already mounted.
montaggio della puleggia pulley, should it not already
qualora non sia già montata. been assembled.
A questo punto il giunto è At this point

point the
the coupling
couplingisis
pronto per l’installazione sul ready for
to be installed on on
being installed
motore o albero macchina. the machine
machine motor
motorororshaft
shaft.
20 15
CALETTAMENTO COUPLING KEYING
DEL GIUNTO ON THE SHAFT
MOUNTING
SULL’ALBERO ON THE SHAFT
Il giunto ROTOFLUID® The ROTOFLUID® standard

standard (di serie) viene (mass-produced) coupling is
fornito con albero cavo con supplied with an hollow shaft
il foro e sede chiavetta a and both the hole and the
norme DIN 6885 per motori key seat conform to the DIN
MEC. 6885 regulations, for the MEC
motors.
Il calettamento del giunto The coupling mounting

keying (hollow
(lato albero cavo) può shaft side)
(hollow can
shaft be carried
side) can be out
essere effettuato tanto sul both on the motor (electrical
done both on the motor
motore (elettrico od or endothermic) and on the
(electrical or endothermic)
endotermico) come sulla driven part of the machine.
and on the driven part of the
parte condotta della machine.
macchina.
MONTAGGIO STANDARD STANDARD ASSEMBLY

MOTORE COLLEGATO MOTOR CONNECTED TO
ALL’ALBERO CAVO DEL THE COUPLING HOLLOW
GIUNTO (PARTE INTERNA) SHAFT (INTERNAL PART)
MONTAGGIO REVERSE ASSEMBLY

REVERSE ASSEMBLY
ROVESCIATO MOTOR CONNECTED
CONNECTED ON
ON
MOTORE COLLEGATO SUI THE COUPLING
COUPLING CASE
SHELLS
GUSCI DEL GIUNTO (EXTERNAL PART)
PART)
(PARTE ESTERNA)
Questa installazione è da This installation

installation is
is preferred
to
preferire in caso di prefer in case of
when startups arevery long or
frequent
avviamenti molto lunghi o and
long, to obtain a wider to
frequent starting, heat
frequenti per ottenere obtain a wider heat
dissipation.
maggiore dissipazione di dissipation.
calore.
ALBERO CAVO ALBERO CAVO

HOLLOW SHAFT HOLLOW SHAFT
Qui di seguito vengono The procedure
indicationsfor
forthe
the
fornite le indicazioni per il coupling mounting
keying (hollow shaft
(hollow
calettamento del giunto side) on the motor or on
shaft side) on the motor orthe
on
(lato albero cavo) sul machine are the following.
the machine is as follows.
motore o sulla macchina.
16 21
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL CALETTAMENTO DEL THE COUPLING
COUPLINGKEYING
GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE MUST BE CARRIED
INSTALLATION OUT ONLY
SHOULD
ESEGUITO SOLO DOPO AVER AFTERBE
ONLY HAVING ELECTRICALLY
ATTEMPTED
SCOLLEGATO DISCONNECTED
WITH THE
THE ELECTRICAL
ELETTRICAMENTE IL MACHINE
FEED MOTOR ON THE
DISCONNECTED
MOTORE DELLA MACCHINA LINE SWITCH
AND ADEQUATEANDSIGNAGE
AFTER
SUL SEZIONATORE DI LINEA LAVORI IN CORSO HAVING INFORMED
HAVING ABOUT
BEEN PLACED.
E DOPO AVER SEGNALATO WORK IN THE INTERVENTION
COUPLING IN
L’INTERVENTO IN CORSO. PROGRESS. THESHOULD
INSTALLATION KEYING
PROGRESS
IL CALETTAMENTO DEVE MUST
BE BE CARRIED OUT
ACCOMPLISHED
ESSERE EFFETTUATO SUL WHEN THE
BEFORE MOTOR
THE MOTORIS NOT
IS
MOTORE A BANCO CON YET INSTALLED,
INSTALLED, WITHWITH
ITSITS
AXIS
L’ASSE IN ORIZZONTALE E A AXIS HORIZONTAL
HORIZONTAL ANDANDWITHWITH
TEMPERATURA NON THE TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURENOT NOT
SUPERIORE A 40°C. HIGHER THAN
HIGHER THAN40°C.
40°C.
Per l’installazione operare For the installation proceed

act as
come segue: follows:
as follows:
1 1
Pulire accuratamente le Clean the driving
driving shaft
shaft
superfici dell’albero motore surfaces and
and the
the coupling
coupling
e la sede del giunto. seat well.
accurately.
2 2
Le sedi del giunto vengono The coupling
coupling bores
seats are
prodotte con tolleranze H7 produced withwith
manufactured H7 or
H7G7or G7
o G7, di conseguenza può allowances, and therefore a
tolerances, thereby
risultare un accoppiamento forced fit can
eliminating come fit.
a forced out.
forzato.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
UN BUON ACCOPPIAMENTO THE CORRECT
A GOOD FIT
FIT BETWEEN THE
TRA ALBERO E SEDE NON BETWEEN
SHAFT ANDSHAFT ANDMUST
THE SEAT
DEVE AVERE INTERFERENZA BORE MUST
NOT HAVE BE NEITHER
EITHER
NE’ TROPPO GIOCO. AN INTERFERANCE
INTERFERENCE OR
OR TOO
ATTENERSI AI VALORI TOO
MUCH MUCH
PLAY.PLAY. FOLLOW
FOLLOWS THE
INDICATI IN TABELLA THE VALUES
VALUES INDICATED
INDICATED IN IN
THE TABLE.
TABLE.
DIAMETRO FORO GIUNTO ROTOFLUID®

VELOCITÁ MOTORS
ROTOFLUID® COUPLING HOLE DIAMETER SPEED
MOTORI
H7 H7 H7 H7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7 G7
14 19 24 28 38 42 48 55 60 65 70 75 80 90 100 110 125 140
GIOCO MAX MAX PLAY

(centesimi) (hundredths)
FINO A 1,5 1,5 2 2 2, 2,5 2,5 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 UP TO
1500 G/min 1500 R/min
GIOCO MAX MAX PLAY

(centesimi) 1 1 1 1 1,5 1,5 1,5 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 (hundredths)
OLTRE A OVER
1500 G/min 1500 R/min
22 17
Si consiglia di verificare con It
We is suggest
suggested
thatto verify
the shaftwith
appositi strumenti the
andsuitable micro-metric
bore dimensions are
micrometrici le dimensioni instruments
verified beforetheattempting
real size
reali dell’albero motore o of the driving
assembly shaft,
of the of theto
coupling
della macchina e delle sedi machine
the shaft.and of the coupling
del giunto. seats.
4 4
Nel caso vi sia interferenza In case of fit
fit interference,
interference, itit
nell’accoppiamento, is
willnecessary to carry
be necessary out an
to reduce
bisogna eseguire un adjustment with some
the shaft diameter emery
uniformly
aggiustaggio con della tela cloth uniformly
over it’s on all
length with the
some
abrasiva uniformemente su driving shaftor
emery cloth orsimilar
machine
tutta la lunghezza dell’albero length.
medium.
motore o macchina.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
UN GIOCO MAGGIORE A A PLAY HIGHER
HIGHER THAN
THAN THE
THE
QUELLO INDICATO IN ONE INDICATED
INDICATED IN
IN THE
THE
TABELLA PUO’ TABLE CAN CAUSE
CAUSE A A
PROVOCARE ROTATING UNBALANCE
UNBALANCING,
SBILANCIAMENTO WITH CONSEQUENT
CONSEQUENT
DURANTE LA VIBRATIONS.
VIBRATION.
ROTAZIONE CON
CONSEGUENTI
VIBRAZIONI. GIOCO
PLAY
5 5
Lubrificare tutta la superficie Lubricate the
all the driven
driven motor
motor
dell’albero motore o or machine surface
surface and
and the
the
macchina e la relativa sede corresponding seat
seat on
on the
the
sul giunto, preferibilmente coupling preferably
preferably with
with
con grassi resistenti alle pressure resistant
resistant grease.
greases.
pressioni.
18 23
6 6
Per giunti di peso superiore For the couplings with
with aa
a 30 Kg, svitare weight over 30 Kg. screw
screw and
and
completamente e rimuovere remove completely oneone of
of the
the
una delle viti sulla corona screws on the ring and
and insert
insert
del giunto ed inserire un an adequate lifting bracket.
cricket.
adeguato grillo di
sollevamento.
7 7
Sollevare il giunto con funi Lift the coupling
coupling with
with ropes
ropes
di portata adeguata al peso having a capacity
capacity adequate
adequate
(vedi capitolo to the weight
weight (see
(see the
the chapter
chapter
“PESI E DIMENSIONI DI “WEIGHTS AND AND OVERALL
OVERALL
INGOMBRO”) avvalendosi DIMENSIONS”),
DIMENSIONS”), by by means
means of of
del grillo ed avvicinarlo a cricket
the and
bracket bring
and it near
bring to
it near
all’albero in posizione the shaft
to the in horizontal
shaft in horizontal
orizzontale. position.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PER IL CALETTAMENTO FOR ATTACHING
THE MOTORTO KEYING
THE
SUL MOTORE NON YOU
MOTORMUST
DO NOT
NOT BEAT
CREATEOR
BISOGNA PICCHIARE O CREATE ANY
AN IMPACT ONEFFORT
THE ON
ESERCITARE SFORZI DI THE COUPLING
COUPLING SHELL.
CASE.
NESSUN TIPO SUI GUSCI DANGER OF
OF DAMAGING
SEATS AND
DEL GIUNTO. BEARING DAMAGING
THE SEALS AND
AND CREATING
PERICOLO DI COUPLINGS CRACKS.
CRACKS IN THE HOUSING.
DANNEGGIAMENTO DELLE
SEDI DEI CUSCINETTI E
INCRINATURE DEI GIUNTI.
8 8
Predisporre sul foro Insert a suitably
Predispose long bar
a threaded
dell’albero una barra suitably
threadedlong (see the
rod into technical
shaft
filettata di adeguata catalogue)
bore without onlocking
the shaft hole,
it (see
lunghezza without
technicallocking it.
catalogue).
(vedi catalogo tecnico)
senza bloccarla.
24 19
9 9
Imboccare la sede del Insert
Fit thethe coupling
coupling onon
seat thethe
giunto sull’albero. shaft.
Per giunti con puleggia For couplings
couplings withwith pullies
pulley
“BETA” è possibile inserire type
“BETA”“BETA” it is possible
it is possible to insert
sull’albero del motore degli to
oninsert someshaft
the motor “AD”some
spacer
anelli distanziali “AD” per rings
“AD” which
spacerwill realign
rings, the
to recover
recuperare degli eventuali driven pulley; non-alignment
the possible never exceed
disallineamenti con la 15% of the
with the motor
driven shaftnever
pulley,
puleggia condotta, senza length.
exceed the 15% of the motor
mai superare il 15% della shaft length.
lunghezza dell’albero
motore.
10 10
Inserire sulla barra filettata Insert aonthrust bearing on
the threaded barthe
a
un cuscinetto reggispinta threaded bar, touching
thrust bearing, leaning onlyonly
che appoggi solo ed on the
the coupling
coupling sleeve.
sleeve.Then
esclusivamente sul cannotto screw the nutthe
Then screw onnut theon the
del giunto, quindi avvitare il threaded
threaded bar bar and
and tighten
tighten
dado sulla barra filettata e the nut
nut until
until the
the coupling
couplingisis
serrare il dado fino a calzare perfectly
perfectly placed
placed on on the
themotor
motor
completamente il giunto shaft.
sull’albero motore. This operation
operation must is to be be carried
Questa operazione deve completed
out keepingwith stillthe
themotor
motor
essere effettuata tenendo shaft on
on the
the impeller
impeller side side,
fermo l’albero motore dalla prevented
otherwise in fromcase rotating.
the
parte della ventola oppure, Alternatively,
couplings arethe couplings
equipped with
nel caso di giunti dotati di are equipped
extraction holeswith extraction
fori di estrazione (di serie dal holes (mass produced
(mass-produced from 70Pfromto
70P al 95P), è possibile 70P
95P),toit95P). It is possible
is possible to use theto
utilizzare il sistema di use the system
pulling S.E. pulling
S.E to system
keep to
estrazione S.E per tenere keep the shaft
the shaft still. from rotating.
fermo l’albero.
11 11
Nel caso si verifichi uno In the
caseevent that in
of effort thethe
coupling
sforzo nel calettamento del mounting is difficult,
coupling keying you itmust
will not
giunto non bisogna be
keepnecessary to discontinue
on operating, but it is
proseguire ma si deve assembly
necessary(see the chapter it
to disassemble
smontarlo (vedi capitolo “COUPLING DISASSEMBLE”)
(see the chapter “COUPLING
“SMONTAGGIO DEL and repeat the operations
DISASSEMBLE”) and repeat
GIUNTO”) e ripetere le from point 2 to point
the operations 4, more
from point 2 to
operazioni dal punto 2 al carefully.
point 4, more carefully.
punto 4 con maggiore cura.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
VERIFICARE LE SUPERFICI VERIFY THE
VERIFY THE SHAFT,
SHAFT, KEY
KEY
DELL’ALBERO, DELLA AND bore
SEAT SURFACES.
SURFACES.
CHIAVETTA E DELLA SEDE. DANGER OF
DANGER OF SEIZING.
SEIZING.
PERICOLO DI
GRIPPAGGIO.
INCRINATURE DEI GIUNTI.
20 25
12 12
Dopo aver mandato in After
After pressing
having madethe coupling
the
battuta il giunto sull’albero, onto the shaft,
coupling beat onloosen the nut
the shaft,
allentare il dado e rimuovere on the the
loose threaded
nut and rod, remove
remove the
la barra filettata ed il the threaded
threaded barrodandandtheclamp
thrust
cuscinetto reggispinta ed plate andand
bearing, insert the clamping
insert the head
inserire il tirante di testa con screw
tie rodand
withclamp washer
a suitable with
washer,
un’apposita rondella con the proper
having thickness
a centring and
diameter
diametro di centratura, di diameter (see technical
with an adequate thickness
adeguato spessore e catalogue).
and diameter (see technical
diametro (vedi catalogo catalogue).
tecnico).
13 13
Serrare a fondo il tirante di Tighten
Tighten the
the clamp screw
tightening screw
testa tenendo fermo l’albero completely
completely,while keeping
by keeping the
still
della macchina o del motore machine or motor
the machine shaftshaft,
or motor on
dal lato ventola. the impeller
on the sideside.
impeller from turning.
14 14
Rimuovere l’imbracatura ed Remove
Remove the
the sling
sling and
and the
the
il grillo e reinserire la vite ed bracket and insert
cricket and re-insert thethe
again
il dado precedentemente screw and
and the
the nut
nut,previously
previously
tolti serrando a fondo. removed,
removed, and then tighten
by tightening then
completely.
completely.
26 21
15 15
A questo punto è possibile At this point it is possible
effettuare il riempimento to fill
carrytheout
coupling
the oil with
fillingoil,
in
dell’olio nel giunto con l’asse with the axis in
the coupling, horizontal
with the axis in
in orizzontale (vedi capitolo position
horizontal (see the chapter
position (see the
“RIEMPIMENTO, TARATURA “OIL
chapter FILLING”, CALIBRATION
“OIL FILLING”,
E SOSTITUZIONE OLIO”). AND CHANGE“.)
CALIBRATION AND CHANGE“.)
Il calettamento del giunto The

The coupling
coupling installation on
keying on the
dal lato albero cavo è così the hollow
hollows shaft
shaft side
side is is
nownow
terminato. complete.
over.
GIUNTI “ALFA” “ALFA” COUPLINGS

(in linea) (on line)
Provvedere al montaggio Please refer to the instruc-
degli accessori (elemento tions included on the
elastico, mozzo, ecc.) ENCLOSURE “A” to
secondo le indicazioni assemble the accessories
dell’ALLEGATO “A”. (flexible element, hub, etc.)
GIUNTI “BETA” “BETA” COUPLINGS

(assi paralleli) (parallel axis)
Provvedere al montaggio Install thethe
Carry out belts according
belts to
assembling,
delle cinghie secondo le the instructions
following of the belt
the instructions of the
indicazioni del costruttore di manufacturer.
belts manufacturer.
cinghie).
ATTENZIONE WARNING
CINGHIE TROPPO LENTE BELTS THATBELTS
TOO SLACK ARE TOO
CAN
POSSONO DARE ORIGINE A LOOSE CAN CAUSE
CAUSE VIBRATIONS.
VIBRAZIONI. UN ECCESSIVO VIBRATIONS.
EXCESSIVE TENSIONNING
TENSIONAMENTO O BELTS THATALIGNMENTS
OR WRONG ARE TOO
ERRATO ALLINEAMENTO TIGHT OR IMPROPERLY
CAN DAMAGE THE SEATS OF
PUO’ DANNEGGIARE LE ALIGNED CAN FOR
THE BEARINGS DAMAGE
THE
SEDI DEI CUSCINETTI DI THE BEARINGS
COUPLING ON AND
ROLLING THE
ROTOLAMENTO DEL COUPLING. MOTOR
THOSE OF THE MOTOROR
GIUNTO, DEL MOTORE O DRIVEN MACHINE.
OR OF THE MACHINE.
DELLA MACCHINA.
I giunti BETA X, J e H in The BETA X,J and H couplings,

installazione verticale sono couplings installed are
in vertical position, vertically
previsti per un funzionamento are permitted
provided for a to operate
continuous
ininterrotto non superiore a continuously
working, which forcannot
no morelastthan
for
2-3 giorni. 2-3
moredays.
than 2-3 days
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PER FUNZIONAMENTI FOR CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS
ININTERROTTI DI DURATA WORKING
WORKINGS LASTING
LASTING
SUPERIORE, IMPIEGARE LONGER,
LONGER, USE
USE MORE
MORE
OLI PIU’ LUBRIFICANTI O, LUBRICATING
LUBRICATING OIL OR
OILS ORININ
PER IMPIEGHI GRAVOSI, CASE OF
OF HEAVIER
HEAVIER USES,
USES,
L’ESECUZIONE SPECIA- USE THE SPECIAL
SPECIAL VERSION
VERSION
LE CON LUBRIFICAZIO- WITH FORCED
FORCED BEARING
BEARING
NE INDIPENDENTE DEL LUBRICATION,
LUBRICATION,
CUSCINETTO SOTTO TIRO UNDERNEATH
UNDERNEATH THE
THE BELT.
BELT.
CINGHIA.
22 27
CONFORMAZIONE
CONFORMAZIONE COUPLINGSTRUCTURE
COUPLING KEYING
GIUNTOEESISTEMI
GIUNTO SISTEMI NBR VITON ON THE
AND SHAFT
PROTECTION
DI PROTEZIONE
DI SICUREZZA SYSTEMS
I giunti standard, di
180°C The
The standard
standardscouplings,
couplings,
grandezza 10, 20, 30, 30P e sizes
sizes 10,20,30,30P
10,20,30,30P and and40P,
40P,
40P, sono forniti con are
are provided
provided with
with NBR
NBRseals.
seals.
Upon
Upon request,
request, they
theycan
canbe be
guarnizioni in NBR. A
richiesta possono essere 145°C supplied
supplied with
with viton
vitonseals,
seals,
muniti di guarnizioni in viton, resistant
resistant to
to aa temperature
temperatureof of
resistenti fino a 180°C. 180°C.
180°C.
I giunti standard di The
The standard
standard couplings,
couplings,sizes
sizes
grandezza 50, 55, 60, 65, 50,55,60,65,70P,75P,80P,85P,9
50,55,60,65,70P,75P,80P,85P,9
70P, 75P, 80P, 85P, 90P, 95P 0P,95P
0P,95P and
and 1200
1200 are
are
e 1200 vengono forniti con equipped
equipped with
with viton
vitonseals.
seals.
guarnizioni in viton. All standards
standards couplings
couplingsareare
Tutti i giunti standard sono supplied
supplied with
with fusible
fusibleplug
plugatat
equipaggiati con tappo 145°C,
145°C, but
but other plugs can be
different
fusibile a 145°C, salvo specified
instructionbyofthe customer.
customer.
disposizioni particolari del
cliente.
TAPPO FUSIBILE
FUSIBLE TRIP PLUG
ATTENZIONE WARNING
TENUTO CONTO CHE LA CONSIDERING
STATED THAT THE THAT THE
MASSIMA TEMPERATURA MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
LA SI OTTIENE IN IS OBTAINED
OBTAINED IN IN NORMAL
NORMAL
CONDIZIONI NORMALI CONDITION
CONDITION DURINGTHE
DURING THE
DURANTE IL FUNZIONA- OPERATION
OPERATION IN IN FULL
FULL
MENTO A REGIME, I BIANCO 120°C ROSSO 145°C VERDE 180°C CONDITION,
CONDITION, THETHE
GIUNTI POTRANNO WHITE 120°C RED 145°C GREEN 180°C COUPLINGS
COUPLINGS COULD
COULDBE BE
ESSERE EQUIPAGGIATI EQUIPPED
EQUIPPED WITH
WITH FUSIBLE
FUSIBLE
CON TAPPI FUSIBILI O TAPPO ESPANSIBILE PLUGS
PLUGS OR
OR TRIP
TRIP PLUGS,
PLUGS,
TAPPI ESPANSIBILI CON TRIP PLUG WITH
WITH FUSION
FUSION
TEMPERATURE DI TEMPERATURES
TEMPERATURES (WHICH(WHICH
FUSIONE (IDENTIFICABILI CAN
CAN BE
BE IDENTIFIED
IDENTIFIED
DAL COLORE E DALLA BY THE
THE STAMPING
STAMPING
STAMPIGLIATURA). AND
AND COLOUR).
COLOUR).
BIANCO 120°C BIANCO 145°C BIANCO 180°C

WHITE 120°C WHITE 145°C WHITE 180°C
Dopo aver calettato il giunto After the

After the coupling
coupling mounting,
keying, the
si può procedere installation on the
the installation on the
all’installazione in machine can
machine can bebe finalized,
carried out,
macchina prevedendo ripari by providing
providing for
for fixed
fixed ventila-
fissi ventilati ed adeguati ted guardsguards
ventilated and suitable
and
servocomandi di sicurez- safety and stop
suitable safety and stop
za e di arresto in funzione servo-controls, according
servo-controls, accordingto to
del tipo di tappo montato the kind
kind of
of plug
plug assembled
assembled
sul giunto ROTOFLUID® , on the
the ROTOFLUID®‚
ROTOFLUID®‚ cou-
come descritto alle pagine coupling, described
pling, as as describedin the
in the
seguenti. following pages.
following pages.
28 23
GIUNTO ROTOFLUID®
A ROTOFLUID® CON
TAPPO FUSIBILE A COUPLING WITH
FUSIBLE PLUG
Questo dispositivo interviene This device intervenes in case

in caso di eccessivo of excessive overheating and
surriscaldamento e al when the fusible plug
superamento della massima maximum temperature is
temperatura del TAPPO FU- exceeded (90°C.
) 90°C.120°C.
120°C.
SIBILE (90°C. 120°C. 145°C. 145°C. or 180°C.).
180°C.) inInthis
thiscase
o 180°C.) avviene la fusione case,
the pinthe fusible
fusion pin melts
occurs and the
della pastiglia e la and consequently
consequent leakagetheofoilthe
conseguente fuoriuscita leaks from theoilcoupling.
transmission from the
dell’olio di trasmissione del coupling take place too.
giunto.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NORMALMENTE IL TAPPO THE FUSIBLE
FUSIBLE PLUG
PLUG IS IS
FUSIBILE SI TROVA SUL NORMALLY PLACED
NORMALLY PLACED ON ON
LATO OPPOSTO THE OPPOSITE
OPPOSITE SIDE
SIDE OFOF
ALL’ALBERO CAVO DEL THE COUPLING
COUPLING HOLLOW
HOLLOW
GIUNTO. SHAFT. WHEN
SHAFT. WHEN ITIT IS
IS
IN FASE DI INSTALLAZIONE INSTALLED, VERIFY THAT
INSTALLED, VERIFY THAT
VERIFICARE CHE THE OIL
OIL LEAKAGE,
LEAKAGE, WHICH
WHICH
L’EVENTUALE CAN TAKE
WILL OCCURPLACE
WHEN DOES
THE
FUORIUSCITA DELL’OLIO NOT COVER THE MOTOR.
PLUG TRIPS, DOES NOT
NON VADA SUL MOTORE. LEAK ONTO THE MOTOR.
IN TAL CASO BISOGNA SHOULD

SHOULD IT
IT HAPPEN,
HAPPEN, IT
ITIS
IS
PREVEDERE: NECESSARY
NECESSARY TO
TO PROVIDE:
FORESEE:
A1 A1
Un carter separato dal A sump
sump separated
separated from
fromthethe
motore per la raccolta e motor to
to collect
collect and
and evacuate
evacuate
l’evacuazione dell’olio ad the high
high temperature
temperature oiloil
alta temperatura che which could
could pour
pour out.
out
potrebbe fuoriuscire.
A2
A2 A device
device for
for the
the immediate
immediate
Un dispositivo di arresto automatic
automatic stop
stop of of the
the motor,
motor,
automatico immediato del preventing
preventing itit from
from starting
starting
motore che impedisca il again, until
beforethethereason for
restoration
riavvio prima del ripristino the plug
of the to trip has
condition been
which has
della condizione che ha corrected.
caused the oil leakage.
causato la fuoriuscita
dell’olio.
ATTENZIONE! WARNING!
In caso di fuoriuscita di olio In
In case
case of
of oil
oil loss
loss from
from the
the
dal giunto, occorre coupling immediately
coupling STOP immediatelySTOP
FERMARE immediatamente the
the motor.
motor.
il motore. BEARINGS
BEARINGSDRYING-UP
DRYING-UP
PERICOLO DI and
and SEIZURE
SEIZUREDANGER!
DANGER!
GRIPPAGGIO CUSCINETTI
24 29
A3 A3
Dopo aver completamente After having installed the
installato il giunto in coupling completely in the
macchina è possibile machine, it is possible to
effettuare il collaudo qualora carry out the testing,
sia necessaria una taratura whenever a starting
dell’avviamento (vedi calibration is required (see
capitolo “RIEMPIMENTO, the chapter “FILLING,
TARATURA E CALIBRATION AND OIL
SOSTITUZIONE OLIO”). CHANGE”).
ATTENZIONE WARNING
DURANTE IL COLLAUDO E IL DURING THE TEST AND THE
FUNZIONAMENTO BISOGNA OPERATION REMEMBER:
RICORDARE:
DURANTE IL COLLAUDO E IL - DO NOTTHE
DURING EXCEED THE THE
TEST AND
- NON SUPERARE MAI IL
FUNZIONAMENTO BISOGNA MAXIMUM NUMBERS
OPERATION REMEMBER: OF
NUMERO
RICORDARE: MASSIMO DI STARTING FIXED
- DO NOT EXCEED THE BY
AVVIAMENTI ORA
- NON SUPERARE MAI WESTCAR NUMBER
MAXIMUM (SEE THE OF
PRESCRITTI
ILNUMERO DALLA
MASSIMO TECHNICAL CATALOGUE).BY
STARTS RECOMMENDED
WESTCAR (VEDI CATALOGO DANGER OF OVERHEATING.
WESTCAR (SEE THE
DIAVVIAMENTI ORA
TECNICO). PERICOLO DI - WHEN THE COUPLING IS
PRESCRITTI DALLA TECHNICAL CATALOGUE).
SURRISCALDAMENTO. WORKING IN NORMAL
WESTCAR (VEDI CATALOGO DANGER OF OVERHEATING.
- DURANTE IL NORMALE CONDITION IT DOES NOT
TECNICO).
FUNZIONAMENTO IL DI
PERICOLO -MAKE
WHENANY
THENOISE,
COUPLING
AND IS
IN
SURRISCALDAMENTO.
GIUNTO NON É RUMOROSO WORKING IN NORMAL
ANY CASE THE NOISE IS
-EDURANTE
COMUNQUE IL NORMALE
MOLTO AL CONDITION
MUCH UNDER IT DOES NOT (SO
THE 80db
DI SOTTO DEGLI 80
FUNZIONAMENTO db (TALE
ILGIUNTO MAKE ANY
THAT NO NOISE.
SOUND
DA NON
NON RICHIEDERE
É RUMOROSO- ABSORBENT
IN CASE OF PANELS OR
L’IMPIEGO
IN DI PANNELLI
CASO DIRUMOROSITA’, OTHERSTOP
NOISE, THINGS THEARE
MACHINE
FONOASSORBENTI
ARRESTARE O IMMEDIATELY, CHECKOF
REQUIRED). IN CASE AND
ALTRO). IN CASO
IMMEDIATAMENTE DI NOISE, STOP
ELIMINATE THETHE MACHINE
CAUSE.
RUMOROSITA’,
LAMACCHINA EDARRESTARE IMMEDIATELY, CHECK AND
IMMEDIATAMENTE LA ELIMINATE THE CAUSE.
ACCERTARE E RIMUOVERNE
MACCHINA ED ACCERTARE
LA CAUSA.
E RIMUOVERNE LA CAUSA.
At this point the coupling is

A questo punto il giunto è ready
At thisfor the the
point use.coupling is
pronto all’uso. ready for use.
30 25
GIUNTO ROTOFLUID® ROTOFLUID® COUPLING
B CON TAPPO FUSIBILE

E TAPPO ESPANSIBILE B WITH FUSIBLE PLUG
AND TRIP PLUG
Questa configurazione in This configuration provided

The configuration provided on
esecuzione a richiesta offre 120°C on request,
request, offers
offers a double
a double
una duplice sicurezza con il safety,
safety, with
with the
the indication
survey of aof a
rilevamento di una prima first
first threshold
threshold of
soglia di sovratemperatura overtemperature,
overtemperature, due toby
given
data dal TAPPO THE
THE TRIP
TRIP PLUG
PLUG and and aa second
second
ESPANSIBILE e da una threshold
threshold due given toby
thethe
seconda soglia data dal FUSIBLE
FUSIBLE PLUG,PLUG, which
TAPPO FUSIBILE che results
causesinthe oiloil
leakage,
leakage,
provoca la fuoriuscita whenever,
whenever, due owing to to
anomalies,
anomalies,
dell’olio qualora a causa di the
the motor
motor fails
has notto stop
stopped
anomalia non sia avvenuto when
when the the first
first threshold has
l’arresto del motore al been
been reached.
reached.
raggiungimento della prima
soglia.
In caso di eccessivo 145°C In

In case
case of
of excessive
excessive
surriscaldamento, al overheating,
overheating, when
when the TRIP
superamento della PLUG
PLUG maximum
maximum temperature
massima temperatura del is
is exceeded
exceeded (90°C.
(90°C. 120°C. or
TAPPO ESPANSIBILE (90°C. 145°C.),
145°C.), the
the pin
pin fusion takes
120°C. o 145°C.) avviene la place.
place.
fusione della pastiglia e la Consequently,
Consequently, the plugpistontrips
to
conseguente fuoriuscita del allowing
survey thethemotor
extended
stop pin to
signal
pistoncino per il rilevamento
del segnale di arresto per il
145°C make
comescontact
stop
with acausing
out, without
switch. Therefore,
the transmission
motor
hot
oil to pour
motore senza provocare la oil
outdoes
fromnot
theescape
coupling.from the
fuoriuscita dell’olio di
trasmissione dal giunto. 120°C coupling.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL TAPPO ESPANSIBILE
NBR VITON THE TRIP
THE TRIP PLUG
PLUGMUST
MUST
DEVE ESSERE IMPIEGATO BE USED
BE USED FOR
FOR THE
THEFIRST
FIRST
PER L’INTERVENTO DI THRESHOLD
THRESHOLD
PRIMA SOGLIA E DEVE INTERVENTIONAND
INTERVENTION ANDITS
ITS
ESSERE CON FUSION TEMPERATURE
FUSION TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURA DI MUST BE
MUST BE INFERIOR
INFERIORTOTO
FUSIONE INFERIORE A THAT OF
THAT OF THE
THE FUSIBLE
FUSIBLE
QUELLA DEL TAPPO PLUG. THE
PLUG. THE FUSIBLE
LATTER HAS
PLUG
FUSIBILE E QUEST’ULTIMO NEVER TO
SHOULD HAVEHAVE
NEVER A A
NON DEVE MAI ESSERE DI TEMPERATURE
HIGHER HIGHER
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURA THAN WHAT
THAN THE ONETHEADMITTED
SEALS
SUPERIORE A QUELLA BY THE COUPLING
ON TYPE OF SEALS
CAN
AMMESSA DAL TIPO DI ASSEMBLED ON THE
WITHSTAND.
GUARNIZIONI MONTATE COUPLING.
SUL GIUNTO.
26 31
RICORDARE CHE: REMEMBER THAT:
IL TAPPO ESPANSIBILE E’ THE
THE TRIP
TRIP PLUG
PLUG IS
IS USED
USED
INDICATO PER FOR THE
FOR THE INSTALLATIONS
INSTALLATIONS
INSTALLAZIONE DI TIPO B OF TYPE
TYPE “B”
“B” WHERE
WHERETHETHE
DOVE IL CORPO ESTERNO COUPLING EXTERNAL
COUPLING’S CASE
DEL GIUNTO E’ SEMPRE IN BODY ALWAYS
ROTATES SO ASROTATES,
TO
ROTAZIONE PER TO GUARANTEE
GUARANTEE THAT THE
THE
GARANTIRE LA SIGNAL SURVEYING ALSO
SIGNAL CAN INDICATE THE
RILEVAZIONE DEL IN CASE OF STALL
COUPLING’S CONDITION,
SEGNALE ANCHE CONDITIONS.
QUALORA INTERVENGA INCLUDING A STALL.
UNA CONDIZIONE DI
STALLO.
IN TAL CASO IN THIS

THIS CASE
CASE IT
IT IS
IS
BISOGNA PREVEDERE NECESSARY
NECESSARY TOTO
PROVIDE FOR:
PROVIDE:
B1
Un microinterruttore di B1
sicurezza (di tipo approvato) A safety micro-switch
micro-switch(of (of
che rilevi il segnale del approved type),
type), which
whichisisable
able
pistoncino e determini to sense
surveythe
the piston
piston signal,
l’arresto immediato del makes the motor
motor stop
stop
motore e che impedisca la immediately and prevents
immediately and preventsitit
ripartenza prima del from starting
starting again,
again, before
beforethe
the
ripristino della condizione condition which
which has
has caused
causedthe
che ha causato la fuoriuscita the piston
piston to trip
coming outisisremoved.
recovered.
del pistoncino.
B2 B2
Un carter separato dal motore A sump separated from the
per la raccolta e l’evacuazione motor to collect and evacuate
dell’olio ad alta temperatura the oil, which could pour out at
che potrebbe fuoriuscire. high temperature.
B3 B3
Un dispositivo di arresto device for
A device for the
the immediate
immediate
automatico immediato del automatic stop
stop ofof the
the motor,
motor,
motore che impedisca il preventing itit from
from starting
starting
riavvio prima del ripristino again, before
until thethe restoration
cause of the of
della condizione che ha the conditionand
overheating which has caused
subsequent
causato la fuoriuscita dell’olio. theleakage
oil oil leakage.
is removed.
32 27
B4 B4
Dopo aver completamente After having installed the
installato il giunto in coupling completely in the
macchina è possibile machine, it is possible to carry
effettuare il collaudo. out the testing, whenever a
Qualora sia necessario, starting calibration is required
effettuare una taratura (see the chapter “FILLING,
dell’avviamento (vedi capitolo CALIBRATION AND OIL
“RIEMPIMENTO, TARATURA CHANGE”).
E SOSTITUZIONE OLIO”).
ATTENZIONE WARNING
DURANTE IL COLLAUDO E IL DURING
DURING THE TEST TEST AND THE
FUNZIONAMENTO BISOGNA AND THE OPERATION
OPERATION REMEMBER:
RICORDARE: REMEMBER:
- DO NOT EXCEED THE
DURANTE IL COLLAUDO E IL -DURING
DO NOTTHE
EXCEEDTEST AND
THE THE
- NON SUPERARE MAI IL MAXIMUM NUMBERS OF
FUNZIONAMENTO
NUMERO MASSIMO BISOGNA
DI OPERATION
MAXIMUM REMEMBER:
NUMBER
STARTING FIXED BY OF
RICORDARE:
AVVIAMENTI ORA -WESTCAR
DO NOTRECOMMENDED
STARTS EXCEED
(SEE THE THE
-PRESCRITTI
NON SUPERAREDALLAMAI MAXIMUM
BY WESTCAR
TECHNICAL NUMBER OF
(SEE THE
CATALOGUE).
ILNUMERO MASSIMO
WESTCAR (VEDI CATALOGO TECHNICAL
STARTS OF CATALOGUE).
DANGERRECOMMENDED
OVERHEATING. BY
TECNICO). PERICOLO
DIAVVIAMENTI ORA DI DANGER
WESTCAR OF
- WHEN THE(SEEOVERHEATING.
COUPLING
THE IS
SURRISCALDAMENTO.
PRESCRITTI DALLA -TECHNICAL
WHEN THE
WORKING COUPLING
NORMAL IS
INCATALOGUE).
- DURANTE
WESTCAR IL NORMALE
(VEDI CATALOGO WORKING
CONDITION INITNORMAL
DOES NOT
DANGER OF OVERHEATING.
FUNZIONAMENTO
TECNICO). PERICOLO IL DI CONDITION
MAKE ANY IT
NOISE,
- WHEN THE COUPLINGDOES
ANDNOTIN
IS
GIUNTO NON É
SURRISCALDAMENTO.RUMOROSO MAKE
WORKING IN NORMAL IN
ANY ANY
CASE NOISE,
THE AND
NOISE IS
E COMUNQUE MOLTO AL ANY
MUCH CASE
UNDER THETHE NOISE
80dbIS
- DURANTE IL NORMALE CONDITION IT DOES NOT
DI SOTTO DEGLI 80 db MUCH UNDER
(SO THAT NO SOUND THE 80db
FUNZIONAMENTO ILGIUNTO MAKE ANY NOISE.
(TALE DA NON RICHIEDERE (SO THAT NO PANELS
ABSORBENT SOUND OR
NON É RUMOROSO- IN CASE OF PANELS OR
ABSORBENT
L’IMPIEGO DI PANNELLI OTHER THINGS ARE
IN CASO DIRUMOROSITA’,
FONOASSORBENTI O NOISE,
OTHER STOP
THINGS
REQUIRED). THE
IN MACHINE
ARE
CASE OF
ARRESTARE
ALTRO). IN CASO DI IMMEDIATELY,
REQUIRED).
NOISE, STOPIN CHECK
THECASE AND
OF
MACHINE
IMMEDIATAMENTE
RUMOROSITA’, ARRESTARE ELIMINATE
NOISE, STOP
IMMEDIATELY,THE THECAUSE.AND
CHECK
LAMACCHINA
IMMEDIATAMENTEED LA MACHINE
ELIMINATEIMMEDIATELY,
THE CAUSE.
MACCHINA ED
ACCERTARE ACCERTARE
E RIMUOVERNE CHECK AND ELIMINATE
E RIMUOVERNE
LA CAUSA. LA CAUSA. THE CAUSE.
A questo punto il giunto è At this point

point the
the coupling
couplingisis
pronto all’uso. ready for the use.
to use.
use.
28 33
IN FILLING THE COUPLING
SHOULD ONLY BE DONE
WHEN THE MACHINE
IS SWITCHED OFF, THE
POWER IS DISCONNECTED
FROM THE SOURCE AND
THE LOCK-OUT TAG
ENGAGED. THE COUPLING
MUST BE AT ROOM
TEMPERATURE AND IT’S
AXIS IN A HORIZONTAL
POSITION.
After the coupling has been

assembled on the motor
begin the filling operation
as follows:
2 2
Per giunti Rotofluid senza For ROTOTFLUID couplings
camera di ritardo, ruotare il without delay chamber, rotate
giunto fino a posizionare la the coupling until 45° notch is
tacca dei 45° sulla verticale. positioned on the vertical.
2a 2a
Per giunti Rotofluid SCF For ROTOTFLUID SCF
(con camera semplice) couplings (with simple
vedere angolo di riempimento chamber) see the standard
standard a pag. 38 tabella 2. filling angle reported at page
38, table 2.
2b
Per giunti Rotofluid DCF 2b
(con camera doppia) vedere For ROTOTFLUID DCF
angolo di riempimento couplings (with double
standard a pag. 38 tabella 3. chamber) see the standard
filling angle reported at page
2c
38, table 3.
Per giunti ROTOFLUID CA
(con camera anulare) vedere 2c
angolo di riempimento For ROTOTFLUID CA
standard a pag. 39 tabella 4. couplings (with annular
chamber) see the standard
filling angle reported at page
39, table 4.
34
3 3
Effettuare il riempimento del Fill
Carrytheout
coupling until thefilling
the coupling oil
giunto fino alla fuoriuscita pours outoil
until the ofpours
the hole,
out being
from the
dal foro, impiegando solo sure
hole,tobyuse
usingonlyonly
the the
oils oils
oli consigliati dal costruttore suggested
suggested by by the
the
(vedi capitolo manufacturer
manufacturer (see (seethe
the
“OLI DI TRASMISSIONE”). chapter
chapter “TRANSMISSION
“TRANSMISSION
OILS”)
OILS”)
4
Rimontare il tappo sul 4
giunto. Reassemble the plug on the
coupling.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
RIMUOVERE DAL GIUNTO REMOVE FROM THE
QUALSIASI CHIAVE O COUPLING ANY KEY OR
ATTREZZO IMPIEGATO TOOL USED FOR THIS
PER QUESTA OPERATION. DANGER OF
OPERAZIONE. PROJECTION.
PERICOLO DI
PROIEZIONE.
L’operazione di primo The first fillingdi

L’operazione operation
primo is
riempimento è così now complete.
riempimento è così
terminata. terminata.
30 35
TARATURA OLIO OIL CALIBRATION
Il livello stadard di
Il livello standard di The ROTOTFLUID
For standard fillingcouplings
level
riempimento è 45° per giunti
riempimento base.
consigliato without delay
suggested chamber, is 45°.
is 45°.
ROTOFLUID (senza
è 45°.
camera di ritardo)
In funzione del tipo

tipo di
di impiego
impiego According to the use and
e delle prestazioni
prestazioni richieste
richieste al al According
performances to the use and
expected from
giunto, in alcuni
alcuni casi
casi ilil livello
livello performances expected
the coupling, in some cases fromthe
di the coupling, in some cases
di riempimento
riempimento devedeve essere
essere filling level must be modified,
modificato the fill level must be modified,
modificato diminuendo ola
diminuendo by decreasing
by decreasing ortheincreasing the
oil quantity.
quantità
aumentandodi olio.
la quantità oil quantity.
di olio.
GIRI MOTORE REVOLUTION

Riducendo la quantità d’olio By reducing the quantity of oil
si ottiene: it is possible to obtain:
VELOCITA’ IN ENTRATA
VELOCITA’ IN USCITA
OUTLET SPEED
INLET SPEED
MAX SLEPPAGE
SCORRIM. MAX
A - Avviamento più lungo e A - A longer
longer and
and more
moregradual
gradual
graduale startup.
starting.
B - Minore assorbimento di B - Less
A lesscurrent
currentinput
inputatat
corrente all’avviamento. startup.
starting.
C - Migliore protezione degli C - A better protection
protectionof ofthe
the
organi della trasmissione transmissionmembers
transmission components in
in caso di sovraccarico. TEMPO DI AVVIAMENTO STARTING TIME in case
case of overloading.
of overloading.
D - Maggiore scorrimento a D - Higher
A higherslippage
slippage,rate at full
in full
regime. operationof working.
condition
ATTENZIONE WARNING
UNA ECCESSIVA RIDUZIONE TOO LITTLE OILOIL
AN EXCESSIVE CAN
DELL’OLIO, PUO’ CAUSE THE COUPLING
REDUCTION CAN IMPLY THE
COMPORTARE SPEED TO INCREASE
POSSIBILITY TO SPEED THE
L’IMPOSSIBILITA’ DI OR EVEN CAUSE
MACHINE OR EVENANCAUSE
ACCELERARE LA EXCESSIVE COUPLING
AN EXCESSIVE COUPLING
MACCHINA O ADDIRITTURA OVERHEATING, THUS
OVERHEATING, THUS
CAUSARE UN DAMAGING THE SEALS.
DAMAGING THE SEALS.
SURRISCALDAMENTO
ECCESSIVO DEL GIUNTO
E DANNEGGIARE COSI’ LE
GUARNIZIONI.
GIRI MOTORE REVOLUTION

Nel caso sia necessario
Aumentando la quantità If the
By oil quantity
increasing theinquantity
the of
aumentare la quantità di olio coupling needs to be
VELOCITA’ IN ENTRATA
d’olio si ottiene: oil it is possible to obtain:

VELOCITA’ IN USCITA
nel giunto occorre interpellare increased it is mandatory

OUTLET SPEED
INLET SPEED
MAX SLEPPAGE
la Westcar. to contact Westcar prior to

SCORRIM. MAX
A - Avviamento più rapido. A - Faster the

changing starting
oil level.
B - Minore scorrimento a B - Less slippage, in full
regime. condition of working.
C - Maggiore assorbimento di C - Higher current input during
corrente in fase di the acceleration phase.
accelerazione. D - Higher transmission
D - Maggiore sollecitazione TEMPO DI AVVIAMENTO STARTING TIME members stress.
degli organi della
trasmissione.
36 31
ATTENZIONE WARNING
UNA ECCESSIVA QUANTITA’ AN EXCESSIVE QUANTITY
D’OLIO PUO’ CAUSARE OF OIL CAN OVERLOAD THE
SOVRACCARICO DEL MOTOR, DAMAGING OF THE
MOTORE, ROVESCIAMENTO SEALS OR CAUSING THE
DEL LABBRO DELLE COUPLING TO CRACK DUE
TENUTE O ROTTURA DEL TO EXCESSIVE INTERNAL
GIUNTO PER SOVRA- PRESSURE.
PRESSIONE INTERNA
Below are shown the required
DOVUTA ALLA MANCANZA DI
oil fill levels corresponding to
SPAZIO DI DILATAZIONE OLIO
the coupling size and fill angle.
Qui di seguito vengono
THIS OPERATION MUST BE
riportate le quantità di
CARRIED OUT WHEN THE
riempimento olio
MOTOR AND THE DRIVEN
corrispondenti ai diversi
MACHINE ARE NOT IN
livelli di riempimento.
OPERATION, THE POWER
QUESTA OPERAZIONE SOURCE DISCONNECTED
DEVE ESSERE EFFETTUATA AND ADEQUATE SIGNAGE
CON IL MOTORE E PLACED. THE COUPLING
MACCHINA CONDOTTA MUST BE AT ROOM
FERMI, SCOLLEGATI DALLA TEMPERATURE AND IT’S
FONTE DI ALIMENTAZIONE AXIS IN THE HORIZONTAL
SUL SEZIONATORE POSITION.
DI LINEA ED AVERNE
SEGNALATO L’INTERVENTO.
ILGIUNTO DEVE ESSERE A
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE
CON L’ASSE IN
ORRIZONTALE.
RIEMPIMENTO GIUNTO ROTOFLUID FILLING ROTOFLUID COUPLING

TAPPO DI RIEMPIMENTO E CONTROLLO
FILLING AND CHECK PLUG 2 3 4
1 1
2
Oil level
3 a
4
Oil level ve
l 30 45 60
30 L le
OI 75
4
5
90
60
75
90
Tab. 1
Grand.
10 20 30 30P 40P 50 55 60 65 70P 75P 80P 85P 90P 95P
Size
A mm 193 230 290 327 338 430 430 520 520 640 640 810 810 1000 1000
B mm 88 115 150 150 183 154 196 172 220 190 245 226 300 344 466
3
4
2
1
1
Livelli a litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri 2 litri N° viti litri litri litri litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri litri
a l evel liters screw Oilliters
level liters screw liters liters3 screw liters liters liters liters screw liters liters screw liters liters screw liters liters
45° 0,55 1 1/2 1,20 2,4 2Oil level
1/2 4,1 4,1 43 4,4 7,2 8,6 13,5
45
3 1/2 18,1 30,1 4 35,5 60,6 4 1/2 91,9 153,3
30 60
30 75
el
50° 0,52 1 1/2 1,14 2,28 2 1/2 3,9 3,9 3 1/2 4 6,9 8,2 12,9 4 17,3 28,8 4 34 58 5 88,5 146,9
lev
L
OI
4
9
5
55° 0,50 2 1,09 2,17 3 3,7 3,7 3 1/2 4 6,5 7,8 12,1 4 1/2 16,4 27,3 4 1/2 32,3 54,9 5 1/2 84,5 139,6
60
75
60° 0,47 2 1,03 2,04 3 3,5 3,5 4 3,8 6,2 7,3 11,4 4 1/2 15,4 25,6 5 30,4 51,8 6 79,7 131,5
90
65° 0,44 2 0,97 1,91 3 1/2 3,2 3,3 4 1/2 3,6 5,9 6,9 10,8 5 14,5 24,1 5 1/2 28,6 48,7 6 1/2 74,5 123
70° 0,42 2 1/2 0,92 1,79 3 1/2 3 3,1 4 1/2 3,4 5,6 6,5 10,2 5 1/2 13,5 22,6 6 26,8 45,8 7 69,3 115,2
75° 0,40 2 1/2 0,86 1,67 4 2,8 2,9 5 3,2 5,3 6,1 9,6 6 12,6 21,2 6 1/2 25,2 43 7 1/2 64,4 107,7
80° 0,37 2 1/2 0,81 1,56 4 2,6 2,7 5 1/2 3 5 5,7 9 6 11,8 19,8 6 1/2 23,6 40,4 8 59,8 100,6
85° 0,35 3 0,76 1,45 4 1/2 2,5 2,5 5 1/2 2,9 4,7 5,3 8,4 6 1/2 11 18,5 7 22 37,7 8 1/2 55,4 99,6
90° 0,32 3 0,71 1,34 4 1/2 2,3 2,3 6 2,7 4,4 5 7,8 7 10,2 17,2 7 1/2 20,5 35,1 9 51,1 86,7
Le celle evidenziate indicano i livelli standard - The highlighted cells show the standard level
37
RIEMPIMENTO GIUNTO ROTOFLUID SCF FILLING ROTOFLUID SCF COUPLING
FILLING AND CHECK PLUG
4
2
1
1
2
Oil level 3 a
4
Oil level 45 60
30 30
75
el
lev
OIL
4
9
5
0
60
2 3 4
75
1 1
2
90
Oil level
3
4
Oil level el 30 45 60
30 lev
OIL 75
4
5
90
60
75
90
Tab. 2
Grand.
30 30P 40P 50 55 60 65 70P 75P 80P 85P 90P 95P
Size
A mm 290 327 338 430 430 520 520 640 640 810 810 1000 1000
B mm 205 205 241 234 276 262 310 300 355 344 418 464 586
3
Livelli a N° viti litri N° viti litri litri N°1viti litri litri litri litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri litri
2
a l evel screw liters screwOil liters liters screw2 liters liters liters liters screw liters liters screw liters liters screw liters liters
1
3
level
4
2
3
55° 2 2,4 3 3,9 4,1 1 32 1/2 4,94 7,4 9,2 13,5 4 1/2 18,9 29,7 4 1/2 39,2 61,8 5 1/2 97,1 164
1
60 75
Oil level
60° 2 2,3 3 3,7 3,8 43 4,6 7 8,73 0 4 12,8 4 1/2 17,9 28,1 5 37,4 59,5 6 91,7 154,9
Oil level 5
30 90
4
4
65° 2 2,2 3 1/2 3,5 3,63 4 1/2 4,4 6,7 8,23 0 4 5 12,1 5 16,9 26,6 5 1/2 35,2 55,3 6 1/2 85,7 145
5
el
lev
el OIL
60
60
Oil level
0 75
lev
70° 2 1/2 2 3 1/2 3,3 3,4 4 1/2 4,1 6,3 7,7 11,4 5 1/2 15,8 24,8 6 32,9 51,8 7 79,7 135,1
OIL
75
4
9
5
0
60
90
75° 2 1/2 1,9 4 3 3,1 5 3,8 5,9 7,2 10,7 6 14,7 23,2 6 1/2 30,6 48,4 7 1/2 73,7 125,4
75
80° 2 1/2 1,7 4 2,8 2,9 5 1/2 3,6 5,6 6,6 9,9 6 13,5 21,5 6 1/2 28,3 45,0 8 67,9 116,1
90
85° 3 1,6 4 1/2 2,6 2,7 5 1/2 3,3 5,2 6,1 9,2 6 1/2 12,4 19,9 7 25,9 41,6 8 1/2 62,5 107,3
90° 3 1,5 4 1/2 2,4 2,5 6 3,1 4,8 5,6 8,5 7 11,3 18,3 7 1/2 23,8 38,4 9 57,3 98,6
95° 3 1,3 5 2,2 2,3 6 1/2 2,8 4,5 5,1 7,8 7 1/2 10,2 16,7 8 21,5 35,1 9 1/2 51,9 89,9
RIEMPIMENTO GIUNTO ROTOFLUID DCF FILLING ROTOFLUID DCF COUPLING

3
1
2
2
1
Oil level 3
4
a
Oil level 60 75
30 45
90
30
4
5
el
lev
OIL
60
75
90
Tab. 3
Grand.
30 30P 40P 50 55 60 65 70P 75P 80P 85P 90P 95P
Size
A mm 290 327 338 430 430 520 520 640 640 810 810 1000 1000
B mm 245 245 313 309 351 342 390 415 470 444 518 544 666
Livelli a N° viti litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri litri litri litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri litri
a l evel Screw liters Screw liters liters Screw liters liters liters liters Screw liters liters Screw liters liters Screw liters liters
60° 2 2,6 3 4 4,7 4 5,7 8,1 10,4 14,4 4 1/2 21,6 31,7 5 43,3 64,5 6 104,6 168,5
65° 2 2,4 3 1/2 3,8 4,4 4 1/2 5,3 7,6 9,8 13,6 5 20,6 30,1 5 1/2 40,9 61 6 1/2 97,7 157,6
70° 2 1/2 2,2 3 1/2 3,5 4,1 4 1/2 5 7,2 9,2 12,8 5 1/2 19,2 28,2 6 38,2 57,1 7 90,6 146,7
75° 2 1/2 2,1 4 3,3 3,8 5 4,6 6,7 8,4 11,9 6 17,6 26,1 6 1/2 35,3 53,1 7 1/2 83,5 135,8
80° 2 1/2 1,9 4 3 3,5 5 1/2 4,2 6,2 7,7 10,9 6 16 24 6 1/2 32,3 49 8 76,5 125,3
85° 3 1,8 4 1/2 2,8 3,2 5 1/2 3,9 5,8 7 10,1 6 1/2 14,5 22 7 29,3 45 8 1/2 70,2 115,5
90° 3 1,6 4 1/2 2,5 2,9 6 3,6 5,3 6,3 9,2 7 13,1 20,1 7 1/2 26,6 41,2 9 64 105,8
95° 3 1,5 5 2,3 2,7 6 1/2 3,2 4,9 5,6 8,3 7 1/2 11,6 18,1 8 23,7 37,3 9 1/2 57,7 96,1
38
RIEMPIMENTO GIUNTO ROTOFLUID-CA FILLING ROTOFLUID-CA COUPLING
TAPPO DI RIEMPIMENTO
FILLING PLUG
Tab. 4
Grand.
55S 55D 65S 65D 75PS 75PD 80P 85PD 85PD-915 90P
Size
A mm 480 480 580 580 710 710 810 890 915 1010
B mm 467 457 480 480 572 572 565 765 765 1038
Livelli a N° viti litri litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri litri N° viti litri N° viti litri litri litri
a l evel Screw liters liters Screw litres litres Screw liters liters Screw liters Screw liters liters liters
60° 4 1/2 18 17.3 4 33.2 31.9 6 60.7 59 5 75.5 6 136.5 136.5 176
65° 4 5/6 17 16.3 4 1/3 31.2 30 6 1/2 57.4 55.8 5 3/7 71.4 6 1/2 127.8 127.8 166.3
70° 5 1/6 15.9 15.2 4 2/3 29.2 28 7 53.5 52 5 5/6 66 7 118.6 118.6 154.1
75° 5 1/2 TAPPO
14.7 DI 14.1
RIEMPIMENTO
5 27.2 26.1 7 1/2 49.6 48.2 6 1/4 60.7 7 1/2 109 109 141.5
80° 5 5/6 FILLING
13.7 PLUG
13.1 5 1/3 25.2 24.2 8 45.9 44.6 6 2/3 56 8 99.1 99.1 129.8
85° 6 1/6 12.7 12.2 5 2/3 23.3 22.4 8 1/2 42.5 41.3 7 51.5 8 1/2 89.3 89.3 119.1
90° 6 1/2 11.7 11.2 6 21.5 20.6 9 39.1 38α 7 1/2 47 9 80.1 80.1 108.8
95° 6 5/6 10,5 10.2 6 1/3 19.7 18.8 9 1/2 35.8 34.7 8 42.5 9 1/2 71.8 71.8 98.1
100° 7 1/6 - 9.2 6 2/3 - 16,8 10 - 31 8 1/3 38 10 60,5 60,5 86.8
105° 7 1/2 - 8 7 - 14,8 10 1/2 - 27,2 8 3/4 32,8 10 1/2 50,7 50,7 76
110° 7 5/6 - 6.9 7 1/3 - 12,8 11 - 23,2 9 1/6 27,3 11 41,1 41,1 63
115° 8 1/6 - 5.9 7 2/3 - 10,9 11 1/2 - 19,4 9 3/5 21,9 11 1/2 32 32 51
120° 8 1/2 - 4.9 8 - 9 12 - 15,7 10 17 12 24,3 24,3 41
Tab. 5
Dimensione ugelli per passaggio olio / Calibrated plug dimensions
GIUNTI ROTOFLUID / ROTOFLUID COUPLING GIUNTI ROTOFLUID /ROTOFLUID COUPLING
SCF / DCF UGELLI / NOZZLES CA
Grandezza Tipo TIPO / TYPE Grandezza Tipo
N° D Ød N° D Ød
Size Type Size Type
20 3 M8 2,5 V 55S 4 M10 2,5 G
30 4 M8 2,5 G 55D 4 M10 2,5 G
30P 4 M10 2,5 G 65S 4 M10 2,5 G
40P 4 M10 2,5 G 65D 4 M10 2,5 G
50 4 M10 2,5 G 75PS 4 M10 2,5 G
55 4 M10 2,5 G 75PD 4 M10 2,5 G
60 4 M10 2,5 G 80P 3 M10 2,5 G
65 4 M10 2,5 G 85PD 5 M10 2,5 G
70P 4 M10 2,5 G 85PD915 5 M10 2,5 G
75P 4 M10 2,5 G 90P 4 M10 2,5 G
80P 3 M10 2,5 G
85P 3 M10 2,5 G
90P 4 M16 2,5 G
95P 4 M16 2,5 G
39
Per effettuare la taratura Calibration
To carry outisthe
ascalibration
follows: act
operare come segue. as follows.
1 1
Posizionare il giunto con il Position
Position the
the coupling
couplingwith
with
tappo accessibile nella the
the plug accessibleon
plug accessible top.top
in the
posizione più alta. part.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PRIMA DELLA RIMOZIONE BEFORE REMOVING
REMOVING THE
THE
DEL TAPPO BISOGNA PLUG IT
TAKE PRECAUTIONS
IS NECESSARY TO
PREMUNIRSI CON STRACCI TO
TAKECOVER THE AREAWITH
PRECAUTIONS WITH
DI PROTEZIONE DA A RAG IN ORDER
PROTECTIONS TO AVOID
RAGS, FROM
EVENTUALI GETTI D’OLIO OIL SQUIRTING
POSSIBLE OUTCAUSED
OIL JETS DUE
DOVUTI A PRESSIONI TO
BY RESIDUAL PRESSURE
RESIDUAL PRESSURES.
RESIDUE. INSIDE THE COUPLING.
2 2
Rimuovere completamente il Remove the accessible plug
tappo accessibile. completely.
3 3
Nel caso si debba effettuare MAX 45° When
In caseit itisisnecessary
necessary totofill the
il rabbocco ruotare il giunto coupling,
carry out the rotate the up,
filling coupling
rotate
in posizione di riempimento in
thethe filling position,
coupling never
in the filling
senza mai superare la tacca exceeding
position, never the 45° notch the
exceeding
dei 45° sulla verticale (limite positioned on the vertical
45° notch positioned on the
massimo di riempimento) (maximum filling limit)
vertical (maximum andlimit)
filling add
ed aggiungere l’olio fino alla the
andoil until
add theitoil
poursuntilout of the
it pours
fuoriuscita dal foro. TAPPO hole.
out from the hole.
PLUG
40 33
IMPORTANTE IMPORTANT
NORMALMENTE
NORMALMENTE NON NON SI NORMALLY
NORMALLY THE THE FILL LEVEL
FILLING
DEVE
DEVE SUPERARE
SUPERARE IL
IL LIVELLO
LIVELLO OF 45° MUST
LEVEL 45°.NOT
OF 40°. MUSTBENOT BE
DI
DI45°.
40°.
45°. EXCEEDED.
EXCEEDED. ONLY IN
IN CASI
PER CASIPARTICOLARI
PARTICOLARI E PARTICULAR
FOR PARTICULARCASES AND
CASES
SOLO DOPO AVER
CONSULTARE LA WESTCAR. AFTER HAVING
CONTACT WESTCAR. ASKED
CONSULTATO LA WESTCAR, WESTCAR’S ADVICE, THE
SI PUO’ ARRIVARE A 30°. DI 30°. FILLING CAN BE
RIEMPIMENTO REACHED.
4 4
Per diminuire la quantità In
Onorder to decrease
the contrary, the
to decrease
d’olio invece predisporre amount of oilof
the quantity inoil,
theprovide
coupling,
una bacinella di raccolta e rotate it until thebasin
for a collecting fillingandhole
ruotare il giunto fino a is low enough
rotate to allow
the coupling untiloilittois
posizionare la tacca di drain intoto
possible a suitable
position container.
the filling
riempimento desiderata Drain
notchoff excessive
required on the oil. vertical
sulla verticale ed attendere and wait until the exceeding
la fuoriuscita dell’olio oil pours out.
eccedente.
5
5 Reassemble
Reassemble the the plug
plugin on the
Rimontare il tappo sul giunto the coupling
coupling andand make
write down anan
e fare un segno di riscontro inspection
inspection mark
mark,infor
order
the to
per eventuali futuri rabboc- have an indication
possible, future oilfor future
filling ups
chi e sostituzioni olio. oil
andfilling or changes.
charges.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
RIMUOVERE DAL GIUNTO REMOVE FROM THE
QUALSIASI CHIAVE O COUPLING ANY KEY OR
ATTREZZO IMPIEGATO TOOL USED FOR THIS
PER QUESTA OPERATION.
OPERAZIONE. DANGER OF PROJECTION.
PERICOLO DI
PROIEZIONE.
L’operazione di taratura è The calibration operation is

così terminata. then over.
34 41
SOSTITUZIONE OLIO OIL CHANGE
Questa operazione deve This
This operation
operationmust
mustbebe
essere effettuata le prime done
carriedforout
thefor
first time
the first times
volte dopo 2000 ore di after
after 2000
2000 hours
hours’operation
operation
funzionamento e successi- and
and later
later every
every4000
4000hours.
hours.
vamente ogni 4000 ore.
In case of particularly dusty
Per l’impiego in ambienti environments, every 1000
particolarmente polverosi hours.
ogni 1000 ore.
Change
To carrythe
outoil asoperation
this follows: act
Per effettuare questa as follows:
operazione operare
come segue:
ATTENZIONE WARNING
QUESTA OPERAZIONE DEVE THIS OPERATION
OPERATION MUST
MUSTBE BE
ESSERE EFFETTUATA DOPO CARRIED OUT AFTER
DONE AFTER HAVING HAVING
AVER AVVIATO ANCHE STARTED UP
STARTED UP THE
THE MOTOR,
MOTOR,
PARZIALMENTE IL MOTORE, EVEN PARTIALLY, SO
EVEN PARTIALLY, SOTHAT
THAT
IN MODO CHE LE IMPURITA’ THE IMPURITIES
THE IMPURITIES ARE
ARESU-
SIANO IN SOSPENSIONE SPENDED IN THE OIL.
SUSPENDED IN THE OIL.
NELL’OLIO. INOLTRE DEVE BESIDES IT MUST TAKE
FILLING THE COUPLING
ESSERE EFFETTUATA CON PLACE WHEN THE MOTOR
IL MOTORE E MACCHINA SHOULD
AND THE ONLY BEMACHINE
DRIVEN DONE
CONDOTTA FERMI, WHEN THE MACHINE
ARE NOT WORKING,
SCOLLEGATI DALLA FONTE IS SWITCHED OFF,
DISCONNECTED THE
FROM
DI ALIMENTAZIONE SUL POWER IS DISCONNECTED
THE FEEDING SOURCE ON
SEZIONATORE DI LINEA ED FROM THE
THE LINE SOURCE AND
DISCONNECTING
AVERNE SEGNALATO OFF LAVORI IN CORSO SWITCH
THE AND THE
LOCK-OUT TAG
L’INTERVENTO. WORK IN INTERVENTATION HAS BEEN
ENGAGED. THE COUPLING
IL GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE A PROGRESS SIGNALLED. THE
MUST BE AT ROOM
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE COUPLING MUSTAND
TEMPERATURE BE AT
IT’S
CON L’ASSE IN AXIS IN A HORIZONTALAND
ROOM TEMPERATURE
ORIZZONTALE. ITS AXIS MUST BE IN
POSITION.
HORIZONTAL POSITION.
1 1
Posizionare il giunto con Position the coupling
coupling with
with the
the
il tappo accessibile nelle plug accessible
accessible on
on the
the top.
top
posizioni pù alte fuoriuscita parts.
dal foro.
42 35
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PRIMA DELLA RIMOZIONE BEFORE
TAKE REMOVING THE
PRECAUTIONS TO
DEL TAPPO BISOGNA COVER THE AREA WITHTO
PLUG IT IS NECESSARY A
PREMUNIRSI CON STRACCI TAKEIN
RAG PRECAUTIONS
ORDER TO AVOIDWITH
DI PROTEZIONE DA PROTECTIONS
OIL SQUIRTINGRAGS, FROM
OUT DUE
EVENTUALI GETTI D’OLIO POSSIBLE OIL JETS
TO RESIDUAL PRESSURECAUSED
DOVUTI A PRESSIONI BY RESIDUAL PRESSURES.
INSIDE THE COUPLING.
RESIDUE.
2
2 Remove the accessible plug
Rimuovere completamente il completely.
tappo accessibile.
Should
Should thethe coupling
couplingbe be
Nel caso il giunto sia installed
installed vertically
in verticalmaking
and it
installato in verticale e difficult
therefore toitplace the motor
is difficult to
risulti difficoltoso disporre in a horizontal
place the motor position,
in the
in orizzontale il motore, measure
horizontal the quantitygauge
position, of oil
misurare la quantità d’olio removed
the quantityandofreplace it with
oil which will
che uscirà per rimetterne an
pourequal
out,amount
so that of
anclean
equaloil.
una quantità pari. Ripetere Repeat
quantitythis
canoperation
be several
più volte l’operazione per times to remove
reintroduced. as many
Repeat the of
eliminare le impurità the impurities
operation as possible
several times to
trattenute dall’olio from the oil.
eliminate the impurities kept
rimanente. by the remaining oil.
3 3
Predisporre sotto al giunto See to the
Rotate place a receiver
coupling untilunder
the
una bacinella di capacià the coupling,
filling which
hole is low has an
enough
adeguata per la raccolta suitable
to capacity
allow oil to drainfor thea oil
into
dell’olio. collection.
suitable container. Drain off
Ruotare il giunto fino a Rotate theoil.
excessive coupling to place
portare il foro di uscita olio the hole for the oil pouring
nella posizione più bassa ed out in the lower position and
attenderne la fuoriuscita. wait until it pours out.
4
Per effettuare il riempimento 4
o la taratura dell’olio Fill the oilout
To carry or initiate the
the oil filling
comportarsi come calibration
or calibrationas outlined
follow thein
descritto ai relativi capitoli. previous
instruction sections
given in ofthe
this
manual.
relative chapters.
Dopo aver effettuato

queste operazioni la The
Afteroilhaving
change is nowout
carried
sostituzione dell’olio è complete.
these operations, the oil
terminata. change is over.
36 43
SOSTITUZIONE
SOSTITUZIONE OIL CHANGE FOR
OLIOPER
OLIO PER IL GIUNTO
IL GIUNTO VERTICAL ROTOFLUID®
ROTOFLUID®
ROTOFLUID ®
VERTICALE COUPLING
I giunti contraddistinti dalla The couplings signed with the

lettera ( C ) sono previsti per letter [C] are foreseen for a
il funzionamento verticale. vertical operation.
Il primo riempimento first oil filling

The first filling must
mustbebe
dell’olio deve essere carried
done outthe
with withcoupling
the coupling
eseguito con il giunto mounted on on the
the engine
enginewith
with
montato sul motore con the shaft in a horizontal
l’asse in orizzontale come position, as shown on page 29.
trattato a pagina 29. Afterward oil
Afterward oil changes
change can
can be
be
In seguito, per praticità, è carried
done outcouplings
with with couplings
vertically
possibile eseguire la vertically mounted.
mounted.
sostituzione dell’olio con il
giunto montato in verticale.
Questa operazione deve This

This operation
operation must
mustbe be
essere eseguita la prima done theout
carried first
thetime
firstafter
time after
volta dopo 2000 ore di 2000
2000 operating
operating hours,
hours,and
and
funzionamento e successi- later
later on
on every
every 4000
4000 hours.
hours.
vamente ogni 4000 ore.
In case of particularly dusty
Oppure, per l’impiego in environments, change the oil
ambienti particolarmente every 1000 hours, by
polverosi, ogni 1000 ore, nel following the procedures
seguente modo: described below:
ATTENZIONE WARNING
QUESTA OPERAZIONE DEVE THIS OPERATIONMUST
THIS OPERATION MUST BEBE
ESSERE ESEGUITA DOPO DONE
CARRIEDAFTER HAVING
OUT AFTER HAVING
AVER AVVIATO ANCHE STARTED THEMOTOR,
STARTED THE MOTOR,
PARZIALMENTE IL MOTORE EVEN IFPARTIALLY
EVEN IF PARTIALLYSTARTED,
PER METTERE IN STARTED,
IN ORDER TOIN PUT
ORDERIN TO
LAVORI IN CORSO
SOSPENSIONE NELL’OLIO
LE EVENTUALI IMPURITA’.
OFF WORK IN
PUT IN SUSPENSION
SUSPENSION
POSSIBLE
THE
THE POSSIBLE
OIL IMPURITIES.
OIL IMPURITIES.
INOLTRE IL MOTORE DELLA PROGRESS THIS OPERATION
FURTHERMORE, THESHOULD
MACCHINA DEVE ESSERE ONLY BE DONE
MACHINE MOTORWHEN
MUSTTHE BE
FERMO E SCOLLEGATO MACHINE
STOPPED ANDIS SWITCHED
DALLA TENSIONE SUL OFF, THE POWER
DISCONNECTED IS THE
FROM
SEZIONATORE DI LINEA E DISCONNECTED FROM THE
LINE SELECTOR VOLTAGE,
DEVE ESSERE SEGNALATO SOURCE AND THE
AND THE ACTION LOCK-
MUST BE
L’INTERVENTO. OUT TAG ENGAGED.
NOTIFIED. THE COUPLINGTHE
IL GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE A COUPLING
MUST BE ATMUST
ROOMBE AT
TEMPERATURA AMBIENTE ROOM TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE, AND
AND IT MUST
E NON SUPERIORE A 40°C. NOT MORE
NOT BE MORE THAN
THAN 4040°C.
C.
1 1
Predisporre una bacinella di Place a basin of a suitable
capacità adeguata capacity under the coupling
sotto al giunto per la for the oil collection.
raccolta dell’olio.
44 37
2 2
Rimuovere il tappo superiore. Remove the upper plug.
3 3
Rimuovere il tappo inferiore Remove the lower plug and
ed attendere la completa wait for the oil to be
fuoriuscita d’olio. completely drained.
NOTA: NOTE:
L’olio all’interno non When the
When thecoupling
couplingwill is be
drained,
drai-
fuoriuscirà completamente in thereamay
ned, still
part of thebeoilsome
will remain
quanto ne rimarrà un residual the
between oil in the vanes
vanes of the pump
quantitativo tra gli interstizi, of the
and thepump and
turbine. turbine, it
Therefore,
pertanto bisogneà tenerne so this
has must
to be be taken
considered into the
during
conto durante l’operazione di consideration
filling operation.during refilling
riempimento. operations.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NON DISPERDERE L’OLIO DO NOT DISPERSE THE
IN AMBIENTE, MA OIL IN THE ENVIRONMENT,
RIVOLGERSI AD APPOSITE PLEASE CONTACT
AZIENDE AUTORIZZATE AUTHORIZED DISPOSAL
PER LO SMALTIMENTO. COMPANIES.
4 4
Rimontare il tappo inferiore. Replace the lower plug.
5 5
Provvedere al rabbocco up with
Fill up with suitable
suitable oils
oils
impiegando oli idonei pag. 47
(see pag. 47 and
and 48).
48).
(vedere pag. 47 e 48). quantity of
The quantity of oil
oil being
being
La quantità d’olio deve replaced must
replaced must be
be the
thesame
same
essere pari alla quantità the one
as the one that
has has
beenbeen
d’olio fuoriuscita per drained, thus
drained, thus ensuring
ensuringthe the
garantire le precedenti same coupling
same coupling performance
performance
prestazioni del giunto. the previous
as the previous one.
one.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL RIEMPIMENTO MASSIMO THE MAXIMUM OIL FILL FOR
CONSENTITO PER IL THE VERTICAL POSITION
FUNZIONAMENTO IN MUST NEVER BE MORE THAN
VERTICALE NON DEVE MAI THE QUANTITY
RISULTARE SUPERIORE ALLA CORRESPONDING TO 45° AND
QUANTITA’ CORRISPONDENTE THE MINIMUM QUANTITY
A 45°, MENTRE LA ALLOWING THE START-UP
QUANTITA’ MINIMA A MUST NEVER BE LESS THAN
GARANTIRE L’AVVIAMENTO THE QUANTITY
NON DEVE RISULTARE CORRESPONDING TO 75°
INFERIORE A 75° DI OF THE FILLING.
RIEMPIMENTO (SEE TABLE 1 PAGE 37)
(VEDI TABELLA 1 A PAG. 37).
6 6
Rimontare il tappo di Replace the
the oil
oil fill
filling plug.
plug.
caricamento olio.
This operation
Vertical filling is
isso terminated.
now complete.
L’operazione è così terminata.
38 45
TARATURA OLIO PER OIL CALIBRATION FOR
IL GIUNTO VERTICALE VERTICAL ROTOFLUID®
ROTOFLUID® COUPLING
Qualora si renda necessario Should itit become

become necessary
necessary
eseguire una taratura to calibrate
effect theaoil coupling
calibration
LAVORI IN CORSO
dell’olio con il giunto
montato in verticale, si può
OFF WORK IN
mounted
possible
vertically,mounted
with the coupling
vertically,toit proceed
it is
as to
is possible
procedere come segue: PROGRESS follows:
proceed as follows:
ATTENZIONE WARNING
QUESTA OPERAZIONE DEVE THIS OPERATIONMUST
THIS OPERATION SHOULD
BE
ESSERE EFFETTUATA CON IL ONLY
CARRIED OUT WITH THETHE
BE DONE WHEN
MOTORE DELLA MACHINE MOTOR
MACHINE STOPPED
IS SWITCHED
MACCHINA FERMO E AND DISCONNECTED
OFF, THE POWER IS FROM
SCOLLEGATO DALLA THE NETWORK SELECTOR
DISCONNECTED FROM
TENSIONE SUL VOLTAGE,
THE AND AND
SOURCE AFTER HAVING
THE
SEZIONATORE DI RETE E NOTIFIED THE ACTION.
LOCK-OUT TAG ENGAGED.
DOPO AVERNE SEGNALATO THE COUPLING MUST BE AT A
THE COUPLING MUST BE
L’INTERVENTO. TEMPERATURE NOT HIGHER
AT ROOM TEMPERATURE
IL GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE A THAN 40°C.
TEMPERATURA NON AND NOT MORE THAN
SUPERIORE A 40°C. 40 C.
PER GIUNTI ROTOFLUID® FOR ROTOFLUID®

55/65/75P/85P/95P. COUPLINGS 55/65/75P/85P/95P.
1A 1A
Rimuovere il tappo A o B e Remove either A or B plug
rimuovere l’olio eccedente and remove the extra oil
(contenuto nella pompa) con (present in the pump) with a
un’apposita bacinella. suitable syringe.
PER GIUNTI ROTOFLUID® FOR ROTOFLUID®

10/20/30/30P/40/50/60/70P/ COUPLINGS
80P/90P. 10/20/30/30P/40/50/60/70P/
80P/90P.
1B 1B
Rimuovere il tappo C o D Remove either C or D plug,
ed estrarre la quantità d’olio extract the oil quantity
desiderata raccogliendola in needed and place it into a
un’apposita bacinella receiver.
2 2
Per eventuali rabbocchi Any possible topping up must
invece provvedere al be done through plug A.
riempimento della quantitò
d’olio desiderata attraverso
il tappo A.
3 3
A taratura eseguita rimontare After the calibration has been
il tappo precedentemente carried out replace the plug
tolto. previously removed.
La taratura è così terminata. so

The calibration is completed.
completed.
46 39
OLIO DI OIL CALIBRATION FOR
TRANSMISSION
TRASMISSIONE VERTICAL
OIL ROTOFLUID®
COUPLING
Le caratteristiche essenziali The essential specifications

per una buona scelta for a good choice of the
dell’olio di trasmissione transmission oil are:
sono:
1
1 A good oil fluidity
fluidity
Una buona fluidità dell’olio (see “VISCOSITY“) to to allow
allow
(vedi “VISCOSITA’”) per the torque transmission.
transmission.
consentire la trasmissione It is necessary to remember
remember
della massima coppia. that the oil fluidity
fluidity changes
changes
Bisogna ricordare che l’olio according to the change
changing in of
varia la sua fluidità al temperature
temperature; the hotter it the
(the hotter is,
variare della temperatura fluider it becomes).
is, the more viscous the oil
(più è caldo più diventa becomes.
fluido).
2 2
Un buon potere lubrificante A good lubricating
lubricating power,
power,
per garantire la lubrificazione to ensure the
the coupling
coupling
di cuscinetti del giunto. bearings lubrication.
lubrication.
In linea di massima si As a general
general rule
rule itoils
canwith
be used
possono impiegare oli con oils with viscosities
viscosities ranging
ranging from 1,9°
viscosità comprese tra 1,9° e from4°
and 1,9° and 4°
Engler Engler.
can be used.
4° Engler.
Qui di seguito vengono The recommended oils

indicati gli oli consigliati in according their characteristics
funzione delle loro are the following.
caratteristiche.
TABELLA A TABLE A
Questi oli sono molto fluidi These are fluid oils and have
e hanno una viscosità da 21 a viscosity ranging from 21
a 22 CST e sono indicati per to 22 CST and are suggested
impiego con temperature to be used with temperatures
non al di sotto di -20°C. not below -20°C.
MARCA OLIO BP CASTROL ESSO MOBIL OLEO- SHELL OIL BRAND

TECNICA
ENERGOL HYSPIN NUTO MOVO TELLUS
TIPO OLIO HPL22 AWS22 H22 DTE 22 H22 OIL 22 OIL TYPE
ISO VG 22 22 22 22 22 22 ISO VG
VISCOSITÁ CST a 40° C 21 22 21.01 22 22 22 CST a 40° C VISCOSITY
ENGLER 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 ENGLER
INDICE DI VISCOSITÁ 104 100 104 110 103 90 VISCOSITY INDEX
PESO SPECIFICO Kg/dm3 0.875 0.870 0.864 0.880 0.871 Kg/dm3 SPECIFIC GRAVITY
°F -22 -22 -31 -16.6 -43.6 -22 °F
SCORRIMENTO SLIPPAGE
°C -30 -30 -35 -27 -42 -30 °C
°F 377.6 410 399.2 365 356 °F
INFIAMMABILITÁ INFLAMMABILITY
°C 192 210 204 185 180 °C
40 47
TABELLA B TABLE B
Gli oli qui di seguito hanno The following oils have a
una viscosità da 46 a 48 CST viscosity ranging from 46 to
e grazie al loro maggiore 48 CST and thanks to their
potere lubrificante sono higher lubricating power are
indicati per impieghi recommended for
ininterrotti di maggiore uninterrupted uses, lasting
durata con temperature longer, with temperatures
non al di sotto di -15°C. not below -15°C.
MARCA OLIO BP CASTROL ESSO MOBIL OLEO- SHELL OIL BRAND

TECNICA
BARTRAN HYSPIN INVAROL MOVO TELLUS
TIPO OLIO HW46 AWH46 EP46
DTE 15
HVI46 T 46 OIL TYPE
ISO VG 46 46 46 46 46 46 ISO VG
VISCOSITÁ CST a 40° C 46 46 46 46 46 46 CST a 40° C VISCOSITY
ENGLER 4 4 4 4 4 4 ENGLER
INDICE DI VISCOSITÁ 152 150 167 155 155 185 VISCOSITY INDEX
PESO SPECIFICO Kg/dm3 0.882 0.875 0.867 0.880 0.875 0.875 Kg/dm3 SPECIFIC GRAVITY
°F -33 -38 -33 -38 -36 -44 °F
°C -36 -39 -36 -39 -38 -42 °C
°F 431 410 437 374 374 365 °F
°C 222 210 225 190 190 185 °C
TABELLA C TABLE C
Questi oli hanno come The characteristics of the
caratteristica un alto indice oils are
is a ahigh
highviscosity
viscosityindex
index
di viscosità (più stabile al (more stable with
at thechange
changingin
variare della temperatura) in temperatures)
temperature) andandtheirtheir
useuse
e sono quindi indicati per is therefore recommended for
l’impiego in ambienti con those environments, with
temperature non al di sotto temperatures not below -40°C.
di -40°C.
MARCA OLIO ESSO MOBIL OIL BRAND

TIPO OLIO INVAROL EP22 SHC 524 OIL TYPE
ISO VG 22 32 ISO VG
VISCOSITÁ CST a 40° C 20.75 32 CST a 40° C VISCOSITY
ENGLER 2.3 3,3 ENGLER
INDICE DI VISCOSITÁ 167 144 VISCOSITY INDEX
PESO SPECIFICO Kg/dm3 0.888 0,855 Kg/dm3 SPECIFIC GRAVITY
°F -45.4 -65,2 °F
°C -43 -54 °C
°F 302 543,2 °F
°C 150 234 °C
ATTENZIONE WARNING
L’OLIO ALL’INTERNO DEL THE OIL
THE OILINSIDE
INSIDETHETHECOUPLING
COU-
GIUNTO DEVE ESSERE FLUI- PLINGBE
MUST MUST BETO
FLUID, FLUID, TO
BE ABLE
DO PER TRASMETTERE LA BE TRANSMIT
TO ABLE TO TRANSMIT THEIN
THE TORQUE.
COPPIA, IN CASO DI BASSE TORQUE.
CASE OF LOWIN CASE OF LOW
TEMPERATURES
TEMPERATURE (AL DI SOTTO TEMPERATURES
(BELOW (BELOW 0°C)
0°C) THE FIRST
DI 0°C) IL PRIMO AVVIAMEN- THE FIRSTREQUIRES
STARTING STARTINGA REQUI-
TO RICHIEDE UN TEMPO DI RES A HIGHER
HIGHER SLIPPING SLIPPING
TIME FORTIME
MAGGIORE SCORRIMENTO FORTORQUE
THE THE TORQUE TRANSMIS-
TRANSMISSION
PER LA TRASMISSIONE SION
TO IN FULL
REACH FULLCONDITION
WORKING OF
DELLA COPPIA A REGIME. WORKING.
CONDITION.
48
41
When excessive coupling
overheating occurs and the
plug has been tripped, please
replace the plug only after
eliminating the cause of the
overheating.
THIS OPERATION SHOULD

ONLY BE DONE WHEN THE
MACHINE IS SWITCHED
OFF, THE POWER IS
DISCONNECTED FROM THE
SOURCE AND THE LOCK-
OUT TAG ENGAGED. THE
IN
COUPLING MUST BE AT
ROOM TEMPERATURE.
USE ORIGINAL SPARE

PLUGS ONLY WITH
THE MAXIMUM FUSION
TEMPERATURES
ALLOWABLE FOR THE
TYPE OF SEALS USED IN
THE COUPLING (SEE THE
CHAPTER “COUPLING
STRUCTURE AND SAFETY
SYSTEMS”).
49
SOSTITUZIONE DEL FUSIBLE PLUG
TAPPO FUSIBILE REPLACEMENT
Per effettuare la To replace the FUSIBLE

sostituzione del TAPPO PLUG proceed as follows:
FUSIBILE operare come
segue:
A1 A1
Svitare il vecchio tappo Unscrew the old fusible plug.
fusibile.
A2 A2
Effettuare il rabbocco come Fill the coupling as
descritto al capitolo described in the chapter “OIL
“RIEMPIMENTO, TARATURA FILLING, CALIBRATION AND
E SOSTITUZIONE OLIO”. CHARGE”.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
VERIFICARE LO STATO VERIFY THE SEAL
DELLE TENUTE CONDITION, BY CHECKING
CONTROLLANDO CHE THAT THERE IS NO
NON VI SIANO OIL BLOW-BY.
TRAFILAMENTI D’OLIO.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
NORMALMENTE IL THE FUSIBLE PLUG IS
TAPPO FUSIBILE SI TROVA NORMALLY PLACED
SUL LATO OPPOSTO ON THE OPPOSITE SIDE
ALL’ALBERO CAVO DEL THE COUPLING HOLLOW
GIUNTO. IN FASE DI SHAFT. DURING THE
INSTALLAZIONE INSTALLATION VERIFY
VERIFICARE CHE THAT THE
L’EVENTUALE POSSIBLE OIL LEAKAGE
FUORIUSCITA DELL’OLIO DOES NOT GO ON
NON VADA SUL MOTORE. THE MOTOR.
50 43
A3 A3
Riavvitare il nuovo tappo Screw in the new plug
e serrare a fondo. and tighten completely.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
RIMUOVERE DAL GIUNTO REMOVEFROM
REMOVE ANY KEY
THEOR
QUALSIASI CHIAVE O COUPLING ANY
TOOL USED FORKEY OR
THIS
UTENSILE UTILIZZATO PER TOOL USED FOR
MAINTENANCE THIS
QUESTA MANUTENZIONE MAINTENANCE
OPERATION. OPERATION.
La sostituzione del tappo The fusible plug replacement

fusibile è così terminata. is then complete.
44 51
SOSTITUZIONE DEL TRIP PLUG REPLACEMENT
TAPPO ESPANSIBILE
Per effettuare la sostituzione To carry out

out the
the TRIP
TRIP PLUG
PLUG
del TAPPO ESPANSIBILE replacement,
act as follows:proceed as
operare come segue: follows:
B1 B1
Ruotare a mano il giunto Rotate
Unscrew thethe
coupling
coupling by by
fino a posizionare il tappo hand until the
the trip
trip plug
plug is
is
alto. quindi
espansibile in alto, on top.
high-positioned,
Attenzione prima della
rimuoverlo. Warning
then removebefore
it. removing the
rimozione del tappo plug it is necessary to take
bisogna premunirsi con precautions with protections
stracci di protezione da rags, from possible oil
eventuali getti d’olio dovuti jets caused by residual
a pressioni residue. pressures.
Quindi rimuovere il tappo. Then remove the trip plug.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
IL TAPPO ESPANSIBILE THE TRIP PLUG
PLUG MUST
MUST BEBE
DEVE ESSERE INSTALLED ON
INSTALLED ON THE
THE
INSTALLATO SUL LATO MOTOR SIDE
SIDE AND
AND ITS
IST
DEL MOTORE E DEVE FUSION
FUSION TEMPERATURE
ESSERE DI TEMPERATURE MUST
MUST ALWAYS BE LOWER
TEMPERATURA DI
THAN THAT OF THE TO
ALWAYS BE LOWER
FUSIONE SEMPRE THE ONE OF THE FUSIBLE
INFERIORE A QUELLA DEL FUSIBLE PLUG UTILIZED IN
TAPPO FUSIBILE
145°C PLUG, THIS ASSEMBLED
THE STANDARD COUPLING.
IN SERIES ON THE
MONTATO DI SERIE SUL FOR INSTANCE :
COUPLING.
GIUNTO. FUSIBLE PLUG: = 145°C
FOR ISTANCE
ES: TAPPO TRIP PLUG
FUSIBLE = 120°C
PLUG = 145°C
FUSIBILE=145°C TRIP PLUG = 120°C
TAPPO
ESPANSIBILE=120°C.
145°C 120°C
B2 B2
Verificare il livello dell’olio Verify the oil level and, if
ed eventualmente effettuare carry
necessary, fill up out the filling
as described
il rabbocco come descritto upthe
in as chapter
described in the
“OIL chapter
FILLING
al capitolo “RIEMPIMENTO, “OIL FILLING CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION AND CHANGE“.
TARATURA E SOSTITUZIONE AND CHANGE“.
OLIO”.
52 45
B1 B1
Riavvitare il nuovo tappo e Screw the new plug and
serrare a fondo. tighten completely.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
VERIFICARE LO STATO VERIFY
VERIFY THE
THE SEAL
SEALS
DELLE TENUTE CONDITION, BY
CONDITION, BY CHECKING
CHECKING
CONTROLLANDO CHE THAT THERE IS NO OIL
THAT THERE IS NO OIL
NON VI SIANO BLOW-BY.
BLOW-BY.
TRAFILAMENTI D’OLIO
ATTENZIONE WARNING
RIMUOVERE DAL GIUNTO REMOVE ANY
FROMKEY OR
THE
QUALSIASI CHIAVE COUPLING
TOOL USEDANY
FORKEY
THISOR
UTENSILE UTILIZZATO PER TOOL USED FOR
MAINTENANCE THIS
PERATION.
QUESTA MANUTENZIONE. MAINTENANCE OPERATION.
A questo punto la The fusible

fusible plug
plug
sostituzione del tappo replacement is
replacement is then
then over.
espansibile è terminata. complete.
46 53
SMONTAGGIO DEL COUPLING
GIUNTO DISASSEMBLING
Normalmente il giunto non The coupling usually does

does not
not
necessita di manutenzioni need inner maintenance
maintenance
interne se non per cause operations, except for
dueextra
to extra
straordinarie (guasti rotture). LAVORI IN CORSO causes (failures or breaks)
breaks).
WORK IN
Qualora si debba eseguire la PROGRESS In case the pulley – for the
sostituzione della puleggia BETA “I“ or “X“ couplings – or
nel caso dei giunti BETA “I” else the bearings, the seals
o “X” oppure dei cuscinetti, or other internal components
delle tenute o altri must be replaced, it is
componenti interni, bisogna necessary to remove the
rimuovere il giunto (lato coupling (hollow shaft side)
albero cavo) dall’albero from the motor shaft or the
motore o dalla macchina, machine, acting as follows:
operando come segue:
ATTENZIONE WARNING
QUESTE OPERAZIONI THESE
THIS OPERATIONS
OPERATION SHOULDMUST
DEVONO ESSERE BE CARRIED
ONLY BE DONE OUTWHENWHEN
THE
EFFETTUATE CON IL THE MOTOR
MACHINE IS
IS SWITCHED OFF,
MOTORE E MACCHINA ELECTRICALLY
THE POWER IS DISCONNECTED
CONDOTTA FERMI, DISCONNECTED
FROM THE SOURCE AND THE
AND THE
SCOLLEGATI DALLA RETE COUPLING
LOCK-OUT TAGIS ENGAGED.
AT ROOMTHE
DI ALIMENTAZIONE TEMPERATURE
COUPLING MUST BE (MAX. 40°C)
AT ROOM
ELETTRICA ED IL GIUNTO AFTER THE OIL HAS
TEMPERATURE AND NOT MORE BEEN
A TEMPERATURA EMPTIED.
THAN 40 C AFTER THE OIL HAS
AMBIENTE. BEEN DRAINED.
1 1
Rimuovere la protezione. Remove the protection
sump.
2 2
Rimuovere gli organi di Remove thethe components
members forthatthe
collegamento al giunto parte connect
connectionthe with
coupling
the to the
esterna, cinghie nel caso di drive (motor)
coupling belts part
external - in case
the of
giunto BETA, o accessori BETA
belts -coupling - or
in case of the
BETA
(elementi elastici, mozzi, accessories
coupling - or(flexible
the
ecc.) nel caso del giunto elements,
accessories hubs, etc.) in case
(flexible
ALFA of ALFA coupling.
elements, hubs, etc.) in case
of ALFA coupling.
54 47
3 3
Svitare completamente il Unscrew
Unscrew the main tie-rod
completely the main
tirante di testa tenendo completely whilestill
tie-rod, keeping keeping the
the motor
fermo l’albero della motor shaft
shaft on theon the impeller
impeller side.
macchina o del motore side from rotating.
lato ventola.
4 4
Avvitare l’estrattore sul foro Screw the screw on the
del giunto tenendo presente coupling hole, considering
che è possibile impiegare il that for those couplings
sistema di estrazione S.E. provided with the relatives
per quei giunti provvisti di holes on the shaft
relativi fori sull’albero (DI (mass-produced from the 70P
SERIE DALLA GRANDEZZA to the 95P size), it is possible
70P ALLA 95P) to use the extraction
system S.E.
In caso contrario impiegare Otherwise, use the extraction

il sistema di estrazione V.E. system V.E.
5 5
Svitare e rimuovere una Unscrew
Unscrew and
and remove
remove one
one
delle viti poste sulla of the screws
screws placed
placed onon the
the
corona del giunto e inserire coupling case and insert
ring and insert aa
un apposito grillo. suitable bracket.
cricket.
48 55
6 6
Imbracare il grillo con funi di Sling the
Sling the bracket
cricket with
with ropes
portata adeguata al peso del which which
ropes can stand the coupling
are capable of
giunto (vedi capitolo weight adequately
holding the coupling(see the
weight
“PESI E DIMENSIONI chapter “WEIGHTS
adequately AND
(see the chapter
DI
DI INGOMBRO”).
INGOMBRO”). OVERALL
OVERALL DIMESIONS”).
“WEIGHTS AND OVERALL
DIMESIONS”).
DIMESIONS”).
ATTENZIONE
ATTENZIONE WARNING
WARNING
NON
NON SOLLEVARE
SOLLEVARE ILIL DO
DO NOT
DO NOT LIFT
NOT LIFT THE
LIFT THE
THE
GIUNTO
GIUNTO IMPIEGANDO
IMPIEGANDO COUPLING
COUPLING USING
COUPLING USING LIFTING
USINGLIFTING
LIFTING
MEZZI
MEZZI DI
DI SOLLEVAMENTO
SOLLEVAMENTO MEANS DIFFERENT
MEANS WHICH
MEANS ARE FROM
DIFFERENT FROM
DIFFERENTI
DIFFERENTI DA
DA QUELLO
QUELLO THE
THE EXPECTED
EXPECTED ONE
ONE AND
AND
INADEQUATE.
PREVISTO
PREVISTO E NON
E NON WHICH ARE INADEQUATE.
WHICH ARE INADEQUATE.
ADEGUATI.
ADEGUATI.
7 7
7
Mettere in leggera 7
Use a suitable lifting system
Mettere
tensioneinleleggera
funi con un Use
Lift a suitable
the sling
to tension solifting
asthe
lightly system
to remove
ropes.
tensione
adeguatolesistema
funi condiun to tension
the lightly
slack and the ropes.
provide a light
adeguato sistema
sollevamento. di tension on the ropes.
sollevamento.
8 8
8
Avvitare a fondo la vite 8
Screw the screw puller screw
Avvitare a fondo
dell’estrattore finola alla
vite Screw
Turn thethe
completely, screw
puller puller
screw
until the screw
coupling
dell’estrattore
completa fino alla
estrazione del completely,by
completely,
extracted, until
until thecoupling
the
keeping coupling
the
completa
giunto estrazione
tenendo fermodel extracted,
motor shaft
extracted, byorkeeping
by keeping the
the machine
the
giunto tenendo
l’albero fermo o
della macchina motorstill,
shaft
motor shaft
shaft orthe
onor theimpeller
the machine
machine side
l’albero motore dal lato o
della macchina -shaft
in case
shaft still,of
still, onathe
on V.E impeller
the screw puller
impeller side
side
ventola
l’albero nel casodal
motore di lato case of
- in case of aa V.E
V.E screw
screwpuller;
puller
estrattore
ventola nelV.E.;
caso di otherwise by keeping the
estrattore V.E.; shaft still with
otherwise the S.E.the
by keeping
oppure tenendo fermo system.
shaft still with the S.E.
l’albero con il sistema
oppure tenendo fermoS.E. system.
l’albero con il sistema S.E.
49
56 49
9 9
Rimuovere la camera di
Remove the delay
ritardo.
chamber.
10
10 Unscrew the tightening
Svitare completamente il
screw completely, by
tirante di testa tenendo
keeping the machine or
fermo l’albero della
motor shaft still, on the
macchina o del motore
impeller side.
lato ventola.
11 11
Avvitare l’estrattore sul Attach the screw puller on the
foro del giunto tenendo coupling bore, keeping in mind
presente che è possibile that it may be possible to use
impiegare il sistema di the extraction system S.E., for
estrazione S.E. per quei those couplings provided with
giunti provvisti di relativi the relative holes on the
fori sull’albero (di serie shaft (mass-produced from
dalla grandezza 70P alla 95), the 70P to the 95 sizes),
dopo aver rimosso la after having removed the
flangia della camera di delay chamber flange
ritardo dal giunto. from the coupling.
In caso contrario Otherwise, use the
impiegare il sistema di extraction system V.E.
estrazione V.E.
12 12
Dopo aver completamente After having extracted the
sfilato il giunto depositarlo coupling completely, put it
con cura su un pallet. down on a pallet carefully.
A questo punto l’operazione At this point the

di smontaggio del giunto è coupling removal
disassembling coupling
terminata. operation is over.
Qualora si debba effettuare Whenever

Whenever an an extraordinary
extraordinary
un intervento di maintenance
maintenance intervention
interventionisis
manutenzione required
required (bearings,
(bearings,sealssealsoror
straordinaria (sostituzione internal member
internal members
cuscinetti, guarnizioni o replacement),
replacement), itit is
is
organi interni) è bene advisable
advisable toto send
sendthe the
spedire il giunto coupling
coupling toto WESTCAR
WESTCARor orto
to
alla WESTCAR o al the
the closest
closest distributor,
distributor,after
after
distributore più vicino, dopo having
having drained
provided theforoil.
the oil
aver provveduto alla pouring out.
fuoriuscita dell’olio.
50 57
APERTURA DEL ROTOFLUID®
GIUNTO COUPLING OPENING
ROTOFLUID®
Nel caso si debba Should

Should itit be
benecessary
necessarytotoopen
open
effettuare l’apertura del giunto the coupling
couplingon at place,
your facility
after its
sul posto, dopo averlo smonta- after its removal
disassembling from
from thethe motor
motor or
to dal motore o dalla macchina, or
themachine,
machine,proceed as follows:
act as follows:
operare come segue.
1
1 For the 10/20/30/30P/40P
Per le grandezze sizes remove the mim-seal
10/20/30/30P/40P togliere il snap ring placed on the
seeger della mim posta sul coupling side, where it is
lato del giunto con la scritta stated “ROTOFLUID“.
“ROTOFLUID”.
1A 1A
Per i giunti di grandezza For the coupling with the
70P/75P/80P/85P/90P/95P, 70P/75P/80P/85P/90P/95P
togliere il seeger della mim sizes, remove the mim-seal
posto sul lato del foro snap ring, placed on the side
filettato d’estrazione. of the extraction threaded
hole.
2 2
Per rimuovere la mim è To remove
removethethemin-seal
min-sealititisis
possibile operare in due possible
possible to
toproceed in two
act in two ways:
modi: ways:
2A
2A By means of a screwdriver.
Con l’impiego di un
cacciavite.
ATTENZIONE WARNING
PERICOLO DI PROIEZIONE DANGER
DANGEROFOFMIM-SEAL
MIM-SEAL
DELLA MIM. EJECTION.
PROJECTION.
2B 2B
Tenere uno straccio sulla Hold
Hold aarag over
tatter onthe
theseal
mim andand
mim ed immettere blow compressed
let some compressedair into
airthe
in
attraverso il foro del tappo coupling via the
through the plug
plug, hole
until theunit
dell’aria compressa fino alla the
mimseal popsout.
comes out.
fuoriuscita della mim stessa.
58 51
3 3
Rimuovere il secondo Remove the second snap ring
seeger posto sull’albero placed on the shaft, on the
sullo stesso lato del giunto same coupling side, indicated
indicato ai punti 1 e 1A. in the points 1 and 1A.
4 4
Svitare tutte le viti poste Unscrew all the screws
sulla corona del giunto ed placed on the ring coupling
aprire i due gusci. and open the two shells.
L’apertura del giunto è così The coupling opening is the

terminata. complete.
52 59
APERTURA DEI OPENING OF THE
GIUNTI ROTOFLUID® ROTOFLUID®
50/55/60/65 COUPLINGS 50/55/60/65
1 1
Rimuovere il seeger del Remove the snap ring of the
cuscinetto schermato posto screened bearing placed on
sul lato del foro filettato the side of the extraction
d’estrazione del giunto. threaded hole of the coupling.
2
2 Unscrew all the screw
Svitare tutte le viti poste placed on the coupling ring
sulla corona del giunto ed and open the two shells.
aprire i due gusci.
The
The coupling
couplingopening
openin now
openingnow
is then
L’apertura del giunto è così complete.
over.
terminata.
Per il rimontaggio del For

For the
thecoupling
couplingreassembly,
giunto procedere proceed in reverse
reassembling, act in reverse
nell’ordine inverso avendo order,
order, by
bytaking
takingcare
caretoto
cura di riposizionare le mim re-position
re-positionthe themim-seals
mim-seals
con il labbro rivolto verso with
with the
thelip
lipturned
turnedover
overthe
the
l’interno senza deformarlo. inside
inside part,
part,without
without
deforming
deformingit. it.
60 53
PARTI DI SUGGESTED
RICAMBIO SPARE PARTS
CONSIGLIATE
Per consentire una buona For

For aa good
goodand andtimely
timely
e tempestiva manutenzione coupling
couplingmaintenance,
maintenance,we it is
del giunto è bene suggested
suggest to provide
having for
some spare
prevedere delle scorte someon
parts stocks
hand,for those parts
especially
minime di quelle parti più GRANDEZZA which are more
components thatsubjected
are subjecttoto
soggette ad usura o a SIZE wear and
wear or toreplacement.
replacements, for
sostituzione per gli interventi the intervention of
di manutenzione extraordinary maintenance.
straordinaria. CODICE DI IDENTIFICAZIONE
Codice - CODE
IDENTIFICATION CODE To order the KITS please
Per l’ordinazione dei KIT always specify:
citare sempre:
SIZE AND
GRANDEZZA E IDENTIFICATION CODE
CODE
CODICE DI
CODICE of the
of the coupling
coupling.
IDENTIFICAZIONE
del giunto.
del giunto. To order the KIT for the FUSIBLE
PLUGS and the TRIP PLUGS,
Per la richiesta del KIT please also specify the interven-
TAPPI FUSIBILI o ESPANSIBILI tion temperature.
specificare inoltre la
temperatura d’intervento. GRANDEZZA For further information
SIZE concerning the single
Per ulteriori informazioni components, please ask for the
riguardanti i singoli compo- SPARE PARTS DRAWINGS,
nenti del giunto richiedere i specifying the model of the
CODICE DI IDENTIFICAZIONE
DISEGNI PARTI DI RICAM- Codice - CODE
IDENTIFICATION CODE
ROTOFLUID® coupling.
BIO specificando il modello
del giunto ROTOFLUID®.
KIT RICAMBI SPARE PARTS KIT
GUARNIZIONI IN NBR CUSCINETTI TAPPO FUSIBILE

NBR SEALS BEARINGS FUSIBLE PLUG
90 °C / 120 °C / 145 °C / 180 °C
GUARNIZIONI IN VITON SEEGER TAPPO ESPANSIBILE

VITON SEALS SNAP-RING TRIP PLUG
90 °C / 120 °C / 145 °C / 180 °C
54 61
RICERCA TOUBLESHOOTING
GUASTI
IL GIUNTO IDRODINAMICO SI SURRISCALDA OPPURE IL TAPPO FUSIBILE

O ESPANSIBILE INTERVIENE TROPPO FREQUENTEMENTE
THE FLUID COUPLING OVERHEATS OR THE FUSIBLE PLUG OR THE TRIP
PLUG TRIP TOO FREQUENTLY
CAUSE PROBABILI DA VERIFICARE POSSIBLE CAUSES TO CHECK
1 Il raffreddamento è insufficiente per prese d’aria sul 1 The cooling is insufficient due to missing or not suitable
carter mancanti o non idonee. air intakes on the sump.
2 Il carter è provvisto di ventola di raffreddamento ma è 2 The sump is provided with cooling impeller but it does
fuori uso o gira in senso contrario not work or turns in the reverse direction.
3 La temperatura ambiente è troppo elevata o ci sono 3 The room temperature is too high or there are some heat
fonti di calore vicino al giunto. sources near the coupling.
4 La macchina condotta sta funzionando in presenza di 4 The driven machine is working in presence of excessive
eccessivi sovraccarichi. overloads.
5 L’olio di trasmissione nel giunto è insufficiente. 5 The transmission oil in the coupling is insufficient.
6 Il giunto idrodinamico perde olio. 6 The fluid coupling leaks oil.
7 Gli avviamenti sono troppo frequenti o troppo lunghi. 7 The starts are too frequent or too long.
8 Il giunto idrodinamico è sottodimensionato. 8 The fluid coupling is undersized.
LA MACCHINA CONDOTTA NON ARRIVA A REGIME

THE DRIVEN MACHINE DOES NOT REACH THE FULL OPERATING CONDITIONS
1 La quantità di olio di trasmissione nel giunto è 1 The transmission oil quantity in the coupling is
insufficiente. insufficient.
3 la macchina condotta sta funzionando in presenza di 3 The driven machine is working in presence of excessive
4 La potenza installata del motore è insufficiente. 4 The motor power installed is insufficient.
5 La temperatura ambiente è troppo bassa. 5 The room temperature is too low.
6 L’olio di trasmissione nel giunto è troppo denso. 6 The transmission oil in the coupling is too dense.
7 La velocità in entrata al giunto idrodinamico è 7 The fluid coupling inlet speed is insufficient.
insufficiente. 8 The fluid coupling is undersized.
8 Il giunto idrodinamico è sottodimensionato.
L’AVVIAMENTO E’ TROPPO LUNGO

THE STARTING IS TOO LONG
1 La quantità di olio di trasmissione nel giunto è 1 The transmission oil quantity in the coupling is
insufficiente. insufficient.
3 La macchina condotta sta funzionando in presenza di 3 The driven machine is working in presence of excessive
4 La potenza installata del motore è insufficiente. 4 The motor power installed is insufficient.
5 La temperatura ambiente è troppo bassa. 5 The room temperature is too low.
6 L’olio di trasmissione nel giunto è troppo denso. 6 The transmission oil in the coupling is too dense.
7 Il giunto idrodinamico è sottodimensionato. 7 The fluid coupling is undersized.
62
L’AVVIAMENTO E’ TROPPO RAPIDO
THE STARTING IS TOO FAST
1 La quantità d’olio nel giunto idrodinamico è eccessiva. 1 The transmission oil quantity in the coupling is excessive.
2 Il giunto idrodinamico è sovradimensionato per le 2 The fluid coupling is oversized for the performances
prestazioni richieste required.
IL GIUNTO IDRODINAMICO PERDE OLIO

THE FLUID COUPLING LEAKS OIL
1 Nel tappo fusibile è avvenuta la fusione della pastiglia. 1 The fusion of the pastille inside the fusible plug has
2 I tappi olio non sono serrati o la guarnizione è occured.
danneggiata. 2 The oil plugs are not tightened or the seal is damaged.
3 Le guarnizioni hanno ceduto a causa di eccessivo 3 The seals have deteriorated, because of an excessive
surriscaldamento. overheating.
4 Le guarnizioni hanno ceduto a causa di sovrapressioni 4 The seals have deteriorated, because of excessive
all’interno del giunto. pressure inside the coupling.
5 Le guarnizioni sono usurate o la tenuta è compromessa 5 The seals are worn out or the seal is compromised by
dalla presenza di corpi estranei sotto le mim. the presence of foreign bodies under the mim-seals.
6 In installazione “B” le mim perdono olio in fase di 6 With the installation “B“, the mim-seals leak oil during the
avviamento per effetto di forza centrifuga. Impiegare starting, due to the centrifugal force. Use mim-seals with
mim con molle rinforzate o in viton. reinforced springs or in VITON.
7 Le guarnizioni montate sul giunto non sono idonee. 7 The seals mounted in the coupling are not suitable.
8 Le viti sulla corona del giunto non sono serrate 8 The screws on the coupling ring are not tightened
correttamente. correctly.
9 I gusci del giunto sono incrinati o rotti a causa di urti o 9 The coupling shells are cracked or broken, due to
sovrapressioni interne. impacts or excessive internal pressure.
IL GIUNTO VIBRA O E’ RUMOROSO

THE COUPLING VIBRATES OR MAKES NOISE
1 Gli organi collegati al giunto sono disallineati o girano 1 The attached components are not aligned or properly
fuori asse. balanced..
2 Il tirante di testa del giunto si è allentato o non è serrato 2 The coupling tightening screw has loosened or it has not
correttamente. been tightened correctly.
3 Il tirante di testa è serrato fuori centro o non ha la 3 The tightening screw is tightened off-center or the
ranella con la centratura. centering washer is missing.
4 L’ accoppiamento del giunto sull’albero ha troppo gioco. 4 The fit of the coupling on the shaft has too much play.
5 Le cinghie di trasmissione sono troppo lente o troppo 5 The transmission belts are too slack or too tight.
tensionate. 6 The driven parts or the coupling are unbalanced.
6 Le parti condotte o il giunto sono sbilanciate. 7 The coupling or the pulley are unbalanced.
7 Il giunto o la puleggia sono sbilanciate. 8 Unbalanced masses have been applied on the coupling
8 Sono state applicate masse sbilanciate al giunto o sono or some parts have been removed.
state asportate delle parti. 9 Some air swirls are generated inside the sump.
9 Si creano dei vortici d’aria all’interno del carter. 10 There is an interference between the coupling rotating
10 C’è un’ interferenza tra le parti in rotazione del giunto and non-rotating parts.
con le parti ferme. 11 The bearings have been damaged because of an
11 I cuscinetti si sono danneggiati per assenza o insufficient lubrication.
insufficienza di lubrificazione.
63
MONTAGGIO E MOUNTING AND
DBSE
ALLINEAMENTO G
ALIGNMENT ROTOFLUID
G
ROTOFLUID WAG-G TYPEFig.
WAG-G
1 Z
S
Condizioni generali GENERAL CONDITION
La serie di Giunti Idrodinamici The fluid Coupling series
ROTOFLUID WAG-G e ROTOA FLUID WAG -G and
similari (SCF WAG-G, similar (SCF WAG -G,
DCF WAG-G e CA WAG-G) DCF WAG -G and CA WAG -G)
includono due semigiunti these include two half gear
come mostrato in fig.1 e 2. WAG-G couplings as shown in Fig. 1 Y
Questa combinazione offre i and 2. This arrangement offers
seguenti vantaggi: the following advantages:
1. La possibilità di sostituire il
1. Possible replacement of
Giunto Idrodinamico senza
the Fluid Coupling without
rimuovere il motore elettrico
DBSE moving the electrical motor
e la macchina comandata G G and the driven machine (is
(non è necessario eseguire
not necessary to perform any
alcun ulteriore allineamento)
further
Fig. 2 alignment)
2. il peso del Giunto 53
2. The50weight of the Fluid
Idrodinamico è distribuito
Coupling
52 is 51
shared between
sia sull’albero del motore
the electrical motor shaft and
elettrico che sull’albero
driven shaft.
comandato
X
Il mezzo giunto a ingranaggio The half gear coupling includes:
include: un manicotto (50), un SCF WAG-G a sleeve (50), a hub (51), the
mozzo (51), le viti calibrate calibrated screws, (53) the nuts
(53), i dadi (54), le guarnizioni (54), the O-Ring (53) and two
(52) e due tappi (H) (Fig. 2). plugs (H) (Fig. 3)
DBSE
1. Assemblaggio 1. ASSEMBLY
1.1. Se i semigiunti sono DBSE
1.1 If the half couplings are
stati forniti pre-lavorati, G G supplied pre machined, finish
eseguire il foro e la the bore and the groove for
scanalatura per la chiavetta the key.
1.2. Pulire accuratamente
le parti, ingrassare le
guarnizioni (52) e inserirle 1.2 Accurately clean parts,
nelle sedi del manicotto (50) grease the O-Ring (52) and
insert in the seal into the
1.3. Posizionare i manicotti sleeve (50).
sugli assi evitando di
danneggiare le gurnizioni.
Assemblare i mozzi (52) DCF WAG-G 1.3 Position the sleeves on
sull’albero (la parte lunga the shafts avoiding O-Ring
del mozzo verso l’estremità damage. Assemble the hubs
dell’albero). Le estremità (52) on the shaft (long part of
mozzo/albero dovranno the hub toward the shaft and
coincidere. hub must line up.
1.4. Installare il motore
elettrico e la macchina DBSE 1.4 Install electric motor and
comandata in base al valore G G driven machine according to
di DBSE. the seal DBSE dimension.
1.5. Allineare gli alberi
utilizzando un calibro o 1.5 Align the shafts using
comparatore (Fig. 2). La a dial gauge (Fig.2). the
tolleranza di allineamento alignment tolerances angular
(angolare y-z, Fig.1; radiale x, y-z (Fig. 1), radial X (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2)
1.6. Ingrassare la dentatura
del mozzo e posizionare i 1.6 Grease the teeth of the
manicotti (50) sui mozzi (51). CA WAG-G hubs and sleeves (50) on the
hubs (51).
64
1.7. Applicare la pasta 1.7 Apply the sealing paste
sigillante sulla superficie or equivalent on the mating
DBSE di unione tra i manicotti e Errore angolare - Angular misalignment surfaces of the sleeves and
inserire
G il Giunto Idrodinamico insert the Fluid Coupling
tra i manicotti. Unire bene between the sleeves. Fit with
Fig. 1 Z
utilizzando le viti calibrate the calibrated screws (53)
S
(53) e i dadi (54). Stringere and the nuts (54). Uniformly
uniformemente le viti secondo tighten screws according the
il momento torcente indicato torques indicated Tab. A
in Tab. A A
1.8. Rimuovere i due tappi 1.8 Remove the two plugs
(H) dei manicotti (Fig. 2). (H) of the sleeves (Fig. 2).
Mettere i due fori in posizione Place the two holes in the
orizzontale per portare avanti Y horizontal position to perform
l’operazione su entrambi i the operation on both
manicotti. Aggiungere grasso sleeves. Add grease until
finché fuoriesce dal foro some grease exits from the
opposto. Riassemblare i tappi opposite hole. Reassemble
(H). Per le quantità di grasso the plugs (H). For grease
DBSE
riferirsi alla Tab.
G B. quantity refer to Tab. B .
Errore radiale - Radial misalignment
Fig. 2
53
50 54
51
52 53
H
X
DBSE
DBSE
G
Tab. A
ROTOFLUID ROTOFLUID-CA
ROTOGEAR
WAG-G SCF WAG-G DCF WAG-G CA WAG-G Coppia
Grasso serraggio
ROTOFLUID ROTOFLUID CA
Grease Tightening
Gandezza Grandezza DBSE DBSE DBSE DBSE Torque
Size Size G Y-Z X X X X
Tipo ±1 ±1 ±1 ±1
Type
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Kg. Nm
20 RE 40 0,10 165 0,22 - - -- -- 2 x 0,04 28

30 200 0,28 255 0,36 295 0,42
30P 1,5 200 0,28 255 0,36 295 0,42
40P -- RE 55 0,12 236 0,34 294 0,42 366 0,53 --
--
2 x 0,1 52
50 217 0,31 297 0,43 372 0,54
55 55S – 55D 261,5 0,37 341,5 0,49 416,5 0,60 514 0,74
DBSE 60 -- 270 0,35 360 0,48 440 0,59 -- --
RE 85 0,19
G 2 x 0,14
65 65S – 65D 318 0,41 408 0,55 488 0,66 558 0,76
2,5 91
70P -- 298,5 0,39 408,5 0,55 523,5 0,71 570,5 --
RE 100 0,22 2 x 0,35
75P 75PS – 75PD 353,5 0,47 463,5 0,63 578,5 0,79 660 0,91
80P 80P 376 0,49 494 0,66 594 0,80 669,5 0,90
RE 120 3 0,26 2 x 0,5 215
85P 85PD 446 0,59 564 0,76 664 0,91 871 1,20
90P 90P RE 180 4 0,37 448 0,65 508 0,82 588 0,94 854 1,24 2 x 1,2 910
Tab. B
GRASSO RACCOMANDATO AGIP API IP SHELL MOBIL ESSO
RECOMMENDED GREASE ALVANIA EP GREASE
NORMAL SERVICE GR-MU/EPO (EP1) APIGREASE PGX-0 ATHESIA-EPO MOBIL GREASE SPECIAL PEN-O-LED-EP-350
1
65
MONTAGGIO E DBSE MOUNTING AND
ALLINEAMENTO G G ALIGNMENT ROTOFLUID
ROTOFLUID KLM TYPE KLM
Fig. 1
G
Condizioni generali DBSE
GENERAL CONDITION
La serie di Giunti Idrodinamici The Fluid Coupling series
ROTOFLUID KLM e similari ROTOFLUID
A KLM and similar
(SCF KLM, DCF KLM e (SCF KLM, DCF KLM and
CA KLM) sono completi di CA KLM) are complete with 2
due semigiunti lamellari come disc half couplings as shown
mostrato in Fig. 3. Questo tipo KLM in Fig. 3. This kind of in line
di assemblaggio offre una assembly offers several
serie di vantaggi: advantages:
1. la possibilità di sostituire il Fig. 2 replacement of the
1) Possible
Giunto Idrodinamico senza fluid coupling without moving
rimuovere il motore elettrico DBSE the electric motor and the
e la macchina comandata G G driven machine (it is not DBSE
(non è necessario eseguire necessary to perform any
alcun ulteriore allineamento) further alignment).
X
2. il peso del Giunto 2) The weight o f the fluid
Idrodinamico è distribuito coupling can be shared
sia sull’albero del motore between the driver and driven
elettrico che sull’albero shafts.
comandato
3) The disc half coupling does
3. il semigiunto lamellare not require any maintenance.
non richiede alcun tipo di
The disc
Fig. 3half coupling includes
manutenzione
SCF KLM a hub (207),
203
a set of discs 201
Il semigiunto lamellare (202) a flange (201) 8 bolts
comprende un mozzo (207), 206
(206).These parts are supplied
un set di dischi (202), una ready to be used (Fig. 3).
flangia (201), otto bulloni
(206). Questi pezzi sono
forniti pronti per l’uso (Fig. 3). 1. ASSEMBLY
DBSE
G G 1.1 If the half couplings
205
are supplied with rough
1. Assemblaggio
bores, the bore and keyway
1.1. Se i semigiunti sono may be machined without
forniti con fori grezzi, il foro disassembling the same half
può essere lavorato senza coupling, referring to the
smontare il semigiunto surface (S) of the hub (207)
stesso, facendo riferimento in Fig. 3. The interference
alla superficie (S) del mozzo between the shaft and the
(207) in Fig. 3. L’interferenza hub must not exceed 0,0005
tra l’albero e il mozzo non mm. for mm. of the bore.
deve superare 0,0005 mm DCF KLM
1.2 Accurately clean parts.
per mm di foro.
1.3 Fit half couplings onto the
1.2. Pulire accuratamente le
respective shafts which must
parti.
be in-line with the respective
1.3. Inserire i semigiunti nei hubs.
rispettivi alberi, l’estremità
DBSE 1.4 Position electric motor
dei quali dovrà essere
G G and driven machine
in corrispondenza con
according to the said DBSE
l’estremità dei mozzi
dimension.
1.4. Posizionare il motore
Align the shafts by using
elettrico e la macchina
a dial guage (Fig. 2). The
comandata rispettando
alignment tolerances radial X,
la dimensione (DBSE).
angular H1-H2 are reported
Allineare gli alberi usando
in Tab. A.
un comparatore (Fig. 2). Le
tolleranze di allineamento
radiale x, angolare H1-H2
sono riportate in Tab. A.
CA KLM
66
DBSE
1.5.G Assicurarsi che le Errore angolare - Angular misalignment 1.5 Make sure that the
corrispondenti flange del H1 matching flanges of the
giunto idrodinamico e i Fig. 1 fluid coupling and disc half
semigiunti lamellari siano couplings are perfectly clean.
G
perfettamente puliti. Inserire Insert the fluid coupling
DBSE
il giunto idrodinamico tra i between the 2 half couplings
due semigiunti e serrarli con and lock them with the
le viti (204), quindi stringerle A screws (204) then uniformly
uniformemente secondo tighten them according to the
i valori di coppia torcente torque indicated in Tab B.
riportati in Tab. B.
1.6 Verify alignment once
1.6. Verificare nuovamente H2 again, together with the max
l’allineamento, insieme H1 and the min H2 between
con il massimo H1 e il Errore radiale - Radial misalignment hub (207) and flange (201)
Fig. 2
minimo H2 tra giunto (207) according to the allowable
e flangia (201) secondo i values reported in Tab. A
DBSE valori ammissibili riportati in DBSE
Tab. A. G
Fig. 3 203
201
203 206
206 207
DBSE S
G 205
202
204
Tab. A
Giunti Lamellari ROTOFLUID ROTOFLUID-CA
Disc Couplings
ROTOFLUID ROTOFLUID CA HBSX…/8/RX KLM SCF KLM DCF KLM CA KLM
Gandezza Grandezza
Size Size DBSE DBSE DBSE DBSE
Grandezza G H1-H2 X X X X
±0,4 ±0,4 ±0,4 ±0,4
Size
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
30-30P 0,23 217 0,38 272 0,46 312 0,60
170 1,5
40P 0,23 253 0,44 311 0,52 383 0,70
- --
50 0,28 237 0,43 317 0,54 392 0,74
330 1,5
55 55S – 55D 0,28 269 0,47 349 0,59 424 0,79 525 0,94
60 -- 0,39 259 0,58 349 0,60 429 0,82 -- --
650 1,5
65 65S – 65D 0,39 307 0,54 397 0,67 477 0,89 547 0,99
DBSE 70P -- 0,44 281 0,58 391 0,74 506 1,04 -- --
G 1260 2,5
75P 75PS – 75PD 0,44 336 0,61 446 0,77 561 1,08 643 1,20
80P 80P 0,55 366 0,73 484 0,90 584 1,28 661 1,39
3160 3
85P 85PD-915 0,55 436 0,84 554 1,01 654 1,38 861 1,68
90P 90P 0,62 469 0,91 529 1,00 609 1,37 875 1,76
4630 4
95P -- 0,62 584 1,08 704 1,25 784 1,63 -- 0,00
Tab. B
Grandezza / Size 30-30P-40P 50-55 60-65 70P-75P 80P-85P 90P-95P
COPPIA DI ITEM 203 22,5 22,5 50 50 90 220

SERRAGGIO Nm. ITEM 204 25 50 50 210 290 410
TIGHTENING ITEM 205 25 50 50 210 290 410

TORQUE Nm. ITEM 206 22,5 50 85 220 800 1100
67
M 1 R
M 1 R
MONTAGGIO E MOUNTING AND
ALLINEAMENTO GIUNTO ALIGNMENT ROTOFLEXI
ELASTICO ROTOFLEXI FLEXIBLE COUPLING
M 1 R
1) Smontare l’elemento in 1) Demount the ROTOFLEXI
gomma del giunto elastico rubber element (3) as shown
(3) ROTOFLEXI come at fig. 1.
indicato in fig.1
2) Montare il giunto idraulico FIG. 1 3
2) Fit the hydraulic coupling
(1) sul motore (M), montare FIG. 1 3 (1) on the motor shaft (M),
il mozzo (2) del giunto fit the ROTOFLEXI hub (2)
elastico sull’albero della on the driven shaft ( R ).
macchina da azionare 3 Assure that the driven shaft
(R). Posizionare quindi FIG. 1
is coaxial with the hydraulic
la macchina in modo che M coupling (1). The concentricity
l’albero risulti coassiale R is assured when it is possible
M
con il giunto idraulico (1). R 4 to mount the hub (2) to the
La coassialità è garantita 4 hydraulic coupling flange
quando tramite le viti (4) è M (1) by means of the srcew
possibile fissare il mozzo R (4), as shown at fig. 2. It is
4
(2) alla flangia del giunto now possible to connect the
idraulico (1) come indicato motor and the driven machine
in fig. 2. A questo punto checking that between the
la macchina e il motore hub (2) and the driven shaft
possono essere fissati B shoulder there is a space (B)
definitivamente prevedendo B equal to the thickness of the
che tra il mozzo (2) e lo B rubber element (3).
spallamento dell’albero FIG. 2
resti uno spazio (B) pari FIG. 2
allo spessore dell’elemento FIG. 2
elastico (3).
3) Svitare le viti (4), 3) Remove the screws (4),
allontanare il mozzo (2), B move the hub (2), place the
inserire l’elemento elastico B rubber element (3), lock the
B screws (4) and (5) as shown
(3), bloccare a fondo le viti
(4) e (5) come indicato in 4 at fig. 3
44
fig. 3.
N.B. Le viti devono essere Note: The screws must be
serrate alla coppia presentata tightened with a torque
in tab. C2, utilizzando una wrench, according to the
chiave dinamometrica. Cop- values indicated in the table
pie di serraggio insufficienti 55 5 C2. Insufficient tightening
porterebbero inevitabilmen- torque will allow the screws
te all’allentamento delle viti to vibrate loose and cause
durante il funzionamento e, damage to the rubber
FIG. 3FIG. 3
di conseguenza, alla distru- FIG. 3 element. When tightening the
zione dell’elemento elastico screws use a medium type
del giunto. Per il fissaggio sealing paste.
delle viti, utilizzare sempre
frenafiletti del tipo medio.
Giunto Rotofluid Disallineamento Viti Coppia Serr.

Tab. C2 Rotofluid coupling Misalignment Screws Fix Torque
ROTOFLEXI Giunto Rotofluid Disallineamento Viti Coppia S
Tipo
Giunto Rotofluid Coppia . Disallineamento Viti Coppia Serr.
B 2 K-LRV
TypeROTOFLEXI
K-FRV
Rotofluid Rotofluid Nom. Nm. KB Misalignment
coupling coupling KA ßMisalignment
E Screws Fix Torque Screws Fix Torq
1 ROTOFLEXI B B Coppia
Nominal (max) max (max.) (max.) (4)-(5) Nm.
KB max.
Tipo TipoK-LRU K-FRV . Coppia .(A2-A1)
BB 2
2 max.
KA K-LRV K-LRV K-FRV K-FRV Torque
Nom. Nm. KB
Nom. Nm.KA KB ß KA E ß E
E max. Type Type (4)-(5) Nm.
KBmax.
KB max.
1 1 1 10 B
20 B- B - Nominal25B Nominal
±0,5 max0,3
(max) (max)
(max.) 1°max
(max.) 0,3(4)-(5)M8
(max.) (max.) Nm. 25
K-LRU K-LRU K-FRV K-FRV (A2-A1) (A2-A1)
KA KA
max.max. 2 20 24 10 22 Torque
65 Torque
±0,5 0,4 1° 0,4 M8 25
E max.E max.
31 10 20 -20 -30 25175
- ±0,5 25 0,30,4 ±0,51°1°15’
0,30,3 0,41°M8 M10 0,3 25 M8
ß
1 30/30P 10
32 20 - ±0,5 50 25
42 2 40 20 24
20
36 10
24
30/30P 2210
34 65330 22 ±0,5 65 0,40,4
±0,5 ±0,51°1°15’
0,40,4 0,41°M8 M12 0,4 25 M8 87 25
ß ßRADIALE 53 50/55 30/30P
40 40 38 175 440 ±0,8
ASSIALE
AXIAL
ANGOLARE
ANGULAR RADIAL
3 30/30P 32 20
32 3020 30 ±0,5 175 0,40,4 1°15’
1°15’
±0,5 0,40,4 0,41°15’M10 M14 0,4 50 M10138 50
64 60/65
40 44 30/30P
36 50/55 3442 330 630 ±0,5 ±0,8 0,40,61°15’ 1°30’0,4 0,6 M12 M14 87 138
4 40 36 30/30P 34 330 ±0,5 0,4 1°15’ 0,4 M12 87
7 70P/75P 50 60/65 48 1160 ±1 0,6 1°30’ 0,6
ASSIA
ASSIALELE ANGOLARE
ANGOLARE RADIALE
RADIALE 5 5 50/55 50/55
40 40
40 3840 440 38 ±0,8 440 0,4 ±0,8 1°15’ 0,40,4 1°15’ M14 M16 212
0,4 138 M14 138
AXIAL
AXIAL ANGULAR
ANGULAR RADIAL
RADIAL 8 80P/85P 62 70P/75P 56 2000 ±1 0,6 1°30’ 0,6 M18 291
6 6 60/65 60/65
44 50/55
44 42
50/55 63042 ±0,8
630 0,6 ±0,8
1°30’ 0,60,6 1°30’
M14 0,6 138 M14 138
7 7 70P/75P 50 60/65
70P/75P 50 48
60/65 1160
48 ±1
1160 0,6 1°30’
±1 0,6
0,6 1°30’ M16 0,6 212 M16 212
8 8 80P/85P 62 70P/75P 56
80P/85P 62 70P/75P 562000 ±1
2000 0,6 1°30’
±1 0,6
0,6 1°30’ M18 0,6 291 M18 291
68
ALLINEAMENTO GOMMOLO
PIN COUPLING
GIUNTI ELASTICI RUBBER ELEMENT “AB” SERIES
SERIE “AB”
Grandezza Giunto elastico Dimensioni mm. PERNO ALIGNMENTRICAMBI
Giunto Flexible Coupling Dimensions mm. PERNO PIN SPARE
idraulico PIN
Tipo Coppia Filetto Coppia di Gommolo Perno
Nom. Nm. Q.ty
Fluid Coupling Type B1-B2 Thread serraggio Nm. Rubber Pin
øO Nominal A C V
AB MAX. Ø Tightening Ø Ø
Size Torque Nm. Torque Nm.
50/55 AB-5 186 950 0,18 1 2 4 M10 50 30 12 8
60/65 AB-6 224 2200 0,22 1,2 2 4 M14 138 40 18 8
70P/75P AB-8/7 330 6500 0,35 1,7 3 6 M18 291 60 25 8
øO
80P AB-8 330 6500 0,35 1,7 3 6 M18 291 60 25 8
85P AB-8M 400 12000 0,35 2 3 6 M18 291 60 25 12
90P/95P AB-9 550 32000 0,55 2,7 4 6 M24 710 76 32 14
V
A
ASSIALE RADIALE
AXIAL RADIAL
B1
B2
ANGOLARE
ANGULAR
Grandezza Giunto elastico Dimensioni mm. PERNO RICAMBI

Giunto Flexible Coupling Dimensions mm. PIN SPARE
idraulico
Tipo Coppia Filetto Coppia di Gommolo Perno
Nom. Nm. Q.ty
Fluid Coupling Type B1-B2 Thread serraggio Nm. Rubber Pin
øO Nominal A C V
AB MAX. Ø Tightening Ø Ø
Size Torque Nm. Torque Nm.
50/55 AB-5 186 950 0,18 1 2 4 M10 50 30 12 8
60/65 AB-6 224 2200 0,22 1,2 2 4 M14 138 40 18 8
70P/75P AB-8/7 330 6500 0,35 1,7 3 6 M18 291 60 25 8
80P AB-8 330 6500 0,35 1,7 3 6 M18 291 60 25 8
85P AB-8M 400 12000 0,35 2 3 6 M18 291 60 25 12
90P/95P AB-9 550 32000 0,55 2,7 4 6 M24 710 76 32 14
69
PROFILO ESTERNO ROTOFLUID COUPLINGS
ED ELEMENTI PRINCIPALI OUTLINE AND MAIN
DEI GIUNTI ROTOFLUID COMPONENTS
GIUNTI CON POMPA LARGA
GIUNTO/COUPLING ALFA Fig. 1 GIUNTO/COUPLING ALFA

Fig. 2
10 K1
10 K3
20 K1
20 K3
30 K1
30 K3
30P K1
30P K2 - K3
40P K1
40P K2
GIUNTO/COUPLING BETA
10 Z
20 Z
30 Z-X-J-H
30P Z-X-J-H
40P Z-X-J-H

COPERCHIO TURBINA ESTERNA

HOUSING EXTERNAL IMPELLER
POMPA INTERNA POMPA INTERNA

INTERNAL IMPELLER INTERNAL IMPELLER
TURBINA ESTERNA COPERCHIO

EXTERNAL IMPELLER HOUSING
GIUNTI CON SEMPLICE POMPA

Fig. 3 GIUNTI CON DOPPIA POMPA Fig. 4
GIUNTO/COUPLING ALFA GIUNTO/COUPLING ALFA

50 K2 25 K2
60 K2 55 K2
70P K2 - K3 65 K2
80P K2 75P K2
90P K2 85P K2
95P K2
50 Z-X-J-H 25 Z-X-J-H
60 Z-X-J-H 55 Z-X-J-H
70P Z-X-J-H 65 Z-X-J-H
80P X-J-H 75P Z-X-J-H
90P X-J-H 85P X-J-H

TURBINA FEMMINA TURBINA FEMMINA

EXTERNAL IMPELLER-F EXTERNAL IMPELLER-F
POMPA INTERNA POMPA INTERNA

INTERNAL IMPELLER INTERNAL IMPELLER
COPERCHIO TURBINA MASCHIO

HOUSING EXTERNAL IMPELLER-M
70
PROFILO ESTERNO ED ROTOFLUID COUPLINGS
ELEMENTI PRINCIPALI DEI GIUNTI SCF/DCF-CA OUTLINE
ROTOFLUID SCF/DCF-CA AND MAIN COMPONENTS
CAMERA DI RITARDO SEMPLICE SCF

GIUNTI CON POMPA LARGA
GIUNTI CON SEMPLICE POMPA
GIUNTO/COUPLING ALFA SCF/DCF CAMERA DI RITARDO DOPPIA DCF GIUNTO/COUPLING ALFA SCF/DCF
50 K2
30/30P K2
40P K2 60 K2
70P K2N
GIUNTO/COUPLING BETA 80P K2N
30/30P Z-X-J-H 90P K2
40P Z-X-J-H
GIUNTO/COUPLING BETA SCF/DCF
Fig. 1 50 Z-X-J-H
60 Z-X-J-H
70P X-J-H Fig. 2
80P X-J
ALBERO CAVO
ALBERO CAVO
TURBINA ESTERNA
POMPA INTERNA TURBINA FEMMINA
COPERCHIO
POMPA INTERNA COPERCHIO
GIUNTI CON DOPPIA POMPA
GIUNTO/COUPLING ALFA SCF/DCF

55 K2
65 K2
75P K2N
85P K2N
95P K2
GIUNTO/COUPLING BETA SCF/DCF
55 Z-X-J-H
65 Z-X-J-H
75P X-J-H
Fig. 3
85P X-J
ALBERO CAVO
TURBINA FEMMINA
TURBINA MASCHIO
POMPA INTERNA
GIUNTI CA CON DOPPIA POMPA

GIUNTI CA CON SEMPLICE POMPA
GIUNTO/COUPLING CA ALFA GIUNTO/COUPLING CA ALFA

55D K2 80P K2N
65D K2 90P K2
75PD K2N
85PD K2
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
TURBINA
ESTERNA TURBINA ESTERNA
POMPA INTERNA COPERCHIO
POMPA INTERNA TURBINA MASCHIO
71
COPPIE SERRAGGIO SCREWS TIGHTENING TORQUE
VITI PER GIUNTI E FOR COUPLINGS AND
ACCESSORI COPPIE SERRAGGIO VITI PER GIUNTIACCESSORIES
E
ACCESSORI Foglio /
90-023B
MILANO - ITALY
SCREWS TIGHTENING
ROTOFLUID CA ALFA TORQUE FOR Data /
ROTOFLUID ALFA ALFA ROTOFLUID CA ROTOFLUID BETA
1 1COUPLINGS AND ACCESSORIES
1 17-12-10
ALFA ROTOFLUID BETA ROTOFLUID
K-SCF-DCF SCF-DCF
1 1 7 1
GIUNTI ALFA GIUNTI BETA SCF-DCF
3 2
K-SCF-DCF
GIUNTI CA ALFA
VITE DI TESTA
TIGHTENING SCREW 7
3 2
5 5
D VITE DI TESTA
D
5 5
D D
Pul.
7
Pul. 6
7 4 4 4
6
4 4 4
10 8 10 8 10 11
10 8 10 8 10 11
12 13
12 12 13
12
S LR-V 9 FR-V AB
S LR-V 9 FR-V AB
11
11
10 8
1010
Disco freno PAV
810 8 8 Disco freno PAV
10 10
Pul. J/XJ Pul. J/XJ

Pul. Pul. T Pul. T
Pul.
FRD FR-PAV/PBV Disco freno PBV

FRD AFF FR-PAV/PBV Disco freno PBV
AFF
Diametro viti e dadi utilizzati classe 8.8 (UNI 5931, 5737, 5739, 5932) – Coppie di serraggio in Nm. (UNI 3740)
Screws and nut diameters used are in 8.8 class (UNI 5931, 5737, 5739, 5932) – Tightening torque in Nm.(UNI 3740)
ROTOFLUID Pos.1 Pos.2 Pos.3 Pos.4 Pos.5 Pos.6 Pos.7 Pos.8 Pos.9 Pos.10 Pos.11 Pos.12 Pos.13 Viti Coppia
Grand./Size Screws Torque
10 M5 - - - M6 - M6 M6 M8 M6 - M6 - M5 6,03
20 M6 - - M6 M8 - M6 M8 M8 M8 - M6 M6 M6 10,38
30/30P M8 - - M8 M8 - M8 M10 M10 M8 - M8 M8 M10 50,53
40/40P M8 - - M8 M10 - M8 M12 M12 M10 - M10 M8 M12 87,08
50/55 M8 M10 - M10 M10 - M10 M14 M14 M10 M10 M10 M10 M14 138,5
60/65 M8 M10 - M10 M10 - M10 M14 M14 M10 M14 M10 M10 M16 212
70P/75P M10 - - M12 M12 M12 M12 M18 M18 M16 M18 M12 M12 M20 413
80P/85P M12 M14 M14 M12 - - - M18 M18 M18 M18 M14 M14 M24 710
90P M14 M20 M16 M20 - - - - - M20 M24 - -
95P M14 M16 M16 M20 - - - - - M20 M24 - -
ROTOFLUID CA Pos.1 Pos.2 Pos.3 Pos.4 Pos.5 Pos.6 Pos.7 Pos.8 Pos.9 Pos.10 Pos.11 Pos.12 Pos.13
Grand./Size
55D/55S M8 M10 - M10 M10 - M8 M14 M14 M10 M10 M10 -
65D/65S M10 M10 - M10 M10 - M10 M14 M14 M10 M14 M10 -
75PD/75PS M10 - - M10 M12 M12 M12 M16 M16 M16 M18 M12 -
80P M12 M14 M14 M12 - - - M18 M18 M18 M18 M14 -
85PD/85PD915 M12 M14 M14 M12 - - - M18 M18 M20 M24 M14 -
90P M14 M16 M16 M20 - - - - - M20 M24 - -
Dimensione “D” Albero motore 55-60-65-70-75-80-

Motor shaft diameter 14 19 24 28 38 42-48 90-95-100-110-125
85
Tirante di Testa / Tightening screw M5 M6 M8 M10 M12 M16 M20 M24
Coppia di serraggio Nm.
Tightening torque Nm. 6,03 10,38 25,16 50,53 87,08 212 413 710
72
Prescrizioni relative RULES FOR THE CORRECT
alla conservazione e PRESERVATION AND
all’installazione dei giunti INSTALLATION
idraulici OF FLUID COUPLINGS
1) PRESCRIZIONE RIGUARDANTI LA 1) GUIDELINES FOR THE PRESERVATION FOR

CONSERVAZIONE PREVISTA DAL FORNITORE A 6 MONTH PERIOD PROVIDED FOR THE
PRIMA DELLA CONSEGNA DEL COMPONENTE MANUFACTURER BEFORE THE DELIVERY OF THE
PER UN PERIODO DI 6 MESI. COUPLING
Il componente deve essere protetto, nelle sue The steel parts of the coupling must be properly protected
parti in acciaio, con fluido protettivo (CRC 3.36 o by means of a protective fluid (such as CRC 3.36 or
equivalente). Non è necessario prevedere alcuna equivalent).
protezione per le parti in alluminio. Nella versione The aluminum parts do not need any particular protection.
con camera di ritardo,porre attenzione all’imballaggio Should the coupling be equipped with a delay chamber,
del componente, facendo in modo che la camera preserve the packaging and ensure the delay chamber is
di ritardo sia rivolta verso l’alto. Si assicura così turned upwards. This way the lubrication of rotary seals
che l’olio di riempimento lubrifichi le tenute rotanti and bearings via the filling oil is guaranteed.
e i cuscinetti. Nel caso in cui il giunto venga fornito If the coupling is supplied without oil, protect rotary seals
senza olio, proteggere le tenute rotanti con grasso with grease (such as Agip 33 FD, Shell Alvania R3 or
(Agip 33FD o Schell Alvania R3 o equivalente). equivalent).
2) OPERAZIONI E CONTROLLI DA EFFETTUARE IN 2) PROCEDURES AND INSPECTIONS AT THE

CANTIERE CUSTOMER FACILITY.
2.1) A MAGAZZINO DEL CLIENTE. 2.1) AT THE CUSTOMER’S WAREHOUSE.

Non è prevista alcuna operazione di conservazione No preservation procedures are required, as those
in quanto le procedure messe in atto dal fornitore implemented by the supplier provide the proper
assicurano una conservazione del componente per il preservation of the coupling for the necessary period.
periodo richiesto. The components must be stocked in their original
I componenti devono essere immagazzinati nel loro packaging in a dry and clean environment and kept away
imballo d’origine, in ambiente asciutto e pulito, al from direct sunlight and dust.
riparo dalla luce diretta del sole e della polvere.
2.2) IN CASE OF EQUIPMENT ALREADY ASSEMBLED,
2.2) AD APPARECCHIATURA MONTATA, INATTIVA BUT NOT OPERATING FOR A PERIOD UP TO 6
PER UN PERIODO FINO A 6 MESI MONTHS
Applicare alle parti in acciaio del conponente, il Apply the protective fluid CRC 6.66 Marine, or equivalent,
fluido protettivo CRC 6.66 Marine o equivalente on the steel parts, thus ensuring a 3-month protection in
che assicura una protezione di 3 mesi in ambiente a marine environment or else the protective fluid CRC
marino, oppure il protettivo CRC Protective Marine Protective Marine, which guarantees a protection up to 6
che garantisce una protezione fino a 6 mesi. months.
Questo prodotto è asportabile con diluente CRC The fluid may be then removed using the diluent CRC
Marine Elmec Clean. Marine Elmec Clean.
Nel caso in cui il giunto sia senza olio di Should the coupling be without filling oil, spray 0.25
riempimento, spruzzare al suo interno 0,25 litri di olio liters of oil TECTYL 930 SAE 30 inside and secure the
TECTYL 930 SAE 30 e rimontare il tappo in modo cap again in order to ensure the coupling is hermetically
da garantire una chiusura ermetica del giunto sealed. The rotary seals must be greased.
Le tenute rotanti devono ingrassate.
2.3) IN CASE OF EQUIPMENT THAT HAS ALREADY
2.3) APPARECCHIATURA CHE HA GIA’ LAVORATO, BEING OPERATING BUT WHICH SHALL NOT BE
MA INATTIVA PER UN PERIODO FINO A 6 MESI OPERATING FOR A PERIOD UP TO 6 MONTHS
In questo caso è necessario che a cessata attività Should be this the case, all the procedures as per para. 2.2)
siano messe in atto le procedure di cui al punto 2.2 must be followed once the equipment is taken out of service.
2.4) APPARECCHIATURA MONTATA, MA INATTIVA 2.4) IN CASE OF EQUIPMENT ALREADY ASSEMBLED,

PER UN PERIODO SUPERIORE A 6 MESI. BUT NOT OPERATING FOR A PERIOD OVER 6 MONTHS
Procedere come al punto 2.2 ripetendo le operazioni Follow the procedures as per para 2.2/ and repeat
prescritte ogni 6 mesi rimuovendo ogni volta la them every 6 months by always removing the old
vecchia protezione prima di applicare la nuova. protective fluid before applying the new one. Rotate the
Eseguire manualmente una o più rotazioni complete coupling 360° one or more times manually. This way the
del giunto. Si assicura così che l’olio di riempimento lubrication of rotary seals and bearings via the filling oil is
lubrifichi le tenute rotanti e i cuscinetti. guaranteed.
73
ALLEGATO ENCLOSURE
“ATEX” “ATEX”
PRESCRIZIONI PER L’UTILIZZO SICURO IN SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS FOR USE IN AN

ATMOSFERA ESPLOSIVA EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE (ATEX)
Il giunto idraulico è un apparecchio destinato ad The hydraulic coupling is a device designed to
essere installato su macchina che dovrà essere be installed on machines that must conform to
conforme alle disposizioni della direttiva 98/392/ the dispositions of directive 98/392/CEE and
CEE e 94/9/CEE. Perciò, l’installazione e la 94/9/CEE. For this reason, the installation and
manutenzione del giunto idraulico deve essere maintenance of the hydraulic coupling must be
effettuata da personale qualificato. performed by qualified personnel.
1 Prima della messa in funzione della macchina, il 1 Before putting the machine in operation,
corpo del giunto idraulico deve essere collegato the body of the hydraulic coupling must be
alla messa a terra generale dell’impianto. Ciò connected to the general ground of the system.
può avvenire anche tramite l’accoppiamento This can be accomplished through a mechanical
meccanico con motore o parte condotta,nel qual coupling with motor or ducted part, in which
caso ciò deve essere verificato. case, it must be verified.
2 Le eventuali riverniciature possono essere fatte 2 Any repainting can only be done using anti-static
solamente impiegando prodotti antistatici. products
3 La sostituzione delle parti soggette a usura 3 The replacement of parts subject to wear and
e dell’olio del giunto idraulico, può avvenire the oil of the hydraulic coupling can only be
soltanto con componenti approvati dal performed with components approved by the
costruttore. manufacturer.
4 Non sollecitare l’apparecchio oltre i limiti di 4 Do not stress the device beyond the operating
funzionamento prescritti dai relativi diagrammi e limits prescribed by the relative selection
tabelle di selezione. diagrams.
5 Non eseguire avviamenti consecutivi, a meno 5 Do not execute consecutive starts without
che, sia previsto un sistema di controllo della providing for a system to control the temperature
temperatura del giunto idraulico. of the hydraulic coupling.
6 I giunti WESTCAR sono sempre equipaggiati 6 All WESTCAR couplings are equipped with
di TAPPO-TERMICO tarato in funzione alla a THERMAL FUSE calibrated as a function
CLASSE DI TEMPERATURA, la temperatura di of the TEMPERATURE CLASS, the melting
fusione è indicata sul manuale e stampigliata temperature is indicated on the manual and
sullo stesso tappo. I TAPPI-TERMICI possono stamped on the cap of the THERMAL FUSE
essere di due tipi.
7 It is forbidden to tamper with, or remove, the
a) Tipo: TERMO-FUSIBILE con fuoriuscita di THERMAL FUSE cap.
olio dal giunto e conseguente arresto della
macchina condotta. In questo caso deve 8 It is IMPORTANT to stop the motor as soon as
essere previsto dal costruttore un dispositivo the cap of the THERMAL FUSE has melted,
di arresto immediato del motore per evitare il since oil will be leaking from the coupling.
PERICOLO DI SURRISCALDAMENTO DELLE
GUARNIZIONI E DEI CUSCINETTI. Prima
della partenza occorre rimuovere la cause del
sovraccarico, ripristinare nel giunto il livello
dell’olio di trasmissione e sostituire il tappo
TERMO-FUSIBILE con uno nuovo, ORIGINALE
WESTCAR della stessa temperatura, come
descritto nel relativo MANUALE D’USO E
MANUTENZIONE.
74
b) Tipo: TERMO-ESPANSIBILE con fuoriuscita DANGER OF OVERHEATING OF THE
del pistoncino di 5 mm che percuote la leva del BEARINGS AND GASKETS.
microinterruttore azionando il sistema di allarme
o l’arresto immediato del motore. In tal caso non 9 If the THERMAL FUSE is removed from the
si ha fuoriuscita di olio. Prima della partenza è coupling, the manufacturer of the machine must
necessario rimuovere le cause del sovraccarico, provide at least one safety device that stops the
sostituire il tappo TERMO-ESPANSIBILE motor in the event of an overload, so as to avoid
con un nuovo tappo ORIGINALE WESTCAR overheating the coupling.
della stessa temperatura, riportare la leva del The device can be installed in a potentially
microninterruttore nella posizione corretta, e explosive atmosphere classified as zone 1, zone
verificarne il corretto funzionamento. 2, zone 21 or zone 22, with temperature class as
7) E’ proibito manomettere o eliminare il tappo indicated in the following marking.
TERMO-FUSIBILE e/o TERMO-ESPANSIBILE. The device’s marking is:
9) Nel caso che, il tappo TERMO-FUSIBILE II 2 GD T3/200°C
o TERMO-ESPANSIBILE venga rimosso (with 183° C THERMAL FUSE cap)
dal giunto idraulico, è obbligatorio per il
costruttore della macchina, prevedere almeno II 2 GD T4/135°C
un dispositivo di sicurezza che arresti il motore (with 117/120° C THERMAL FUSE cap)
in caso di sovraccarico in modo da evitare il
surriscaldamento del giunto. L’apparecchio può II 2 GD T5/100°C
essere installato in atmosfera potenzialmente (with 96° C THERMAL FUSE cap)
esplosiva classificata come CATEGORIA 2 (per
zona 1, e zona 21); CATEGORIA 3 (per zona II 2 GD T145°C
2, e zona 22, con classe di temperatura come (with 145° C THERMAL FUSE cap)
indicato nella seguente marcatura.
II 2 GD T3/200°C
(con tappo TERMO-FUSIBILE o
TERMO-ESPANSIBILE da 183°C)
II 2 GD T4/135°C
TERMO-ESPANSIBILE da 117/120°C)
II 2 GD T5/100°C
II 2 GD T145°C
75
SIAMO PRESENTI / WE ARE PRESENT IN
Australia / Australia Gran Bretagna / Great Britain Singapore / Singapore
Austria / Austria india / India Slovenia / Slovenja
Belgio / Belgium indonesia / Indonesia Spagna / Spain
Canada / Canada iran / Iran u.S.A. / U.S.A.
Cina / China israele / Israel Sud Africa / South Africa
Cipro / Cyprus Malesia / Malaysia Svezia / Sweden
Corea / Korea Norvegia / Norway Svizzera / Switzerland
danimarca / Denmark Nuova Zelanda / New Zealand tailandia / Thailand
Egitto / Egypt olanda / Holland taiwan / Taiwan
finlandia / Finland Portogallo / Portugal turchia / Turkey
francia / France Rep. Ceca / Ceka Republik ungheria / Hungary
Germania / Germany Romania / Romania
ROTOFLUID
ETIOPIA
7.00 DRAWING LIST

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

CNBM - MUGHER CEMENT ENTERPRISE
ETIOPIA
DESCRIPTION DRWG. NO.

LAYOUT PLAN 1/2 – 2/2 VO-201.475
LOADING DATA VO-201.477
MOTORIZATION POSITION VO-201.557
DETAILS FOUNDATION and FIXING RAIL 1/3 – 3/3 VO-950.363
CABLE DRIVER VO-950.365
ARRANGEMENT OF CABLE ENTRY PIT and JB VO-950.366
COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION VO-201.622
RAKE WHEELS ASSEMBLY E-506.04.001-E

JOINT SHAFT ASSEMBLY E-506.02.220-E
CHAIN ASSEMBLY E-506.02.600-E
THIMBLE WITH SPRING ASSEMBLY E-506.04.016-E
PALT TRANSLATION IDLE AXLE ASSEMBLY E-506.03.011-E
BUMPER SUPPORT, GUIDE ROLLER and RAIL CLEANER E-506.03.012-E
TRANSMISSION PULLEY ASSEMBLY E-506.04.004-E
CHAIN TIGHTENING SYSTEM ASSEMBLY E-506.02.110-E
PALT TRANSLATION TOWING AXLE ASSEMBLY E-506.03.001-E
RAKE ROPES E-498.28-E
BEAM STRUCTURE 1/6 – 6/6 E-506.01.001
LOWER PARTS OF CHAIN HOLDER 1/5 – 5/5 E-506.01.002
DISCHARGE HOPPER 1/2 – 2/2 E-506.01.003
BEAM SUPPORT (fixed side) E-506.01.004
BEAM SUPPORT (hinge side) E-506.01.005
TIE ROD CONNECTION FOR RAKE AND GANGWAYS HOLDER E-506.01.007
HOLDER FOR RAKE TROLLEY E-506.01.009
RAKE STRUCTURE 1/2 -2/2 E-506.01.008
LATERAL PROTECTION 1/2 2/2 E-506.01.014
BEAM WALKWAYS 1/5 – 5/5 E-506.01.012
RECLAIMER FEDING CHUTE E-506.01.015
RECLAIMER SHARE E-506.01.016
CHAIN PROTECTION E-506.01.011
CAGE E-506.01.800-E
BLADE TOWING AXLE E-506.02.001-E
CHAIN MOTORIZATION E-506.02.020-E

CNBM - MUGHER CEMENT ENTERPRISE
ETIOPIA
BLADE 1300 X 330 E-506.02.011

BLADE CENTRAL WHEEL ASSEMBLY E-506.02.030
BLADE IDLE AXLE E-506.02.200-E
TRANSLATION WHEEL BEAM (belt side) E-232.03.001-E
TRANSLATION WHEEL BEAM (joint side) E-232.03.002-E
WINCH ASSEMBLY E-506.04.002-E
STOPS FOR RAKE TROLLEY E-506.01.010
RAKE PULLEY E-506.04.006-E
IMPACT TABLE FRAME E-506.01.013
CABLE REEL APPLICATION E-506.02.031
HINGE FOR TROLLEYS E-506.01.006
BLADE CENTRAL WHEEL E-506.02.032
BLADE CENTRAL WHEEL SUPPORT E-506.02.033
SPACER E-506.02.035
LOCKING COVER CENTRAL WHEEL E-506.02.036
SUPPORT FOR CHAIN LUBRICATION E-506.02.014
LUBRICATION POINTS E-506.10 / .12

ETIOPIA
8.00 DRAWINGS

BLANK PAGE
LEFT INTENTIONALLY

Utente: EP - Data: 30/06/2015
Stato: RILASCIATO

Reclaimer Erection Manual PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Reclaimer Erection Manual PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

CNBM – MUGHER CEMENT ENTERPRISE

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

1.00 STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

2.00 PROJECT AND MECHANICAL DATA

4.00 ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS

6.00 TRADE COMPONENTS

7.00 DRAWING LIST

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

1.00 STORAGE INSTRUCTIONS

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

necessary to store it in a shed or under a roof.

– the mechanical parts

– the motors, reduction gears, etc.

– the lubrication plants (pipes included)

– electrical equipments and components, cables

– hoist and ropes

moisture, dust and eventual sand.

transparent paint or protective grease.

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

1.02 REDUCTION GEARS

silica salt bags, in order to reduce moisture.

protected against any static and dynamic loading.

Regarding bearings, avoid any loading, both static and dynamic.

Always protect the breathing caps from dust.

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

- Store in a dry and clean environment.

- Let motor turn - possibly electrically or at least by hand - once a month.

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

the maximum admissible load.

Only lift machine and components using appropriate lifting ropes.

1.05 LUBRICATION PLANT

stored waiting for its installation.

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

2.00 PROJECT AND MECHANICAL DATA

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

2.01 PROJECT DATA

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

2.02 MECHANICAL DATA

TYPE OF UNIT : PALT 130/34+4

TOTAL MACHINE WEIGHT : kg 137.000

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

OUTPUT: 150 t/h MATERIAL: COAL BULK DENSITY: 0,72 t/m³

HEATERS POWER [KW]: 22

OUTPUT: 150 t/h MATERIAL: COAL BULK DENSITY: 0,72 t/m³

MOTOR PULLEY MOTOR TOWING WHEELS

OUTPUT: 150 t/h MATERIAL: COAL BULK DENSITY: 0,72 t/m³

WHEEL FINAL STAGES FAST-SLOW FAST

HEATERS POWER [KW]: 5,5

POWER [KW]: 1,1 HEATERS

VELOCITA' DURANTE RIPRESA:

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

4.00 ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

Bedeschi S.p.A. – Via Praimbole, 38 Padova (Italy) / e-mail: sales@bedeschi.it – http://www.bedeschi.it

4.01 RAILS CHECK

For a correct machine operation, these tolerances have to be respected.

4.02 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS